Catalog Electric - Elmark - 2023

The Brand of Electricity
CATALOG INTERACTIV
ELECTRICE | 2023
• Răsfoiți cu ușurință catalogul nostru interactiv făcând click pe imagini sau pe
numerele de pagină ale conținutului.
• Folosiți butonul „Go to the 1st page“ pentru a reveni la conținut.
click
& view • Selectați un produs și faceți clikc pe imagine, vedeți prețul și disponibilitatea sau
plasați o comandă.
AUTOMATION
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) & Accessories | page 12
C 40N MCB 4.5kA | C60N MCB 6kA | C100L MCB 10kA | C100M MCB 10kA | C60DC PV MCB 6kA | Devices for MCB |
page 12 page 14 page 16 page 20 page 24 page 26
High power devices | page 28
Base for High power Fuse links | page 30 RT18 Switch Photovoltdic fuse Change over switch | ISS2 Switch
devices | page 28 disconnectors | holders | page 33 page 38 disconnectors |
page 32 page 39
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) | page 41
1500V DC1 MCCB DS1 MCCB Manual devices for Electronic devices for DW1 MCCB | page 51 Change-over switch
Thermo-magnetic type | Thermo-magnetic & elec- MCCB | page 49 MCCB | page 50 EQ1 | page 52
page 41 tronic type | page 43
Residual current devices (RCD) | page 54
RCD JEL1 AC type | RCD JEL1A A type | RCD JEL7B B type | RCBO JEL5A A type | RCBO JEL4A Electronic RCBO JEL8 with arc fault
page 54 page 55 page 57 page 58 A type | page 60 protective, type A |
page 61
Surge protection devices | page 64
SPD AC | page 66 Combined SPD AC - DC | SPD for PV

page 68 systems | page 69
Low voltage contactors | page 64
LT1D/HK | page 72 LT1D | page 74 CJ19-43 | page 77 LT4D | page 78 Auxiliary Module contactors |
contacts | page 79 page 82
AUTOMATION
Thermal protection devices | Starters | page 83
Thermal relays LT2 | page Thermo-magnetic Accessories for TM2 | Starters for direct start | “Delta-Star” Starters | Reverse starters |
83 automatic breakers TM page 87 page 90 page 92 page 93
2 | page 86
Frequency inverters | Soft starters | Compensating devices | page 95
Frequency Frequency Accessories for Soft starters | page 97 Capacitor Cosφ regulator |
inverters inverters frequency batteries | page 99 page 100
ELM2000 | page 95 ELM600 | page 96 inverters | page 95
Timers and relays | Digital counters | page 101
Timer TM180 | Multi-function relay 2P & 4P Impulse relays | Wi-Fi Smart relay Programmable timers Universal digital
page 101 ELR-4 | page 107 page 116 ELR-1W | page 112 TE15A | page 114 counter | page 119
Transformers | Industrial relays | page 123
MES type transformers | Industrial relay ELM | Bases for industrial relays Interface relays L-14F-LS | Bases for interface relays Power relays EL-40FN |
page 123 page 125 | page 126 page 127 | page 128 page 129
Measurement devices | Limit switches | Sensors | page 134
Digital measurement Multi-functional Analogue measurement Limit switches CSA | Sensors EL-CM | Power supplies DR-45 |
devices EL-ED16R | programmable meter | devices SD72 | page 141 page 147 page 153
page 134 page 138 page 139
Rotary switches | Buttons & Indicators | Warning lights | page 156
Rotary switches Buttons EL-2211T | page LED Indicators Buttons EL1-B213 | page Telpher control MBP | Warning lights LTE1101J |
LW26-GS | page 156 161 AD56-22-W | page 163 168 page 169 page 170
INSTALLATION
Industrial plugs & sockets | Industrial boards | page 173
Movable industrial Movable industrial Fixed industrial plugs Fixed industrial sockets Empty industrial boards Assembled industrial
plugs HT/HTN | page sockets HT | page 174 HT | page 175 HT | page 176 EC69025 | page 182 boards EC69025 |
173 page 183
Distribution boards | page 186
Modular distribution Accessories for modular Metal boards CPK , IP54 | Plastic boards for flush Plastic boards for Halogen free plastic
enclosures MATRIX | distribution enclosures | page 205 mounting | page 211 surface mounting | boards ABS, IP65 |
page 186 page 199 page 212 page 214
Cable installation systems & Cable trunking | page 215
Non-isolated Isolated terminals SVS | Plastic cable trunking | Air conditioning trunk- Underfloor trunking Accessories for
connection tubes GLT | page 218 page 222 ing | page 228 systems | page 230 underfloor trunking
page 215 systems | page 231
Cable support systems | page 234
Insulating conduits | Halogen free rigit Metal cable trays | Accessories for metal Wire mesh cable trays | Accessories wire mesh
page 236 insulating conduit | page 243 cable trays | page 244 page 246 cable trays | page 247
page 236
Lighting protection | page 248
Air-termination rod | Earthing rod with strip | Hot-dip galvanized Aluminum round con- Lighting protection Lighting protection
page 248 page 248 strip | page 249 ductor | page 250 accessories | page 251 accessories | page 253
Distribution boxes | page 254
Junction boxes for brick Console boxes | Console boxes for plas- Distribution boxes for Waterproof distribution Waterproof distribution
and concrete | page 255 terboard | page 255 plasterboard | boxes, IP44 | page 257 boxes, IP65 | page 258
page 254 page 256
INSTALLATION
Cable terminals & Cable consumables | page 259
DIN rails | page 259 Zero terminals | Fixed terminals | Terminal blocks | PVC Insulating tapes | Heat shrinkage tubes |
page 260 page 261 page 258 page 268 page 270
Explosion proof installation systems | page 275
Ex-proof starters | Ex-proof indicators | Ex-proof boxes | Ex-proof ceiling lamp | Ex-proof high bay | Ex-proof emergency
page 275 page 276 page 277 page 279 page 281 lamp | page 281
Cable reels | Multiplugs | Accessories | page 283
Cable reels | page 283 Desktop multiplugs | Multiplugs with cables | Adapters | page 289 Rubber plugs | Plug adapters |
page 285 page 286 page 291 page 293
Cables & Conductors | page 295
Outside power cables | Inside power cables | Installation conductors | Cables with rubber Communication cables | Alarm cable | page 307
page 295 page 297 page 299 insulation | page 303 page 304
TOOLS
Electrical and cordless tools | page 309
Professional corded line Professional corded line Professional corded line Cordless line | page 313 Batteries for cordless line Battery charger |
drills | page 309 angle grinder | jig saw | page 311 tools | page 314 page 314
page 310
TOOLS
Digital tools| page 315
Digital multimeters | Digital multimeter- Digital clamp meters | Infrared temperature Laser distance meter | Laser lever meter |
page 315 pen | page 317 page 317 meter | page 318 page 318 page 318
Mechanical tools | page 319
Voltage tester | Crimping pliers | Wire strippers | Cable cutting pliers | Hydraulic tools | Insulated hand tools |
Accessories and protection equipment | page 335
Cutting discs | page 335 Twist knot wire wheel Cross head drills | Safety hand gloves | Safety eyeglasses | Disposable mask |
brush | page 337 page 338 page 343 page 343 page 344
Work and hobby lights | Fixings and fasteners page 345
Work lights | page 345 Batteries | page 348 Screws | page 349 Anchors | page 356 Wall plugs | page 357 Cable fixings | page 364
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
Solar Panels and Mounting structures elements | page 372
Solar panels | Mounting rails | page Mounting brackets | Mounting triangles | Mounting earthing Mounting grounding
page 389 393 page 393 page 396 elements | page 398 elements | page 399
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
Mounting structure sets | page 400
Sets for pitched tile roof | Sets for pitched sheet Sets for bituminous roof | Sets for flat roof or Sets for flat roof or ground Garage mounting
page 400 metal roof | page 401 page 402 ground | page 403 with east-west and sud structure set | page 407
orientation | page 405
Battaries and accessories for solar power systems | page 408
Batteries | page 408 Energy port | page 410 Battery monts | Solar cables | page 412 Connectors | page 413 4p switch | page 413
page 411
Off-grid inverters up 3.5kW to 10kW and sets | page 415
SET SET SET SET
Single phase off-grid Three phase off-grid Single phase off-grid Single phase off-grid Three phase off-grid Three phase off-grid sys-
inverters up 5kW | inverters up 6kW | system 3.5kW, set | system 5kW, set | system 6kW, set | tem up 10kW to 100kw,
page 416 page 417 page 436 page 437 page 438 set | page 440
On-grid up 3.6kW to 110kW invertes and sets | page 420
SET SET SET SET
Single phase on-grid Three phase on-grid Single phase on-grid Three phase on-grid Single phase system up Three phase system up
inverters up 8kW | page inverters 40W | page system up 3.6kW to 8kW, system up 6kW to 30kW, 5kW to 8kW with garage 6kW with garage struc-
420 423 sets | page 442 sets | page 445 structure, sets | page 450 ture, sets | page 452
Hybrid inverters up 3.5kW to 10kW and sets | page 426
SET SET SET SET
Single phase hybrid Three phase hybrid Single phase hybrid Three phase hybrid Three phase hybrid Three phase hybrid sys-
inverters 3.5kW | page inverters 10kW | page system 5kW, set | page system 6kW, set | page system 10kW, set | page tem up 10kW to 100kW,
426 428 437 438 439 set | page 440
Charging stations for electric and plug-in cars | Generators | page 465
EV Portable charger | EV charging wall boxes | EV charging cables | EV charging pillar | Gasoline generators | Diesel generators |
VENTILATION
Domestic fans | page 475
AF series - easy ALS silent series | AS series | page 478 AN series | page 479 AC series | page 480 Retro desk fan |
mounting | page 475 page 477 page 481
Industrial fans | Ventilation systems and accessories | page 482
PAS series | page 482 IAS series | page 483 TAS series | page 484 3 in 1 Industrial fan | Air conduits | page 486 Accessories | page 488
page 485
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
CITY Series | LECCE Series | page 497
Switches CITY series | Sockets CITY Series | Network sockets CITY Switches LECCE series | Sockets LECCE series | Network sockets LECCE
page 497 page 500 series | page 501 page 526 page 528 series | page 529
LONDON Series | RHYME Series | page 547
Switches LONDON Sockets LONDON Network sockets Switches RHYME series | Sockets RHYME series | Network sockets RHYME
series | page 547 series | page 552 LONDON series | page 566 page 568 series | page 569
page 553
ANTIQUE Series | Waterproof Series | page 590
Switches ANTIQUE Sockets ANTIQUE Waterproof switches Waterproof sockets Waterproof switches Boiler switches |
series | page 590 series | page 591 IP44 | page 593 IP65 | page 594 and sockets ANTIQUE page 597
Series | page 595
DOORBELLS
Wireless doorbells and doorbells with sensor | page 599
Wireless doorbells with Self-powered wireless Digital wireless Doorbell with sensor | Bell transformer for DIN
flash light | page 599 doorbells | page 601 doorbells | page 602 page 603 rail | page 604
AUTOMATION
• Miniature circuit breakers & • Frequency inverters

accessories • Cos φ regulator
• High power safety devices & • Timers
isolating switches • Transformers
• Switch disconnectors • Industrial relays
• Isolating switches • Measurement devices
• Moulded case circuit breakers • Limit switches
• Residual current devices • Sensors
• Surge arresters • Rotary switches
• Low voltage contactors • Buttons & Indicators
• Thermal overload relays • Warning lights & Towers
• Starters
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | MINI CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C40N
С4xN FUNCTIONS
number of poles (1,2,3) • Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
breaking capacity in (kA) • It can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
tripping curve C • In combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the
Cx protected circuit
rated current in (A) • For mounting in residential and industrial buildings
tripping curve С • For mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m
• Allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 4500 A
Documents corresponding to
the product: TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
Standard EN60898-1
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500A
EN60947-2 • Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
• Isolating voltage:≥2000V
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000
• Mechanical (number of cycles): 20000
• Class of current limiting: 3
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping:
¾ C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power
supply cables and conventional consumers
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane
Q235– A
• Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
• Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C /3s
• Maximum current release containing:
¾ Copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
¾ Resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
¾ Welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
¾ Bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current
¾ Thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
¾ Magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
+ 7 standard
0 extended
¾ Thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
* for industrial usage
3 years warranty ¾ Drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
¾ Contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
¾ Dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
¾ Static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
¾ Composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
• Power supply (conducting)
¾ Power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63, 3P63
¾ Rigid conductors up to 25 mm
¾ Flexible conductors up to 16 mm
• Tightening moment:1.33Nm
MOUNTING
• Vertical
• DIN-rail
• For mounting in housing or industrial
environment without serious interference
• Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 65°C±2° C
1P 2P 3P
Dimensions (mm)
C D1 D2 D3 H1
5 40 65 72 78
H2 W1 W2 W3 W4
45 18 36 54 72
ELMARK
11 Download BUSINESS APP from www.elmarkholdimg.eu or for mobile from or
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C40N
Catalogue Type Number of Rated current Breaking Recommended Packing/Box
number poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) (pcs)
41660C C41N / 2A 1 2 4.5 1.0 12/240
41661C C41N / 4A 1 4 4.5 1.0 12/240
41651C C41N / 6A 1 6 4.5 1.0 12/240
41652C C41N / 10A 1 10 4.5 1.5 12/240
41653C C41N / 16A 1 16 4.5 2.5 12/240
41654C C41N / 20A 1 20 4.5 2.5 12/240
41655C C41N / 25A 1 25 4.5 4.0 12/240
41656C C41N / 32A 1 32 4.5 6.0 12/240
41657C C41N / 40A 1 40 4.5 10.0 12/240
41658C C41N / 50A 1 50 4.5 10.0 12/240
41659C C41N / 63A 1 63 4.5 10.0 12/240

41670C C42N / 6A 2 6 4.5 1.0 6/120
41671C C42N / 10A 2 10 4.5 1.5 6/120
41672C C42N / 16A 2 16 4.5 2.5 6/120
7
41673C C42N / 20A 2 20 4.5 2.5 6/120 YEARS TOTAL
41674C C42N / 25A 2 25 4.5 4.0 6/120 WARRANTY
41675C C42N / 32A 2 32 4.5 6.0 6/120 + 7 standard

0 extended
41676C C42N / 40A 2 40 4.5 10.0 6/120 3 years warranty
41677C C42N / 50A 2 50 4.5 10.0 6/120

41678C C42N / 63A 2 63 4.5 10.0 6/120

41641C C43N / 6A 3 6 4.5 1.0 4/80
41642C C43N / 10A 3 10 4.5 1.5 4/80
41643C C43N / 16A 3 16 4.5 2.5 4/80
41644C C43N / 20A 3 20 4.5 2.5 4/80
41645C C43N / 25A 3 25 4.5 4.0 4/80
41646C C43N / 32A 3 32 4.5 6.0 4/80
41647C C43N / 40A 3 40 4.5 10.0 4/80
41648C C43N / 50A 3 50 4.5 10.0 4/80
41649C C43N / 63A 3 63 4.5 10.0 4/80
ELMARK
Download BUSINESS APP from www.elmarkholdimg.eu or for mobile from or 12
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C60N
С6xN FUNCTIONS
number of poles (1,2,3,4) • Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
tripping curve C • In combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the
rated current in (A) • For mounting in industrial buildings with high contamination level of the electric systems
tripping curve С,B • For mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m
• Allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A
Documents corresponding to
the product: TECHNICAL DATA
Standard EN60898-1
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A
• Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
• Isolating voltage:≥2000V
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 8000
• Mechanical (number of cycles): 50000
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping curve:
¾ B – the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and
generators
¾ C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power
supply cables and conventional consumers
• Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of 1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with
additional coating
• Plastic box – nylon glass filled FR material
• Status indicator
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
• Heat resistance of internal non-electrical components: 850°С / 10 s
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
¾ coil: solenoid
¾ resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
+ 7 standard
0 extended
¾ welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
3 years warranty ¾ bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current
¾ thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
¾ thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
¾ drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
¾ contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
¾ dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
¾ static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
¾ composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
• Power supply (conducting)
¾ power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63, 3P63
¾ rigid conductors up to 25 mm
¾ flexible conductors up to 16 mm
• Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
MOUNTING Dimensions (mm)

• Vertical
• DIN-rail C D1 D2 D3 H1
• For mounting in housing or industrial envi- 5 50 65 72 81
ronment without serious interference H2 W1 W2 W3 W4
45 18 36 54 72
1P 2P 3P 4P
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated cur- Breaking Recommended Packing/Box
number number poles rent In (A) capacity conductor (mm²) (pcs)
Curve C Curve B (kA)
41100C 41501C C61N / 1A 1 1 6 1.0 12/240
41102C 41502C C61N / 2A 1 2 6 1.0 12/240
41104C 41504C C61N / 4A 1 4 6 1.0 12/240
41106C 41506C C61N / 6A 1 6 6 1.0 12/240
41110C 41510C C61N / 10A 1 10 6 1.5 12/240
41116C 41516C C61N / 16A 1 16 6 2.5 12/240
41120C 41520C C61N / 20A 1 20 6 2.5 12/240
41125C 41525C C61N / 25A 1 25 6 4.0 12/240
41132C 41532C C61N / 32A 1 32 6 6.0 12/240
41140C 41540C C61N / 40A 1 40 6 10.0 12/240
41150C 41550C C61N / 50A 1 50 6 10.0 12/240
41163C 41563C C61N / 63A 1 63 6 10.0 12/240

Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated cur- Breaking Recommended Packing/Box
number number poles rent In (A) capacity conductor (mm²) (pcs)
Curve C Curve B (kA)
41202C
41204C
41602C
41604C
C62N / 2A
C62N / 4A
2
2
2
4
6
6
1.0
1.0
6/120
6/120
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
41206C 41606C C62N / 6A 2 6 6 1.0 6/120 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
41210C 41610C C62N / 10A 2 10 6 1.5 6/120
41216C 41616C C62N / 16A 2 16 6 2.5 6/120
41220C 41620C C62N / 20A 2 20 6 2.5 6/120
41225C 41625C C62N / 25A 2 25 6 4.0 6/120
41232C 41632C C62N / 32A 2 32 6 6.0 6/120
41240C 41640C C62N / 40A 2 40 6 10.0 6/120
41250C 41650C C62N / 50A 2 50 6 10.0 6/120
41263C 41663C C62N / 63A 2 63 6 10.0 6/120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box
number number poles current capacity (kA) conductor (pcs)
Curve C Curve B In (A) (mm²)
41302C 41702C C63N / 2A 3 2 6 1.0 4/80
41304C 41704C C63N / 4A 3 4 6 1.0 4/80
41306C 41706C C63N / 6A 3 6 6 1.0 4/80
41310C 41710C C63N / 10A 3 10 6 1.5 4/80
41316C 41716C C63N / 16A 3 16 6 2.5 4/80
41320C 41720C C63N / 20A 3 20 6 2.5 4/80
41325C 41725C C63N / 25A 3 25 6 4.0 4/80
41332C 41732C C63N / 32A 3 32 6 6.0 4/80
41340C 41740C C63N / 40A 3 40 6 10.0 4/80
41350C 41750C C63N / 50A 3 50 6 10.0 4/80
41363C 41763C C63N / 63A 3 63 6 10.0 4/80

Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/
number number poles current In capacity (kA) conductor Box
Curve C Curve B (A) (mm²) (pcs)
41402C 41802C C64N / 2A 4 2 6 1.0 3/60
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
41404C
41406C
41804C
41806C
C64N / 4A
C64N / 6A
4
4
4
6
6
6 1.0
1.0 3/60
3/60
+ 7 standard
0 extended
41410C 41810C C64N / 10A 4 10 6 1.5 3/60
3 years warranty
41416C 41816C C64N / 16A 4 16 6 2.5 3/60
41420C 41820C C64N / 20A 4 20 6 2.5 3/60
41425C 41825C C64N / 25A 4 25 6 4.0 3/60
41432C 41832C C64N / 32A 4 32 6 6.0 3/60
41440C 41840C C64N / 40A 4 40 6 10.0 3/60
41450C 41850C C64N / 50A 4 50 6 10.0 3/60
41463C 41863C C64N / 63A 4 63 6 10.0 3/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C100L
С10xL FUNCTIONS
number of poles (1,2,3) • Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
tripping curve B, C • In combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the
rated current in (A)
tripping curve C, B TECHNICAL DATA
Documents corresponding to • Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
the product: • Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
Standard EN60898-1 • Isolating voltage:≥2000V, 1 min at impulse wave 1.2/50μs
EN60947-2 • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000
• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
• Class of current limiting:3
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping curve: C
MOUNTING
• Vertical
• DIN-rail
• Possibility for labeling
1P 2P 3P
1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C100L

Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/Box
number number poles current capacity conductor (mm²) (pcs)
Curve C Curve B In (A) (kA)
41101C
41103C
41101C/B
41103C/B
C101L/6A
C101L/10A
1
1
6
10
10
10
1.0
1.5
12/240
12/240
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
41105C 41105C/B C101L/16A 1 16 10 2.5 12/240 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
41107C 41107C/B C101L/20A 1 20 10 2.5 12/240
41108C 41108C/B C101L/25A 1 25 10 4.0 12/240
41109C 41109C/B C101L/32A 1 32 10 6.0 12/240
41111C 41111C/B C101L/40A 1 40 10 10.0 12/240
41112C 41112C/B C101L/50A 1 50 10 10.0 12/240
41113C 41113C/B C101L/63A 1 63 10 16.0 12/240
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number number poles current capacity (kA) conductor Box
Curve C Curve B In (A) (mm²) (pcs)
41201C 41201C/B C102L/6A 2 6 10 1.0 6/120
41203C 41203C/B C102L/10A 2 10 10 1.5 6/120
41205C 41205C/B C102L/16A 2 16 10 2.5 6/120
41207C 41207C/B C102L/20A 2 20 10 2.5 6/120
41208C 41208C/B C102L/25A 2 25 10 4.0 6/120
41209C 41209C/B C102L/32A 2 32 10 6.0 6/120
41211C 41211C/B C102L/40A 2 40 10 10.0 6/120
41212C 41212C/B C102L/50A 2 50 10 10.0 6/120
41213C 41213C/B C102L/63A 2 63 10 16.0 6/120

number number poles current capacity (kA) conductor Box
Curve C Curve B In (A) (mm²) (pcs)
41301C 41301C/B C103L/6A 3 6 10 1.0 4/80
41303C 41303C/B C103L/10A 3 10 10 1.5 4/80
41305C 41305C/B C103L/16A 3 16 10 2.5 4/80
41307C 41307C/B C103L/20A 3 20 10 2.5 4/80
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 41308C
41309C
41308C/B
41309C/B
C103L/25A
C103L/32A
3
3
25
32
10
10
4.0
6.0
4/80
4/80
+ 7 standard
0 extended
* for industrial usage 41311C 41311C/B C103L/40A 3 40 10 10.0 4/80
3 years warranty
41312C 41312C/B C103L/50A 3 50 10 10.0 4/80
41313C 41313C/B C103L/63A 3 63 10 16.0 4/80

Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated cur- Breaking Recommended Packing/
number number poles rent In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) Box
Curve C Curve B (pcs)
41401C 41401C/B C104L/6A 4 6 10 1.0 3/60
41403C 41403C/B C104L/10A 4 10 10 1.5 3/60
41405C 41405C/B C104L/16A 4 16 10 2.5 3/60
41407C 41407C/B C104L/20A 4 20 10 2.5 3/60
41408C 41408C/B C104L/25A 4 25 10 4.0 3/60
41409C 41409C/B C104L/32A 4 32 10 6.0 3/60
41411C 41411C/B C104L/40A 4 40 10 10.0 3/60
41412C 41412C/B C104L/50A 4 50 10 10.0 3/60
41413C 41413C/B C104L/63A 4 63 10 16.0 3/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS DP1N (1P + E)
FUNCTIONS
• Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit
• It can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
• It breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead
conductor
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A
• Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu
• Insulating voltage: ≥2000V
• Tripping curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power
supply
• Cables and conventional consumers
CONNECTING
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
• Power supply (conducting):
¾ power supply busbar DP1N
¾ flexible or rigid conductor
• Mounting: on DIN-rail

Curve C
41006C DP1N/6 1P+N 6 4.5 1.0 12/240
41010C DP1N/10 1P+N 10 4.5 1.5 12/240
41016C DP1N/16 1P+N 16 4.5 2.5 12/240
7
41020C DP1N/20 1P+N 20 4.5 2.5 12/240
YEARS TOTAL
41025C DP1N/25 1P+N 25 4.5 4.0 12/240 WARRANTY
41032C DP1N/32 1P+N 32 4.5 6.0 12/240 + 7 standard

0 extended
3 years warranty
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C100M
С100M constructive series FUNCTIONS

number of poles (1;2;3;4) • Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
• It can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
Dx • In combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the
rated current
protected circuit
tripping curve С, D, B
TECHNICAL DATA
Documents corresponding to • Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
the product: • Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
Standard EN60898-1 • Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
• Isolating volatage:≥2000V
EN 60947-2
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000
• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
• Class of current limiting:3
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping curve: C,D
Q235 – A
• Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
¾ copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
¾ resistance: from 148 to 230m
¾ welding effort: <400 N/
¾ bimetal plate – composition: TB180/0.5
¾ thickness: 0.8mm
¾ magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
¾ thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
¾ drawing effort: 20N/mm²
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
¾ dimension 6x6x1
+ 7 standard
0 extended
* for industrial usage ¾ composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
3 years warranty • Power supply (conducting)
¾ power supply busbar
¾ rigid conductors up to 50
¾ rigid conductors up to 50
MOUNTING Dimensions (mm)
• Vertical
• DIN-rail C D1 D2 D3 H1
• Possibility for labeling 5 50 65 74 45
• For mounting in industrial environment H2 W1 W2 W3 W4
• Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 65°C±2° C 81 27 54 81 108
1P 2P 3P 4P
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C100M
Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated current Breaking Packing/Box
number number number poles In (A) capacity (kA) (pcs)
Curve C Curve B Curve D
41180 41180B 41180D C100M 1 80 10 9/180
41190 41190B 41190D C100M 1 100 10 9/180
41195 41195B 41195D C100M 1 125 10 9/180

41280 41282 41281 C100M 2 80 10 6/120
41290 41292 41291 C100M 2 100 10 6/120
3P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C100M 7 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated current Breaking Packing/Box * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
41380 41382 41381 C100M 3 80 10 4/60
41390 41392 41391 C100M 3 100 10 4/60

41480 41482 41481 C100M 4 80 10 3/60
41490 41492 41491 C100M 4 100 10 3/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C60DC
C6xDC FUNCTIONS
number of poles (1,2) • For lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer
breaking capacity in (kA) protection
tripping curve C • Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternat-
Cx ing current and constant current power supply circuits
rated current in (A)
• For commutation and control of electrical circuits
tripping curve С • In combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or
indication of the protected circuit
Documents corresponding to • For mounting in industrial buildings
the product: • For protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current
Standard EN60898-1 power supply
EN60898-2 TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC
• Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A
• Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu
• Insulating voltage: ≥2000V
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥4000
• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000
• IP code: IP>20
• Tripping curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect
power supply cables and conventional consumers
Q235– A
• Plastic box – nylon glass filled FR material
¾ Coil: solenoid
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
¾ resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
¾ welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
¾ bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current
+ 7 standard
0 extended
¾ thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
3 years warranty ¾ thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
¾ drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
¾ dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
¾ composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
¾ Ì metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc
• Conducting:
¾ power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63
¾ rigid conductors up to 25 mm
¾ flexible conductors up to 16 mm
MOUNTING
• Vertical
• DIN-rail
• For mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious current interference
Dimensions (mm)
C D1 D2 D3
1P 2P 5 49 65 72
H1 H2 W1 W2
78 45 18 36
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60DC
number poles In (A) capacity (kA) conductor (pcs)
(mm²)
41164C C61DC / 1A 1 1 6 1.0 12/240
41165C C61DC / 2A 1 2 6 1.0 12/240
41166C C61DC / 4A 1 4 6 1.0 12/240
41167C C61DC / 6A 1 6 6 1.0 12/240
41168C C61DC / 10A 1 10 6 1.5 12/240
41169C C61DC / 16A 1 16 6 2.5 12/240
41170C C61DC / 20A 1 20 6 2.5 12/240
41171C C61DC / 25A 1 25 6 4.0 12/240
41172C C61DC / 32A 1 32 6 6.0 12/240
41173C C61DC / 40A 1 40 6 10.0 12/240
41174C C61DC / 50A 1 50 6 10.0 12/240
41175C C61DC / 63A 1 63 6 10.0 12/240
2P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60DC

41176C C62DC / 2A 2 2 6 1.0 6/120 7 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
41177C C62DC / 4A 2 4 6 1.0 6/120 + 7 standard
0 extended
41178C C62DC / 6A 2 6 6 1.0 6/120 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
41179C C62DC / 10A 2 10 6 1.5 6/120
41181C C62DC / 16A 2 16 6 2.5 6/120
41182C C62DC / 20A 2 20 6 2.5 6/120
41183C C62DC / 25A 2 25 6 4.0 6/120
ELMARK
KM1-63DC 6KA/10KA DC MCB GO TO THE
1st PAGE
EKM1-63DC
ini Circuit Breaker6KA/10KA
AUTOMATION | MINI CIRCUIT BREAKERS DC MCB Standard_ IEC60947-2
Mini Circuit Breaker Standard_ IEC60947-2

MCB Characteristics
MCB Characteristics
Time limit for

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV Initial state tripping or
Time limit for
not tripping
Expected
Expected
result
Remarks
Initial state tripping or Remarks
result
not tripping
a 1.05ln Cold state a t≤1h
b 1.30ln t＜1h Tripping
b 1.30ln
Documents corresponding to t＜1h Tripping
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV the rated working voltage of DC circuit breakers
the product: c 8ln Cold state a
specially
Tripping
used in photovoltaic can be as high as DC 1000V. The special arc extinguishing and
c 8ln Cold state a Tripping
current limiting system can quickly disconnect the fault current of the DC power distribution
Standard IEC60947-2
d 12ln Cold state a system.
Tripping The photovoltaic module, an important component in solar power system, can avoid
d 12ln Cold state a Tripping
Note: The terminology “Cold state” means damage
that the testfrom highat DC reverse current and AC feedback current caused by the inverter failure,
is performed
Note: The terminology “Cold state” means that the test is performed at
the base calibration temperature with no
the base calibration temperature with no load
load prior to the test.
prior to the test.
ensuring a reliable operation of solar PV system.
FUNCTIONS
• Disconnection the fault current of the DC power distribution system trough are extinguishing
and current limiting system.
• Protection from high DC reverse current and AC feedback current caused by the inverter failure,
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram Circuit Diagram • Responsible protection of high cost components in PV system.
• Covers all common PV system voltages and currents.
1 3 1 3 5 7
1 3 1 3 5 7 TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 2P(500V); 4P(1000V)
2 4 • Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A
2 4 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8
• Rated impulse withstands voltage (1.5/50) Uimp: 4000V
• Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min: 2kV
1P 2P 4P
1P
Overall and Installation Dimension(mm)
2P 4P • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000
• Pollution degree: 2
Overall and Installation Dimension(mm) • Contact position indicator: Yes
• IP code: IP>20
• Terminal connection type:
• Cable
35.5
45
81
• Pin-type busbar
• U-type busbar
35.5
45
81
• Terminal size top/bottom for cable: 25mm2

7 YEARS TOTAL 18
WARRANTY
18
36
54
72
50
66
78
• Terminal size top/bottom for busbar: 25mm2
• Tightening torque: 2.5Nm
+ 7 standard 18
0 extended
18
36
50
66
EKM1-63DC 6KA/10KA DC MCB

MOUNTING 02
54 78
* for industrial usage 72
3 years warranty • Vertical
02
• DIN-rail
Mini Circuit Breaker Standard_
• For mounting in housing or industrial IEC60947-2
environment without serious current interference
• Ambient temperature: -5° C to + 65°C±2° C
• Daily temperature average: ≤35° C
MCB Characteristics
Characteristics Curves
Time limit for

Expected
result
not tripping
the base calibration temperature with no load prior to the test.
Circuit Diagram
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 ELMARK 4
23 Download BUSINESS APP 2 4
from www.elmarkholdimg.eu 6 for8mobile from
or or
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

2P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV 500V DC
41264 C62DC PV/6А 2 6 6 4.0 90
41265 C62DC PV/10А 2 10 6 4.0 90
41266 C62DC PV/13А 2 13 6 4.0 90
41267 C62DC PV/16А 2 16 6 4.0 90
41268 C62DC PV/20А 2 20 6 6.0 90
41269 C62DC PV/25А 2 25 6 6.0 90
41270 C62DC PV/32А 2 32 6 10.0 90
41271 C62DC PV/40А 2 40 6 10.0 90
41272 C62DC PV/50А 2 50 6 16.0 90
41273 C62DC PV/63А 2 63 6 25.0 90

41564 C64DC PV/6А 4 6 6 4.0 45
41565 C64DC PV/10А 4 10 6 4.0 45
41566 C64DC PV/13А 4 13 6 4.0 45
41567
41568
C64DC PV/16А
C64DC PV/20А
4
4
16
20
6
6
4.0
6.0
45
45
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
41569 C64DC PV/25А 4 25 6 6.0 45 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
41570 C64DC PV/32А 4 32 6 10.0 45
41571 C64DC PV/40А 4 40 6 10.0 45
41572 C64DC PV/50А 4 50 6 16.0 45
41573 C64DC PV/63А 4 63 6 25.0 45
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SINGLE-PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT PROTECTOR

FUNCTIONS TECHNICAL DATA
• Under-voltage protection • Operated voltage range: 80-400V AC;
• Over-voltage protection 50/60Hz (Single-phase)
• Over-current protection • Rated current: 63A
• Over-voltage protection value: 230-300V AC
FACTORY SETTING • Under-voltage protection value: 140-230VAC
• Over-voltage trip value: 270V • Over-current protection value: 1-63A
• Under-voltage trip value: 170V • Voltage power off time: 0-400s
• Over-current trip value: 63A • Current power off time: 0-30s
• Voltage power off time: 2s • Voltage range setting step: 1V
• Starting delay time: 2s • Time range setting step: 1s
• Current power off time: 2s • Power consumption: ≤ 1.5W
• Mechanical life: 100 000
• Relative humidity: 45-90% Rh
• Altitude: up to 2000m
• Pollution level: 2 class
• Dimensions: 36x80x66mm
• Mounting: on DIN rail
Catalogue Type Rated Over-voltage Under-voltage Over-current Packing/

number voltage protection protection protection Box (pcs)
range range range
41906 ELMARK MN4 220V AC 230-300V AC 140-230V AC 1-63A 1/100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
THREE-PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT PROTECTOR

• Under-voltage protection • Operated voltage range: 140-500V AC; 50/60Hz
• Over-voltage protection (Three-phase)
• Over-current protection • Rated current: 63A
• Over-voltage protection value: 390-500V AC
FACTORY SETTING • Under-voltage protection value: 140-370VAC
• Over-voltage trip value: 420V • Over-current protection value: 1-63A
• Under-voltage trip value: 210V • Voltage power off time: 0-400s
• Over-current trip value: 63A • Current power off time: 0-30s
• Voltage power off time: 2s • Voltage range setting step: 1V
• Starting delay time: 2s • Time range setting step: 1s
• Current power off time: 2s • Power consumption: ≤ 1.5W
• Mechanical life: 100 000
• Relative humidity: 45-90% Rh
• Pollution level: 2 class
Over-voltage Under-voltage Over-current

Catalogue Rated Packing/
Type protection protection protection
number voltage Box (pcs)
range range range
41907 ELMARK MN4 400V AC 390-500V AC 140-370V AC 1-63A 1/50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Documents corresponding to SINGLE POLE MONITORING VOLTAGE RELAY MN1
the product:
EN 60255-1; IEC60947-5-1 FUNCTIONS
• Protect electrical equipment from over & under voltage
• Voltage measurement accuracy <1%
• Relay status is indicated by LED
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 220V AC; 50/60Hz
• Hysteresis: 0-20% adjustable
• Time delay: 0.1-10s adjustable
• Reset time: 0.2 sec max
• Current ratting: 3A/AC-15
• Mechanical life: 1X10⁷
• Electrical life: 1X10⁵
• Ambient temperature: -10C°/+55C°
Catalogue Packing/Box
Type Rated voltage Hysteresis
number (pcs)
41900 ELMARK MN1 220V AC 0-20% adjustable 12/240
Documents corresponding to THREE POLE MONITORING VOLTAGE RELAY MN3

the product:
7
EN 60255-1; IEC60947-5-1 FUNCTIONS
YEARS TOTAL
• Protect electrical equipment from over & under voltage WARRANTY
• Voltage measurement accuracy <1%
+ 7 standard
0 extended
• Relay status is indicated by LED
3 years warranty
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 415V AC; 50/60Hz
• Hysteresis: 0-20% adjustable
• Time delay: 0.1-10s adjustable
• Reset time: 0.2 sec max
• Current ratting: 3A/AC-15
• Mechanical life: 1X10⁷
• Electrical life: 1X10⁵
• Ambient temperature: -10C°/+55C°
Catalogue Type Rated voltage Hysteresis Packing/Box

number (pcs)
41927 ELMARK MN3 415V AC 0-20% adjustable 12/240
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR PROTECTION
SHUNT RELEASE MX
FUNCTIONS
• Remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed
• Allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery
• Indication of the device’s location
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
• Isolating voltage: ≥2000V
• IP code: IP>20
CONNECTING
• Conductors: flexible up to 1.5mm²
• The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker
MOUNTING
• Vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker’s rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up
to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
Catalogue Type Rated voltage Type breaker Packing/Box

number (pcs)
41902C ELMARK MX 60 230V С60 12/240
AUXILIARY CONTACT OF
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY FUNCTIONS
+ 3 standard
2 extended • At circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system
• Indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 230V
• IP code: IP>20
CONNECTING
• Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm
MOUNTING
• Vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker’s rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to
the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
Catalogue Packing/Box
Type Rated voltage Type breaker
number (pcs)
41901C ELMARK OF 60 230V С60 12/240
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES
AUTOMATION | SAFETY DEVICES

Documents corresponding to the BASES FOR HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES
product:
Standard EN 60269-1 The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permittivity alloy with mounted
contact jaws of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy
fuse links taking out. All current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts;
the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power supply conductors are connected. The bases
are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links.
Remark : Fuse bases SIST are made of resin / Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
Overall dimensions (mm)
Base type А1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 C2 Ød
SIST00 25 100 120 - 30 25 60 7.5
SIST 0 25 150 170 - 30 37 72 7.5
SIST1 25 175 200 30 58 38 84 10.5
SIST2 25 200 225 30 60 38 100 10.5
SIST3 25 210 250 30 60 40 105 10.5
Catalogue Base type Fuse link type Rated Rated voltage Weight Packing / Box
number current (А) Un (V) (gr) (pcs)
12001 SIST00 NТ 00 up to 160 600 193 5/120
Catalogue Base type Fuse link Rated Rated voltage Weight Packing / Box
number
12010 SIST0
type
NТ 0
current (А)
up to 160
Un (V)
600
(gr)
295
(pcs)
3/54
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
number type current (А) Un (V) (gr) (pcs)
12100 SIST1 NТ 1 up to 250 600 550 3/36
12200 SIST2 NТ 2 up to 400 600 770 1/20
12300 SIST3 NТ 3 up to 630 600 965 1/20
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Documents corresponding to the

FUSE LINKS FOR HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICE
product:
Standard EN 60269-1 The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are
EN 60269-2 distinguished with high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic
(porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is
mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading terminals. These
terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of
knives to provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to “gL – gG” class which means
that they are with common function and normal response time. NH Fuses.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated short circuit current: 120 kA
• IP code: IP 00
• Ambient temperature: -5 to +65°C
• Operating class gL/gG – general purpose, line
protection, slow acting.
Base type А B C D H
NT00 78 40 15 29 56.5
NT 0 125 68 15 29 56.5
NT1 135 68 21 48 62
NT 2 150 68 27 58 72
NT 3 150 68 33 67 84.5
NT00C 78 40 15 21 56.5
NT1C 135 68 21 29 62
NT2C 150 68 33 48 84.5
Catalogue number Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs)

10001 NT00 16 500,600 3/90
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
10002
10003
NT00
NT00
25
32
500,600
500,600
3/90
3/90
+ 3 standard
2 extended
10004 NT00 40 500,600 3/90
10005 NT00 50 500,600 3/90
10006 NT00 63 500,600 3/90
10008 NT00 80 500,600 3/90
10009 NT00 100 500,600 3/90
10012 NT00 125 500,600 3/90
10016 NT00 160 500,600 3 / 90

10015 NT0 16 500,600 3/90
10025 NT0 25 500,600 3/90
10032 NT0 32 500,600 3/90
10040 NT0 40 500,600 3/90
10050 NT0 50 500,600 3/90
10063 NT0 63 500,600 3/90
10080 NT0 80 500,600 3/90
10090 NT0 100 500,600 3/90
10092 NT0 125 500,600 3/90
10096 NT0 160 500,600 3/90
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

10108 NT1 80 500,600 3/36
10110 NT1 100 500,600 3/36
10112 NT1 125 500,600 3/36
10116 NT1 160 500,600 3/36
10120 NT1 200 500,600 3/36
10122 NT1 225 500,600 3/36
10125 NT1 250 500,600 3/36

10216 NT2 160 500,600 1/24
10220 NT2 200 500,600 1/24
10225 NT2 250 500,600 1/24
10231 NT2 315 500,600 1/24
10240 NT2 400 500,600 1/24

10350 NT3 500 500,600 1/24
10363 NT3 630 500,600 1/24
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

10001C NT00C 16 500,600 3/120
10002C NT00C 25 500,600 3/120
10003C NT00C 32 500,600 3/120
10004C NT00C 40 500,600 3/120
10005C NT00C 50 500,600 3/120
10006C NT00C 63 500,600 3/120
10008C NT00C 80 500,600 3/120
10009C NT00C 100 500,600 3/120

10108C NT1C 80 500,600 3/54
10110C NT1C 100 500,600 3/54
10112C NT1C 125 500,600 3/54
10116C NT1C 160 500,600 3/54
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | ISOLATING SWITCHES

10216C NT2C 160 500,600 1/30
10220C NT2C 200 500,600 1/30
10225C NT2C 250 500,600 1/30
Documents corresponding to the ISOLATING SWITCHES

product:
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3 Designed in two types – horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage iso-
lating switch and high power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used
for low voltage distribution boards and complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible
circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and convenience at fuse links change. The
plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous circuits switching
on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolat-
ing switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and
improves the safety of the staff.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 500V • IP code: IP 40
• Rated short circuit current: according to the • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
mounted fuse links • Ambient temperature: -5 to
• Number of poles: 3 • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
• Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
Base type А B C D E
5
THB -160 105 160 85 45 100
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY THB - 250 185 220 111 66 180
+ 3 standard
2 extended THB - 400 210 260 130 88 205
THB - 630 256 270 140 94.5 245
Catalogue Type In (A) Un (V) Fuse link size Packing / Box

number (pcs)
44801 THB 160 500, 660 NT00 1/18
44802 THB 250 500, 660 NT1 1/6
44803 THB 400 500, 660 NT2 1/4
44804 THB 630 500, 660 NT3 1/4
Base А B C D E F G H W1 W2
type
HG2B 50 99 185 290 2 57 58 746 146 195
Catalogue Type In (A) Un (V) Fuse link size Packing / Box

number (pcs)
44805 HG2B 160 500, 660 NT00 1/4
44806 HG2B 250 500, 660 NT1 1/4
44807 HG2B 400 500, 660 NT2 1/4
44808 HG2B 630 500, 660 NT3 1/4
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Documents corresponding to the SWITCH DISCONNECTORS RT18
product:
Standard EN 60269-2; The series of switch disconnectors are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high
IEC269-2 speed of start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of non-flammable plastics adapted for
mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extin-
guishing the electric arc. LED indicator is mounted on the front panel to show fuse link condition. In
this ceramic body is mounted melting, specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power
terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with especially laid nickel layer and
Overall dimensions contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. There are offered two types of insertions
according to the degree of quick operation: normally quickly operating ones – class “gG”. Suitable for
DC system.
TECHNICAL DATA • Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
• Rated voltage: 500V • IP code: IP 40
• Rated short circuit current: according to the • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
mounted fuse links • Ambient temperature: -5 to
• Number of poles: 3 • Altitude: up to 2000m
Catalogue Base type Number Rated Type of the Base dimensions (mm) Packing /
number of poles current fuse Box (pcs)
5
A B W E YEARS TOTAL
(А)
WARRANTY
10RT1831 1PRT18 - 32x 1P 32 xxG1038 37 82 18 78 12/240 + 3 standard
2 extended
10RT18311 1NRT18 - 32x 1P+N 32 xxG1038 37 82 36 78 6/120
10RT1832 2PRT18 - 32x 2P 32 xxG1038 37 82 36 78 6/120
10RT1833 3PRT18 - 32x 3P 32 xxG1038 37 82 54 78 4/80
10RT18331 3NRT18 - 32x 3P+N 32 xxG1038 37 82 72 78 3/60
10RT1861 1PRT18 - 63x 1P 63 xxG1451 37 105 27 110 6/108
10RT18611 1NRT18 - 63x 1P+N 63 xxG1451 37 105 54 110 6/108
10RT1862 2PRT18 - 63x 2P 63 xxG1451 37 105 54 110 6/108
10RT1863 3PRT18 - 63x 3P 63 xxG1451 37 105 81 110 6/108
10RT18631 3NRT18 - 63x 3P+N 63 xxG1451 37 105 108 110 6/108
FUSE FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTORS RT18

Catalogue Type of the Voltage Rated Size of the fuse Packing / Box
number fuse class gG (V) current (А) A x ØB x C (pcs)
10G10381 01G1038 500 1 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G10382 02G1038 500 2 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G10384 04G1038 500 4 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G10386 06G1038 500 6 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G103810 10G1038 500 10 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G103816 16G1038 500 16 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G103820 20G1038 500 20 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G103825 25G1038 500 25 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G103832 32G1038 500 32 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000
10G145140 40G1451 500 40 51xØ14.3x12mm 10/500
10G145150 50G1451 500 50 51xØ14.3x12mm 10/500
10G145163 63G1451 500 63 51xØ14.3x12mm 10/500
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | PHOTOVOLTAIC FUSE HOLDERS
PHOTOVOLTAIC FUSE HOLDERS 1500V DC, 15PV14L SERIES

Photovoltaic fuse holders provide protection against short-circuits and overloads. They work with
fuse till 50A and rated voltage 1500V DC.
FUNCTIONS AND ADVANTAGES:
• Protection against short-circuits and overloads.
• Easy installation and fuse removal with no additional tools required.
• Tin-plated bimetallic copper fuse clips deliver superior fatigue resistance compared to traditional
spring brass.
• High temperature performance thanks to venting grooves and cooling chambers that improve
heat dissipation also for multiple configurations.
• Finger safety feature which ensures personnel protection during maintenance (no possibility of
getting in touch with live parts during fuse replacement).
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated Voltage: 1500V DC
• Rated Current: 50A
• Size of Fuse Link: suitable for fuse with sizes 10x85 and 14x85mm
• Class of Operation: gPV
• Mechanical Life: 500 times
• Tightening Torque: 2.5Nm
• Cable section of terminal: 10mm²
Catalogue Type Number of Rated current Base dimensions (mm) Packing /Box
number poles (А) W H D (pcs)
15PV14L PV DC 1P 50 22.4 134 92 1/120
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | PHOTOVOLTAIC FUSE LINKS

FUSE LINKS 1500V DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC FUSE HOLDERS
15PV14L SERIES
A fuse is a replaceable circuit protection device that provides protection to both the equipment
and the equipment operator in the event of a circuit overload. It is commonly connected with a
circuit in series, and when fault current increases to a certain value, the fuse blows out to cut off
the circuit so as to fulfill an aim of protecting other equipment in the circuit. The fuse is the most
commonly used component in an over current protection circuit. The traditional fuse mainly con-
sists of two parts of a tube body, of which both ends have metal connecting terminals, and metal
melts in the tube body.
Solar fuses vary in a number of different ways including fuse speed, voltage and amperage rating,
braking capacity and their physical size and shape.
FUNCTIONS
• Protect solar power equipment against over current.
• Protect against reverse current and short circuits.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 1500V DC
• Rated current: 6-50A
• Class of operation: gPV
• Breaking capacity: 20kA
• Sizes: 10x85mm and 14x85mm
Catalogue Voltage (V) Rated current (А) Size of the fuse Packing/ Box (pcs)
number (mm)
15PV06A 1500V DC 6 10x85 1000
15PV10A 1500V DC 10 10x85 1000
15PV12A 1500V DC 12 10x85 1000
15PV16A 1500V DC 16 10x85 1000
15PV20A 1500V DC 20 10x85 1000
15PV25A 1500V DC 25 10x85 1000
15PV32A 1500V DC 32 10x85 1000
15PV40A
15PV45A
1500V DC
1500V DC
40
45
14x85
14x85
400
400
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
15PV50A 1500V DC 50 14x85 400
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS FROM 20A TO 125A
Documents corresponding FUNCTIONS

to the product: • Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical
Standard EN 60947-3 and IEC947-3 circuits
• Breaking of electrical circuits
• Can be used as a main breaker
• It has no protective function
• Specification: CE, ROHS, BS, EN,EIC60439-3
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal cycles):
• Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or ≥20000
flexible conductors • IP code: IP>20
• Tightening moment: 1.33Nm • Mounting: DIN-rail
• Isolating voltage: ≥500V • Plastic material of UV rays
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): • Ambient temperature: -20°C + 65°C
≥10000
Dimensions (mm)
H1 H2 D1 D2 D3 W1 W2 W3 W3
81 45 50 65 76 17.5 35 52.5 70
Catalogue Type Number Rated Recommended Packing/Box

number of poles current In (A) conductor (mm²) (pcs)
41914 ISS 1P 40 10 12/240
7 YEARS TOTAL
41911 ISS 1P 63 16 12/240
WARRANTY 41912 ISS 1P 80 25 12/240
+ 5 standard
2 extended 41913 ISS 1P 100 35 12/240
3 years warranty 41916 ISS 1p 125 50 12/240

number of poles current In (A) conductor (mm²) (pcs)
41924 ISS 2P 40 10 6/120
41921 ISS 2P 63 16 6/120
41922 ISS 2P 80 25 6/120
41923 ISS 2P 100 35 6/120
41925 ISS 2p 125 50 6/120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number of poles current In (A) conductor (pcs)
(mm²)
41935 ISS 3P 20 2.5 4/80
41936 ISS 3P 32 6.0 4/80
41934 ISS 3P 40 10 4/80
41931 ISS 3P 63 16 4/80
41932 ISS 3P 80 25 4/80
41933 ISS 3P 100 35 4/80
41937 ISS 3p 125 50 4/80

number of poles current In (A) conductor (pcs)
(mm²)
41944 ISS 4P 40 10 3 / 60
41941 ISS 4P 63 16 3 / 60
41942 ISS 4P 80 25 3 / 60
7
41943 ISS 4P 100 35 3 / 60
YEARS TOTAL
41945 ISS 4p 125 50 3 / 60 WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
PADLOCK ADAPTOR FOR MCB

An adaptоr makes it possible to block the operating lever whether switched ON or OF
Catalogue number Type

41904 Padlock adaptor for MCB
ELMARK
Electrical Electrical Life
EKCS101G EKCS101G
1500 Cycles
Features Mechanical Life 8500 Cycles
tch can switch on, Load and break the circuit under normal conditions, using as Switch
Protection degree IP20Switch
Changeover
Changeover Switch
GO TO THE Standard_
Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃
EKCS101G
EKCS101G
1st PAGE
Electrical Terminal/Cable size 240/415V~ 50mm2

Changeover
Changeover Switch
Switch
63,80,100,125A
Features
Standard_ IEC60947-3
Mounting On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) by means of fast clip device.
50/60Hz
1,2,3,4P
Circuit 1 9 1 5
1-0-2 SWITCH 1-0-2II1ISS3 5
Diagram
THREE
II I POSITION
1P
CHANGEOVER
II I II I
2P I SERIES,
II I II 63А
I 3P
1500 Cycles
2 4 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10 12
1 9
5corresponding 13 8500 Cycles
A changeover switch is designed to transfer a house or business electricity from the commercial
Documents
II IP20
toIItheI product: I II I II I 4P
power grid to a local generator when an outage occurs also known as transfer switches, they
Standard
2 4 6 -5℃...40℃
IEC60947-3
8 10
connect directly to the generator commercial power supply or line and the house.
12 14 16
ISS3 can be freely switched on and off between two loads carried by a group of lines, or on two
50mm Application Application
2 power sources.

Overall and On DIN rail EN60715(35mm)FUNCTIONS:
installation by means of fast clip device.
dimensions (mm) • Switching on/off The Changeover
heavyThe Changeover
loaded Switch canSwitch
electricalswitchcan
on,switch
Load andon,break
Load and
the circuit
break the
under
circuit
normal
under
conditions,
normal condition
using as
circuits
Disconnectors.
Disconnectors.
Application
5Application 78
4P 144 mm
1 1 • Switching
5 3P between
9108 mm two loads or two power
2P 3P Voltage
II I II I II I 1Psources
2P 72 mm
II36 mmI II I
Technical Technical
Data Data
50
Rated Voltage
Rated 240/415V~ 240/415V~
TheTheChangeover
Changeover Switch
Switch
can can
switch
switch
• on, Load
on, Load
Breaking and
ofand
break break
the the
electrical circuit
circuit
circuits underunder
normal
normal
conditions,
conditions,
using
using
as Switch
as Switch
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10 Rated
12 Current
Rated Current 63,80,100,125A
63,80,100,125A
Disconnectors.
Disconnectors.
1 • Can be
5 used as a main breaker
9 13
• It has no protectiveRated Frequency

Rated Frequency
function 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
9 13
Number of Number
Poles of Poles 1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P
IITechnical
TechnicalData
DataRated Rated
Voltage
Voltage 240/415V~
240/415V~
II 1 5 9 13
II I I 4P
II I II I II I II I
EKCS101G 125A O
Contact form Contact form 1-0-2 1-0-2

TECHNICAL DATA
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
400V~ 50/60Hz I
45
RatedRated
Current
Current 35 84 63,80,100,125A
63,80,100,125A • Isolating voltage: 440V
8 10 12 14 16 • Rated operational voltage Ue: 2P 230V;
RatedRated
Frequency
Frequency Electrical Electrical
50/60Hz 50/60Hz
Electrical 50/60Hz
Life
Electrical Life 1500 Cycles1500
• Electrical wear resistance Cyclesof cycles):
(number
Number
Number of Poles
of Poles 1,2,3,4P
1,2,3,4P
AC-22A
Features Features
Mechanical Mechanical
LifeUe: 4P Life 8500 Cycles8500 Cycles
IEC60947-3
• Rated operational voltage 400V; ≥25 000

ension(mm) Contact
Contact
formform 2 50/60Hz
4 6 8 10 1-0-2
12 1-0-2
Protection Protection
degree
14 16 degree
• Mechanical wear IP20 IP20
resistance (number of
cycles): ≥20 000
• Rated current: Ambient
63A Temperature
Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃ -5℃...40℃
Electrical
ElectricalElectrical
Electrical
Life Life • Joining terminal: flat 1500 1500
Cycles
(tunnel) Cycles
screw terminal • IP code: IP>20
01 Features
FeaturesMechanical
4P 144 mm
Mechanical
3P 108 mm Life Life
Electrical Electrical
• Connecting: power 8500 8500
Terminal/Cable Cycles
supply Cycles
Terminal/Cable
size
busbar, size
rigid • Mounting: DIN-rail
50mm 50mm 2 2
Protection
Protectiondegreedegree 16mm2 IP20
Features Features Mounting
conductors till Mounting orIP20
flexible conductors • Plastic material of UV rays
On DIN rail On
EN60715(35mm)
DIN rail EN60715(35mm)
by means of
byfast
mea c
2P 72 mm
50
• Ambient temperature: -20°C + 65°C
Ambient
AmbientTemperature
Temperature -5℃...40℃
-5℃...40℃
1P 36 mm
till 10mm2
Circuit Circuit50mm
1 5 9 13
Electrical
ElectricalTerminal/Cable
Terminal/Cable
size size 1 50mm2 2 1 1 51 5 1 51 95
Diagram DiagramOn II I 1PII I 1P
II I II II I I
2P device. 2P
II I II I II II I I II II I I
Features
Features Mounting
Mounting DIN
On DIN
rail EN60715(35mm)
rail EN60715(35mm)
by means
by means
of fastof fast
clip clip
device.
II 1 5 9 13
II I II I II I II I
125A
EKCS101G
O
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Circuit diagram 2 4 62 84 6 8
400V~ 50/60Hz I
2 4 2 4 2 4 62 8 4106 128
35 84
Circuit
Circuit
7
1 1 1 1 5 5 1 51 195 1 513 95 9 139
Diagram
Diagram
YEARS TOTAL
I 1P 1P 2P II2P I 4P 3P 3P 4P
WARRANTY
AC-22A
IEC60947-3
II III II III I II III I IIII I I IIIIII IIIII I II IIII III II I II IIIII II
+ 7 standard 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 64 6 8 8 2 4 62 26 2 412
84 10 8 614
410 6 8 16
10814
12 10 12 16
12
0 extended 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
3 years warranty 1 1 5 5 9 9 13 13
II III I II III I II III I II Overall
III I and
Overall
Installation
4P and
4P Installation
Dimension(mm)
Dimension(mm)
Catalogue 2 2 4 6
4 6 8 10
8 10 12 14
12 14 16 16
Type Number Rated Recommended Packing/Box
number of poles current In (A) conductor (mm²) 4P 144 mm (pcs)
4P 144 mm
78 78 3P 108 mm 3P 108 mm
41928 ISS3 2P 6350 10/16 6/120
Overall
Overall
andand
Installation
Installation
Dimension(mm)
Dimension(mm)
2P 72 mm 2P 72 mm
50
1P 36 mm 1P 36 mm
41929 ISS3 4P 63 10/16 6/120
1 51 95 13 9 13
4P 144
4P mm144 mm
78 78 3P 108
3P mm108 mm
II 1 5 9 13 II 1 5 9 13
2P 722Pmm 72 mm EKCS101G 125A O

II I
EKCS101G
II I II I
125A
II I
O
II I II I II I II I
50 50 400V~ 50/60Hz I
2 4 6 8 10
400V~ 50/60Hz
12 14 16
I
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1P 361Pmm 36 mm
45 45 35 84 35 84
1 1 5 5 9 9 13 13
AC-22A AC-22A
IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3
II 1 II 5 19 5
13 9 13
II I II I III II III II II I II I
EKCS101G EKCS101G 125A O
125A 2
O
4 6 8 10
2 412 14
6 81610 12 14 16
400V~ 50/60Hz400V~ 50/60HIz I
2 4 62 84 10 6 12 8 1410 1612 14 16
45 45 35 84 35 84
01 01
AC-22A AC-22A
IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3
2 2 4 46 6 8 810 1012 12 14 1416 16
01 01
ELMARK
h on, Load and break the circuit under normal conditions, using as Switch
Protection degree EKCS101GEKCS101G
IP20
Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃
Changeover
Changeover
Switch Switch
GO TO THE IEC60947-3
Standard_Standard_ IE
EKCS101G
EKCS101G
240/415V~
1st PAGE
Terminal/Cable size 2
50mm
Mounting 63,80,100,125A On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) by means of fast clip device.
Changeover
Changeover
Switch
Switch
50/60Hz

1,2,3,4P
1 1 5 9
1-0-2
1 5
1P 2P 3P
II I II I II I II I II I II I
THREE POSITION CHANGEOVER SWITCH 1-0-22 ISS4 SERIES, 125А
1500 Cycles
2 4 2 4 6 8 4 6 8 10 12
1 8500 9
Cycles 5 13
IIDocuments
I I IP20
II corresponding
II I II I
A changeover 4P switch is designed to transfer a house or business electricity from the commercial
8-5℃...40℃
power grid to a local generator when an outage occurs also known as transfer switches, they
2 to the
4 product:
6 10 12 14 16
Standard IEC60947-3 connect directly to the generator commercial power supply or line and the house.
50mm2
ISS4 can be freely switched on and off between two loads carried by a group of lines, or on two
On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) Application

nd Installation Dimension(mm) by meansApplication
power sources.
of fast clip device.
Overall and installation FUNCTIONS:
dimensions (mm) • Switching on/off The Changeover
heavy
4P 144 mm The Changeover
loaded Switch canSwitch
switchcan
electrical on,switch
Load and
on,break
Load and
the circuit
break the
under
circuit
normal
under
conditions,
normal conditions,
using as Switch
using as Sw
1 5 circuits 9Disconnectors.
Disconnectors.
II I Application
IIApplication
78 1 5 3P 108 mm
2P 3P
I 50
II I 1P• Switching
2P 72 mm
36IImm I
between
II I two loads or two power
sources
Technical Technical
Data Data
Rated12Voltage
Rated Voltage 240/415V~ 240/415V~
TheThe
Changeover
Changeover
Switch
Switch
can
2 can
switch
1 switch
4 • on, 6 Load
on,5Load
8and and
breakbreak
9 the the
circuit
circuit
13 under
under
normal
normal
conditions,
conditions,
using
using
as Switch
as Switch
4 6 8 Breaking 10
of electrical circuits
Rated Current
Rated Current 63,80,100,125A
63,80,100,125A
Disconnectors.
Disconnectors. • Can be used as a main breaker
13 Rated Frequency
• 125AIt has no protective Rated Frequency
function 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
Number of Number
Poles of Poles 1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P
II 1 5 9 13
II I 4PRated
II I II I II I II I
O
EKCS101G
Technical
Technical
Data
DataRated Voltage
Voltage 240/415V~
240/415V~
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
400V~ 50/60Hz I
TECHNICAL DATA Contact form Contact form 1-0-2 1-0-2

Rated
Rated
Current
Current 63,80,100,125A
63,80,100,125A
45 35 84
14 16 • Rated operational voltage Ue: 2P 240V; • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
Rated
Rated
Frequency
Frequency AC-22A
50/60Hz
IEC60947-3 50/60Hz
Electrical 50/60Hz
Life
Electrical Life cycles): ≥ 8 500 1500 Cycles1500 Cycles
Number
Number
of Poles
of Poles Features
• Rated Features 1,2,3,4P
Mechanical
operational voltage1,2,3,4P
Mechanical
LifeUe: 4P Life400V; • IP code: IP>20 8500 Cycles8500 Cycles
m) Contact
Contact
formform 2 50/60Hz
4 6 8 10
1-0-2
Protection
12
1-0-2
Protection
degree
14 16
degree IP20
• Mounting: DIN-rail IP20
Ambient Temperature
• Rated current: 125A Ambient Temperature • Plastic material -5℃...40℃
of UV rays-5℃...40℃
Electrical
ElectricalElectrical
Electrical
Life144
4P Life
mm • Joining terminal: flat1500 1500
Cycles
(tunnel) Cycles
screw terminal • Ambient temperature: -20°C + 65°C
Features
FeaturesMechanical
Mechanical
3P 108 mm Life Life
• Connecting: power 8500
Terminal/Cable
supply8500
CyclesCycles
Terminal/Cable
size
busbar, size
rigid or 50mm2 50mm2
Protection
Protection
degree
degree flexible conductors till
Features Features IP20 IP20
50mm2
Mounting Mounting On DIN rail On
EN60715(35mm)
DIN rail EN60715(35mm)
by means of
byfast
means
clip device.
of fast clip d
2P 72 mm
1P 36 mm
Ambient
Ambient
Temperature
Temperature -5℃...40℃
-5℃...40℃
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
≥1 500
Circuit Circuit1
1 5 9 13
Electrical
ElectricalTerminal/Cable
Terminal/Cable
size size 50mm
50mm
2 2 1 1 51 5 1 51 95 9
Diagram DiagramII I 1PII 1P 2P device. 2P I II I II II I I II I II I II II I I II II I I II 3P
I
Features
Features
Mounting
Mounting On DIN
On DIN
rail EN60715(35mm)
rail EN60715(35mm)
by means
by means
of fast
of fast
clip clip
device.
II 1 5 9 13
II I II I II I II I
125A
EKCS101G
O
Circuit diagram
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
2 4 62 84 6 8
400V~ 50/60Hz
2 4 2 4 2 4 62 8 4106 128 10 12
I
Circuit
Circuit
84
7
1 1 1 1 5 5 1 51 195 1 513 95 9 139
Diagram
Diagram
YEARS TOTAL
AC-22A
IEC60947-3 II III I 1P 1P II III I II III I
2P II2P I IIII I I IIIIII IIIII I II IIII III II I II IIIII II
4P 3P 3P 4P WARRANTY
2 2 4 4 2 2 4 64 6 8 8 2 4 62 26 2 412
84 10 8 614
410 6 8 16
10814
12 10 12 16
12 + 7 standard
0 extended
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1 1 5 5 9 9 13 13
I II Overall
III I and
Overall
Installation
4P and
4P Installation
Dimension(mm)
Dimension(mm)
3 years warranty
II III I II III I II III
Catalogue 2 2 4 6
4 6 8 10
8 10 12 14
12 14 16 16
Type Number Rated Recommended Packing/Box
number of poles current In (A) conductor (mm²) 4P 144 mm 4P (pcs)
144 mm
78 78 3P 108 mm 3P 108 mm
41946 ISS4 2P 125 50 2P 72 mm 1/90
Overall
Overall
andand
Installation
Installation
Dimension(mm)
Dimension(mm)
2P 72 mm
50 50
1P 36 mm 1P 36 mm
41947 ISS4 4P 125 50 1/45
1 51 95 13 9 13
4P 144
4P mm144 mm
78 78 3P 108
3P mm108 mm II II
1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13
2P 722Pmm 72 mm EKCS101G 125A O

II I
EKCS101G
II I II I
125A
II I
O
II I II I II I II I
50 50 400V~ 50/60Hz I
2 4 6 8 10
400V~ 50/60Hz
12 14 16
I
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1P 361Pmm 36 mm
45 45 35 84 35 84
1 1 5 5 9 9 13 13
AC-22A AC-22A
IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3
II 1 II 5 19 5
13 9 13
II I II I III II III II II I II I
EKCS101G EKCS101G 125A O
125A 2
O
4 6 8 10
2 412 14
6 81610 12 14 16
400V~ 50/60Hz400V~ 50/60HIz I
2 4 62 84 10 6 12 8 1410 1612 14 16
45 45 35 84 35 84
01 01
AC-22A AC-22A
IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3
2 2 4 46 6 8 810 1012 12 14 1416 16
01 01
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS2 FROM 125A TO 800A
Documents corresponding The series three- and four-pole load switch disconnectors ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main
to the product: electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they
Standard EN 60947-1 are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation.
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 Simple and secure management.
FUNCTIONS
• Switching on and off of electrical circuits
under load
• Disconnection of electrical circuits
• Used as main circuit-breaker
• Resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in
the protected circuit
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz • Mechanical endurance (number of cycles):
• Double connector: screw connection ≥10 000
• Connection: solid or flexible conductors • IP code: IP>20
• Insulation voltage: ≥1000V • Mounting method: to a surface by means of
• Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V bolts
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): • Plastic resistant to UV rays
≥5 000 • Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС
Dimensions (mm)
Type A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y
ISS2-125/3 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25
ISS2-125/4 170 135 125 27 73 150 150 65 20 25 3.5 25
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
ISS2-160/3
ISS2-160/4
140
170
135
135
125
125
27
27
73
73
120
150
120
150
65
65
20
20
25
25
3.5
3.5
25
25
+ 5 standard
2 extended ISS2-250/3 180 170 138 35 86 160 160 90 25 30 3.5 25
3 years warranty ISS2-250/4 230 170 138 35 86 210 210 90 25 30 3.5 25
ISS2-400/3 230 240 165 50 110 210 210 140 32 40 5 37
ISS2-400/4 295 240 165 50 110 275 275 140 32 40 5 37
ISS2-630/3 230 260 165 50 110 210 210 140 40 50 6 37
ISS2-630/4 295 260 165 50 110 275 275 140 40 50 6 37
ISS2-800/3 378 312 240 50 140 353 353 175 60 56 8 48
ISS2-800/ 498 312 240 50 140 473 473 175 60 56 8 48
Catalogue Catalogue Type Rated Max. breaking Tightening Packing/Box

number number current capacity moment (pcs)
3-pole 4-pole In (A) Icu (A) (Nm)
41951 41961 ISS2-125in 125 1250 6.5 1/12

41952 41962 ISS2-125out 125 1250 6.5 1/12
41953 41963 ISS2-160in 160 1250 6.5 1/12
41954 41964 ISS2-160out 160 1250 6.5 1/12
41955 41965 ISS2-250in 250 2000 10 1/6
41956 41966 ISS2-250out 250 2000 10 1/6
41957 41967 ISS2-400in 400 3200 14.5 1/2
41958 41968 ISS2-630in 630 4000 14.5 1/2
41959 41969 ISS2-800in 800 1000 27 1/2
Note:
ISS2-xxx in – load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board
ISS2 -xxx out – load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the
board
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MANUAL SWITCHING TO RESERVE SERIES EQ 2M FROM 160A TO 800A
Documents corresponding The series three- and four-pole load switch disconnectors ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main
to the product: electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they
Standard EN 60947-1 are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation.
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 Simple and secure management.
FUNCTIONS
• Switching on and off of electrical circuits
under load
• Disconnection of electrical circuits
• Used as main circuit-breaker
• Resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in
the protected circuit
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz ≥10 000
• Double connector: screw connection • IP code: IP>20
• Connection: solid or flexible conductors • Mounting method: to a surface by means of
• Insulation voltage: ≥1000V bolts
• Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V • Plastic resistant to UV rays
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): • Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС
≥5 000
• Mechanical endurance (number of cycles):
Dimensions (mm)
Type A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y Y1
ЕQ2M-160/3 270 135 212 89 150 120 65 95 20 25 3.5 55 25
EQ2M-160/4 300 135 212 104 150 150 65 95 20 25 3.5 55 25
ЕQ2M-250/3
EQ2M-250/4
307
357
170
170
260
260
110
135
180
180
160
210
65
65
115
115
25
25
30
30
3.5
3.5
70
70
25
25 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
ЕQ2M-400/3 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 32 40 5 83 37 2 extended
EQ2M-400/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 32 40 5 83 37 3 years warranty
ЕQ2M-630/3 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 40 50 6 83 37

EQ2M-630/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 40 50 6 83 37
ЕQ2M-8003 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 60 56 8 83 48
EQ2M-800/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 60 56 8 83 48
Catalogue Catalogue Type Rated Max. breaking Tightening Packing/Box

number number current capacity moment (pcs)
3-pole 4-pole In (A) Icu (A) (Nm)
44641 44641P ЕQ2M-160 160 1250 6.5 1/4
44642 44642P ЕQ2M-250 250 2000 10 1/2
44643 44643P ЕQ2M-400 400 3200 14.5 1/2
44644 44644P ЕQ2M-630 630 4000 14.5 1/2
44645 44645P ЕQ2M-800 800 1000 27 1/2
ELMARK
GO TO THE
AUTOMATION | HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1st PAGE
1000V DC HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, DC1 SERIES
Documents corresponding DC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) are used for the protection of electrical devices
to the product: that operate with direct current. The DC MCCBs are available in 50A-300A with maximum breaking
StandardI EC 60947-1 capacity up to 20kA, which can ensure reliable short-circuit protection of the system. The MCCBs
IEC 60947-2 available in 2P, with nominal voltage of 1000VDC.
GB/T 14048.2
FUNCTIONS
• Protection against overloading.
• Protection against short circuit.
• Manual switching control.
• High breaking capacity level.
• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage Ue (V) DC: 1000V DC
• Rated insulation voltage Ui (V): 1250V
• Rated current In(A): 50-300A
• Extreme short-circuit breaking capacity Icu (kA): 20kA at 1000V DC
• Running short-circuit breaking capacity Ics (kA): Ics=100%Icu
• Pole number: 2P
• Rated impulse withstands voltage Uimp (kV): 8kV
• Transient action value (ln): 10ln
• Working temperature: -40~+70°C
• IP code: IP>20
MOUNTING
+ + • Joining with bolts
• Mounting position: vertical
7 YEARS TOTAL Dimensions (mm)

L
WARRANTY
Type L W H
+ 7 standard
0 extended
DC1-320 180 76 126
3 years warranty + +
W H Catalogue Type Rated current Number of Operating/Max. Packing/ box
number ln (A) poles breaking capacity (pcs)
(kA) lcs/Icu 1000V
44000DC DC1-320 50A 2P 20/20 1
44001DC DC1-320 63A 2P 20/20 1
44002DC DC1-320 80A 2P 20/20 1
44003DC DC1-320 100A 2P 20/20 1
44004DC DC1-320 125A 2P 20/20 1
44005DC DC1-320 160A 2P 20/20 1
44006DC DC1-320 200A 2P 20/20 1
44007DC DC1-320 250A 2P 20/20 1
44008DC DC1-320 300A 2P 20/20 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
AUTOMATION | HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1st PAGE
1500V DC HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, DC1 SERIES
capacity up to 20kA, which can ensure reliable short-circuit protection of the system. The MCCBs
Standard IEC 60947-1
available in 2P & 3P, with nominal voltage of 1500VDC.
IEC 60947-2
GB/T 14048.2 FUNCTIONS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Pole number: 2P
• IP code: IP>20
MOUNTING
+ + • Joining with bolts.
• Mounting position: vertical.
Dimensions (mm)
7 YEARS TOTAL
L
WARRANTY
Type L W H
+ 7 standard
0 extended
DC1-320-3P 180 107 126
+ + DC1-400-2P 250 124 165
3 years warranty
W H DC1-630-2P 250 124 165

DC1-800-2P 250 124 165
Catalogue Type Rated current Number of poles Operating/Max. Packing/ box

number ln (A) breaking capacity (pcs)
(kA) lcs/Icu 1000V
44012DC DC1-320 50A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44013DC DC1-320 63A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44014DC DC1-320 80A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44015DC DC1-320 100A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44016DC DC1-320 125A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44017DC DC1-320 160A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44018DC DC1-320 200A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44019DC DC1-320 250A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44009DC DC1-400 400A 2P (2P housing) 20/20 1
44010DC DC1-630 630A 2P (2P housing) 20/20 1
44011DC DC1-800 800A 2P (2P housing) 20/20 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
AUTOMATION | MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1st PAGE
HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(MCCB) DS1 MAX FROM 63A... 800A

to the product: • High breaking capacity level • Endures high currents of short circuit in the
Standard EN 60947-1 • Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits protected circuit
EN 60947-2 • Breaking of electrical circuits and control of • Remarkable with high reliability of current
powerful consumers characteristics control: manual
• Can be used as a main breaker in housing or • Possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for
industrial distributing installations automation
TECHNICAL DATA
• Isolating voltage: 2000V ¾ Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
• Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V ¾ Thickness: depends on the current
• Connecting: • Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
¾ Rigid or flexible conductors • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
¾ Front conductors joining ≥10000
¾ Possibility for mounting to lengthening • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
terminal cycles): ≥20000
• Plastic elements: • IP code: IP>20
¾ Not keeping the burning material nylon PA66 • Mounting: joining with bolts; mounting
¾ Box permitivity strength: >16MV/m position: vertical
• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
the outer parts: 960°C • Test button
• Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2 • Ambient temperature: -20°/65°C
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 a b d
DS1 MAX 125/63 3P M 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/80 3PM 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/100 3P M 92 150 110 92 30 129 4.5
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
DS1 MAX 125/125 3P M
DS1 MAX 250/160 3P M
92
92
150
165
110
110
92
90
30
35
129
126
4.5
4.5
+ 7 standard
0 extended
* for industrial usage DS1 MAX 250/200 3P M 107 165 110 90 35 126 4.5
3 years warranty
DS1 MAX 250/250 3P H 107 165 110 90 35 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 400/400 3P H 150 257 146 106 44 194 7
DS1 MAX 630/630 3P H 182 270 155 116 116 200 7
DS1 MAX 800/800 3P H 210 28 155 116 70 243 7
DS1 MAX 125/63 4P M 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/80 4PM 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/100 4P M 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 125/125 4P M 122 150 110 92 60 129 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/160 4P M 142 165 110 90 70 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/200 4P M 142 165 110 90 70 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 250/250 4P H 142 165 110 90 70 126 4.5
DS1 MAX 400/400 4P H 198 257 146 106 44 194 7
DS1 MAX 630/630 4P H 240 270 155 116 116 200 7
DS1 MAX 800/800 4P H 280 280 155 116 70 243 7
Catalogue Catalogue Type Rated current Operating Max. breaking Thermal current Packing/
number number ln (A) breaking capacity capacity (kA) lcu adjustment (A) box (pcs)
3-poles 4-poles (kA) lcs 415V 690V
44163MM 444163MM DS1 MAX-125 63 36 50 20 50.4-63 1/16
44164MM 444164MM DS1 MAX-125 80 36 50 20 64-80 1/16
44165MM 444165MM DS1 MAX-125 100 36 50 20 80-100 1/16
44166MM 444166MM DS1 MAX-125 125 36 50 20 100-125 1/16
44160MM 444160MM DS1 MAX-250 160 36 50 20 128-160 1/6
44200MM 444200MM DS1 MAX-250 200 36 50 20 160-200 1/6
44250MH 444250MH DS1 MAX-250 250 42 65 25 200-250 1/6
44401MH 444401MH DS1 MAX-400 400 50 85 30 320-400 1/3
44630MH 444630MH DS1 MAX-630 630 50 85 30 504-630 1/2
44800MH 444800MH DS1 MAX-800 800 65 100 50 640-800 1/2
ELMARK
GO TO THE
AUTOMATION | MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1st PAGE
HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(MCCB) DS1 MAX TO 800A-ELECTRONIC TYPE

to the product: • High breaking capacity level • Possibilities for electrical module parameters
Standard EN 60947-1 • Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical adjustment through direct modules
EN 60947-2 circuits (combination of keys) thus providing accurate
• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of protection from overload
powerful consumers and short circuit
• Can be used as a main breaker in housing or • simultaneous protection of the three phases
industrial distributing installations • possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for
• Endures high currents of short circuit in the automation
protected circuit • contactor for TT test 15V DC
• Remarkable with high reliability of current
characteristics
• Control: manual
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• Isolating voltage: 2000V cycles): ≥ 20000
• Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V • IP code: IP>20
• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal • Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of
• Connecting: the outer parts: 960°C
¾ Rigid or flexible conductors • Mounting:
¾ Front conductors joining ¾ Joining with bolts
¾ Possibility for mounting to lengthening ¾ Mounting position: vertical
terminal • Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): • Test button
≥ 10000 • Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС
Catalogue Catalogue Type Rated Operating Max. breaking Thermal Packing/

number number current breaking capacity current box
3-poles 4-poles ln (A) capacity (kA) lcu
(kA) lcs 415V 690V
adjustment (pcs)
(A) 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
44940MH 444940MH DS1 MAX-400E 400 50 85 30 200-400 1/3 0 extended
44963MH 444963MH DS1 MAX-630E 630 50 85 30 400-630 1/2 3 years warranty
44980MH 444980MH DS1 MAX-800E 800 65 100 50 630-800 1/2
DS1 MAX - 400E
DS1 MAX - 630E
DS1 MAX - 800E
Tripping characteristic:
Ir1(A) Over-load long time delay tripping current
Ir1 adjustment, according to the different rated current of MCCB.
t1(s) Long time delay tripping time t1 adjustment.
Ir2(XIr1) Short circuit short time delay tripping time Ir2 adjustment.
t2(s) Short time delay tripping time t2 adjustment.
Ir3(XIr1) Short circuit instantaneous tripping current Ir3 adjustment.
Ir0(XIr1) Pre-alarm tripping current Ir0 adjustment.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SHUNT RELEASE (MX)

The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and
switches off the breaker to which it is mounted
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz
• Electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A
• Electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A
• Available joining conductors
MOUNTING
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
CONNECTING
Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
DS1 MAX - ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX

400V 230V
444511M 44452M DS1 MAX 400/3300
44455M 44456M DS1 MAX 630/3300
44459M 44460M DS1 MAX 800/3300
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH

MOUNTED MX
400V 230V
44326M 44327M DS1 MAX 125/63
44331M 44332M DS1 MAX 125/80
44336M 44337M DS1 MAX 125/100
44340M 44341M DS1 MAX 125/125
44333M 44344M DS1 MAX 250/160
44347M 44348M DS1 MAX 250/200
44351M 44352M DS1 MAX 250/250
44355M 44356M DS1 MAX 400/400
44363M 44364M DS1 MAX 630/630
44367M 44368M DS1 MAX 800/800
ELMARK
GO TO THE

1st PAGE
UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (MN)

The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is
mounted at power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain limits
TECHNICAL DATA
• Operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz
• Electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A
• Electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A
• Switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the operating
MOUNTING
MN for DS1 - 125-160
Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
CONNECTING
DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN

400V 230V
44483M 44484M DS1 MAX 400/3300
44487M 44488M DS1 MAX 630/3300
44491M 44492M DS1 MAX 800/3300
MN for DS1 - 250-800
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH

MOUNTED MN
400V 230V
44391M 44392M DS1 MAX 125/63
44395M 44396M DS1 MAX 125/80
44399M 44402M DS1 MAX 125/100
44407M 44408M DS1 MAX 125/125
44411M 44412M DS1 MAX 250/160
44415M 44416M DS1 MAX 250/200
44419M 44420M DS1 MAX 250/250
44423M 44424M DS1 MAX 400/400
44431M 44432M DS1 MAX 630/630
44435M 44436M DS1 MAX 800/800
ELMARK
GO TO THE
Documents corresponding According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups:
to the product: • Internal devices – accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the
Standard EN 60947-1 breakers and fix them in specially designed jacks
EN 60947-2 • External devices – they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker
AUXILIARY CONTACT (OF)

The device changes its condition comfortably to the breaker’s condition; it has a NO and a NC
contactor.
TECHNICAL DATA
• For breakers up to 160A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 3A
• For breakers from 250 to 800A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 6A
• Labeling of the cables
MOUNTING
Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
CONNECTING
DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED OF

44303M DS1 MAX 125/63
7
44304M DS1 MAX 125/80
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 44305M DS1 MAX 125/100
+ 7 standard
0 extended 44306M DS1 MAX 125/125
3 years warranty
44307M DS1 MAX 250/160
44308M DS1 MAX 250/200
44309M DS1 MAX 250/250
44310M DS1 MAX 400/400
44312M DS1 MAX 630/630
44313M DS1 MAX 800/800
ELMARK
GO TO THE

1st PAGE
MCCB WITH AUXILIARY DEVICES MOUNTED (MX+OF) AND (MN+OF)
DS1 MAX - ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF

Catalogue number Catalogue number Type
400V 230V
44485М 44486M DS1 MAX 400/3300
44489M 44490M DS1 MAX 630/3300
44493M 44494M DS1 MAX 800/3300
DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF

400V 230V
44393M 44394M DS1 MAX 125/63
44397M
44405M
44398M
44406M
DS1 MAX 125/80
DS1 MAX 125/100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
44409M 44410M DS1 MAX 125/125 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
44413M 44414M DS1 MAX 250/160
44417M 44418M DS1 MAX 250/200
44421M 44422M DS1 MAX 250/250
44425M 44426M DS1 MAX 400/400
44433M 44434M DS1 MAX 630/630
44437M 44438M DS1 MAX 800/800
ELMARK
GO TO THE
AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUITTYPE

DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC BREAKERS
WITH MOUNTED MX+OF
DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

400V 230V
44453M 44454M DS1 MAX 400/3300
44457M 44458M DS1 MAX 630/3300
44461M 44462M DS1 MAX 800/3300
DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

400V 230V
44328M 44330M DS1 MAX 125/63
44334M 44335M DS1 MAX 125/80
44338M 44339M DS1 MAX 125/100
44342M 44343M DS1 MAX 125/125
44345M 44346M DS1 MAX 250/160
44349M 44350M DS1 MAX 250/200
44353M 44354M DS1 MAX 250/250
44357M 44358M DS1 MAX 400/400
44365M 44366M DS1 MAX 630/630
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
44369M 44370M DS1 MAX 800/800
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB, DS1 MAX (MANUAL)

The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
• Two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C
MOUNTING
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is
mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base
Catalogue Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number A B C D min. D max. Box (pcs)
44966M DS1 MAX 63A 25 50 50 65 115 1
44967M DS1 MAX 125A 25 50 50 65 115 1
44969M DS1 MAX 250A 35 70 70 80 130 1
44970M DS1 MAX 400A 45 107 107 85 105 1
44972M DS1 MAX 630/800A 70 119 119 110 110 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE

1st PAGE
ELECTRICAL REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB DS1 MAX

(ELECTRICAL)
The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
• Two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C
MOUNTING
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is
mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base
Catalogue Catalogue Type of the Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number number breaker L1 B B H H1 Box (pcs)
230V 400V
44917M 44906M DS1 MAX 63A 116 90 50 77 12,5 1
DS1 - 125-160 44912M 44907M DS1 MAX 125A 116 90 50 77 12,5 1
44914M 44909M DS1 MAX 250A 116 90 70 77 15 1
44915M 44910M DS1 MAX 400A 176 130 107 115 27 1
44916M 44911M DS1 MAX 630A 176 130 119 115 31 1
44916M 44911M DS1 MAX 630A 176 130 119 115 31 1
DS1 MAX - 63-250
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
TERMINAL PLATES FOR MCCB - DS1 MAX

Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals
and providing excellent contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different
cross section are available depending on the switch rated power.
MOUNTING
Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base.
Catalogue number Catalogue number Type Rated current (А)

3pcs/set 4pcs/set
31125M - TP 125 MAX 125
31250M - TP 250 MAX 250
31400M 314400M TP 400 MAX 400
31630M 314630M TP 630 MAX 630
31850M 314850M TP 800 MAX 800
ELMARK
GO TO THE
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) DW1 SERIES
Documents corresponding The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low voltage
to the product: electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit protection, built in
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load monitoring
IEC 947-2 FUNCTIONS TECHNICAL DATA
• Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical • Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
circuits. • Isolating voltage: 690V
• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of • Surge voltage wear resistance: 2kV
powerful consumers. • Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts
• Used as a main breaker in housing or to the power supply rail
industrial distributing installations. Connecting:
• Endures high currents of short circuit in the ¾ Copper rails
protected circuit. ¾ busway connection – at the back
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Electrical wear resistance: ≥2000 cycles
characteristics. • Mechanical wear resistance: ≥9000 cycles
• Motor control. • IP code: IP54
• Mounted auxiliary devices for automation - • Mounting:
under voltage release, earth protection, ¾ Clamping with bolts
intelligent controlling block with a possibility ¾ Mounting position: vertical gradient -
for a choice of the protected function. max. 5°
• Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
*A commutation type of breakers with RS • Test button
485 connection for duplex transmission of all • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
function parameters, adjustment and data • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
can also be produced at client’s order and
delivery terms agreement. BASIC PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
• Overload protection with long time delay
• Short circuit protection with short time delay,
time inversion limit.
• Short circuit protection with short time delay,
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
time fixed limit.
• Instantaneous short circuit protection.
• Earth protection function.
+ 5 standard
2 extended
• Full stability function.
3 years warranty • “Overload alarm” function.
• Test function & Auto diagnostics function.
Dimensions (mm)
Type A H W
DW1-2000 FIXED 362 402 373
DW1-3200 FIXED 422 402 363
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 375 432 461
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 435 432 494
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 550 432 494
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 813 452 504
Catalogue number Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity Electrical wear Mechanical Packing/Box
In (A) Un (V) (кА) resistance wear resistance (pcs)
400 V 690 V (number of (number of
cycles) cycles)
44208 DW1-2000 FIXED 1600 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1
44209 DW1-2000 FIXED 2000 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1
44255 DW1-3200 FIXED 2500 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1
44329 DW1-3200 FIXED 3200 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1
44208DO DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 1600 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1
44209DO DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 2000 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1
44255DO DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 2500 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1
44329DO DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 3200 AC400V 100 70 2000 9000 1/1
44436DO DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 3600 AC400V 100 75 2000 9000 1/1
44440DO DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 4000 AC400V 100 75 2000 9000 1/1
44650DO DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 5000 AC400V 120 75 2000 9000 1/1
44663DO DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 6300 AC400V 120 75 2000 9000 1/1
ELMARK
GO TO THE

1st PAGE
DUAL POWER CHANGE-OVER SWITCH EQ1 SERIES (ATS)
Documents corresponding The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power sup-
to the product: ply and two electrical sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set param-
EN 60947-1 eters. It switches only when the three phases of the second power supply source are available. The
EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1 system for dual power change-over switch consists of two molded case circuit breakers mounted
on a metal frame connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command
device that controls the system parameters’ correspondence.
• Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical • Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
circuits at main power supply discrepancy • Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V
• Switching to dual power change-over at • Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts
power supply phase lack to the power supply rail
•With option to connect to fire alarm controller. • Connecting:
In case of fire, the ATS switches off both power ¾ Copper rails
supply sources ¾ Flexible or rigid conductors
• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
powerful consumers ≥2000
• Used as a main breaker in housing or indus- • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
trial distributing installations supplied with a cycles):
generator or a second power supply source ≥6000
(hospitals, post offices, military sites, control • IP code: IP21
rooms) • Mounting:
• Remarkable with high reliability of current ¾ Clamping with bolts
characteristics ¾ Mounting position: vertical gradient,
• Control: motor maximum 5°
• Controls the following circuit parameters: • Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and
¾ Presence of the three phases nonflammable
¾ The phase voltage to be in the set limits • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
overload • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
¾ Short circuit at the outlet
BASIC FUNCTIONS OF THE CONTROL DEVICE

• Overload protection main power supply source after restoring its 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Instantaneous short circuit protection parameters. The system for dual power change- + 5 standard
2 extended
• Under phase protection over switch is offered in two types: * for industrial usage
• Under voltage protection • With display (control device) mounted on the 3 years warranty
• Possibility for setting the change-over time mounting plate (integrated type)
between the two sources – min 3s • With separated control display
• Possibility for automatic switch-over to the

Type A B C D H
EQ1 - 100 405 365 230 250 <170
EQ1 - 225 450 410 230 250 <190
EQ1 - 400 570 510 300 330 <200
EQ1 - 630 680 620 300 330 <250
EQ1 - 800 750 690 300 330 <250
Catalogue Type Rated current Max. breaking Operating Section of the Electrical wear Mechanical wear Packing/
number In (A) capacity breaking power supply resistance resistance (number Box (pcs)
(kA) Icu capacity conductor (number of of cycles)
(кА)Ics (mm²) cycles)
44100 EQ1 - 100 100 50 35 35 2000 6000 1/1
44225 EQ1 - 225 225 50 35 70 2000 6000 1/1
44403 EQ1 - 400 400 100 65 180 2000 6000 1/1
44633 EQ1 - 630 630 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1
44833 EQ1 - 800 800 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1
44101 EQ1 - 100* 100 50 35 35 2000 6000 1/1
44226 EQ1 - 225* 225 50 35 70 2000 6000 1/1
44404 EQ1 - 400* 400 100 65 180 2000 6000 1/1
44634 EQ1 - 630* 630 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1
44834 EQ1 - 800* 800 100 65 240 1000 3000 1/1
Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1
Documents corresponding The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It
to the product: compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The
EN 61008-1 conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1 transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated
at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of
some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is mis-balanced and
the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current
winding, called current leakage. The device breaks when the value of this current exceeds the limit
value of the residual current breaker.
• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits • Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz
at insulation damage of the conductors to the • Rated current: according to the table
consumers. • Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits • Time delay until break: <0.1s at I Δ n and
at presence of a person under voltage. <0.04s at 2I Δ n
• Used to protect not only particular consum- • Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥2000V
ers/ circuits, but also the whole panel. • Short circuit current wear resistance:
• Remarkable with high reliability of current 4500А, 6000А
Type AC for AC current
characteristics. • Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
• Control: manual switching on and made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
automatic switching off at exit failure. • Type of the plastic:
¾ Material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
CONNECTING ¾ Permitivity strength: >18MV/m
• Power supply busbar (only for bipolar) • Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
• Flexible or rigid conductors with correspond- • Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
ing section • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
≥5000
• Mechanical wear resistance (number of
MOUNTING
cycles): ≥10000
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• On DIN-rail
• IP code: IP>20
• Indication for operating (switched on) posi-
+ 7 standard
0 extended tion
* for industrial usage • Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and
3 years warranty The residual current device is mounted in
nonflammable
the distribution box, and after the device the
neutral conductor and the earthing conductor
• Installation altitude: up to 2000m
must not be connected together. In order to
work accurately, the device must have three- or
five-conductor grid with separate protective Dimensions (mm)
conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or W1 W2 H H1 H2 D1 D2
TT with three or five conductors). The corpus
of the consumer depending on the grid type 35 70 81 35 45 50 72
must be connected either to the protective
conductor or be earthed. (Fig.1)
Connecting scheme
Fig. 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1
Residual current devices JЕL 1, 6kA - Type АС - alternating fault currents sensible. Impulse with-
stand voltage 2000VAC
Catalogue number Type Number Breaking Rated Packing/Box

Leakage current I Δ n (mA) of poles capacity (kA) current (pcs)
In (A)
30 100 300 500
40210 40212 40213 40214 JEL 1 2P 6 10.0 1/60
40216 40217 40218 40219 JEL 1 2P 6 16.0 1/60
40292 40293 40294 40295 JEL 1 2P 6 20.0 1/60
40221 40222 40223 40224 JEL 1 2P 6 25.0 1/60
40231 40232 40233 40234 JEL 1 2P 6 32.0 1/60
40241 40242 40243 40244 JEL 1 2P 6 40.0 1/60
40261 40262 40263 40264 JEL 1 2P 6 63.0 1/60
40281 40282 40283 40284 JEL 1 2P 6 80.0 1/60
40291 40296 40297 40298 JEL 1 2P 6 100.0 1/60
Catalogue number Type Number Breaking Rated Packing/Box

Leakage current I Δ n (mA) of poles capacity current (pcs)
(kA) In (A)
30 100 300 500
40410
40416
40412
40417
40413
40418
40414
40419
JEL 1
JEL 1
4P
4P
6
6
10.0
16.0
1/30
1/30
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
40492 40493 40494 40495 JEL 1 4P 6 20.0 1/30 * for industrial usage
40421 40422 40423 40424 JEL 1 4P 6 25.0 1/30 3 years warranty
40431 40432 40433 40434 JEL 1 4P 6 32.0 1/30

40441 40442 40443 40444 JEL 1 4P 6 40.0 1/30
40461 40462 40463 40464 JEL 1 4P 6 63.0 1/30
Type AC for AC current 40481 40482 40483 40484 JEL 1 4P 6 80.0 1/30
40491 40496 40497 40498 JEL 1 4P 6 100.0 1/30
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1A
Documents corresponding These are Residual Current Devices (RCDs) JEL 1A with enhanced sensibility and fast - operating
to the product: protection devices applicable in circuits with harmonic or direct pulsating current component
EN 61008-1 presence.
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1 FUNCTIONS TECHNICAL DATA
• Switching off electrical circuits on load at con- • Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50 Hz
ductor insulation breaking to the consumer • Rated current: according to the table
• Switching off electrical circuits on load at • Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
direct and indirect contact • Time delay until break: <0.1s at I Δ n and
• Switching off electrical circuits on load at <0.04s at 2I Δ n
alternating earth fault currents during conse- • Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000А
quent light impact • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
• Switching off consumers at harmonic ≥5000
presence due to luminescent lights • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• Switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault cycles): ≥10000
currents presence • IP code: IP>20
• Mechanical indicator for ON position
CONNECTING MOUNTING
• Power supply busbar (only for bipolar) • On DIN-rail
• Flexible or rigid conductors with correspond- • Mounting position: vertical
ing section
Residual current devices JЕL 1A, 6kA - Type А - alternating and pulsating direct fault currents
sensible Impulse withstand voltage 2000VAC/ 400VDC
Catalogue number Type Number of Breaking Rated Packing/

Leakage current I Δ n (mA) poles capacity current Box (pcs)
(kA) In (A)
30 100 300 500
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
40510
40516
40512
40517
40513
40518
40514
40519
JEL 1A
JEL 1A
2P
2P
6
6
10.0
16.0
1/60
1/60
+ 7 standard
0 extended 40592 40593 40594 40595 JEL 1A 2P 6 20.0 1/60
3 years warranty 40521 40522 40523 40524 JEL 1A 2P 6 25.0 1/60
40531 40532 40533 40534 JEL 1A 2P 6 32.0 1/60
40541 40542 40543 40544 JEL 1A 2P 6 40.0 1/60
40561 40562 40563 40564 JEL 1A 2P 6 63.0 1/60
Type A for AC/DC current 40581 40582 40583 40584 JEL 1A 2P 6 80.0 1/60
40591 40596 40597 40598 JEL 1A 2P 6 100.0 1/60

(kA) In (A)
30 100 300 500
40610 40612 40613 40614 JEL 1A 4P 6 10.0 1 / 30
40616 40617 40618 40619 JEL 1A 4P 6 16.0 1 / 30
40692 40693 40694 40695 JEL 1A 4P 6 20.0 1 / 30
40621 40622 40623 40624 JEL 1A 4P 6 25.0 1 / 30
40631 40632 40633 40634 JEL 1A 4P 6 32.0 1 / 30
40641 40642 40643 40644 JEL 1A 4P 6 40.0 1 / 30
40661 40662 40663 40664 JEL 1A 4P 6 63.0 1 / 30
Type A for AC/DC current 40681 40682 40683 40684 JEL 1A 4P 6 80.0 1 / 30
40691 40696 40697 40698 JEL 1A 4P 6 100.0 1 / 30
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

EKL6-100B 10KA B Type RCCB
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE (RCD)- JEL7B
Residual Current Circuit Breaker Standard_ IEC61008-1
Documents corresponding DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM IEC62423
to the product: JEL7B Type B RCD has compact structure, good reliability, and high safety. They ensure higher
protection levels with maximum operational continuity under all working conditions. Type B RCDs
Tripping are sensitive to
Lagging Angle AC and steady DC leakage I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A
IEC61008-1
IEC62423 AC, pulsating currents. This type may be required for
Current use in photovoltaic 0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
EKL6-100B 10KA B Type
can resultRCCB
(PV) solar energy installations because the PV panels produce a DC output
Range
and some types 90°
of fault in the leakage 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
of DC currents to earth. Type B RCDs can0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
ensure
maximum safety in135° many applications, such as EV0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
Charging Station, Crane and Elevator, variable
Residual
speedCurrent
drives,Circuit
medical Breaker
equipment, PV and Wind power plants, etc. Standard_ IEC61008-1
IEC62423
TECHNICAL DATA
Alternative Current Sensitive Pulsating direct current sensitive Surge current proof
Tripping Lagging Angle
• Mode: Electromagnetic I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A
• Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1min:
B class
Current
• Type: 0°
B for AC/DC current 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
2.5kV 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
RangeTripping
• Rated is ensured
operating for
90° sinusoidal
voltage AC 50/60 Hz
Ue 2P: 240V 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
• Electrical life: 2 000 cycles 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
residual
• Rated currentsvoltage
operating pulsed
135° DCUeresidual
4P: 415V 50/60 Hz 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
• Mechanical life: 4 000 cycles0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
currents, alternating
• Insulation voltage Ui:residual
500V • IP code: IP>20
sinusoidal
• Circuit currents
breaker ratedupcurrent:
to 1000Hz,
accordingThey
to thereact• to AC and pulsating DC type: RCCB’s surge capacity.
Alternative Current Sensitive Pulsating direct current sensitive
Terminal connection Surge current proof
pulsating direct residual currents and fault current¾which
table Cablereach 0 or almost Not tripping at standardized 8/20 υs
for smooth
B class
• Residual directresponsiveness:
current residual currents, 30mA 0 within one¾time period of the surge-current waves acc.to VDE 0432
Pin-type busbar
whether
• Break timeapplied
Tripping suddenly
is ensured
under IΔn:for or
sinusoidal
≤0.1s AC mains frequency. Part 2 with surge current values of up
increasing slowly.
¾ U-type busbar
residual
• Circuit breaker currents pulsed
tripping DC residual
curve: C tocable:
250A. 35mm2
currents, alternating residual • Terminal size top/bottom for
sinusoidal currents up to 1000Hz,
• Breaking capacity: 10 000A They react to AC and pulsating DC
• Terminal size RCCB’s surge capacity.
top/bottom for busbar: 35mm2
• Short pulsating direct residual
circuit protection currents
device and fuse:
(SCPD) fault current which reach 0 or torque:
• Tightening almost 2.5Nm
Not tripping at standardized 8/20 υs
10 000Afor smooth direct residual currents, 0 within one time period oftemperature:
• Ambient the surge-current waves acc.to VDE 0432
-10°C + 65°C
• Ratedwhether
impulse applied suddenly or
withstand
increasing slowly.
mains frequency.
voltage(1.5/50) • Installation altitude: Part 2 with surge current values of up
up to 2000m
to 250A.
Uimp: 4000V
Circuit Diagram
Type B for AC/DC current
Circuit Diagram Type B (2P) Type B (4P)
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Type B (2P) Type B (4P) + 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
Circuit diagram

35.5
45
83
35.5
45
35.583
35.5
21.3
21.3
54 72 73.1
54 72 73.1
Overall and installation dimensions (mm)
02
02
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
2P ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE (RCD)- JEL7B

Catalogue number Type Number Breaking Rated Packing/
Leakage current I Δ n (mA) of poles capacity current Box (pcs)
(kA) (A)
30
40845B JEL7B 1P+N 10 16 1/90
40846B JEL7B 1P+N 10 25 1/90
40847B JEL7B 1P+N 10 32 1/90
40848B JEL7B 1P+N 10 40 1/90
40849B JEL7B 1P+N 10 63 1/90
40850B JEL7B 1P+N 10 80 1/90
40851B JEL7B 1P+N 10 100 1/90

(kA) (A)
30
40852B JEL7B 3P+N 10 16 1/45
40853B JEL7B 3P+N 10 25 1/45
40854B JEL7B 3P+N 10 32 1/45
40855B JEL7B 3P+N 10 40 1/45
40856B JEL7B 3P+N 10 63 1/45
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 40857B JEL7B 3P+N 10 80 1/45
+ 7 standard
0 extended
40858B JEL7B 3P+N 10 100 1/45
3 years warranty
ELMARK
90° 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
135° 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
GO TO THE
Thermal Tripping Magnetic Tripping
1st PAGE
As per No Tripping Time Hold Trip Time

IEC60898 tripping current Limits current current Limits
B Curve current I2 t I4 I5 t

C Curve
B Curve 1.13×I N ≥1h 3×I N ≥0.1s

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL
Tripping Time CURRENT Trip OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER
D Curve
As per No ＜1hHold Time ＜0.1s

1.45×I 5×I
IEC60898 tripping current Limits current current Limits N
(RCBO)- JEL5A current

B Curve I t I I t 2 4 5
N
C Curve 1.13×I N ≥1h 5×I N ≥0.1s

C Curve
B Curve 1.13×I N ≥1h 3×I N ≥0.1s

＜1h ＜0.1s
D Curve
1.45×I N ＜1h
1.45×I 10×I
＜0.1s
Documents corresponding DESCRIPTION
N
OF THE5×I
OPERATING
N
N
SYSTEM
to the product: RCBO JEL5A is with enhanced sensibility and fast - operating protection devices applicable in cir-
C Curve 1.13×I ≥1h 5×I ≥0.1s
IEC61009-1 N
cuits with harmonic or direct pulsating
N
current component presence RCBO JEL5A is mainly used for
＜1h ＜0.1s
1.45×I
AC 50Hz
N or 60Hz, rated10×I
voltage 230 or below and rated working current 40A or below and
N
5 10 20 30 40 60 80
4 5 4 5 5 X In immediately cut off power supply once someone suffers from electric shock or leakage current
above specified value. It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current
electromagnetic device. It combines the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts
3 5 10 20 30 40 60 80
at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current
1 N
3 4 4 5 4 5 5 X In
device- at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the magnitude of the currents through
the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the
secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such
1 N a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually
neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of a person under
T voltage, the system is mis-balanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual
magnetic field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. When the value
T 2 N of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker the device breaks and the
residual current device switches off from the power supply grid. The device operates without any
2 N
mension(mm)
extra power supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is not influenced by voltage varying
Circuit diagram or decreasing.
Dimension(mm)
• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at • Mode: Electromagnetic
short circuit or overload. • Type: A for AC/DC current
• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits • Rated operating voltage Ue:
at insulation damage of the conductors to the 230/240V 50/60 Hz
consumers. • Insulation voltage Ui: 500V
35.5
8181
45
35.5
• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at • Circuit breaker rated current: according to the
45
presence of a person and animals under voltage. table

• Switching off consumers at harmonic pres- • Residual current responsiveness: 30; 300mA
36 36 50
50
ence due to luminescent lights.
• Switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault
• Break time under IΔn: ≤0.1s
• Circuit breaker tripping curve: C 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
66
66
currents presence. • Energy limiting class: 3 + 7 standard
0 extended
78
78 • Used to protect not only particular consumers/ • Breaking capacity: 6 000A * for industrial usage
circuits, but also the whole panel. • Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.5/50) 3 years warranty
Overall and installation • Remarkable with high reliability of current Uimp:≥4000V

04
04
dimensions (mm) characteristics. • Dielectric test voltage at ind.Freq. for 1min: 2kV
• Control: manual switching on and automatic • Polution degree: 2
switching off at failure in the insulation after the • Thermo-magnetic release characteristic: C
breaker. • Electrical life: 4 000 cycles
• Mechanical life: 10 000 cycles
MOUNTING • IP code: IP>20
• On DIN-rail • Indication for operating (switched on) position
• Mounting position: vertical • Terminal connection type:
The residual current device is mounted in ¾ Cable
the distribution box, and after the device the ¾ Pin-type busbar
neutral conductor and the earthing conductor ¾ U-type busbar
must not be connected together. In order to • Terminal size top/bottom for cable: 25 mm2
work accurately, the device must have three- or • Terminal size top/bottom for busbar: 25 mm2
five-conductor grid with separate operating • Tightening torque: 2.5Nm
neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting • Reference temperature for setting of thermal
conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT element: 30°C
with three or five conductors). • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
Type A for AC/DC current • Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Catalogue number Type Number Breaking Rated Packing /

(kA) (A)
30 300
40006A 40012A JEL5A 1P+N 6 6 1/90
40010A 40013A JEL5A 1P+N 6 10 1/90
40016A 40018A JEL5A 1P+N 6 16 1/90
40020A 40019A JEL5A 1P+N 6 20 1/90
40025A 40023A JEL5A 1P+N 6 25 1/90
40032A 40033A JEL5A 1P+N 6 32 1/90
40040A 40043A JEL5A 1P+N 6 40 1/90
ELMARK
1.45 AC 0.5I△n＜I△＜I△n
Lagging Angle I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A
0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
GO TO THE
A
90° 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
1st PAGE
135° 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
Thermal Tripping 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
Magnetic Tripping
1.13In
1.45In
10000 B Curve current I2 t I4 I5 t

5000
ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT
C Curve OPERATED CIRCUIT
DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPEBREAKER (RCBO)-MX+OF
WITH MOUNTED JEL4A
D Curve B Curve 1.13×I N ≥1h 3×I N ≥0.1s
Thermal Tripping ＜1h
Magnetic Tripping ＜0.1s
1000
1.45×I N 5×I N
500
100
Documents corresponding DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM
1.13×II N
C Curve current ≥1h I 5×I N ≥0.1s
50
t I t
to the product:
B Curve
RCBO JEL4A is with
2 4 5
enhanced sensibility and fast - operating protection devices applicable in
＜1h ＜0.1s
1.45×I≥1h 10×I N
10
C Curve
5 IEC61009-1
D Curve B Curve 1.13×I circuits N 3×I
with harmonic N
or direct≥0.1s
pulsating current component presence.
N
"Phase ＜1h
line + neutral + leakage＜0.1s "protection circuit breaker JEL4A is applied to the single-phase
1.45×I 5×I N
0.5
1
residential circuit of 50Hz or 60Hz, rated voltage 230V, to protect leakage, civil electrical overload
N
and short circuit. The product is provided with many advantages such as small size, high breaking
0.1 C Curve 1.13×I ≥1hcutting
capacity, 5×I ≥0.1s
off zero-line, live
N line at the same time, and leakage protecting in the case of
N
reverse＜1hwiring live line. ＜0.1s

1.45×I 10×I N
2 3 5 10 20 30 40 60 80
1 2 3 4 4 5 4 5 5 X In N
0.01 FUNCTIONS TECHNICAL DATA

0.006
Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at • Mode: Electronic

short circuit or overload. • Type: A for AC/DC current
0.002
0.001
1 N
1
1 2
2
3 4
3 5
4 5
10
4 5
20
5
30 40 60 80
X In • Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits • Rated operating voltage Ue:
at insulation damage of the conductors to the 230/240V 50/60 Hz
m consumers. • Insulation voltage Ui: 500V
• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits • Circuit breaker rated current: according to
T 1 N at presence of a person and animals under the table
voltage. • Residual current responsiveness: 30; 300mA
• Switching off consumers at harmonic pres- • Break time under IΔn: ≤0.1s
T • Circuit breaker tripping curve: C
N
ence due to luminescent lights.
2 • Switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault • Energy limiting class: 3
currents presence. • Breaking capacity: 6 000A
• Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.5/50)
2
Circuit N
diagram • Used to protect not only particular consum-
ion Dimension(mm) ers/circuits, but also the whole panel. Uimp:≥4000V
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Dielectric test voltage at ind.Freq. for
stallation Dimension(mm) characteristics. 1min: 2kV
• Control: manual switching on and automatic • Polution degree: 2
switching off at failure in the insulation after • Electrical life: 4 000 cycles
• Mechanical life: 10 000 cycles
7 YEARS TOTAL
the breaker.
• IP code: IP>20
WARRANTY
MOUNTING • Indication for operating (switched on)
+ 7 standard
0 extended position
35.5
• On DIN-rail
81 81
45

35.5

45
3 years warranty
The residual current device is mounted in ¾ Cable
the distribution box, and after the device the ¾ Pin-type busbar
neutral conductor and the earthing conductor ¾ U-type busbar
must not be connected together. In order to • Terminal size top/bottom for cable: 25mm2
36 50 • Terminal size top/bottom for busbar: 25 mm2
36 50 work accurately, the device must have three- or
66
66
78 five-conductor grid with separate operating • Tightening torque: 2.5Nm
78
neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting • Reference temperature for setting of thermal
Overall and installation conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT element: 30°C
02
dimensions (mm) with three or five conductors). • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
02
• Installation altitude: up to 2000 m
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COMBINED ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE AND
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2P 6KA
(kA) (A)
30 300
40206A 40205A JEL4A 1P+N 6 6 1/90
40211A 40208A JEL4A 1P+N 6 10 1/90
40215A 40235A JEL4A 1P+N 6 16 1/90
40225A 40230A JEL4A 1P+N 6 20 1/90
40240A 40246A JEL4A 1P+N 6 25 1/90
40265A 40236A JEL4A 1P+N 6 32 1/90
40274A 40273A JEL4A 1P+N 6 40 1/90
Type A for AC/DC current
COMBINED ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE AND

CIRCUIT BREAKER 4P 6KA
(kA) (A)
30 300
40470А 40477А JEL4A 3P+N 6 6 1/30
40471А 40478А JEL4A 3P+N 6 10 1/30
40472А
40473А
40479А
40480А
JEL4A
JEL4A
3P+N
3P+N
6
6
16
20
1/30
1/30
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
40474А 40485А JEL4A 3P+N 6 25 1/30 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
40475А 40486А JEL4A 3P+N 6 32 1/30
40476А 40487А JEL4A 3P+N 6 40 1/30
ELMARK
EKL9-40AFD
GO TO THE
RCBO EKL9-40 With Arc Fault Protective 1st PAGE Standard_ IEC61009-1
IEC62606
Characteristics
Tripping Type Tripping current I△/A

RCBOCurrent
WITH ARC FAULT
AC PROTECTIVE, JEL8 0.5I△n＜I△＜I△n
Range Lagging Angle I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A

EKL9-40AFD 0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
A
Documents corresponding RCBO EKL9-40 With Arc FaultOF
DESCRIPTION 90° OPERATING SYSTEM
Protective
THE 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
135° 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
circuit interrupter (AFCI) is0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
to the product: IEC62606
An arc-fault detection device (AFDD) or arc-fault a circuit breaker
IEC61009-1
Characteristics
that breaks the circuit when it detects the electric arcs that are a signature of loose connections
IEC62606 in home wiring. Loose connections, which can develop over time, can sometimes become hot
Tripping enough Type
to ignite house fires dangerous arc (that Tripping
can current
occur,I△/A
for example, in a lamp cord which has
Characteristics Current a broken AC 0.5I△n＜I△＜I△n
conductor). An AFDD selectively distinguishes between a harmless arc (incidental to
Range normal operation of switches,Lagging Angle and brushedI△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A
Curves
plugs, motors), and a potentially dangerous arc (that
1.13In
1.45In
can occur,Afor example, in a lamp 0° cord which has

0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
a broken conductor).0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
90° 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
10000
120
135° 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n

5000
60 FUNCTIONS
30
• Arc Fault Protection.
min
1000
10
• Overload Protection.
Characteristics
500
5
• Short-Circuit Protection.
Curves 1.13In
1.45In
2 100
• Earth-Leakage Protection.
10000
120
1 50 5000
60
TECHNICALBDATA
30
Curve
min
1000
TV[s]
10
• Mode: Electronic • Electrical life: 4 000 cycles
10

500
C Curve
5
5
• Type: A for AC/DC current • Mechanical life: 10 000 cycles
current I • IP code:tIP>20 Magnetic I Tripping I t
2 100
Thermal Tripping 2 4 5
• Rated operating voltage Ue: 240V 50/60 Hz
1 50
As per No
1
• Insulation voltage Ui: 400V • Tripping Time
Indication Hold
for operating Trip Time
(switched on)
B Curve
according1.13×I
B Curve IEC60898 Limits ≥1hcurrent 3×I ≥0.1s
TV[s]
10
tripping current current Limits

0.5 C Curve
N N
• Circuit breaker rated current:
5
to current position
I t I I t
the table • 1.45×I ＜1h
Terminal connection type: 5×I
2
＜0.1s 4 5
N N
1
0.1
• Residual current responsiveness: 30mAB Curve 1.13×I ¾ Cable ≥1h 3×I ≥0.1s
0.5
N N
＜1h ＜0.1s
• Break time under IΔn: ≤0.1s ¾1.45×I
Pin-type busbar 5×I N
C Curve 1.13×I ≥1h 5×I ≥0.1s

0.1 N
0.01 • Circuit breaker tripping curve: C ¾ U-type busbar N N
C Curve 1.13×I • Terminal ≥1h ＜1h 5×I ≥0.1s ＜0.1s

1.45×I
• Energy limiting class: 3 size top/bottom for cable: 16mm2
10×I
0.006
0.01 N N
＜1h ＜0.1s N N
1.45×I 10×I for busbar: 16mm2
0.006
0.002 • Breaking capacity: 6 000A

0.002
• Terminal size top/bottom N N
0.001
1 2 3 5
• Rated
10
impulse
0.001
1
withstand voltage(1.5/50)
20 30 40 60 80 2 3 5 10 20
30 40 60 80
1 2 3 4 4 Uimp:≥4000V
5 4 5 5 1
X In2 3 4 4 5 4 5 5
• Reference temperature for setting of thermal
X In
• Dielectric test voltage at ind.Freq. for 1min: element: 30°C

7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
2kV
+ 7 standard
0 extended Circuit Diagram Overall and Installation Dimension(mm)
Circuit Diagram Overall and Installation Dimension(mm)

3 years warranty
A
SideA SideB
A
SideA SideB
88.5
35
45
83
21.2
27.2
27.2
21.2
88.5
35
45
83
36
B
73
Circuit diagram Overall and installation dimensions

21.2
27.2
27.2
21.2
Catalogue number Type Number Breaking Rated 02

Packing /
of poles capacity current Box (pcs)
36 Leakagecurrent I Δ n (mA)
B
(kA) (A)
30 73
40870 JEL8 1P+N 6 6 1/60

40871 JEL8 1P+N 6 10 1/60
40872 JEL8 1P+N 6 16 1/60
02
40873 JEL8 1P+N 6 20 1/60
40874 JEL8 1P+N 6 25 1/60
40875 JEL8 1P+N 6 32 1/60
40876 JEL8 1P+N 6 40 1/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
EKL9-40 6KA RCBO

1st PAGE

RCCB with Overcurrent Protection Standard_ IEC61009-1
Characteristics
ELECTRONIC TYPE DPN RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER
Tripping Type Tripping current I△/A
(RCBO), JEL9A
Current AC 0.5I△n＜I△＜I△n
Range Lagging Angle I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A

0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
Documents corresponding A DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
SYSTEM
90° 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
to the product: RCBO JEL9A provide135° 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
protection against earth faults, overloads,0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
short circuits and over-voltage
IEC61009-1 in commercial and domestic installation. The RCBO with both disconnected neutral and phase
guarantees its proper actuation against earth leakage faults even when the neutral and phase
are wrongly connected the electronic RCBO incorporate a filtering device preventing the risks of
Characteristics unwanted due to transient voltages and transient currents.
Curves
1.13In
1.45In
10000
FUNCTIONS
EKL9-40 6KA RCBO 60
120
5000
30
• Overload Protection
RCCB with Overcurrent Protection1000 • Short-Circuit Protection Standard_ IEC61009-1
min
10
5
500
• Earth-Leakage Protection
Characteristics 2 100
1 TECHNICAL DATA IEC60898 tripping current Limits current current Limits
Tripping
50
Type Tripping current I△/A
AC
• Mode: Electronic
0.5I△n＜I△＜I△n
current I • t ElectricalI life: 4 000
I t
cycles
Current 2 4 5
B Curve
• Type: A forI△n＞0.01A
Lagging Angle AC/DC current I△n≤0.01A
TV[s]
10
Range • Mechanical life: 10 000 ≥0.1s
cycles
C Curve
5
0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n B0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
Curve 1.13×I ≥1h 3×I
A
90°
• Rated operating
0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
voltage0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
Ue: 240V 50/60 Hz N
• IP＜1hcode: IP>20
N
＜0.1s
135° • Insulation voltage Ui: 500V
0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n 1.45×I 5×I
1
0.5
N
Indication for operating (switched on)N
• Circuit breaker rated current: according to position

the table C Curve 1.13×I ≥1h
Terminal 5×I
connection ≥0.1s
type:
Characteristics
0.1 N N
Curves • Residual current responsiveness: 30mA 1.45×I ¾ ＜1h

Cable 10×I
＜0.1s
1.13In
1.45In
N N
• Break time under IΔn: ≤0.1s

10000
¾ Pin-type busbar
120
5000
60
0.01
30
0.006
• CircuitThermal
breaker
Tripping
trippingMagnetic
curve: C
Tripping
• Terminal size top/bottom for cable: 16 mm2
min
1000
10
• Energy limiting class: 3 Hold Trip Time

500
5
0.002
As per No Tripping Time • Terminal size top/bottom for busbar: 16 mm2
• Breaking capacity: 6 000A
2 100 0.001
1 50 1
1 2
2 3
3 4
5
current
4 5
10
4 5I
20
5t
30 40
I
60 80
I t
X In
• Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.5/50)2 4 5
B Curve
• Reference temperature for setting of

TV[s]
10
C Curve
B Curve 1.13×I ≥1h 3×I ≥0.1s

Uimp:≥4000V 1.45×I ＜1h
5
N N
N5×I
＜0.1s
N
thermal element: 30°C
• Dielectric test voltage at ind.Freq.
1

0.5
0.1
1min:1.13×I
forC Curve 2kV N≥1h
＜1h
5×I ≥0.1s
＜0.1s
N
• Installation altitude: up to 2000 m

1.45×I 10×I
Circuit Diagram Overall and Installation Dimension(mm)

0.01
• Pollution degree: 2 N N
0.006
7
0.002
YEARS TOTAL
0.001
1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 60 80
1 2 3 4 4 5 4 5 5 X In
WARRANTY
A
+ 7 standard
Side A Side B 0 extended
Circuit Diagram Overall and Installation Dimension(mm) 3 years warranty
A
35
45
83
Side A Side B
35
45
83
21.2
21.2
27.2
27.2
18
21.2
21.2
27.2
27.2
B
73
18
B
73
Overall and installation

Circuit diagram dimensions (mm)
02
02
(kA) (A)
30
40500A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 6 1/90
40501A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 10 1/90
40502A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 16 1/90
40503A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 20 1/90
40504A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 25 1/90
40505A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 32 1/90
40506A JEL9A DPN (1P+N) 6 40 1/90
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
COMBINED ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE JEL 3

WITH CIRCUIT BREAKER 2P, 10КА
Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Breaking Rated Leakage Packing/Box
number number poles capacity current (A) current I Δ n (pcs)
curve C curve B (kA) (mA)
40906 40906B JEL 3 C6 1p+N 10 6 30 5/100
40910 40910B JEL 3 C10 1p+N 10 10 30 5/100
40916 40916B JEL 3 C16 1p+N 10 16 30 5/100
40920 40920B JEL 3 C20 1p+N 10 20 30 5/100
40925 40925B JEL 3 C25 1p+N 10 25 30 5/100
40932 40932B JEL 3 C32 1p+N 10 32 30 5/100
40940 40940B JEL 3 C40 1p+N 10 40 30 5/100
COMBINED ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE JEL 3

WITH CIRCUIT BREAKER 2P, 6КА
Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Breaking Rated Leakage Packing/Box
number number poles capacity current (A) current I Δ n (pcs)
curve C curve B (kA) (mA)
40956C 40956B JEL 3 B6 1p+N 6 6 30 5/100
40960C 40960B JEL 3 B10 1p+N 6 10 30 5/100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
40966C
40970C
40966B
40970B
JEL 3 B16
JEL 3 B20
1p+N
1p+N
6
6
16
20
30
30
5/100
5/100
+ 7 standard
0 extended
40975C 40975B JEL 3 B25 1p+N 6 25 30 5/100
3 years warranty
40982C 40982B JEL 3 B32 1p+N 6 32 30 5/100
40990C 40990B JEL 3 B40 1p+N 6 40 30 5/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COMBINED SURGE ARRESTERS
DS1TYPE 1+2
MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF
Combined surge arresters Type 1 + 2 are coordinated in advance.They can manage and prevent
the high energy during a thunderbolt and to assure the better level of security of electricity of the
electrical equipment
Surge arresters Type 1 is used to catch the energy caused by higher electricity compared to the
capacity of direct thunderbolt. The security device has passed a successful test according to the
standards with electric wave 10/350 (class 1 test).
Surge arresters Type 2 is used to catch the energy caused by higher electricity, compared to the
capacity of indirect strike or commutative overvoltage. The security device has passed a successful
test according to the standards with electric wave 8/20 (class 2 test).
Response time: <25 nS
Voltage protection level: 1,5kV
Catalogue Type Max inpluse Max discharge Nominal line Earthing system
number of arrester current Iimp current Imax voltage
(10/350μS) (8/20 μS) Un (V)
64502 SPD-X/1P+N 12.5kA 50kA 230 TT,TN-S
64503 SPD-X/3P 12.5kA 50kA 230/400 TN-C
64504 SPD-X/3P+N 12.5kA 50kA 230/400 TT,TN-S
Three phase protection TN-C system Three phase protection TN-S system
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
Mono-phase protection TT system
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | SURGE ARRESTERS
SURGE ARRESTERS SPD TYPE
Documents corresponding The surge arrester consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions.
to the product: At normal conditions of the system, the surge arrester has infinitely high resistance between the
Standard EN61 643-1 protected conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or sys-
tem failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the grounded circuit. After
reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrester can endure high momentary
overloading.
• protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits • Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating
from overload voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz
• used to protect not only particular consum- • Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge
ers/circuits, but also the whole panel arrester terminals at rated discharge current
• remarkable with high reliability of current running: according to the tables
characteristics • Rated discharge current In – the rated value of
• control: automatic switching off at exit failure discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20μs, which
and recovery after eliminating the danger can be repeatedly led to the ground: according
to the tables
• Full discharge current Imax – the peak value
CONNECTING of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20μs,
Type AC for AC current • flexible or rigid conductors with which the surge arrester can bear once:
corresponding section according to the table
• Constant operating current: up to 800μA for
MOUNTING
1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600μA for 1P + N, 3P + N
• on DIN-rail • Indication for damaged surge arrester
• mounting position: vertical • Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N
• mounting in the distribution box on the front
or right before the breaker according to the Dimensions (mm)
attached schemes C H1 H2 D1 D2
• Breakers plastic material of UV rays and
nonflammable 5 90 45 43.5 58
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
COLOUR CODE for all types 5кА - yellow; white – 10кА; green – 20 кА and red 40кА
3 years warranty
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity,

named B, C or D (from high to low risk level).
THE COMPANY OFFERS THE FOLLOWING MODELS OF ARRESTERS
Model SPD – Bxxxx – for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the begin-
ning of the installation or in the main panel.
Model SPD – Cxxxx – for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the
installation or before the breaker.
Model SPD – Dxxxx – for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consum-
ers in combination with SPD – Bxxxx/SPD – Cxxxx
Catalogue Type of the In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box

number arrester (pcs)
64101 SPD-D5/1p 5 10 275 1.2 17/170
64102 SPD-C10/1p 10 20 275 1.2 17/170
64103 SPD-C20/1p 20 40 275 1.8 17/170
64104 SPD-B40/1p 40 60 275 2 17/170

64201 SPD-D5/1pN 5 10 275 1.2 8 / 80
64202 SPD-C10/1pN 10 20 275 1.2 8 / 80
64203 SPD-C20/1pN 20 40 275 1.8 8 / 80
64204 SPD-B40/1pN 40 60 275 2 8 / 80
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty

64301 SPD-D5/3p 5 10 440 1.2 5 / 50
64302 SPD-C10/3p 10 20 440 1.2 5 / 50
64303 SPD-C20/3p 20 40 440 1.8 5 / 50
64304 SPD-B40/3p 40 60 440 2 5 / 50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

64401 SPD-D5/3pN 5 10 440 1.2 4 / 40
64402 SPD-C10/3pN 10 20 440 1.2 4 / 40
64403 SPD-C20/3pN 20 40 440 1.8 4 / 40
64404 SPD-B40/3pN 40 60 440 2 4 / 40
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COMBINED SURGE ARRESTERS AC – DC
Specially designed surge arresters providing protection of solar and photo - voltaic systems;
designed to protect system against over voltages resulting from indirect light impact. They could
be installed in earthed and non - earthed systems. They break photo - voltaic generator electric
circuit when voltage reaches or over passes limit threshold value, providing photo - voltaic protec-
tion against destroying.
Catalogue Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box
number (pcs)
64105 SPD-DC-D5/1p 5 10 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.2 17 / 170
64106 SPD-DC-C10/1p 10 20 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.5 17 / 170
64107 SPD-DC-C20/1p 20 40 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.8 17 / 170
64108 SPD-DC-B40/1p 30 60 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 2.2 17 / 170
Type AC for AC/DC current
number (pcs)
64205 SPD-DC-D5/1pN 5 10 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.2 8 / 80
64206 SPD-DC-C10/1pN 10 20 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.5 8 / 80
64207 SPD-DC-C20/1pN 20 40 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.8 8 / 80
64208 SPD-DC-B40/1pN 30 60 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 2.2 8 / 80
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
Type AC for AC/DC current 3 years warranty
number (pcs)
64305 SPD-DC-D5/3p 5 10 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.2 5 / 50
64306 SPD-DC-C10/3p 10 20 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.5 5 / 50
64307 SPD-DC-C20/3p 20 40 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.8 5 / 50
64308 SPD-DC-B40/3p 30 60 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 2.2 5 / 50
Type AC for AC/DC current
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
EKU5-T2-40PVSPDTYPET2
Standard_ IEC/EN61643-31
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES T2 DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) SYSTEMS

- - - -
EKU5T240PV2M600S
Documents corresponding Type 2 PV SPD is a DC surge protector specially designed for photovoltaic power supply systems.
to the product: Max continuous operating voltage reach DC1500V. These units must be installed in parallel on the
IEC/EN61643-31 DC networks to be protected and provide common and different modes protection. Its installed
location is recommendedWithRemoteSignaling
at both ends of the DC power supply line (solar panel side and inverter/
converter side), especiallyUc:600:DC600V,1000:DC1000V,1500:DC1500V
if the line routing is external and long. Type 2 SPDs protect against indi-
No.ofModule:2:2Module,3:3Module
rect lightning strikes, which are characterized by 8/20 µs waveforms. An 8/20 µs waveform means
that the strike has an 8 µsSolarPVSystem
rise time and a duration to one-half peak of 20 µs.
I.max:40kA
TECHNICAL DATA ClassificationT2
SPDserieNo.5
¾ 2P 1000V: ≤4kV
CompanyCode
• SPD classification according to IEC/EN61643-
31: T2 ¾ 3P 1500V: ≤5.2kV
• Max. continuous operating a.c.voltage Ucpv: • Operating temperature range (Tu): -40º~80º
¾ 2P: 600 and 1000V • Operating State/Fault Indication: Green/Red
¾ 3P: 1500V • Cross-section area (Min.):Standard_
4 mm2 IEC/EN61643-31
• Nominal discharge current (8/20μs) In: 20kA • Cross-section area (Max.): 35 mm2
SPDTypeReferenceList
• Maximum discharge current (8/20μs) Imax: • Enclosure material: Thermal Plastic UL94-V0
40kA • Ingress Protection: IP20
• Voltage protection level DC+/DV-to PE: Max.ContinuousOperatingDCVoltage
No.ofPoles
¾ 2P 600V: ≤2.6kV 600VDC 1000VDC 1500VDC
2Module EKU5-T2-40PV-2M600 EKU5-T2-40PV-2M1000 -
3Module
Catalogue Number of- In (kA) EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1000
Imax (kA) Ucpv EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1500
Packing/Box
WithRemoteSignaling
Type I.max 40KA PV Solar DC SPD number poles (pcs)
2Module EKU5-T2-40PV-2M600S EKU5-T2-40PV-2M1000S -
64209
3Module
2P -
20 40 600
EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1000S
1/64
EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1500S
EKU5-T2-40PV EKU5-T2-40PV EKU5-T2-40PV EKU5-T2-40PV

64210 2P 20 40 1000 1/64
2P(600VDC)
64309 3P 2P(1000VDC)
20 40 3P(1000VDC)
1500 1/323P(1500VDC)
TechnicalData
SPDclassificationaccordingtoIEC/EN61643-31 T2 T2 T2
Basiccircuitdiagram
Max.continuousoperatinga.c.voltage Ucpv 600VDC 1000VDC 1500VDC
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Norminaldischargecurrent(8/20μs)
Maximumdischargecurrent(8/20µs)

DC+ DC-
In
Imax
2Mods
20kA
40kA
DC+
≤2.6kV
20kA
40kA
DC-
≤4.0kV
20kA
40kA
-
+ 7 standard
VoltageprotectionlevelDC+/DV-toPE Up
3Mods - ≤4.0kV ≤5.2kV
0 extended
3 years warranty Responsetime tA ≤25ns ≤25ns ≤25ns
Operatingtemperaturerange Tu -40℃~80℃
OperatingState/FaultIndication Green/Red
Cross-sectionarea(Min.) 4mm 2
Cross-sectionarea(Max.) 35mm
2
Type I.max 40KA PV Solar DC SPD Formountingon 35mmDinrail

Enclosurematerial ThermalPlasticUL94-V0
DegreeofProtection IP20
No.ofMoudles 2P(2Mods),3P(3Mods)

2P 3P
OverallandInstallationDimension(mm) Circuit diagram
09
68mm
Overall and installation dimensions
10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES T1+T2 DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) SYSTEMS
Documents corresponding T1+T2 three-module photovoltaic surge protective device (SPD) (with three -step DC switching
to the product: device) features visual indication and optional remote contact signaling (floating changeover
IEC/EN61643-31 contact) for use in PV systems.
TECHNICAL DATA
• SPD classification according to IEC/EN61643-31: T1+T2
• Max. continuous operating a.c.voltage Ucpv: 1000 and 1500 VDC
• Impulse Discharge Current Iimp (10/350 μs): 6.25kA
• Total Discharge Current Itotal (10/350 μs): 12.5kA
• Nominal discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA
• Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20µs): 40kA
• Voltage protection level DC+/DV-to PE: ≤5.2kV
• Response time: ≤25ns
• Operating temperature range (Tu): -40º~80º
• Operating State/Fault Indication: Green/Red
• Cross-section area (Min.): 4 mm2
• Cross-section area (Max.): 35 mm2
• Enclosure material: Thermal Plastic UL94-V0
• Ingress Protection: IP20
Circuit diagram
Catalogue Number of In (kA) Imax (kA) Ucpv Packing/Box

number poles (pcs)
64310 3P 20 40 1000 1/32
64311 3P 20 40 1500 1/32
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
3 years warranty
Connection diagram Overall and installation dimensions
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS
THREE POLE (3P) LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK
Documents corresponding LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers
to the product: operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1 are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also
have 1NC operating contactor.
• switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical • Number of poles: 3
circuits at controlling signal to the coil • Operation class: utilization category AC-3
• making of control systems • Rated operating voltage of power contactors:
• used as an operating element in process up to 690V; 50/60Hz
control panels • Composition of the power contact surfaces:
• remarkable with high reliability of current unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
characteristics • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
• reliable separation of power contactors • Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
• secured cover of the movable part of the • Coil material: pure copper type QA-1
contactor • Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360
• Moveable part material: Bakelite
CONNECTING • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operat-
• flexible conductors with or without cable ing range of coil
terminal • Joining terminal: screw terminal
LT1-D • rigid conductors • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
≥1000000
MOUNTING
• on DIN-rail cycles):
• with bolts to the surface ≥10000000
• mounting position: vertical gradient- • Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A;
max. ± 5° 600 for 40-95A
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
nonflammable (self-extinguishing material) • Pole leaking power: up to 10W
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty Type a b Ø A B C
LT1-HK 06~12/LT-1K 34/35 45 4.5 45 50 50
LT-D 09~12 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 82
LT1 D18 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 87
LT1 D25 40 48 4.5 57 80 95
LT1 D32 40 48 4.5 57 80 100
LT1-HK
LT-D 40~65 40 100/110 6.5 77 126 116
LT-D 80~95 40 100/110 6.5 87 126 127
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue number Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Section of Packing/
according to the coil consumption current moment the power Box (pcs)
voltage (V) of coil (VA) in AC-3 (N.m) supply
230V 400V 220V 380V 415V 440V 660V closed open 440V to conductor
230V 400V 690V inrush hold up
23061E 23062E LT 1 - HK 0610 1NO 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 7 60 6A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1/100
23091 23092 LT1 - D0910 1NO 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50
23273 23270 LT1 - D0901 1NC 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50
23121 23122 LT1 - D1210 1NO 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50
23274 23280 LT1 - D1201 1NC 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50
23181 23182 LT1 - D1810 1NO 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50
23275 23286 LT1 - D1801 1NC 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50
23251 23252 LT1 - D2510 1NO 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
23276 23292 LT1 - D2501 1NC 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
23321 23322 LT1 - D3210 1NO 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
23401 23402 LT1 - D4011 1NO+1NC 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20
23501 23502 LT1 - D5011 1NO+1NC 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20
23651 23652 LT1 - D6511 1NO+1NC 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20
23801 23802 LT1 - D8011 1NO+1NC 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15
23951 23952 LT1 - D9511 1NO+1NC 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15
Catalogue number Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Section of Pack./
according to the coil voltage (V) consumption current moment the power Box
of coil (VA) in AC-3 (N.m) supply (pcs)
12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 220V 380V 415V 440V 660V closed open 440V to conductor
23063E 23064E 23065E 23066E 23067E LT 1 - HK 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 7 60 6A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1/100
7
0610 1NO YEARS TOTAL
23093 23094 23095 23096 23097 LT1 - D0910 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 WARRANTY
1NO + 5 standard
2 extended
23271 23272 23277 23278 23279 LT1 - D0901 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
1NC
23123 23124 23125 23126 23127 LT1 - D1210 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50
1NO
23281 23282 23283 23284 23285 LT1 - D1201 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50
1NC
23183 23184 23185 23186 23187 LT1 - D1810 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50
1NO
23287 23288 23289 23290 23291 LT1 - D1801 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50
1NC
23253 23254 23255 23256 23257 LT1 - D2510 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
1NO
23293 23294 23295 23296 23297 LT1 - D2501 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
1NC
23323 23324 23325 23326 23327 LT1 - D3210 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
1NO
23403 23404 23405 23406 23407 LT1 - D4011 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20
1NO+1NC
23503 23504 23505 23506 23507 LT1 - D5011 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20
1NO+1NC
23653 23654 23655 23656 23657 LT1 - D6511 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20
1NO+1NC
23803 23804 23805 23806 23807 LT1 - D8011 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15
1NO+1NC
23953 23954 23955 23956 23957 LT1 - D9511 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15
1NO+1NC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FOUR POLE (4P) LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D
Documents corresponding LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers
to the product: operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1 are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also
have 1NC operating contactor.
• Switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical • Number of poles: 4
circuits at controlling signal to the coil • Operation class: utilization category AC-3
• Making of control systems • Rated operating voltage of power contactors:
• Used as an operating element in process up to 690V; 50/60Hz
control panels • Composition of the power contact surfaces:
• Remarkable with high reliability of current unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
characteristics • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
• Reliable separation of power contactors • Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
• Secured cover of the movable part of the • Coil material: pure copper type QA-1
contactor • Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360
• Movable part material: Bakelite
CONNECTING • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operat-
• Flexible conductors with or without cable ing range of coil
terminal • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Rigid conductors • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
≥1000000
MOUNTING
• On DIN-rail cycles):
• With bolts to the surface ≥10000000
• Mounting position: vertical gradient- • Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A;
max. ± 5° 600 for 40-95A
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
LT1 25A-4P nonflammable (self-extinguishing material) • Pole leaking power: up to 10W
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty Type a b Ø A B C
LT-D 09~12 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 82
LT1 D25 40 48 4.5 57 80 95
LT-D 40~65 40 100/110 6.5 86 126 116/129
LT-D 80~95 40 100/110 6.5 97 126 127/140
LT1 80A-4P
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue number Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Section of Packing/
according to the coil consumption current moment the power Box (pcs)
voltage (V) of coil (VA) in AC-3 (N.m) supply
230V 400V 220V 380V 415V 440V 660V closed open 440V to conductor
234091 234092 LT1 - D0910 1NO 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50
234121 234122 LT1 - D1210 1NO 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50
234251 234252 LT1 - D2510 1NO 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50
234401 234402 LT1 - D4011 1NO+1NC 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20
234501 234502 LT1 - D5011 1NO+1NC 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20
234651 234652 LT1 - D6511 1NO+1NC 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20
234801 234802 LT1 - D8011 1NO+1NC 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15
234951 234952 LT1 - D9511 1NO+1NC 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15
Catalogue number Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Section of Pack./
according to the coil voltage (V) consumption current moment the power Box
of coil (VA) in AC-3 (N.m) supply (pcs)
12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 220V 380V 415V 440V 660V closed open 440V to conductor
234093 234094 234095 234096 234097 LT1 - D0910 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50
7
1NO YEARS TOTAL
234123 234124 234125 234126 234127 LT1 - D1210 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 WARRANTY
1NO + 5 standard
2 extended
234253 234254 234255 234256 234257 LT1 - D2510 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
1NO
234403 234404 234405 234406 234407 LT1 - D4011 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20
1NO+1NC
234503 234504 234505 234506 234507 LT1 - D5011 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20
1NO+1NC
234653 234654 234655 234656 234657 LT1 - D6511 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20
1NO+1NC
234803 234804 234805 234806 234807 LT1 - D8011 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15
1NO+1NC
234953 234954 234955 234956 234957 LT1 - D9511 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15
1NO+1NC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREE POLE LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-F TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF
DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC
Documents corresponding The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers
to the product: operating in normal working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1 environment. They are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 115A to
800A.
• Frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded • Operation class: utilization category AC-3
electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil • Rated operating voltage of power contactors:
• Making of systems for consumers’ control up to 1000V; 50/60Hz
• Used as an operating element in process • Composition of the power contact surfaces:
control panels unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
characteristics • Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type
• Reliable separation of power contactors • Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360
• Secured cover of the movable part of the • Movable part composition: bakelite
contactor • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operat-
ing range of coil
CONNECTING • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Flexible conductors with or without cable • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
terminal ≥10000000
• Rigid conductors • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• rail cycles):
≥10000000
MOUNTING
• Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200
• With bolts to the surface • Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W
• Mounting position: vertical gradient – maxi- • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
mum± 10°C flammable (self-extinguishing material)
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Type A B C
L M Q Q1 P
+ 5 standard
2 extended
LT 1 F150 163.5 170 171 107 150 26 57.5 40
3 years warranty
LT 1 F225 168.5 197 181 113.5 172 21 51.5 48
LT 1 F265 201.5 203 181 141 178 39 66.5 48
LT 1 F400 213 206 219 145 182 43 74 48
LT 1 F630 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80
LT 1 F800 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80
Catalogue number Type Motor rated capacity (kW) Power Rated Tightening Packing/
according to the coil voltage (V) number consumption current moment Box (pcs)
of coil (VA) in AC-3 (N.m)
230V 400V 36V 48V 110V 220V 380V 415V 440V 500V 660V 1000V closed open 440V to
230V 400V 690V up
23111 23112 23115 23116 23117 LT1 - F115 30 55 59 59 59 80 60 45 550 115 A 18 1/4
23151 23152 23155 23156 23157 LT1 - F150 40 75 80 80 90 100 65 45 550 150 A 25 1/4
23861 23862 23865 23866 23867 LT1 - F225 63 110 110 110 129 129 100 55 805 225 A 35 1/2
23261 23262 23265 23266 23267 LT1 - F265 75 132 140 140 160 160 147 10 700 265 A 35 1/2
23751 23752 LT1 - F400 110 200 220 250 257 280 185 18 1000 400 A 50 1/1
23771 23772 LT1 - F630 200 335 375 400 400 450 450 25 1500 630 A 50 1/1
23881 23882 LT1 - F800 250 450 450 450 450 475 450 15 1300 800 A 50 1/1
Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of
eventual coil change.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS WITH DIRECT CURRENT COIL LP1-D
Documents corresponding The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with DC operating of coil for control. The
to the product: power plugs of the contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and con-
Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 sumers operating in normal operating class AC-3 with frequently switching on/ off the consumer
and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers with electrical power
consumption from 9A to 225A.
• Switching on/off alternating current consum- • Rated operating voltage of the coil: from 12V
ers in direct current controlling schemes at DC to 220V DC
controlling signal to the coil • Rated operating voltage of the power circuit:
• Making of systems for consumers’ control up to 690V DC
• Used as an operating element in process • Insulation voltage: 690V
control panels • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operat-
characteristics ing range of coil
• Reliable separation of power contacts • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Secured cover of the movable part of the • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
contactor ≥10000000
CONNECTING cycles):
• Flexible conductors with or without cable ≥10000000
terminal • Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A;
• Rigid conductors 600 for 40-95A
• Pole leaking power: up to 13W
MOUNTING
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
• on DIN-rail flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• with bolts to the surface • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• mounting position: vertical gradient- • Altitude: up to 2000m
max. ± 5°
Type A B C a b 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
LP 1 D0910 47 76 95 34/35 50/60 + 5 standard
2 extended
LP 1 D1210 47 76 95 34/35 50/60 * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
LP 1 D1810 47 76 95 34/35 50
LP 1 D2510 57 86 101 40 50
LP 1 D3210 57 86 101 40 50
LP 1 D4011 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D5011 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D6511 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D9511 87 129 182 40 100
LP 1 F115 163.5 170 171 40 150
LP 1 F150 163.5 170 171 40 150
LP 1 F225 168.5 197 181 48 172
Catalogue number Type Rated Auxiliary Rated capacity Packing/

according to the coil voltage (V DC) current contact of the consumer (kW) Box (pcs)
12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 230V (А) (pcs.) 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
23962 23098 23130 23971 23980 23139 LP 1 D0910 9 1NO 2.20 4.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 1/40
23963 23128 23131 23972 23981 23140 LP 1 D1210 12 1NO 3.00 5.50 5.50 5.50 7.50 1/40
23964 23188 23132 23973 23982 23141 LP 1 D1810 18 1NO 4.00 7.50 7.50 7.50 10.0 1/30
23925 23258 23133 23974 23983 23142 LP 1 D2510 25 1NO 5.50 11.0 11.0 11.0 15.0 1/20
23966 23328 23134 23975 23984 23143 LP 1 D3210 32 1NO 7.50 15.0 15.0 15.0 18.5 1/30
23967 23408 23135 23976 23985 23144 LP 1 D4011 40 1NO+1NC 11.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 30.0 1/10
23968 23508 23136 23977 23986 23145 LP 1 D5011 50 1NO+1NC 15.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 33.0 1/10
23969 23658 23137 23978 23987 23146 LP 1 D6511 65 1NO+1NC 18.5 30.0 30.0 30.0 37.0 1/10
23970 23958 23138 23979 23988 23147 LP 1 D9511 95 1NO+1NC 25.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 1/10
23914 23917 23989 23148 LP 1 F115 115 1NO 30.0 55.0 59.0 59.0 80.0 1/4
23915 23918 23990 23149 LP 1 F150 150 1NO 40.0 75.0 80.0 80.0 100 1/4
23916 23919 23994 23201 LP 1 F225 225 1NO 63.0 110 110 110 129 1/2
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORSDS1

FORMAX-ELECTRONIC
SWITCHING ON TYPE
OF CAPACITOR BANKS
WITH MOUNTED CJ19-43
MX+OF
Documents corresponding The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three
to the product: phase capacitors used for power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx
Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the transitional process of the capacitor’s
switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched on in the
beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group). The contactors are
suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr.
• Switching on/off of capacitor banks for reac- • Operation class: utilization category AC6b
tive power compensation • Rated operating voltage of the controlling
• Making of systems for compensation of the coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz
energy reactive component • Rated operating voltage of the power circuit:
• Lowering of the peak transitional currents at up to 690V AC
switching on/off of the capacitor • Insulation voltage: 690V
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
characteristics • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8
• Reliable separation of power contacts to 1.15 Uc
• Secured part of the contactor against • Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts
consumer contact +1NO operative
• do not allow manual operation • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
CONNECTING ≥300000
• Flexible conductors with or without cable • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
terminal cycles):
• Rigid conductors ≥1000000
• Number of cycles (switching on) per hour:
MOUNTING
up to 600
• On DIN-rail or • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
• With bolts to the surface
7
• Mounting position: vertical gradient-
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
max. ± 5°
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and
+ 5 standard
2 extended nonflammable (self-extinguishing material)
3 years warranty • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C

Type A B C D
CJ19-32 DPK 56 74 130 150
CJ19-40 DPK 75 127 180 150
CJ19-65 DPK 85 127 200 157
CJ19-95 DPK 85 127 200 157
CJ19-115DPK 122 165 230 157
CJ19-150DPK 122 165 230 157
CJ19-170DPK 122 165 230 157
Catalogue Type Rated current Rated capacity Coil voltage Packing/Box

number (А) of the consumer (kVAr) (V) (pcs)
400/440V 690V
23932 CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 230 1/20
23910 CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 400 1/20
23900 CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 230 1/16
23940 CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 400 1/16
23961 CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 230 1/16
23965 CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 400 1/16
23909 CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 230 1/16
23995 CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 400 1/16
23991 CJ19-115 DPK 115 35 40 230 1/4
23992 CJ19-150 DPK 150 40 50 230 1/4
23993 CJ19-170 DPK 170 50 60 230 1/4
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

REVERSE CONTACTORS LT4-DXX
Documents corresponding LT 4-Dxx series contactors is suitable for across- the line starting and reversing of-3 phase squirrel
to the product: cage and slip ring motors. It consist of two magnetic contactors LT1D. The contactor is provided
Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 whit a built-in interlock safety mechanism. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction
motors with shortly rotor. The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A.

• Switching on of electrical motors in one • Operation class: AC 3
direction of rotation and reversing of the • Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil:
rotation direction at outside command 230V AC; 50/60 Hz
• Making of control systems • Rated operating voltage of the power circuit:
• Remarkable with high reliability of current up to 690V AC
characteristics • Insulation voltage: 690V
• Reliable switching on or separation of power • Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
contacts • Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8
• Secured part of the contactors against con- to 1.15 Uc
sumer contact • Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO
• Secured cover of the movable part of the Operative (for contactors over 40A there is also
contactor Additional 1NC contact)
• Impossibility for simultaneous switching on • Joining terminal: screw terminal
of the two contactors from the group due to • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
mechanical locking ≥1 000 000
CONNECTING cycles): ≥10 000 000
• Flexible conductors with or without cable • Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up
terminal to 600
• Rigid conductors • Pole leaking power: up to 13W ≥10000000
• Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A;
MOUNTING
600 for 40-95A
• On DIN-rail or with bolts to the surface • Pole leaking power: up to 13W
• Mounting position: vertical gradient –
max. ± 5°
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * for industrial usage
• Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C 3 years warranty

Type A B C
LT 4 - D1810 100 70 83
LT 4 - D2510 130 80 98
LT 4 - D3210 130 80 105
LT 4 - D4011 167 126 116
LT 4 - D6511 167 126 116
LT 4 - D9511 182 127 127
Catalogue Type Rated Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) Packing/

number current 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V Box (pcs)
(А)
23301 LT 4 D1810 18 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 1 / 20
23302 LT 4 D2510 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 1 / 20
23303 LT 4 D3210 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 1 / 20
23304 LT 4 D4011 40 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 1/8
23305 LT 4 D6511 65 18.5 30 30 30 37 1/8
23306 LT 4 D9511 95 25 45 45 45 45 1/6
Note: The contactors are offered without factory cabling
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS
AUXILIARY CONTACTS
AUXILIARY CONTACTS LT01

Documents corresponding At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for
to the product: mounting on the movable part of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series.
Standard EN 60947-4-1
• Extending the number of the operative • Operation class: AC 3
contactors up to 4 in different • Insulation voltage: 690V
• Combinations: • Joining terminal: screw terminal
¾ Switches on simultaneously with the other • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and
contact system of the contactor nonflammable (self-extinguishing material)
CONNECTING MOUNTING
• Flexible conductors with or without cable • On the movable cover of the contactor
terminal through pinching
• Rigid conductors • Mounting position: vertical gradient -
max. ± 5°
Dimensions (mm)
7 YEARS TOTAL
H W L W1 W2 H2 L1 L2
WARRANTY 32 40 35 26 45 48 6.5 37
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty Catalogue Type For Contactor Number of Rated Section of the
number Series contacts current conductor (mm²)
23002 LT01-DN02 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NC 6A 0,5-1
23011 LT01-DN11 LT1-D & LT1-F NO+NC 6A 0,5-1
23020 LT01-DN20 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NO 6A 0,5-1
23022 LT01-DN22 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NO+2NC 6A 0,5-1
23040 LT01-DN40 LT1-D & LT1-F 4NO 6A 0,5-1
23004 LT01-DN04 LT1-D & LT1-F 4NC 6A 0,5-1
23001 LT01-KN11 LT1-HK NO+NC 6A 0,5-1
23003 LT01-KN22 LT1-HK 2NO+2NC 6A 0,5-1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS

AUXILIARY CONTACTS LT03-DN11
Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the
movable part of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series LT1D till 65A. Variants with two
additional plug points NO and NC are offered.
• Expanding the number of the operational • Environment operational regime: АС 3
plug points • Insulation voltage: 690V
• Switching on simultaneously with the rest of • Double connector: screw connector
the contact system of the contactor • Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning
(self extinguishing material)
CONNECTING MOUNTING
• Flexible conductors with or without cable end • Mounting position- sideward to the
• solid conductors contactor
Dimensions (mm)
W1 W2 H L A
73 48 22 12.5 72
Catalogue Type Rated current Section of the conductor

number (mm²)
23311 LТ03-DN11 6A 0,5-1
TIME DELAY CONTACT BLOCK LT02-DXX

7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used * for industrial usage
3 years warranty
most frequently in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form “star/delta” starters for
electrical motor control, as it provides the necessary time for motor winding.
Dimensions (mm)
W W2 L1 h1 h2 H
33 45 48 22 14 59
Catalogue Type Number of contacts Time delay Delay

number
23901 LТ02-DT0 NO+NC 0.1~3s ON
23902 LТ02-DT2 NO+NC 0.1~30s ON
23903 LТ02-DT4 NO+NC 10~180s ON
239022 LT02-DT22 NO+NC 0.1~30s OFF
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | MODULE CONTACTORS
MODULE CONTACTORS K SERIES
Documents corresponding Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low
to the product: power electrical consumers. They provide connection between the consumers in small overall
Standard EN 61095 dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails.
• switching on of consumers • Operation class: AC 7a
• making of control systems • Rated operating voltage of the controlling
• remarkable with high reliability of current coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz
characteristics • Rated operating voltage of the power circuit:
• reliable switching on or separation of power up to 690V AC
contacts • Insulation voltage: 690V
• Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
CONNECTING • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• flexible conductors with or without cable • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
terminal flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• rigid conductors • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
MOUNTING
• on DIN-rail or
• mounting position: vertical gradient- max.± 5°
Dimensions (mm)
H1 C D1 D2 A E
81 5 31 66 18 9
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY H1
Catalogue
number
Type In Coil
voltage (V)
Contacts Packing/Box
(pcs)
+ 5 standard
2 extended 23008 K20 20A 230V 2NO 1/12/120
3 years warranty
23007 K20 20A 230V NO+NC 1/12/120
23009 K20 20A 230V 2NC 1/12/120
23012 K20 25A 230V NO+NC 1/12/100
23013 K20 25А 230V 2NO 1/12/100
23014 K20 25A 230V 2NC 1/10/100
23015 K20 40A 230V NO+NC 1/6/60
23016 K20 40A 230V 2NO 1/6/60
23017 K20 40A 230V 2NC 1/6/60
23080 K20 100A 230V 2NO 1/4/40
23083 K20 100A 230V 1NO+1NC 1/4/40
23084 K20 100A 230V 2NC 1/4/40
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | MODULE CONTACTORS

MODULE CONTACTORS K SERIES
Dimensions (mm)
C D1 D2 H3 H4 E F
5 66 48 45 20 35 85
Catalogue Type In Coil Contacts Packing/Box

number voltage (V) (pcs)
23410 K40 25A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/6/60
23411 K40 25A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/6/60
23412 K40 25A 230V 4NO 1/6/60
23413 K40 25A 230V 4NC 1/6/60
23422 K40 40A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/4/40
23423 K40 40A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/4/40
23409 K40 40A 230V 4NO 1/4/40
23424 K40 40A 230V 4NC 1/4/40
23425 K40 63A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/4/40
23426 K40 63A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/4/40
23427 K40 63A 230V 4NO 1/4/40
23428 K40 63A 230V 4NC 1/4/40
23480 K40 80A 230V 4NO 1/2/20
23483 K40 80A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/2/20
23484 K40 80A 230V 4NC 1/2/20
23485 K40 80А 230V 3NO+1NC 1/2/20
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
Documents corresponding The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are three pole relays designed for protection of induction
to the product: motors from overload or overheat. They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an oper-
Standard EN 60947-1 ating circuit for motor control is passed through their NC contacts. They have bimetallic releases
EN 60947-4-1 /1 per phase/ through them the motors current flows and indirectly mated. The bimetallic releases
bend subject to the influence of mating and this results in tripping of the relay. The contacts
change switch position. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual
temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness
and prolongs the term of exploitation.
• Switching off alternating current consumers • Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC;
at current overload. 50/60 Hz
• Making of control systems for consumers. • Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC
• Used as a protective operating element in • Insulation voltage: >690V
control panels of induction motors. • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Joining terminal: screw terminal
characteristics. • Temperature compensation: -25 +55
• Tripping category: class 10A
CONNECTING • Electrical wear resistance (number of.
• Flexible or rigid conductors with or without cycles):≥1000000
cable terminal for joining to the consumer. • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• To the contactor through the relay terminals. cycles):≥10000000
• The connecting terminals with the consumer • Indication for protection activating
can be adjusted according to the type of the • Possibility for choice of the protection restor-
contactor. ing (through the blue button)
• Possibility for range adjustment of the
MOUNTING
protection activating
• Mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
frame through a pin. flammable (self-extinguishing material)
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Mounting position: vertical gradient- max. ± 5°
Note: To protect the consumer from short
+ 5 standard
2 extended circuit, before the combination contactor- ther-
3 years warranty mal relay, a suitably measured breaker or safety
device should be mounted.
Dimensions (mm)
Type a b c m x y v z
LT 2 - E13xx 86 55 10.7 108 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - Kxx 81 50 0 98 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E23xx 86 55 9 109 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E33xx 115 76 9.5 124 54 109 70 30
Catalogue For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated Protection Packing/Box

number LT1-D9 to 220V 380V 660V current (A) adjustment (pcs)
LT1-D25 type 230V 400V 690V range
13001 LT2-E1301 - - - 0.16 0.10 - 0.16 1 / 100
13002 LT2-E1302 - - - 0.25 0.16 - 0.25 1 / 100
13003 LT2-E1303 - - - 0.40 0.25 - 0.40 1 / 100
13004 LT2-E1304 - - 0.37 0.63 0.40 - 0.63 1 / 100
13005 LT2-E1305 - - 0.55 1.00 0.63 - 1.00 1 / 100
13006 LT2-E1306 - 0.37 1.10 1.60 1.0 - 1.60 1 / 100
13007 LT2-E1307 0.37 0.75 1.50 2.50 1.6 - 2.50 1 / 100
13008 LT2-E1308 0.75 1.50 3.00 4.00 2.5 - 4.00 1 / 100
13010 LT2-E1310 1.10 2.20 4.00 6.00 4.0 - 6.00 1 / 100
13012 LT2-E1312 2.00 3.70 5.50 8.00 5.5 - 8.00 1 / 100
13014 LT2-E1314 2.20 4.00 7.50 10.0 7.0 - 10.0 1 / 100
LT 2 - E13xx 13016 LT2-E1316 3.70 5.50 11.0 13.0 9.0 - 13.0 1 / 100
13021 LT2-E1321 4.00 7.50 15.0 18.0 12.0 - 18.0 1 / 100
13022 LT2-E1322 5.50 9.00 18.5 25.0 17.0 - 25.0 1 / 100
13053 LT2-E1353 9.00 11.0 18.5 33.0 23.0 - 32.0 1 / 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated Protection Packing/
number LT1-K06 type 220V 380V 660V current (A) adjustment Box (pcs)
230V 400V 690V range
13403 LT2-K0303 - - - 0.30 0.25 - 0.30 1/100
13406 LT2-K0306 - 0.37 1.10 1.20 0.80 - 1.20 1/100
13407 LT2-K0307 0.37 0.75 1.50 1.80 1.20 - 1.80 1/100
13408 LT2-K0308 0.75 1.10 2.20 2.60 1.80 - 2.60 1/100
13411 LT2-K0312 1.10 2.20 4.00 5.50 3.70 - 5.50 1/100
13412 LT2-K0314 2.20 4.00 5.50 8.00 5.50 - 8.00 1/100
13413 LT2-K0316 3.00 5.00 7.50 11.5 8.00 - 11.5 1/100
LT 2 - Kxx

number LT1-D32 type 220V 380V 660V current (A) adjustment (pcs)
13253 LT2-E2353 11 11 18.5 32 23.0 - 32.0 1 / 100
13255 LT2-E2355 15 15 22.0 36 28.0 - 36.0 1 / 100
LT 2 - E23xx

number LT1-D40 to 220V 380V 660V current (A) adjustment (pcs)
LT1-D95 type 230V 400V 690V range
7
13355 LT2-E3355 18.5 18.5 30 40 30.0 - 40.0 1 / 50 YEARS TOTAL
13357 LT2-E3357 22 22 30 50 37.0 - 50.0 1 / 50 WARRANTY
13359 LT2-E3359 30 30 37 65 48.0 - 65.0 1 / 50 + 5 standard

2 extended
13363 LT2-E3363 45 45 55 80 63.0 - 80.0 1 / 50 3 years warranty
13365 LT2-E3365 55 55 75 93 80.0 - 93.0 1 / 50
LT 2 - E33xx Catalogue For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated Protection Packing/Box
number LT1-F115 to 220V 380V 660V current (A) adjustment (pcs)
LT1-F150 230V 400V 690V range
13367 LT2-F4367 40 75 100 150 90-150 1/30

number LT1-F225 to 220V 380V 660V current (A) adjustment (pcs)
LT1-F400 230V 400V 690V range
13368 LT2-F4368 63 110 129 220 132-220 1/30
13369 LT2-F4369 100 160 220 330 200-330 1/18
13370 LT2-F4370 147 250 335 500 300-500 1/18
For contactor LT1-F630
13371 LT2-F4371 200 335 450 630 380-630 1/18
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | THERMO MAGNETIC BREAKERS
THERMO MAGNETIC AUTOMATIC BREAKERS TM2/TM3

The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control
and protection of induction motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload
motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker thermal elements, and the short
circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements allow
Auxiliary UVR the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal
contact protection. The overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient
temperature changes. In combination with under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM
2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from the power supply. The
choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and
guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of
exploitation.

• Switching off alternating current consumers • Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC;
at current overload 50/60 Hz
• Switching off the electrical circuit to the con- • Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to
sumer at inlet short circuit 80A according to the type in table 1
• Protects the motor at lack/lowering of the • Insulation voltage: 690V
phase voltage (if there is under voltage release) • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
• Used as a protective operating element in • Joining terminal: screw terminal
control panels of induction motors • Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
Dimensions • Remarkable with high reliability of current ≥1000000
characteristics • Mechanical wear resistance (number of
• Possibility for change/choice of the protection cycles):
current (according to the operating current of ≥10000000
the motor) • Indication for protection activating
• Automatic compensation of the ambient • Switching on of the breaker manually with
temperature button “I” and switching off with button “O”
manually or automatically at failure or after
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY CONNECTING
activating of the protection
• Possibility for range adjustment of the protec-
+ 5 standard
2 extended • Flexible or rigid conductors with or without tion activating
* for industrial usage cable terminal for joining to the consumer • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
3 years warranty
• To the contactor through the relay terminals • Possibility for independent operation or as an
element of an automation system
• The connecting terminals with the consumer • Tripping category: class 10A
can be adjusted according to the type of the • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
contactor flammable (self-extinguishing material)
MOUNTING • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• Mounting to DIN-rail
• Mounting position: vertical gradient- max.± 5°
Dimensions (mm)
H l1 l2 d D w1 w2 h1 h2
89 16 50 10 9.2 44.5 18 22 45
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue Type Rated capacity of three-phase motor Instantaneous Current Thermal Packing/
number in AC-3 category short-circuit setting current Box (pcs)
220V 400V 440V 500V 690V release (A) range (A) Ithe
230V 410V TM2-E
(A)
48001 TM2-E01 - - - - - 1.5 0.1 - 0.16 0.16 1 / 50
48002 TM2-E02 - 0.06 0.06 - - 2.4 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 1 / 50
48003 TM2-E03 0.06 0.09 0.09 - - 5.0 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 1 / 50
48004 TM2-E04 - 0.12 0.18 - 0.37 8.0 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 1 / 50
48005 TM2-E05 0.09 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 13.0 0.63 - 1.00 1 1 / 50
48006 TM2-E06 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 22.5 1 - 1.60 1.6 1 / 50
48007 TM2-E07 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.10 1.50 33.5 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 1 / 50
48008 TM2-E08 0.55 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 51.0 2.5 - 4.00 4 1 / 50
48010 TM2-E10 1.10 2.20 2.20 3.00 4.00 78.0 4 - 6.30 6.3 1 / 50
48014 TM2-E14 1.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 138 6 - 10.0 9 1 / 50
48016 TM2-E16 2.20 5.50 5.50 7.50 9.00 170 9 - 14.0 13 1 / 50
48020 TM2-E20 4.00 7.50 7.50 9.00 15.0 223 13 - 18.0 17 1 / 50
48021 TM2-E21 5.50 9.00 11.0 11.0 18.5 327 17 - 23.0 21 1 / 50
48022 TM2-E22 5.50 11.0 11.0 15.0 22.0 327 20 - 25.0 23 1 / 50
48032 TM2-E32 7.50 15.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 416 24 - 32.0 24 1 / 50
48040 TM3-E40 11.0 18.5 22.0 25.0 33.0 480 25 - 40.0 32 1 / 15
48063 TM3-E63 15.0 30.0 33.0 40.0 55.0 550 40 - 63.0 50 1 / 15
48080 TM3-E80 22.0 40.0 45.0 55.0 63.0 665.5 56 - 80.0 64 1 / 15
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2
ACCESSORIES FOR TM2
Documents corresponding VOLTAGE RELEASE (VR) FOR TM2

to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1 For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can
EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 be supplied with auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the
technical characteristics of the breakers. The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic
breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow
switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un.
FUNCTIONS
• Switching off the breaker at power supply • Protects the motor at lack/lowering of the
voltage fall under 0.55 – 0.7 Un phase voltage
• does not allow switching on of the breaker • Used as a protective operating element in
when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un control panels of induction motors
• Prevents unwarranted secondary start of the • Remarkable with high reliability of current
breaker at falling off and restoring of the power characteristics
supply voltage
MOUNTING
• Laterally to a breaker
• At the side of the breaker through special
openings
Catalogue Type Voltage (V)

number
48099 ТМ2 АU225 230
48098 ТМ3 АU385 400
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
Documents corresponding WATERTIGHT BOX FOR TM2-E

to the product:
Standard EN 60529 Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and
EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 moisture to IP 65. Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of up to 32A
MOUNTING Plastic wear resistance of UV rays and non
• Mounting position: vertical gradient, flammable (self-extinguishing material)
maximum± 5°
• Mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with
bolts
• The breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on
rail material
Catalogue Type
number
8083 ТМ2 Е
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TM2 AE11- FRONT MOUNTING
It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC
contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched
on/ off ) to which it is mounted.
TECHNICAL DATA MOUNTING
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non- • Laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
flammable (self-extinguishing material)
Catalogue Type
number
48912 ТМ2 АE11
21 22
13 14
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TM2 AE11- SIDE MOUNTING

It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC
contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched
on/ off ) to which it is mounted.
• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non- • Laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
flammable (self-extinguishing material)
• Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Altitude: up to 2000m + 5 standard
2 extended
Catalogue Type 3 years warranty
number
48911 ТМ2 АN11
48913 ТМ3 АN11
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
STARTERS FOR DIRECT STARTDS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

AUTOMATION | STARTERS
Documents corresponding The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control
to the product: and protection of induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of
Standard EN 60947-1 contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx factory cabled. The starters are offered
EN 60947-4-1 on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture.
At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through
breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at client’s order the factory mounted thermal protection
in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s
operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation,
increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
• Switching on/off alternating current consum- • Rated voltage of the controlling voltage:
ers 230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz
• Does not allow secondary unwarranted • Rated operating voltage: 690V
switching on of the starter at transitory lower- • Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93
ing of the voltage A AC
• Protects the motor from overload in the range • insulation voltage: 690V
of the corresponding thermal protection • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Joining terminal: screw terminal
characteristics • Little power consumption and small dimen-
With thermal overload relays sions
CONNECTING • Possibility for range adjustment of the protec-
• Flexible or rigid conductors with or without tion activating
cable terminal for joining to the consumer and • IP code: IP 44
section according to the motor power • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
• Two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orific- • Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-
es for the cables flammable (self-extinguishing material)
MOUNTING • Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/
screws
+ 5 standard
2 extended • Mounting position: vertical gradient, max.± 5° Note: In case you need different controlling
* for industrial usage coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our
3 years warranty
regional representatives.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Catalogue Type Rated capacity of motors Rated Thermal Coil Packing/

number 50/60Hz AC-3 category current relay voltage Box (pcs)
220V 380V 415V (A) adjustment (V)
43091 LT5 D093 2.2 4.0 4.0 9 7 .. 10A 230 1/16
43092 LT5 D093 2.2 4.0 4.0 9 7 .. 10A 400 1/16
43121 LT5 D123 3.0 5.5 5.5 12 9 .. 13A 230 1/16
43122 LT5 D123 3.0 5.5 5.5 12 9 .. 13A 400 1/16
43181 LT5 D185 4.0 7.5 9.0 18 12 .. 18A 230 1/16
43182 LT5 D185 4.0 7.5 9.0 18 12 .. 18A 400 1/16
2 x PE13 2 x 5.5
Note: Upon request the thermal relay will be replaced

150
166
2 x PE13
120
88
140

number 50/60Hz AC-3 category current relay voltage (V) Box (pcs)
220V 380V 415V (A) adjustment
43251 LT5 D255 5.5 11 11 25 17 .. 25A 230 1/16
43252 LT5 D255 5.5 11 11 25 17 .. 25A 400 1/16
43321 LT5 D325 7.5 15 15 32 23 .. 32A 230 1/16
43322 LT5 D325 7.5 15 15 32 23 .. 32A 400 1/16
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
2 x 5.5 PE13 + 5 standard
2 extended
3 years warranty
16
185
165
2 x PE16
101
135
142

number 50/60Hz AC-3 category current relay voltage (V) Box (pcs)
220V 380V 415V (A) adjustment
43401 LT5 D405 11.0 18.5 22 40 30 .. 40A 230 1/6
43402 LT5 D405 11.0 18.5 22 40 30 .. 40A 400 1/6
43651 LT5 D655 18.5 30.0 37 65 48 .. 65A 230 1/6
43652 LT5 D655 18.5 30.0 37 65 48 .. 65A 400 1/6
43951 LT5 D955 25.0 45.0 45 95 80 .. 93A 230 1/6
43952 LT5 D955 25.0 45.0 45 95 80 .. 93A 400 1/6
4 x 7.7
195
312
2 x PE29
105
181
PE13
150
161
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
”STAR/DELTA” STARTER DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

Documents corresponding The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control
to the product: and protection of induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme “star/delta”.
Standard EN 60947-1 They are a combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons “start”
EN 60947-4-1 and “stop” factory cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding giving possibility for setting
the time for unwinding in “star” as the time for switching between “star” and “delta” is fixed to 0.5
seconds. The starters are offered on the market in two types:
• closed type – metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54)
as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through
breakers or disconnectors
• open type – for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided
protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors.
The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased
separately according to the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s
operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation,
increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at client’s order the
power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
• switching on/off alternating current three • Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V
phase motors operating according to a scheme AC; 50/60 Hz
“star - delta” • Rated operating voltage: 690V
• does not allow secondary unwarranted • Rated operating current range: from 7 to
switching on of the starter at transitory lower- 93A AC
ing of the voltage • insulation voltage: >690V
• protects the motor from overload in the range • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
of the corresponding thermal protection • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• indication of the operating condition through • Little power consumption and small dimen-
a valve indicator sions
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• possibility for mounting of additional contacts
(for the open type)
• remarkable with high reliability of current
• Possibility for operation at higher frequency
• IP code: IP54
• The metal body is covered with corrosion-
+ 5 standard
2 extended
characteristics proof paint
3 years warranty
CONNECTING • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
• flexible or rigid conductors with or without
cable terminal for joining to the consumer and MOUNTING
section according to the motor power
• mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/
• three by three inlets/outlets supplied with
orifices for the cables screws
• mounting position: vertical gradient, max.± 5°
Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional
representatives.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
”STAR/DELTA” STARTER WITHOUT BOX

Type designation (without box) height width depth
LТ3-D25А 135 170 160
LТ3-D32А 135 170 160
LТ3-D40А 150 285 190
LТ3-D65А 150 285 190
LТ3-D95А 150 310 190
Catalogue Type designation Rated capacity (kW) Rated Coil Packing/

number (without a box) 220V 380V 415V 440V current voltage Box (pcs)
230V 400V (A) (V AC)
43253 LТ3-D25А 11 15 15 15 25 400 1/6
43323 LТ3-D32А 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 32 400 1/6
43403 LТ3-D40А 18.5 22 22 22 40 400 1/4
43653 LТ3-D65А 30 55 55 55 65 400 1/4
43953 LТ3-D95А 37 75 75 75 95 400 1/4
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled
motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard
operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.
”STAR/DELTA” STARTER WITH BOX

7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
Overall dimensions (mm) 3 years warranty
Type designation (with box) height width depth

LT 3 -B-D25A 370 240 160
Catalogue Type designation Rated capacity (kW) Rated Coil Packing/

number (with box) 220V 380V 415V 440V current voltage Box (pcs)
230V 400V (A) (V AC)
43254 LT 3 - B - D25А 11 15 15 15 25 400 1/4
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled
motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard
operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
REVERSE STARTER DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF

Documents corresponding The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and
to the product: protection of induction motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two
Standard EN 60947-1 contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons “start” and one “stop” factory cabled. They
EN 60947-4-1 provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for pushing the
button “stop” and giving command from the other “start” for changing the motor winding
direction. The two contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start
in both winding directions. The starters are offered – closed type in metal boxes providing the
corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54) as at mounting there should be provided
protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. The starters are
offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power.
The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions
and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term
of exploitation. If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter
can be changed.
• Switching on alternating current three phase • Rated voltage of the controlling voltage:
motors in one winding direction, switching off 400V AC;
and change of the winding direction at giving 50/60 Hz• Rated operating voltage: 690V
a signal • Rated operating voltage: 690V
• Does not allow secondary unwarranted • Rated operating current range:
switching on of the starter at transitory lower- from 7 to 93 A AC
ing of the voltage • Insulation voltage: 690V
• Protects the motor from overload in the range • Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
of the corresponding thermal protection • Joining terminal: screw terminal
• Remarkable with high reliability of current • Little power consumption and small dimen-
characteristics through a valve indicator sions
• Possibility for mounting of additional contacts • Possibility for operation at higher frequency
7
(for the open type) • IP 44
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY • Remarkable with high reliability of current • The metal body is covered with corrosion-
characteristics proof paint
+ 5 standard
2 extended
* for industrial usage CONNECTING • Ambient temperature: -10°C + 65°C
3 years warranty • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Flexible or rigid conductors with or without
cable terminal for joining to the consumer and
section according to the motor power MOUNTING
• Three by three inlets/outlets supplied with • Mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/
orifices for the cables screws
scheme “Reverse” • Mounting position: vertical gradient, max.± 5°
Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional
representatives.
Catalogue Type Rated capacity (kW) Overall dimensions Rated Coil Packing/
number designation (mm) current voltage Box (pcs)
(with a box) 220V 380V 415V 440V height width depth (A) (V AC)
230V 400V
43001 LT 4 - B - D25А 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 240 240 160 25 400 1/8
43003 LT 4 - B - D40А 18.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 270 265 160 40 400 1/2
43005 LT 4 - B - D95А 37.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 270 265 160 95 400 1/4
43006 LT 4 - B - D25А 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 240 240 160 25 230 1/4
43007 LT 4 - B - D32А 15.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 240 240 160 32 230 1/4
43008 LT 4 - B - D40А 18.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 270 265 160 40 230 1/4
with thermal overload relays 43009 LT 4 - B - D65А 30.0 55.0 55.0 55.0 270 265 160 65 230 1/4
43010 LT 4 - B - D95А 37.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 270 265 160 95 230 1/4
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | FREQUENCY INVERTERS

ELM 2000+ FREQUENCY INVERTERS
Documents corresponding High-tech motor control concept, based on advanced DSP-technology - ready for V/Hz,
to the product: SENSORLESS VECTOR, CLV and PMM motor control - intelligent AUTOTUNING functions for easy
Standard EN61800-3 setup.
EN61800-5-1 Flexible inverter control, dual high resolution analogue inputs, free mappable digital I/O channels.
Ready for all commonly used fieldbus systems.
Universal function-set for all kind of industrial and residential applications, including integrated
PID/pump controller routines.
Smart PC-tools, for inverter control, parametrization and troubleshooting. Parameter-duplication
stick.
Brake chopper integrated.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power range: • I/O Channels and control functions:
¾ 0,4……400 kW ¾ Inverter control- Via terminals / Keypad /
• Power input: Serial link (or combination of all)

¾ Digital inputs- 6 (8) Dig. inputs
¾ Rated input voltage- 1-Phase
220V~240V~±15%); 3-Phase 380V-460V (+/- (NPN-PNPselectable) pulstrain-input
¾ Speed reference input- Potentiometer
)15%
¾ Input frequency- 44….67 Hz
(on keypad unit, external), analogue signal
(terminals),
• Motor output: ¾ keypad, internal programmable value,
¾ Output frequency- 0-650 Hz
pulsetrain, serial link
¾ Frequency resolution- 0,01 Hz
¾ Analogue channels- analogue channels -
¾ Overload capability- 150% - 60 sec. / 10
12 BIT: 0…10V, 0...5V, -10V...0...10V, 0..(4)20 mA,
min ¾ all free scalable in gain and offset, and-
• Control mode: mathematically concatenable
¾ Motor control algorithm- V/Hz-SpaceVec- ¾ Analogue outputs- 2 analogue outputs,
tor, SLVSENSORLESS VECTOR,Torque/Speed programmable in gain and function (0…10V,
control 0(4)..20 mA)
¾ mode CLV-Closed loop vector,Permanent ¾ Digital outputs- 2 digital outputs (free
Magnet Synchronous Motor
¾ Chopper frequency- 0.8…16 kHz (fixed /
mapping to different functions)
¾ Relais output- 1 switchover contact 3A 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
random) 250VAC/30VDC (programmable assignment) + 3 standard
2 extended
¾ V/Hz curve- Linear, exponential, and user- ¾ Data link- Serial link RS 485 (MODBUS)
programmable curve ¾ Special functions- 24V / 50 mA auxiliary
¾ Starting torque- 150% rated torque at 0,5 power supply on terminals, 10V potentiometer
Hz (in SLV Mode) power
¾ Torque compensation- Automatic / Manual ¾ supply, 5V/100 mA power supply on
¾ Motor data input- Manual, from nameplate modbus connector Simple PTC / KLIXON motor
/ AUTOTUNING protection
¾ Control range- 1:100 in SLV mode,1:1000 in
• Protection:
CLV mode,1:20 in PMSM mode ¾ Electrical- Overvoltage, undervoltage
¾ Speed precision +/- 0,5% (SLV),+/- 0.02%
¾ Overcurrent, overload, motor-overload,
(CLV) output short-circuit
¾ Torque precision +/- 5% (SLV)
¾ Thermal- Heatsink overtemperature, I²xt
¾ DC-Brake- User programmable functions
motorprotection
¾ Brake chopper- Chopper transistor inte-
grated (up to 90 kW) • Operating conditions:
¾ Protection class IP20
• Display:
¾ Working temperature -10+50 °C
¾ 7 segment, 4 characters
¾ Humidity- 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing,
¾ Config-Parameters and -value, program-
mable to display various working parameters noncorrosive
¾ Altitude- 1000 m, above 1% derating /
100m
¾ Vibration- Max. 0,5 g
Type of sign
ELМ2000+ 0015 T3
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter model
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FREQUENCY INVERTERS ELM 2000

Catalogue Type Input Maximum Maximum Dimensions Weights
number voltage (V) output current WxDxH (kg)
power (kW) output (А) (mm)
423400P E2000-0004 S2B 230 0.4 2.5A 80x140x135 1.40
423401P E2000-0007 S2B 230 0.7 4.5A 80x140x135 1.50
423402P E2000-0015 S2B 230 1.5 7A 106x180x150 2.00
423403P E2000-0022 S2B 230 2.2 10A 106x180x150 2.10
423404P E2000-0007 T3 400 0.7 2A 106x180x150 2.00
423405P E2000-0015 T3 400 1.5 4.6A 106x180x150 2.10
423406P E2000-0022 T3 400 2.2 6.5A 106x180x170 2.20
423407P E2000-0030 T3 400 3.0 7A 138x235x152 2.50
423408P E2000-0040 T3 400 4.0 9A 138x235x152 3.00
423409P E2000-0055 T3 400 5.5 12A 156x265x170 3.50
423410P E2000-0075 T3 400 7.5 17A 156x265x170 4.50
423411P E2000-0110 T3 400 11.0 23A 205x340x196 4.80
423412P E2000-0150 T3 400 15.0 32A 205x340x196 8.00
423413P E2000-0185 T3 400 18.5 38A 205x340x196 8.50
423414P E2000-0220 T3 400 22.0 44A 270x435x235 9.00
423415P E2000-0300 T3 400 30.0 60A 315x480x235 22.50
423416P E2000-0370 T3 400 37.0 75A 315x480x235 24.00
423417P E2000-0450 T3 400 45.0 90A 360x555x265 24.50
423418P E2000-0550 T3 400 55.0 110A 360x555x265 41.50
423419P E2000-0750 T3 400 75.0 150A 410x650x300 42.00
423420P E2000-0900 T3 400 90.0 180A 410x650x300 56.00
423421P E2000-1100 T3 400 110.0 220A 516x765x326 56.50
5
423422P E2000-1320 T3 400 132.0 265A 560x910x342 87.00
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 423423P E2000-1600 T3 400 160.0 320A 560x910x342 123.00
+ 3 standard
2 extended 423424P E2000-1800 T3 400 180.0 360A 400x1310x385 124.00
423425P E2000-2000 T3 400 200.0 400A 535x1340x380 125.00
423426P E2000-2200 T3 400 220.0 440A 535x1340x380 185.00
423427P E2000-2500 T3 400 250.0 480A 600x1465x380 186.00
423428P E2000-2800 T3 400 280.0 530A 600x1465x380 225.00
423429P E2000-3150 T3 400 315.0 580A 600x1465x380 230.00
423430P E2000-3550 T3 400 355.0 640A 600x1600x388 233.00
423431P E2000-4000 T3 400 400.0 690A 600x1600x388 234.00
ACCESSORIES FOR FREQUENCY INVERTERS ELM2000 & ELM600
LCD REMOTE FRAME SIZE CABLE FOR REMOTE KEYPAD PARAMETER

KEYPAD FOR CABINET IP66 IP66 - 1.5meter COPY STICK
423432P 423433P 423434P
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FREQUENCY INVERTERS ELM 600, SERIES
FEATURES
• Best performance/cost ratio, without compromise in reliability and quality.
• Compact design, easy to integrate in your environment: DIN rail mounting, contactor-style I/O.
• Easy to setup: Simple set of optimized parameters for all basic functions and applications.
• PID and HVAC functions - safety integrated - MODBUS - open for networking.
• Internal EMC filter as standard.
• Economical mass production on high automated and dedicated SMT lines.
• General purpose drive - made for the worldwide market.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power range: • Reference analogue channels: 1 Analogue
¾ Single phase: from 0.75 to 2.2kW channels 0-10V, (0)4-20 mA
¾ Three phase: from 1.5 to 5.5kW • Analogue outputs: 1 analogue output chan-
• Rated voltage: nel programmable in gain, different functions
¾ Single phase: 200…240V +/- 15% to assign (0-10V)
¾ Three phase: 3-phase 380…460V +/- 15% • Digitale outputs: 1 digital output (OC, differ-
• Input frequency: 47 - 57Hz ent functions to assign)
• EMC filter: Integrated (for 2.environment) • Relays output: 1 switchover contact 3 A 230 V
• Output voltage: 0 - V input (programmable for different functions)
• Output frequency: 0.5 - 650Hz • Interface: Serial link (MODBUS – ASCI/RTU)
• Resolution of output frequency: 0.01 Hz • Special function - control options: Jog
• Overload capability: 150% - 60 sec. / 10 Min mode, 12V / 50 mA auxiliary power supply on
• PWM control-modes: V/Hz - Mode terminals PI-control Fixed frequency control,
• PWM frequency: 0.8 - 6kHz programmable cycling frequency sequence
• V/Hz characteristic: Linear, quadratic, and AUTORESET/RESTART function
user-programmable curve • Electrical protection functions: Overvoltage,
• Starting torque: 100% rated torque at 1 Hz Undervoltage Overcurrent, Overload, Mo-
• DC-Brake: Freq. threshold, duration and tor-Overload, Output-short Analogue reference
intensity programmable – DC injection interruption
• Brake chopper: Integrated chopper transistor • Thermal protection functions: Heatsink
• LED display: 7 Segment, 4- digit for program- overtemperature
ming and visualization of different operating • IP code: IP21
parameters • Operating temperature: from -10 to +40°C
• Inverter control - Start/Stop: To configure:
terminals / operation panel / serial link
• Digital control inputs: 4 digital inputs (HIGH/
• Humidity: Max. 90 % not condensing, no
corrosion 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Elavation: 1000 m - 1% derating / 100m above + 3 standard
2 extended
LOW configurable)
• Speed reference signal: Potentiometer,
analogue input (terminals 0-10V, (0)4-20 mA),
operating panel keys, serial link
Catalogue Type Input Maximum Maximum Dimensions Weights

number voltage (V) output current WxDxH (kg)
power (kW) output (А) (mm)
423440 ЕLM600- 0.75kW 1P/230V 230 0.75 4.5 88х140.5х149 0.48
423441 ЕLM600- 1.5kW 1P/230V 230 1.5 7 88х140.5х149 0.49
423442 ЕLM600- 2.2kW 1P/230V 230 2.2 10 106х161х170 0.75
423443 ЕLM600- 1.5kW 3P/400V 400 1.5 4 106х161х170 1.2
423444 ЕLM600- 2.2kW 3P/400V 400 2.2 6.5 106х161х170 1.3
423445 ЕLM600- 3.0kW 3P/400V 400 3.0 7.6 106х161х170 1.3
423446 ЕLM600- 4.0kW 3P/400V 400 4.0 9 106х161х170 1.45
423447 ЕLM600- 5.5kW 3P/400V 400 5.5 12 106х161х170 1.45
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOFT STARTER ELM 2500

AUTOMATION | SOFT STARTERS
Documents corresponding to the Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited
product: rotor. A number of motor control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start
Standard EN60947-4-2 moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of star-delta switching, auto-transformer
EN 60947-1 switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of starters
as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode
is set, a shunt contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft
starter is not designed to control motors in a set mode. Under a stop command in accordance
with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in shutting the motor
down.
FUNCTIONS MOUNTING
• System functions: • Mounting to a flat surface through bolts.
¾ Over-voltage protection – motor will switch • Mounting position – vertical gradient
off when power supply exceeds the preset maximum ± 5°.
limits.
¾ Overload protection – protects the motor
NOTE
from overloading. When more than one soft starter is mounted in
¾ Phase loss protection. a board, it is recommendable to mount them
¾ Temperature overload protection. side by side and when this is not possible,
• Control functions: the appropriate cooling conditions should be
¾ Output faults. provided.
¾ Motor faults diagnostics. • Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant
¾ Keyboard or outward control. (self-extinguishing material)
¾ Delayed start option. • Altitude : up to 2000 m
¾ Faults memory.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
• Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
• Unbalance of phases: < 3%
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
• Obligatory bypass contactor installation.
+ 3 standard
2 extended Overall dimensions (mm)
Type A B C E F d
EL M25015 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25022 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25037 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25045 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25055 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25075 510 260 194 389 232 Ø8
Catalogue Type Power of Rated Type of Section Packing/Box

number motor (kW) current (A) bypass of power (pcs)
contactor supply con-
ductors
42225015 EL M25015 15 30 LT 1-D 50 10 1/1
42225022 EL M25022 22 45 LT 1-D 50 10 1/1
42225037 EL M25037 37 76 LT 1-D 80 16 1/1
42225045 EL M25045 45 90 LT 1-D 95 25 1/1
42225055 EL M25055 55 110 LT 1-F 115 25 1/1
42225075 EL M25075 75 150 LT 1-F 150 35 1/1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | COMPENSATING DEVICES

COMPLEX COMPENSATING DEVICES
The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably connected with its transformation.
The development of semiconductor elements and the broader coming of semi-conductor
transformers, frequency control, welding machines and electrical arc furnaces in industrial
projects have a negative impact over the electrical power quality in the electro distributing
systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to create electromagnetic field. The reactive
component of current is taken from the electro distributing systems but it leads to additional
losses in the power supply system and makes shorter the exploitation term of electrical devices.
This leads to curving of the sinusoid form of current and voltage and interferences with
harmonic character. Compensating the reactive power means to fill up the system in such a way
that the needed reactive power to be created from the compensating device instead of being
taken from the electro transportation system. This leads to killing the voltage fall and cable
losses and increasing the outlet power of the power transporters and cutting down the bills for
overconsumption of reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply company. In
practice compensating the reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters combined in
compensating installations has the broadest spreading.
THERE ARE SEVERAL TYPES OF COMPENSATION ACCORDING TO THEIR LOCATION
• Individual compensation – when to every single motor or consumer is mounted a
compensating system. It is applied to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity.
• Installation compensation – when the consumers from the whole section (workshop) are
grouped and compensation is accomplished for the whole section.
• Overall compensation – accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation
ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF THE COMPENSATING DEVICES COMPENSATION CAN BE
• Passive – when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not
react to changes in the size and nature of the harmonic components and also to the per cent
increase of the reactive energy in time.
• Active – broader spread. The system controls the form of the consumed current and generates
5
different capacity depending on the load changes.
YEARS TOTAL
When designing the electro distributing system of industrial projects the following tasks are WARRANTY
taken into consideration:
+ 3 standard
• Defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components 2 extended
• Defining the additional loading of the capacitor batteries from the harmonic components and
calculating the filtering elements if needed.
The calculation of the compensating device capacity is done by reading the reactive energy
of the system and the working time of the system. Compensating devices represent a device
of one or several metal boxes with common rail system, automatic regulator for cosφ control
RPSF-xx series, different number of capacitor batteries (according to the capacity of the device)
with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series,
protective elements, etc.
The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and re-
active energy with capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111 series are voltage remeasured
and are able to endure overload from harmonic components up to 7% from the basic harmonics.
They are used in systems with high harmonics foul up to 25%.
The high harmonics composition is defined after measuring the influence rate of each separate
harmonics compared to the first one. In Bulgaria mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics.
The capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V and are normally mounted right in the compen-
sation systems.
When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is taken to be foul and in this case except
using capacitors, filters for leveling the harmonics are to be used as well. These filters are calcu-
lated on the basis of the corresponding voltage harmonics and differ for the different harmonics.
They are calculated using complex mathematical programmer which reads the foul rate, the
significance per cent of the voltage harmonic component, etc.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CAPACITOR BATTERIES FOR REACTIVE ENERGY COMPENSATION
Documents corresponding Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed three phase dry capacitors for
to the product: compensation of reactive energy and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminium
Standard EN 60831-1 cylindrical body in which a metal polypropylene folio is mounted which does not require special
EN 60831-2 impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are acquired through filling with a special mixture
on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at failure
(overload from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper cover
where are the connections to the power supply. This is done by a specially constructed valve for
overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element. The breaking of the inner couplings
provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to capacitor element failure.
There is a three phase capacitor in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the
capacitors. The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and active compensation.

• Rated operating voltage: 450V; 50Hz • With bolt M12 orM16 to a flat horizontal base
• Insulation voltage: 690V
• Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
• Capacity: from 5,0 to 100,0 kVAr at 450V
• Tolerance: ±5%
• Operating temperature: -40°C - +65°C
• Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr
• Built in discharging resistance
• Admissible current overload: twice as much
the peak current
• Discharge time: <50V per minute
• Altitude: 2000m
Dimensions (mm)
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY D H1 H3
+ 2 standard
0 extended
30 35 16
Catalogue Type of theDimensions Operating Battery Capacity (µF) Packing/Box

number battery H / Ø (mm) voltage capacity (pcs)
(V) (kVAr)
49005 HY 11A5 210/76 450 5.0 3X26.2 6
49007 HY 11A7 210/76 450 7.5 3X39 6
49010 HY 111A10 240/76 450 10.0 3X52.4 6
49015 HY 111A15 240/86 450 15.0 3X78.9 6
49020 HY 111A20 240/116 450 20.0 3X105 6
49030 HY 111A30 280/160 450 30.0 3X157 6
49050 HY 111A50 345/180 450 50.0 3X262 6
49100 HY 111A100 300/300 450 100.0 3X524 6
49031 HY 111A12* 230 / 85 690 12.5 3X27.9 6
49032 HY 11A25* 280 / 115 690 25 3X55.7 6
* Suitable for wind generators
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

CONTROLLER FOR AUTOMATIC REGULATION OF THE CAPACITY FACTOR
(COSΦ REGULATOR)
The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCFxx series are devices for monitoring of
low voltage systems and control of switching on of capacitor batteries for the capacity factor
compensation. There is possibility for adjustment of the system parameters and control.
Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high degree of data
security, easy programming and secure control of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and
setting the parameters of the power supply system as: capacity coefficient, display of the system
parameters such as voltage, current and capacity, losses, protection against overload, overload
indication or lack of voltage, etc. The change of parameters is performed through a combination
of buttons on the front panel. There is light diode to indicate which parameter is being displayed
on the screen and which outlets are in operation. The display is four digital. There is possibility for
choice of the working conditions: manual or automatic.
• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V Оn the front panel of the box through cutting
• Operating frequency: 45 – 65Hz an opening.
• Insulation voltage: 690V
• Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
• Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr
• Measurement accurateness:
• Voltage: ±1.0%
• Current: ±1.0%
• Capacity coefficient: ±1.0%
• Reactive energy: ±2.0%
• Operating temperature: -10+65°C
• Humidity: 30 – 60%
• Display: 4 digital
• Responsiveness: 20mA
• Outlet: 7A
• Number of outlets: 12 and 16
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue number Type Number of steps Dimensions H (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) + 3 standard
2 extended
49120 HY-RPCF12 12 122x122 8
49160 HY-RPCF16 16 144x144 8
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS
TIMERS AND RELAYS
QUARZ TIME SWITCH WITH POWER RESERVE TM 180 MINI

The mechanic relay for time is supposed to be used for managing chains with maximum capacity
of 3500W.After the setting ,the timer executes the functions we required in 24 hours regime. The
minimum period for setting is 15 minutes as it is executed within 96 pcs segments which the
timing of the work and rest of the consumer is being set. The timer is accomplished with a battery
which assures the work by 70 hours after power failure.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 230-240V AC 50/60Hz • Contact capacity:
• Time range: 24 hours • 16A/250V (COSФ=1)
• Min. programmable interval: 15 minutes • 4A/250V (COSФ=0.6)
• Time adjustment: manual • Electrical endurance: 10⁵ times
• Battery power reserve: 70 hours • Mechanical endurance: 10⁷ times
• Time deviation: ± 1s (at 20°C) • Section of the conductor: rigid conductors up
• Consumption: 2.5VA to 6mm²
• Contact: 1NO
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail
Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box

number H L D (pcs)
50137 ТМ 180 90 18 60 1 / 200
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
QUARZ TIME SWITCH WITH POWER RESERVE TM 180

The mechanic relay for time is supposed to be used for managing chains with maximum capacity
of 3500W.After the setting ,the timer executes the functions we required in 24 hours regime. The
minimum period for setting is 30 minutes as it is executed within 48 pcs segments which the
timing of the work and rest of the consumer is being set. The timer is accomplished with a battery
which assures the work by 150 hours after power failure.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 110-240V AC 50/60Hz • Contact capacity: 16А
• Time range: 24 hours • Electrical endurance: 10⁵ times
• Min. programmable interval: 30 minutes • Mechanical endurance: 10⁷ times
• Time adjustment: manual • Section of the conductor: rigid conductors up
• Battery power reserve: 150 hours to 6mm²
• Time deviation: ± 1s (at 20°C)
• Consumption: 2.5VA
• Contact: 1NO
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail

number H L D (pcs)
50138 ТМ 181 90 53.5 65.5 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

24 HOURS PLUG-IN MECHANICAL TIMER
Mechanical German type plug-in timer with TECHNICAL DATA
children protector. Two position switch for • Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
permanent and time control. • Min. setting time: 15 min
• Max. setting time: 24 hours
• Active load: up to 16A
• IP20

number L W H (pcs)
50140 EL-PMT-1 82 84 56 1/24/48
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
PROGRAMMABLE WEEKLY TIMER

The product according to the time set by the TECHNICAL DATA
user, automatically turn On/Off the variety of • Power supply voltage: 220-250V; 50/60Hz
electrical equipment. • Adjustment range: 1 min
Included LI-ion battery • Active load: up to 30A
• Operations: 17 switching ON/OFF per day, up
MOUNTING
to 119 ON/OFF per week
• With bolts to the surface • Operating temperature: 0 ÷ +55°C
Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)

number L W H
50139 EL-PWT-1 60 32.5 60 1/200
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
WEEKLY PLUG-IN DIGITAL TIMER

Digital German type plug-in timer with children TECHNICAL DATA
protector and rechargeable NI-MH battery. • Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
Two outlets for permanent and time control. • Min. setting time: 1 min or 1 sec
• Max. setting time: 7 days
Catalogue Type Size (mm) Packing/Box • Program per day: 8 or 20 ON/OFF
number (pcs) • Active load: up to 16A
50142 EL-WDT-3 130x75x70 1/24/48 • IP20
WEEKLY PLUG-IN DIGITAL TIMER

Digital German type plug-in timer with TECHNICAL DATA
countdown function and rechargeable NI-MH • Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
battery. Two outlets for permanent and time • Min. setting time: 1 min
control. • Max. setting time: 7 days
• Program per day: 16 ON/OFF
Catalogue Type Size (mm) Packing/Box
number (pcs)
• IP20
50141 EL-WDT-2 68.4x73x77.2 1/24/48
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-2A 2C- ON DELAY

AUTOMATION | TIME RELAYS
Single function time relays are suitable for applications where there is a clear function requirement
in advance and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or in house
installations.
ELR-2A is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting
is available from front panel.
APPLICATION
• Control of electrical appliances
• Control of lights, heating, motors, pump, fan
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage range: 24-240V; 50/60Hz
• Output current: 2x5A
• Function: 2C-On delay
• Output type: 2xSPDT
• Time ranges: 0.1s-60m
• Time setting: via 1 potentiometer H
• Time deviation: < ±5%
• Repeat accuracy: < ±5%
• Ingress protection: IP20
• Mechanical life: 1x10⁷
• Electrical life (AC1): 1x10⁵
• Max. cable size: solid wire max. 2.5 mm2 and
flexible wire 1.5 mm2 w D
• Size: 90x18x64 mm

number W H D (pcs)
50151 ELR-2A 18 90 64 1/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-2B 1C-ON DELAY &

1C INSTANTANEOUS

installations.
ELR-2B is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting
APPLICATION
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Output current: 2x5A
• Function: 1C-On delay and 1C-Instantaneous
• Time ranges: 0.1s-60m H
• Time setting: via 1 potentiometer
• Time deviation: <±5%
• Repeat accuracy: <±5%
• Electrical life (AC1): 1x10⁵ w D
flexible wire 1.5 mm2
• Size: 90x18x64mm

number W H D (pcs)
50152 ELR-2B 18 90 64 1/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-3A 2C-ON DELAY

installations.
ELR-3A is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 12 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting
APPLICATION
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Output current: 2x16A (AC1)
• Function: 2C-On delay
• Time ranges: 0.1s-240h
• Time setting: via 2 potentiometers
• Time deviation: 10% mechanical setting
• Repeat accuracy: 0.2% set value stability
• Min. breaking capacity DC: 500mW
• Reset time: max. 200ms
H
• Over voltage category: III
• Output indication: red LED
flexible wire 1.5 mm2 W D
TIME RANGE
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

number W H D (pcs)
50153 ELR-3A 18 90 64 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-3B 2C-OFF DELAY

installations.
ELR-3B is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 12 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting
APPLICATION
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Function: 2C-Off delay
• Time setting: via 2 potentiometers
H
TIME RANGE
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

number W H D (pcs)
50154 ELR-3B 18 90 64 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MULTI- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-4

Multi function time relays are suitable for applications where there is need more additional
functions requirement and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or
in house installations.
ELR-4 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage - up 12 to 240V AC/DC. This relay
increase 10 functions: 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage, 4 functions controlled by
control input and 1 function of latching relay.
APPLICATION
• Control of industrial and home electrical
appliances
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Function: 10
• Time ranges: 0.1s-240h, ON, OFF
• Function setting: via 3 potentiometers on
front panel
• Min. breaking capacity DC: 500mW H
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
TIME RANGE
+ 3 standard
2 extended

number W H D (pcs)
50155 ELR-4 18 90 64 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Multi function time relays are suitable for applications where there is need more additional func-
tions requirement and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or in
house installations.
ELR-5 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. This relay have
6 time delay functions.
APPLICATION
appliances
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Output current: 5A
• Function: 6
• Output type: 1C-On delay and 1C-
Instantaneous
front panel
• Time deviation: <5%±50ms
• Repeat error: <0.2% ±10ms
• Voltage error: <±0.5% H
• Insulation resistance: 100mΩ (500VDCmge)
• Protection degree: IP20

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
number W H D (pcs)
50156 ELR-5 18 94 64 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ASYMMETRIC CYCLER TIMER, ELR-6

Asymmetric cycle timer can be used for cycle delay control, providing periodic energizing, lighting
control, regular room ventilation, pumps, heating control for electric circuit and etc..
ELR-6 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. This relay have
2 time functions- Cycle beginning with pulse and cycle beginning with pause.
APPLICATION
appliances.
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Function: 2 time functions
front panel
• Reset time: max. 200ms H
• Output indication: LED
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box
+ 3 standard
2 extended
number W H D (pcs)
50157 ELR-5 18 90 64 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INTERMEDIATE RELAYS, ELR-7 SERIES

Intermediate Relays are used for switching larger load output, strengthen or multiplying contacts
of the existing device or send signals to the relevant control elements concurrently.
Relays from ELR-7 series are easy for operation and has different input voltages- from 12V DC, 24V
AC/DC and 240V AC.
FUNCTIONS
• Instead of small contactors.
• Increase the number of contacts.
• Increase contact capacity.
• Switch contact type.
• Used as a switch.
• Eliminate interference in the circuit.
TECHNICAL DATA
ELR-A/ ELR-B
• Voltage range: 24V AC/DC and 230V AC
• Output current: 16A (AC1)
• Output type: 1xSPDT and 3xSPDT
• Supply voltage tolerance: -15% +10%
• Max. change over time: 40ms
H
ELR-C/ ELR-D • Mechanical life: 1x10⁷
W D
Catalogue Type Number Voltage Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number of contact W H D Box (pcs)
5
50158 ELR-A 1xSPDT 24V AC/DC 18 90 64 1/100 YEARS TOTAL
50159 ELR-B 1xSPDT 230V AC 18 90 64 1/100 WARRANTY
50160 ELR-C 3xSPDT 24V AC/DC 18 90 64 1/100 + 3 standard

2 extended
50161 ELR-D 3xSPDT 230V AC 18 90 64 1/100
ELR-A/ ELR-B
ELR-C/ ELR-D
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
WI-FI SMART CONTROL RELAY WITH BUILD-IN ANTENNA,

ELR-1W
ELR-1W is widely used in smart homes and industrial intelligent control. It adopts the most
popular Wi-Fi 2.4GHz control chip, and cooperates with powerful APP and mainstream voice
assistants. Realize WLAN local control (even if the network is disconnected, you can also use APP
local control and remote control, allowing users to fully experience the convenient life brought by
modern intelligent technology. Using mobile phone APP or voice control device to control ON and
OFF of the output of this product to realize the purpose of remotely starting or turning off the load
electrical appliances.
EKR8-10SeriesWiFiIntelligentControlRelay
The product cooperates with the corresponding APP to realize the following functions:
• Support Smart Config for fast networking.
WiFi智能控制继电器 • Support multiple control types: switch, timing start and stop, cycle control, etc.
• Support WLAN local control and remote control.
• Access to mainstream voice assistants such as Tmall Genie, DuerOS, Xiao Ai (Xiao Mi), Alexa,
WiFi智能控制继电器
Google, etc., voice control.
StructureBlockDiagramofIntelligentControlSystem:
• Intranet device sharing and cloud account device sharing function.
• APP supports Android and iOS systems.
StructureBlockDiagramofIntelligentControlSystem:
Clouds
Clouds WiFi/4G
WiFiRouter
WiFi/4G
WiFiRouter
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY EKR8-1010 APP VoiceControl
+ 3 standard
2 extended
EKR8-1010 APP VoiceControl
DistributionNetworkBlockDiagramofStandardConfiguration:
Structure block diagram of Intelligent control system
DistributionNetworkBlockDiagramofStandardConfiguration:
Clouds
Clouds
③Theproductsendsarequesttotherouter
toconnecttoit
③Theproductsendsarequesttotherouter
toconnecttoit
WiFiRouter
WiFiRouter
①MobilephoneandWiFiconnection ②SendWi-Finameandpassword
toproduct APP
①MobilephoneandWiFiconnection ②SendWi-Finameandpassword
toproduct APP
“SeetimeSmart”APP
Distribution network block diagram of standard configuration

“SeetimeSmart”APP
04
ELMARK 04
WiFi特性 WirelessSecuritySupport⽆线安全⽀持 WPA/WPA2
EncryptionType加密类型 WEP/TKIP/AES
WorkingFrequency⼯作频率 2.4GHz-2.5GHz(2400M
GO TO THE
WiFi智能控制继电器
1st PAGE
WiFiRF 802.11b(CCK):19+/-1d
Parameters
WiFiIntelligentControlRelay TransmitPower发射功率 EKR8-10Series
802.11g(OFDM):14+/-1
WiFi智能控制继电器 (Typical
802.11n(HT20@MCS7)
Values)
WiFi射频参数 WirelessTransmissionDistance GeneralIndoor:45M,O
Theproductcooperateswiththecorresponding
APPLICATION
APPtorealizethefollowingfunctions:
(典型值) ⽆线传输距离⼀般室内： 45m，室外：15
• Home control system
SupportSmartConfigforfastnetworking

• Building automation
Supportmultiplecontroltypes:switch,timingstartandstop,
StandbyPowerConsumption待机功耗 Lessthan0.5W⼩于0.5
• Industrial control systems
cyclecontrol,etc.
• Industrial automation
SupportWLANlocalcontrolandremotecontrol
Working
• Mechanical and electrical equipment
AccesstomainstreamvoiceassistantssuchasTmallGenie, WorkingTemperature⼯作温度 -10ºC-60ºC
DuerOS,XiaoAi(XiaoMi),Alexa,Google,etc.,voicecontrol
Condition StorageTemperature储存温度 NormalTemperature常
TECHNICAL DATA • Wireless Transmission Distance: General
Intranetdevicesharingandcloudaccountdevicesharing
⼯作条件
• Voltage Range: 85-240V AC/DC Indoor: 45M,
function
APPsupportsAndroidandiOSsystems WorkingHumidity⼯作湿度
Outdoor: 150M (Note: It depends on the 5%-95%(Non-condens
envi-
H22 EKR8-1011H22
Built-inAntenna内置天
产品配合相应的APP可实现以下功能：
• Standard: IEEE 802.11b/g/n ronment.)
1b/g/n ⽀持SmartConfig实现快速连⽹ Physical
• Working mode: STA/AP/STA+AP
AntennaType天线类型
• Application: Seetime Smart
⽀持多种控制类型：开关、
Parameter
定时启停、循环控制等控制⽅式
ExternalAntenna外置天
• Wireless Security Support: WPA/WPA2 • Standby Power Consumption: Less than 0.5W
A+AP ⽀持WLAN本地控制和远程控制
物理参数
• Encryption Type: WEP/TKIP/AES • Working Temperature: -10-60ºC
接⼊天猫精灵、
主流语⾳助⼿，
DuerOS、⼩爱同学
• Working
语⾳控制
（⼩⽶）2.4GHz-2.5GHz
Frequency: 、Alexa、Google等
RatedCurrent额定电流
• Working Humidity: 5%-95% 10A
(Non-condens-
(2400M-2483.5M) ing)
AES
局域⽹内设备共享和云端账号设备分享功能
• Transmit Power: ControlMethod控制⽅式/WorkingMode⼯作模式
• Size WxHxD: 18x90x65 mm WiFiControl控制
APP⽀持Android和iOS系统
APPLocalControl本地控制 Yes
¾ 802.11b (CCK): 19+/-1dBm
GHz(2400M-2483.5M) Application应⽤领域：
¾ 802.11g (OFDM): 14+/-1dBm
Homecontrolsystem家居控制系统
CK):19+/-1dBm APPRemoteControl远程控制 Yes
¾ 802.11n(HT20@MCS7): 13+/-1dBm
Buildingautomation建筑⾃动化
Industrialcontrolsystem⼯业控制系统
FDM):14+/-1dBm Industrialautomation⼯业⾃动化
Catalogue Type Alexa/GoogleHome/TmallGenie天猫精灵
Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box
T20@MCS7):13+/-1dBm /DuerOS/XiaoAi(XiaoMi)VoiceplatformSupport
Mechanicalandelectricalequipment机电设备
Yes
number W H D (pcs)
⼩爱同学（⼩⽶）语⾳平台⽀持
door:45M,Outdoor:150M(Note:Itdependsontheenvironment.)
50150 ELR-1W 18 90 65 1/100
TechnicalData技术数据 EKR8-1010H22 EKR8-1011H22
5m，室外：150m（
注：
具体因环境⽽定） SCCPControl信令连接控制 IEEE802.11b/g/n
Standard标准 Yes
WiFi
0.5W⼩于0.5W Characteristic Dimensions外形尺⼨图：in英⼨
WorkingMode⼯作模式
（mm毫⽶）
STA/AP/STA+AP
WiringDiagrams接线图
WiFi特性 WirelessSecuritySupport⽆线安全⽀持 WPA/WPA2
EncryptionType加密类型 WEP/TKIP/AES
U
2.6MA X
mperature常温 WorkingFrequency⼯作频率
0. 7
2.4GHz-2.5GHz(2400M-2483.5M)
(65 ) (18 )
1.4 3
on-condensing)（
不凝结） WiFiRF 0.6 3
(36.2 ) 802.11b(CCK):19+/-1dBm
0.1 2
(3 )
Parameters
tenna内置天线 (Typical
TransmitPower发射功率
(16 ) 802.11g(OFDM):14+/-1dBm
0. 6
802.11n(HT20@MCS7):13+/-1dBm
ntenna外置天线 Values)
WiFi射频参数 WirelessTransmissionDistance
(14.2 )
5
GeneralIndoor:45M,Outdoor:150M(Note:Itdependsontheenvironment.
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
⽆线传输距离⼀般室内： 45m，室外：150m 0. 2 （

注：
具体因环境⽽定）
(典型值)
A1
+ 3 standard
(5 )
2 extended
ol控制 NoWiFiControl⽆WiFi连接
StandbyPowerConsumption待机功耗
3. 5 Lessthan0.5W⼩于0.5W
(90 )
WorkingTemperature⼯作温度 -10ºC-60ºC
R
Yes
Working 1. 8
(45 )
1. 4
Condition StorageTemperature储存温度 NormalTemperature常温
(35 )
N/A
⼯作条件 WorkingHumidity⼯作湿度
2. 7 5%-95%(Non-condensing)（
不凝结）
15 1
(67.5 )
Physical Built-inAntenna内置天线
AntennaType天线类型
N/A
Parameter ExternalAntenna外置天线
EKR8-1
0. 7
物理参数
EKR8-1
RatedCurrent额定电流 10A (16.71 )
0. 3
ControlMethod控制⽅式/WorkingMode⼯作模式 WiFiControl控制 NoWiFiControl⽆WiFi连接
Yes
APPLocalControl本地控制 Yes (mm) Yes
grams接线图 ProductWiringDiagram产品接线图
Dimensions
APPRemoteControl远程控制 Yes N/A
Alexa/GoogleHome/TmallGenie天猫精灵
Un L
/DuerOS/XiaoAi(XiaoMi)VoiceplatformSupport Yes N/A
N （⼩⽶）语⾳平台⽀持
⼩爱同学
SCCPControl信令连接控制
A1 A2
Yes Yes
Dimensions外形尺⼨图：in英⼨（mm毫⽶） WiringDiagrams接线图 ProductWiringDiagram产
2.6MA X 0. 7
Un L
A1 A2 N
(65 ) (18 )
1.4 3
0.1 2
R
(36.2 )
0.6 3 (3 ) A1 A2
(16 )
0. 6
(14.2 )
A1 A2
0. 2
15 16 18
(5 )
3. 5
(90 ) R
EKR8-1010H22
1. 8
1. 4
(45 )
(35 )
EKR8-1011H22
2. 7 15 16 18
15 16 18
(67.5 )
0. 7 EKR8-1010H22
03
Product wiring 0.diagram
3
(16.71 )
EKR8-1011H22
Wiring diagram 15 16 18
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Multi function time relays are suitable for applications where there is need more additional func-
tions requirement and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or in
house installations.
ELR-8 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. This relay
increase 6 time delay functions.
APPLICATION
appliances
and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Output current: 5A (AC1)
• Function: 6
• Output type: DPDT
• Time deviation: <5%±50ms
• Repeat error: <0.2% ±10ms
• Insulation resistance: 100mΩ (500VDCmge)
• Size: 79.5x48x48 mm

number W H D (pcs)
50162 ELR-8 48 48 79.5 1/100
50163 Base for ELR-8 1/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL ONE-CHANNEL TIMER TE 15A
The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz mini controller which makes
it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight
ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons.
Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose among a whole
week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start
time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and
stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary,
other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue
setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle
programming is 1 minute..
TECHNICAL DATA
• Display: LCD • Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
• Operations: 16 switching ON/OFF • Operating temperature: -10°C ÷ +65°C
• Minimum setting unit: 1 min • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Time setting range: 1 min- 168 hours • Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
• Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C) • Commutating capacity:
• Battery for programmer storing: up to 15 days ¾ Active load: up to 16A
• Power consumption: <4.5VA • Weight: 125g
• Switched on indicator
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail

number H W L (pcs)
50036 TE 15A 85 36 64 1/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
STAIRCASE DELAY TIMER

The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Provide control of lighting circuits with automatic
switch Off after reset time. Two position switch for permanent and time lighting control and
choice for time delay setting from 30 sec to 10 minutes. Compact 1-mode design- 17.5mm
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
• Adjustment range: 0.5 to 10 min
• Power consumption: <2.5VA
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +60°C
• Humidity: 45 – 95%RH
• Number of contacts: 1NO
• Commutating capacity:
• Inductive load: up to 10 A
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail

number H W L1 L2 D (pcs)
35007 TE 17 82 17.5 40 65 45 1/240
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TIME RELAY “STAR/DELTA” TE 19

The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable
materials. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time
hold at “star/delta” starters and it is used for setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done
through selection of the time unit (seconds or minutes) and rate (x 0.1 or x1) by the slide switches,
and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from 0 to 10). Whenever timer circuit receives a
signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is available. It gives possibility for
time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the
consumer’s need.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles
• Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to • Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
600 seconds • Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
• Repetition accuracy: ±5% from the whole • Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
scale • Commutating capacity: up to 5A
• Adjustment accuracy: ±5% from the whole • Indication:
scale ¾ at operation in “star”: red indication
• Zeroing time: <0.5s ¾ at operation in “delta”: green indication
• Power consumption: <5VA • Weight: 150g
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail
Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number H W L1 L2 H1 H2 Box (pcs)
50102 TE19 85 24 34 66 45 60 1/200
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended IMPULSE RELAY, EPN510- SINGLE POLE
Impulse relays allow circuit remote control. They can be operated manually, remotely, from several
control points, or by impulses. Impulse relays are most frequently used for the control of lighting
circuits in various public places with multiple control points.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Control voltage: 230V
• Rated current of the power circuit: 16А
• Electrical endurance: 200000 cycles
• Maximum switching frequency:
5 operations/minute
• Impulse duration: 50ms
CONNECTION
• Tunnel terminals

number H W C D L1 L2 (pcs)
50300 EPN510 85 24 36 45 34 66 8 / 160
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Required to reduce
Required
temperature
to reducerise
temperature
of modular rise
devices
of modular devices
ure the mechanical
Ensure the mechanical
installed side by
installed
side. side by side.
/or electrical
and/or
link electrical link
Recommended Recommended
to separate electronic
to separate
devices
electronic
(thermostat,
devices (thermostat,
ween impulse
between
relaysimpulse
and relays and
programmable programmable
clock, etc.) from
clock,
electromechanical
etc.) from electromechanical
devices devices
r auxiliaries
their auxiliaries
(relays, contactors).
(relays, contactors).
odules - 1 1 IMPULSE RELAYS (REMOTE-CONTROL SWITCHES)- 2P & 4P

Impulse relays, also known as bi-stable relays, Impulse relays are a form of latching relay that
mm)
imension(mm) transfers the contacts with each pulse.
71 71
ELMARK impulse relays are made up of a magnetic latch relay and a solid-state steering circuit that,
67 67 upon application of power, determines which position the relay is in and energizes the opposite
49 49
18 18 coil.
5.5 23.55.5 23.5
APPLICATION
• The impulse relays are used to control, by • Having two stable mechanical positions, the
means of pushbuttons, lighting circuits pole(s) will be opened by the next impulse.
consisting of: Each impulse received by the coil reverses the
• Incandescent lamps, low-voltage halogen position of the pole(s).
81
81
86
86
45
45
lamps, etc. (Resistive loads) • Can be controlled by an unlimited number of

• Fluorescent lamps, discharge lamps, etc. pushbuttons.
(Inductive loads) • Zero energy consumption.
• Closing of the impulse relay pole(s) is
triggered by an impulse on the coil.
03 03
4
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rating: 16A • Duration of the control order: 50 ms to 1s
• Frequency: 50 оr 60Hz (200ms recommended)
• Insulation voltage (Ui): 440V AC • Over voltage category: IV
• Pollution degree: 3 • Ingress protection: IP20
• Rated impulse withstands voltage (Uimp): 6kV • Electrical life: 200,000 cycles (AC21); 100 000
• Dissipated power (during the impulse): 19VA cycles (AC22)
• Illuminated PB control: Max. current 3mA • Max. cable size: solid wire 0.5-4 mm2 and
(if>use an ATLz) flexible wire 1-4 mm2
• Operating threshold: Min.85% of Un in • Tightening torque: 1 N.m
conformance with IEC/EN60669-2-2 • Size: 86x18x67 mm
Catalogue Type Number Contact Voltage Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box

number of poles type W H D (pcs)
50301 ELR-1620 2P/ 1 mod 2NO 230VAC/110VDC 18 86 67 1/120
50302
50303
ELR-1610
ELR-1621
2P/ 1 mod
2P/ 1 mod
1NO+1NC
2NO
230VAC/110VDC
24VDC/48VAC
18
18
86
86
67
67
1/120
1/120
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
50304 ELR-1611 2P/ 1 mod 1NO+1NC 24VDC/48VAC 18 86 67 1/120
50305 ELR-1622 2P/ 1 mod 2NO 12VDC/24VAC 18 86 67 1/120
50307 ELR-1640 4P/ 2 mod 4NO 230VAC/110VDC 36 86 67 1/60
50308 ELR-1630 4P/ 2 mod 2NO+2NC 230VAC/110VDC 36 86 67 1/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TIMER TE8A – 1A, TE8A – 2A

The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz mini controller
which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation
of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting.
Timer programming is done through selection of the operational day(s) of the week, followed by
selection of the start time and end time. You may choose out of ten modes (one for each day of
the week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one for the whole week). When setting
the time, you should start first with the hours and then continue with the minutes. ТЕ8A - 1a - Up
to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute. ТЕ8A - 2a - It has two
operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with minimal
interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and
showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
TECHNICAL DATA • Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Commutating capacity: up to 16A
• Power consumption: <5VA • Two outlet relays
• Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles • Li-Ion battery: 150h
• Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles • Weight: 150g
• Operating temperature: -10ºC ÷ +65ºC
• Temperature of storage: up to 70C
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail

number H H1 H2 W E L1 L2 F Box (pcs)
50113 ТЕ8А - 1а 100 50 68 50 36 60 74 90 1/75
50114 ТЕ8А - 2а 100 50 68 50 36 60 74 90 1/75
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
TIMER TE6B
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz mini
controller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted
on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. There
is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99 hours 59 minutes, possibility for
correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and
showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
• Possibility for choice of operating range: • Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
¾ from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds • Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
¾ from 1 second to 99.59 minutes • Commutating capacity at active load: 3A
¾ from 1 minute to 99.59 hours • Weight: 300g
• Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
• Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms MOUNTING
• Power consumption: <5VA • On the front panel of the board
• Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles

number D W L (pcs)
50104 TE6B 8.5 45 80 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

TIMER TE48S-S
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz mini controller
which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the
front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. It represents
two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with time range
adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for correction of the set values during
operation. First, select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the time. Depending on
the timer coupling, it can be used as a cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time set, then
counts the second time set, then starts counting over the first time again, etc. until a stop signal is
received. In another mode, the timer can count the set time and stop until a new signal is received
to count the next cycle. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in
hours, minutes and seconds.
TECHNICAL DATA
Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C
• Admissible variation of the input voltage: • Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
85-110%U • Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
• Possibility for choice of operating range: • Commutating capacity at load: 3A
¾ from 1 to 99 seconds • Weight: 300g
¾ from 1 minute to 99 minutes
• Error: <0.01% ±0.05s MOUNTING
• Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms • on the front panel of the board
• Power consumption: <5VA
• Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
number D E L1 L2 C H W Box (pcs)
50105 TE48S-S 5 44.8 74 95 15 58 48 84
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
TIMER ТЕ 19M
Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted
for mounting on DIN rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are
assigned by combinations of the keys. There is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned
by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or hours depending on the necessity of the user. Power
contact up to 3A.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz • Operation temperature: -10 ÷ +65°С
• Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours • Humidity: 45 - 85%RH
• Accuracy of setting: ± 5% from the whole • Computing option: up to 5А
scale • Indication:
• Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds ¾ on power supply: red indication
• Consumed capacity: < 5VA ¾ on operational output relay: green
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 indication
000 cycles • Weight: 150 gr.
• Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): • Time functions: according to the
1 000 000 cycles programming guide
MOUNTING
• DIN rail
number H w h1 h2 l1 L2 Box (pcs)
50102M ТЕ 19M 85 24 45 60 34 66 1/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | DIGITAL COUNTERS
COUNTERS
Documents corresponding UNIVERSAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE2J

to the product:
Standard EN 61010-1 The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of
counting and high counting reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more
than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with black lighting digits, providing excellent
visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is
used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay
outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position
of the decimal point.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Display: LCD
• Counting range: 0 - 99999
• Counting speed: 30/3k cps
• Zeroing: outside impulse
• Battery for programmer storing: up to 10
years
• Commutating capacity: relay outlet with
active load: up to 3A
• Weight: 250g
MOUNTING
• On the front panel
• Opening with dimensions: 45x45
5
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY number H W C D L (pcs)
+ 3 standard
2 extended 50111 CE2J 68 68 65 8.5 90 1/45
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Documents corresponding COMBINED DIGITAL COUNTER/TIMER CE10J
to the product:
Standard EN 60831-1 The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a
EN 60831-2 definite combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which
allows high speed of counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a built
in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display
providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with
accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand
set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Display: LCD
• Counting range: 0 – 999
• Timer range: 0.01 – 99h99min
• Counting speed: 30/500 cps
• Zeroing: outside impulse
• Battery for programmer storing: up to 10
years
• Commutating capacity: relay outlet with
active load: up to 3A
• Weight: 120g
MOUNTING
• On the front panel
• Opening with dimensions: 45x45

number h W c D L (pcs)
50120 CE10J 68 68 65 6 90 1/45
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOTAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE15J

Documents corresponding The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power
to the product: supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and
EN 61010-1 operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility
at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Display: LCD
• Power supply voltage: built in battery
• Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
• Counting accuracy: <0.002%
• Data storing battery: up to 5 years
• Weight: 120g
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail

number H W D L (pcs)
50112 CE15J 86 36 45 64 1/100
TOTAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE15L

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Documents corresponding The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power
+ 3 standard
2 extended to the product: supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and
EN 61010-1 operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility
at different lighting. It is used for time impulse sequence counting with accumulation. It displays
the operated time.a
TECHNICAL DATA
• Display: LCD
• Power supply voltage: built in battery
• Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
• Counting accuracy: <0.002%
• Battery for data storing: up to 5 years
• Weight: 120g
MOUNTING
• DIN rail

number H W D L (pcs)
50115 CE15L 86 35 45 64 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PHASE SEQUENCE INDICATOR EK - RSTB
Documents corresponding The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence,
to the product: sequence and quality of the phases. The device indicates the following fault: lack of one or
EN 61010-1 several phases; change in the sequence of the phases; lowering of the power supplying voltage:
under 10%; increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%; phase asymmetry of the power
supplying voltage: ±10%. In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating
in the device which breaks the controlling circuit. The time between fault indication and outlet
relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very short breaks. When
the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the
hysteresis values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Possibility for operation range adjustment:
0.1 – 10 seconds
• Possibility for working range adjustment: from
300 to 480 V
• Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
• Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles
• Indication: green LED – indication for a
change in the condition; red LED - failure
• Weight: 120g
MOUNTING
• DIN-rail

number h w d1 d2 l1 l2 Box (pcs)
50103 EK - RSTB 85 24 45 60 34 66 1/200
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS
CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS

CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS MES - XX/X5 TYPE

Documents corresponding The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems
to the product: for current characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signalling, etc.
Standard EN 61010-1; They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is the inlet range of the transformer.
EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6 TECHNICAL DATA MOUNTING
• Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz • Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted;
• Admissible deviation of the operating current: • Vertically or horizontally to the power
1.2x In supplying rails according to the opening of the
• Inlet current: 50 – 1200A transformer
• Outlet current: 5A • Current transformers can be mounted on flat
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz surfaces by use of fixing clamps.
(1min)
• Precision class: 0.5
• Weight kg: 0.60 kg
Catalogue Type Range Capacity Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/

number VA A B C D E F G Box (pcs)
45050А MES - 75/30 50/5 1 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40
45075А MES - 75/30 75/5 1.5 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40
45103А MES - 75/30 100/5 1.5 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40
45153А MES - 75/30 150/5 2.5 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

45204А MES - 75/40 200/5 3.75 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40
45254А MES - 75/40 250/5 3.75 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40
45304А MES - 75/40 300/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40
45404А MES - 75/40 400/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40
45504А MES - 75/40 500/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40
45604А MES - 75/40 600/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40

45406А MES - 86/60 400/5 3.75 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40
45506А MES - 86/60 500/5 5 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40
45606А MES - 86/60 600/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40
45806А MES - 86/60 800/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40
45906А MES - 86/60 1000/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/32
45916А MES - 86/60 1200/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/32
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, TYPE СР
Documents corresponding Current measuring transformers of duct type. Specially designed to be installed in measuring
to the product: circuits without removing cables in current measuring circuit. CP Transformers save installation
Standard EN 60044-1 time and decrease installation costs.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Small size table:
• Secondary coil rated current 5А
• Rated voltage 720V
• Frequency 50Hz
• Rated load: up to 30VA
• Safety coefficient: fs≤5
• Secondary coil connection: cable shoe
terminal

Type A B C D E F G
СР 23 20 30 51 89 111 34 47
СР 58 50 80 78 114 145 32 32
СР 88 80 80 108 144 145 32 32
Catalogue Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box

number (pcs)
452320 СР 23 200/5 1 1.5 0.74 1/45
452325 СР 23 250/5 1 2.5 0.74 1/45
452330 СР 23 300/5 0.5 2.5 0.74 1/45
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
number (pcs)
455825 СР 58 250/5 0.5 1.5 0.87 1/36
455830 СР 58 300/5 0.5 2.5 0.87 1/36
455840 СР 58 400/5 0.5 2.5 0.87 1/36
455850 СР 58 500/5 0.5 5 0.87 1/36
455860 СР 58 600/5 0.5 5 0.87 1/36

number (pcs)
458850 СР 88 500/5 0.5 2.5 1 1 / 20
458860 СР 88 600/5 0.5 5 1 1 / 20
458875 СР 88 750/5 0.5 2,5 1 1 / 20
458880 СР 88 800/5 0.5 3.75 1 1 / 20
458890 СР 88 1000/5 0.5 5 1 1 / 20
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | INDUSTRIAL RELAYS
INDUSTRIAL RELAYS AND BASES
Documents corresponding Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for
to the product: command transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values
EN 60947-5-1; enabling the direct control of industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively
EN 61810 small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire
contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button installed to it.
The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the
relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V АС, 50 Нz and • Working temperature: -5 ÷ + 65°С
from 12 to 110V DC • Humidity: 35 - 85% RH indicator
• Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 • possibility for mounting of additional contacts
-110% Un (for the open type)
• Rated current of the sockets: 10А АС • remarkable with high reliability of current
• Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles characteristics
• Isolation resistance: 500 mΩ /min (500V)
• Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50Нz
• Dielectric strength: 1000V АС/1 min
• Turn-out time: 25ms
MOUNTING
• on a DIN rail by means of a socket
Catalogue Relay type Voltage of the Socket type Resistance of Number of Packing/Box
number coil (V) the coil ( Ω ) contacts (pcs)
57141 ELM - 14FC 12 VDC ELM-RT624-B 260 NO+NC 100/1000
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Catalogue Relay type Voltage of the Socket type Resistance of Number of Packing/Box
number coil (V) the coil ( Ω ) contacts (pcs)
57601N ELM-90.2 12VDC ELM-90.22 90 2NO+2NC 10/200
57602N ELM - 90.2 24 VDC ELM - 90.22 360 2NO+2NC 10/200
57603N ELM - 90.2 48 VDC ELM - 90.22 1440 2NO+2NC 10/200
57605N ELM - 90.2 230 VAC ELM - 90.22 6800 2NO+2NC 10/200
57606N ELM-90.2 24VAC ELM-90.22 72 2NO+2NC 10/200
Type ELM-90.2 57611N ELM-90.3 12VDC ELM-90.23 90 3NO+3NC 10/200
57612N ELM - 90.03 24 VDC ELM - 90.23 360 3NO+3NC 10/200
57613N ELM - 90.03 48 VDC ELM - 90.23 1440 3NO+3NC 10/200
57614N ELM - 90.03 110 VAC ELM - 90.23 1650 3NO+3NC 10/200
57615N ELM-90.3 230 VAC ELM-90.23 6800 3NO+3NC 10/200
57616N ELM-90.3 24VAC ELM-90.23 72 3NO+3NC 10/200
Type ELM-90.3
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue Relay type Voltage of Socket type Resistance of Number of Packing/
number the coil (V) the coil ( Ω ) contacts Box (pcs)
57521N ELM-36.02 12VDC ELM-RT702-B 60 2NO+2NC 20/500
57523N ELM-36.02 48 VDC ELM-RT702-B 2560 2NO+2NC 20/500
57525N ELM-36.02 230VAC ELM-RT702-B 15000 2NO+2NC 20/500
57543N ELM-36.04 48 VDC ELM-RT704-B 2560 4NO+4NC 20/500
57544N ELM-36.04 110 VAC ELM-RT704-B 4000 4NO+4NC 20/500
Type ELM-36.02 57545N ELM-36.04 230 VAC ELM-RT704-B 15000 4NO+4NC 20/500
Type ELM-36.04
Catalogue Socket type Dimensions (mm) Number of terminals Packing/Box (pcs)
5
number (pcs.)
YEARS TOTAL
57901 ELM - RT624-B 76 x 15 5 20 / 600 WARRANTY
57902 ELM - RT702-B 76 x 27 11 10 / 240 + 3 standard

2 extended
57912 ELM - RT704-B 76 x 27 14 10 / 240
57904 ELM - 90.22 68 x 38 8 10 / 400
57905 ELM - 90.23 68 x 38 11 10 / 400
57901 57902
57912
57904
57905
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | INTERFACE RELAYS
INTERFACE RELAYS EL-14F-LS SERIES
INTERFACE RELAYS EL-14F-LS SERIES

ELMARK interface relays provide reliable voltage conversion in control systems. Our relays ensure
reliable signal switching and provide electrical isolation for sensitive electronics in all kinds of
machinery in industry.
FEATURES
• Good response control
• Slim size
• With LED indicator
• With lockable test button and inspection
window
• High rated load
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated load: 1Z-12A; 2Z-8A
• Rated voltage: 12V DC; 24V DC; 230V AC
• Insulation resistance: ≤500MΩ
• Operating power: 0.53W/0.9VA
• Dielectric strength
¾ Between open contacts: ≥1000V AC/1 min
¾ Between poles: ≥1500V AC/1 min
¾ Between contact and coil: ≥4000V AC/1 min
• Operate/ release time: ≤15ms/15ms
• Terminal type: Plug-in
• Contact material: AgSnO2
• Electrical life: 10⁵ times
• Mechanical life: 10⁷ times
• Size LxHxD: 28.8 x 34.2 x 12.6 mm
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue
number
Relay
type
Voltage of
the coil (V)
Drop out
voltage
Resistance of
the coil ( Ω )
Socket
type
Contact
form
Packing/
Box (pcs)
+ 3 standard
2 extended 57100 EL-14F-LS 12V DC 1.2 270 EL05A-E 1Z 20/300
57101 EL-14F-LS 24V DC 2.4 1100 EL05A-E 1Z 20/300
57102 EL-14F-LS 230V AC 69.0 23000 EL05A-E 1Z 20/300
Type EL-14F-LS/ 1Z
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | INTERFACE RELAYS

Catalogue Relay type Voltage of Drop out Resistance of Socket Contact Packing/
number the coil (V) voltage the coil ( Ω ) type form Box (pcs)
57103 EL-14F-LS 12V DC 1.2 270 EL08A-E 2Z 20/300
57104 EL-14F-LS 24V DC 2.4 1100 EL08A-E 2Z 20/300
57105 EL-14F-LS 230V AC 69.0 23000 EL08A-E 2Z 20/300
Type EL-14F-LS/ 2Z
BASES FOR INTERFACE RELAYS EL-14F-LS SERIES

TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated load:
¾ EL05A-E: 10A
¾ EL08A-E: 16A
• Rated voltage: 300V AC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
• Wire size: 0.5-2.5mm2
Catalogue Socket type Dimensions Number of Number of Packing/Box

number (mm) terminals (pcs.) contacts (pcs)
57106 EL05A-E 15.8x73x29 1NO+1NC 5 10/240
57107 EL08A-E 15.8x73x29 2NO+2NC 8 10/240
Type EL05A-E/ 5 Type EL05A-E/ 8
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
POWER RELAYS
AUTOMATION | POWER RELAYS
POWER RELAY TYPE EL-40FN, 40A

Power relays are reliable problem solvers when it comes to switching high currents. They have an
electromagnet to open or close a circuit when the input (coil) is correctly excited.
FEATURES TECHNICAL DATA
• Slim size. • Rated load: 40A.
• With LED indicator. • Rated voltage: 12V DC; 24V DC; 230V AC
• Two type mounting: On DIN rail or quick • Insulation resistance: ≤1000MΩ
screw connection. • Dielectric strength
• Size LxHxD: 40A: 48.8 x 68 x 48.8mm
EL-40F
Catalogue Relay Voltage of Rated Drop out Resistance Contact Number of Packing/
number type the coil (V) load (A) voltage of the coil (Ω) form contacts Box (pcs)
57120 EL-40F 12V DC 40 1.2 72 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300
57121 EL-40F 24V DC 40 2.4 288 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300
57122 EL-40F 250V DC 40 72.0 19400 at 220V 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
POWER RELAY TYPE EL-60F, 60A
AUTOMATION | POWER RELAYS

TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated load: 60A.
• Rated voltage: 12V DC; 24V DC; 230V AC
• Insulation resistance: ≤1000MΩ
• Dielectric strength
• Size LxHxD: 45.8 x 64 x 45mm
Catalogue Relay Voltage of Rated Drop out Resistance Contact Number of Packing/
number type the coil (V) load (A) voltage of the coil (Ω) form contacts Box (pcs)
57123 EL-60F 12V DC 60 1.2 72 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300
57124 EL-60F 24V DC 60 2.4 288 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300
57125 EL-60F 250V DC 60 72.0 19400 at 220V 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300
EL-60F
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INDUSTRIAL SOLID STATE RELAYS (SSR)
Documents corresponding Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch
to the product: devices with reliable ON/OFF performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The non-
EN 60947-5-1; contact electronic switch is optically separated from the input signal by a photoelectric coupler.
EN 61810 This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of the devices small overall size. Another
important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending on the input signal
value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can
work at comparatively high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. SSR have
transparent plastic covers to additionally improve their safety level. The SSR use is connected
with considerable heat emissions, so measures must be taken to dispense the excessive thermal
energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through application of specially deigned radiators. The
correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is made by calculating the heat
generation capacity with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A. The heat
removal surface is estimated with the help of the graphic:
TECHNICAL DATA
• Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz or the
solid state
voltage regulators
• Rated output current: from 10А to 60А
• Insulating voltage: 1000 MΩ /min (500V)
• Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz
• Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min
• Leakage current: <2mA
• Turn-on time: <10ms
• Operating temperature: -5°С + 65°С
• Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
Note: The relay output must be supplied with a varistor to ensure its over-voltage protection, whenever
RRS is used to control inductive loads.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue Type Relay Type Control Output Number of Output Packing/
+ 3 standard
2 extended number Voltage (V) Voltage (V) phases Current Box (pcs)
(А)
57710 ZG3NC - 2 - 10B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 10 10 / 100
57720 ZG3NC - 2 - 20B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 20 10 / 100
57725 ZG3NC - 2 - 25B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 25 10 / 100
57740 ZG3NC - 2 - 40B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 40 10 / 100
57760 ZG3NC - 2 - 60B SSR 3-32VDC 230VАC 1 60 10 / 100
57713 ZG3NC - 3 -10B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 10 10 / 100
57723 ZG3NC - 3 - 20B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 20 10 / 100
57735 ZG3NC - 3 - 25B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 25 10 / 100
57743 ZG3NC - 3 - 40B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 40 10 / 100
57763 ZG3NC - 3 - 60B SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 2 60 10 / 100
Catalogue Type Relay Type Control Output Number of Output Packing/

number Voltage (V) Voltage (V) phases Current Box (pcs)
(А)
57831 ZG33 - 3 - 10В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 10 1 / 30
57832 ZG33 - 3 - 20В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 20 1 / 30
57833 ZG33 - 3 - 25В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 25 1 / 30
57834 ZG 33 - 3 - 40В SSR 3-32VDC 400VАC 3 40 1 / 30
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | MEASUREMENT DEVICES

MEASUREMENT DEVICES
Documents corresponding DIGITAL VOLTMETER/AMPEREMETER EKDP 15 A/V

to the product:
Standard EN 61010-1 Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types:
• Ampere meter
• Voltmeter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers
with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and
electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement
range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current (AD,DV) and
alternating current (AA,VA) quantities.
• Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz • DIN-rail
• Inlet signal:
¾ Operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the
range is adjusted from inside)
¾ Operating as ampere meter: 5 – 2000A (the
• Consumption: <4VA
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz
(1min)
• Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
• Display: LCD
• Weight: 150gr
Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used

number
50117A EKDP-15AA
H
88
W
36
L
64
D
45
(pcs)
1 / 100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
50117D EKDP-15DA 88 36 64 45 1 / 100
50116A EKDP-15AV 88 36 64 45 1 / 100
50116D EKDP-15DV 88 36 64 45 1 / 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Documents corresponding DIGITAL VOLTMETER/ AMPERE METER AND

to the product:
Standard EN 61010-1 FREQUENCY METER EKDP7
Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the
following types:
• Ampere meter:
EKDP7 – AA – ampere meter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DA – ampere meter for direct current
• Voltmeter:
EKDP7 – AV – voltmeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DV – voltmeter for direct current
• Frequency meter:
EKDP7 – Hz – frequency meter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers
with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and
electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement
range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure direct current and alternating current
quantities.
• Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz • On the front pane
• Inlet signal:
¾ Operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the
¾ Operating as ampere meter: 5 – 2000A
(the range is adjusted from inside(the range is
adjusted from inside)
• Consumption: <5A
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz
(1min)
• Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Display: LCD
• Weight: 130gr
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Note: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current
device and a measurement shunt for direct current.

number H W H1 D L (pcs)
50106 EKDP7-AV 72 72 68 6 42 1/84
50107 EKDP7-AA 72 72 68 6 42 1/84
50108 EKDP7-DV 72 72 68 6 42 1/84
50109 EKDP7-DA 72 72 68 6 42 1/84
50110 EKDP7-HZ 72 72 68 6 42 1/84
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DIGITAL ROUND VOLTMETER/ AMPERE METER AND FREQUENCY
METER EL-ED16R
Catalogue Type Range Diameter (mm) Packing /
number Box (pcs)
401553 Voltmeter AC 12-500V 22 10/500
401554 Ampere meter AC 0-100A 22 10/500
401555 Frequency meter AC 35-99 HZ 22 10/500
DIGITAL SQUARE VOLTMETER/ AMPERE METER AND

FREQUENCY METER EL-ED16S
Catalogue Type Range Diameter (mm) Packing/
number Box (pcs)
401556 Voltmeter AC 12-500V 22 10/500
401557 Ampere meter AC 0-100A 22 10/500
401558 Frequency meter AC 35-99 HZ 22 10/500
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DIN RAIL MOUNTED KWH METERS
Documents corresponding Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy
to the product: measurement. Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct
Standard IEC 62052-11; IEC measurement of the real consumption of electric power and the results are shown on the LCD
62053-21; IEC 62056-21 display. The system doesn’t need any additional adjustment or calibration. The range includes
single and multi-tariff models.
Catalogue Type Measuring Number of Meter Voltage Overall Packing/Box

number range Tariffs constant (V) dimensions (pcs)
(imp/kWh) H/W/D
(mm)
50213 EL-45SA 5A(40A) 1 2000 230 116 /18/ 59 1/10

(imp/kWh) H/W/D
(mm)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
50216 EL-100SA-U 10A(100A) 1 1600 230 100 /76/ 65 1/60
+ 3 standard
2 extended

(imp/kWh) H/W/D
(mm)
50217 EL-024 3x20A (100A) 1 400 3x220/380 100/76/65 1/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SINGLE PHASE MULTI TARIFF ELECTRIC/ENERGY METER 10(80)A, ADL200
ADL200 single-phase electric meter is designed for single-phase energy measurement on low
voltage system.The meter meet the related technical requirements of electronic meter in the
IEC62053-21, IEC62053-22 standards.
• Measurement: • Rated voltage: 220-264 V AC / 50Hz
¾ kWh, • Nominal input current: 10A
¾ Voltage, • Maximum current: 80A
¾ Current; • Power consumption: <10VA
¾ Active power; • Measuring accuracy: Class 1
¾ Reactive power; • Tariff numbers: 4
¾ Apparent power; • Measuring range: 000000.00~999999.99kWh
¾ Power factor; • Size LxWxH: 36x90x65mm
¾ Frequency • Working temperature: -25°C~55°C
• LED display: 8 bits section • Relative humidity: ≤95% ( No condensation)
• Communication interface: RS485 • Altitude: up to 2500m
• Communication protocol: MODBUS-RTU
Catalogue Type Measuring Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/

number range (V) L W H Box (pcs)
50219 ADL200 10A(80A) 154-264V AC 36 90 65 1/36
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREE PHASE MULTI TARIFF ELECTRIC ENERGY METER 10(80)A, ADL400
n communication
ADL400 is a smart meter designed for power supply system, industrial and mining enterprises and
address utilities to calculate the electricity consumption and manage the electric demand. It features the
Baud rate 1200bps~19200bps high precision, small size and simple installation. It integrates the measurement of all electrical pa-
envir working
-25℃~+55℃ rameters with the comprehensive electricity metering and management provides various data on
on temperature
me
previous 48 months, checks the 31st harmonic content and the total harmonic content. It is fitted
Relative humidity ≤95℅(No condensation) with RS485 communication port and adapted to MODBUS-RTU .ADL400 can be used in all kinds of
nt
control systems, SCADA systems and energy management systems.
5 Dimension drawings
FUNCTIONS
• Measurement of electrical parameters:
kWh; voltage; current; active power ( positive
nication
and negative); reactive power ( positive and
ress negative); apparent power; power factor and
d rate 1200bps~19200bps frequency
king
-25℃~+55℃ • Measurement of harmonics: 2-31st voltage
erature
and current harmonic
humidity ≤95℅(No condensation) • Number of tariffs: 4
• LED display: 12 bits section
rawings • Key programing: 3keys to communication
and set parameters
• Multi-tariff and functions: adapt 4 time zones,
2 time interval list, 14 time interval by day and
Fig1 direct connect 4 tariff rates
• Max. demand and occurrence time
• Frozen data on last 48 months, last 90 days
• Communication interface: RS485
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 3×100V; 3×380V; 3×57.7/100V; • Pulse constant: 400imp/kWh,10000imp/
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
3 standard
3×220/380V
• Frequency: 45-65Hz, error±0.2%
kWh(Correspond with the basic current)
• Range of communication address:
+ 2 extended
• Nominal input current: 3×1(6)A; 3×10(80)A Modbus-RTU: 1~247
Fig1 direct connect • Power consumption: < 1VA Single phase rated • Baud rate: 1200~19200bps
current • Size LxWxH: 72x65x90 mm
Fig2 connect via CT • Energy pulse output: 1 active photocoupler • Working temperature: -25oC~55oC
output
Note：The torque of direct connect should not be greater than 3-4N·m，and the torque of connect • Relative humidity: ≤95% ( No condensation)
via CT should not be greater than 1.5-2N·m。 • kWh Class: 0.5 • Altitude: up to 2500m
• Accuracy class: Error±0.2%
6 Wiring and installing • Time error: ≤0.5s/d
• Width of pulse: 80±20ms
6.1 Wiring sample of voltage and current
-3-
Catalogue Type Measuring Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/
number range (V) L W H Box (pcs)
50212 ADL400 3×1(6)A / 3×220/380V 72 65 90 1/36
3×10(80)A
Fig2 connect via CT
direct connect should not be greater than 3-4N·m，and the torque of connect
greater than 1.5-2N·m。
nstalling
le of voltage and current

-3-
ELMARK
address. See Chapter 6.3 for details.
3.Installation wiring instructions GO TO THE

4.1 Outline and mounting cutout size 1st PAGE
Picture 3
faceplate size housing size cutout size
Outline
width height width height depth width height
72 square 75 75 66.5 66.5 94.3 67 67
96 square 96 96 90 90 77.8 92 92
MULTI FUNCTIONAL/ TARIFF PROGRAMMABLE METER AMC96L-E4/KC
FOR BUILD-IN MOUNTING
AMC series AC multi-function meter is commonly found in larger homes and businesses, our
s compatible with dlt645 and only needs to set the corresponding
Three Phase Panel Meter is a three-phase power meter with a data logger function for real-time
and long-term three-phase power measurement of currents. It integrates the measurement of
power parameters as well as power monitoring and evaluation management in one unit. When it
ns is installed in your home, the power consumed in your home remains the same and it can be used
ze
with smaller and cheaper wiring systems for stable monitoring in environments with lower volt-
ages. It is therefore widely used in power systems, industrial and mining enterprises, intelligent
Picture 3
buildings
Figure 1 AMC72 appearance size and other areas with power monitoring needs.
size housing size cutout size
Programmable meter AMC96L-E4/KC also have a wide range of peripheral interface functions,
height width height depth width height allowing you to choose your own according to your needs. They are also designed with switching
75 66.5 66.5 94.3 67 67 inputs and relay outputs for easy remote control of circuit breakers, making them very easy to use.
96 90 90 77.8 92 92
FUNCTIONS
• Measurement of electrical parameters:
kWh, voltage, current; active power ( positive
and negative); reactive power ( positive and
negative); apparent power; power factor and
frequency
• Measurement of harmonics: 2-31st voltage
and current harmonic
• Number of tariffs: 4
• True RMS Measurements
• Max/Min Log with Timestamp
• 12 bits
Figure 2 AMC96 appearance sizesection LSD display
Figure 1 AMC72 appearance size • Internal Optional 4DI&2DO or 2DI&2DO&2AO
• Standard one Energy Pulse Output
• Communication interface: RS485
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated input voltage:
¾ Single phase AC 100V; 400V AC
• Insulation resistance: Input, output end to
machine enclosure >100MΩ 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
¾ Three phase: AC 3×57.7V/100V(100V); • kWh Class: 0.5 + 3 standard
2 extended
3 3×220V/380V(400V); 3×380V/660V(660V) • Accuracy: Class 0.5
(96 size only) • Analog output: 1-5V, 4-20mA
¾ 72 profile not suitable for high voltage • Pulse constant: 10000imp/kWh(settable)
applications • Communication: R S485port, Modbus -RTU
• Connection: protocol, DLT645 protocol (versions 07 and 97)
¾ Single phase: 2-wire • Baud rate: 1200 ~ 38400 bps
¾ Three phase: 3 and 4-wire • Housing size WxHxD: 90x90x77.8mm
Figure 2 AMC96 appearance size • Input Frequency: 45-65Hz • Faceplate size WxHxD: 96x96x90mm
• Switching input: Dry contact input, built-in • Cut-out size WxH: 92x92mm
power supply • Working temperature: -25oC~65oC
• Nominal input current: 1A; 5A • Relative humidity: ≤93% ( No condensation)
• Power consumption: < 0.5VA • Altitude: up to 2000m
Catalogue Type Input Input Housing size (mm) Packing/

number current (A) voltage (V) Box (pcs)
W H D
3 50218 AMC96L-E4/KC 5 100/400/660 90 90 77.8 1/74
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ANALOGUE (POINTER) PANEL METERS SD72 TYPE FOR BUILD-IN
Documents corresponding Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed
to the product: for frequency measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power
Standard EN 60051-1 supply grid, with overall dimensions 72x72mm. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge
measurement schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes of measuring.
ANALOGUE AMPERE METER

Catalogue Type Type of the Precision Range Note Packing/
number measurement class Box (pcs)
system
654010 Ampere meter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-100А Current transfer 100/5 1/100
50128 Ampere meter DC MEMC 1.5 0-5A - 1/50
50129 Ampere meter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50A Outer resistor 60mV 1/50
Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument;
MEMC - magnetic-electrical movable coil
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ANALOGUE VOLTMETER
Catalogue Type Type of the measurement system Precision Range Packing/
number class Box (pcs)
50125 Voltmeter АС* MEMSI 1.5 0-500V 1/50
50130 Voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50V 1/50
50131 Voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-100V 1/20
* Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ANALOGUE FREQUENCY METER
50126 Frequency meter** МЕ 0.5 45-65Hz 1/50
** Possibility for voltage 110V, 230V , 400V
ANALOGUE COSφ METER

50127 Cosφ meter MEMSI 1.5 3P 400V 1/50
MEMC- magnetic-electrical movable coil
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ANALOGUE WATT METER
Catalogue Type Type of the measurement Precision Range Packing/
number system class Box (pcs)
50132 Watt meter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 1P240V 1/25
50133 Watt meter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 3P 3 line 1/25
50134 Watt meter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 3P 4 line 1/25
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CSA-XXX

AUTOMATION | LIMIT SWITCHES
Product conformity The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for
documentation: setting of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion
Standard: EN 60947-1; machines. They feature a vibration-resistant metal shell.
EN 60947-5-1
TECHNICAL DATA
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
• Rated current: 10A active; 4A inductive • Rated voltage: 230V
• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ • Rated current: up to 10A
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): • IP code: IP66
500 000 with active load • Cable input: cable glandPG11
• Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): • Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm²
1 000 000 • Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Catalogue Type Type of the head Power of starting Power of release Switching General Packing/Box
number (g) (g) position movement (pcs)
46А001 CSA - 001 Metal cylinder 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10/90
46А003 CSA - 003 Cylinder with metal roll 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10/90
46А012 CSA - 012 Horizontal lever with metal roll 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10/90
46А031 CSA - 031 Adjustable lever with metal roll 400 100 22.5° 95° 10/80
46А021 CSA - 021 Lever with metal roll 400 100 22.5° 95° 10/80
46А081 CSA - 081 Spring lever 150 50 22.5° 50mm 10/80
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
46А001 46А031
46А003 46А021
46А012 46А081
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES TZ-6XXX

Product conformity The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion
documentation: machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminium shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and
Standard: EN 60947-1; water.
EN 60947-5-1
TECHNICAL DATA
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s
• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ • IP code: IP65
• Contact resistance: 15mΩ • Cable input: cable gland PG11
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): • Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm²
500 000 with active load
10 000 000
Catalogue Type Type of the head Power of Power of Switching General Packing/Box
number starting (g) release (g) position movement (pcs)
466001 TZ-6001 Metal cylinder 350 115 0.5mm 5.5mm 1/50
466101 TZ -6101 Oil-resistant metal cylinder 800 240 2mm 5mm 1/50
466102 TZ -6102 Oil-resistant cylinder with metal roll 500 100 1mm 3.5mm 1/50
466104 TZ -6104 Oil-resistant horizontal lever with metal roll 640 230 5mm 6mm 1/50
466143 TZ -6143 Oil-resistant vertical lever with metal roll 640 230 5mm 6mm 1/50
466106 TZ -6106 Spring lever 150 - 20° - 1/50
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
466001 466104
466101 466143
466102 466106
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CM-1XXX

Product conformity Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or
documentation: for setting the movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable
Standard: EN 60947-1; terminals. They can work at resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have
EN 60947-5-1 high accuracy and can operate at wide variety of speeds.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC • Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/
• Rated current: 15A active; 5A inductive minute
• Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC) • Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s
• Contact Resistance: 5mΩ • Rated voltage: 230V
• Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with non-in- • IP code: IP40
ductive load • Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
• Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000
468105 CM -1307 Metal cylinder 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1/480
468106 CM -1309 Cylinder and transverse metal roll 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1/480
468109 СМ -1308 Cylinder longitudinal metal roll 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1/480
468110 СМ -1305 Metal cylinder 350 114 0.4mm 1.6mm 1/480
468113 CM -1703 Extended metal roll 160 22 7.1mm 1.02mm 1/480
468117 CM -1705 Spring lever 10 3 20mm 5.6mm 1/480
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
468105 468110
468106 468113
468109 468117
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES TZ-8XXX

Product conformity The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport
documentation: lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-
Standard: EN 60947-1; resistant metal shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water.
EN 60947-5-1
TECHNICAL DATA
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
• Insulating resistance: 100MΩ • IP code: IP65
• Contact Resistance: 25mΩ • Cable input: cable gland PG11
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): • Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm
500 000 with active load • Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
5 000 000
468104 TZ -8104 Lever with metal roll 750 100 20° 50° 10/100
468108 TZ -8108 Adjustable lever with metal roll 750 100 20° 50° 10/100
468112 TZ -8112 Cylinder with metal roll 900 150 1.5mm 4.0mm 10/100
468111 TZ -8111 Metal cylinder 900 150 1.5mm 4.0mm 10/100
468107 TZ -8107 Metal rod 750 100 20° 50° 10/100
468167 TZ -8167 Spring lever 150 - 30mm - 10/100
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
468104 468108 468112
468111 468107 468167
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CWL-XXX

Product conformity The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport
documentation: lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic
Standard: EN 60947-1; strength and resistance to oil, water and pressure.
EN 60947-5-1
TECHNICAL DATA
• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC • Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s
• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ • IP code: IP66
• Contact resistance: 15mΩ • Cable input: cable gland
• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 • Metal shell
with active load • Vibration-resistant
10 000 000
Catalogue Type Type of the head Power of Power of Switching General Packing/Box
46LD CWLD Metal cylinder 2720 910 2.0mm 6.4mm 1 / 50
46LD2 CWLD2 Cylinder with metal roll 2720 910 2.0mm 5.6mm 1 / 50
46LCA2-2 CWLCA2-2 Lever with metal roll 1360 227 20° 50° 1 / 50
46LCA12-2Q CWLCA12-2-Q Adjustable lever with metal roll 2720 910 20° 50° 1 / 50
46LCA32-41 CWCA32-41 Fork 1200 - 55° 90±10° 1 / 50
46LNJ CWLNJ Oil-resistant spring lever 150 - 28mm 90±10° 1 / 50
46LCL CWLCL Metal rod 142 28 20° 50° 1 / 50
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
46LD
46LD2 46LCA12-2Q 46LCL
46LCA2-2 46LCA32-41 46LNJ
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CZ93-XX

Product conformity Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems
documentation: with high safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while
Standard: EN 60947-1; the safety key is mounted to the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full
EN 60947-5-1 interlocking is achieved. Safety key interlock switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load,
3A lamp load and 5A inductive load. They have high operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit
Type of the contact system switches are available in two versions depending on the operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC
TECHNICAL DATA
• Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC
• Rated current: 10A active; 3A inductive • Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000
• Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at • Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/
500VDC) minute
• Contact Resistance: 25mΩ • Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s
• Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non-in- • Rated voltage: 230V
ductive load • IP code: IP65
Catalogue Type Key type Power of Power of Switching General Key Actuating Packing/Box
46CZ08 CZ-93BPG01 CZ93-K1 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Horizontal 10 / 100
46CZ09 CZ-93CPG01 CZ93-K1 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Horizontal 10 / 100
46CZ10
46CZ11
CZ-93BPG02
CZ-93CPG02
CZ93-K2
CZ93-K2
147N
147N
29.4N
29.4N
6 mm
6 mm
28mm
28mm
Vertical
Vertical
10 / 100
10 / 100
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
46CZ12 CZ-93BPG03 CZ93-K3 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Adjustable 10 / 100
46CZ13 CZ-93CPG03 CZ93-K3 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Adjustable 10 / 100
Catalogue Type Key Actuating Packing/Box

number (pcs)
46CZ931 CZ93-K1 Horizontal 1/100
46CZ932 CZ93-K2 Vertical 1/100
46CZ933 CZ93-K3 Adjustable 1/100
46CZ08 / Key type CZ93-K1

46CZ09/ Key type CZ93-K1
46CZ10/ Key type CZ93-K2 46CZ12/ Key type CZ93-K3

46CZ11/ Key type CZ93-K2 46CZ13/ Key type CZ93-K3
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | PROXIMITY SENSOR
ALL-PURPOSE PROXIMITY SWITCH – SERIES LM XX
Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of metal elements
motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the
speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature
a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
• Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
• Precision of repetition: 0.01
• Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +65˚С
• Gearing speed: 5mm/s
• Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
• IP code: IP 67
Catalogue Type Start Power Type of Type of Output Packing /

number distance supply transition contact load Box (pcs)
(mm) voltage
46LM 8-32NA EL-LM8-3002NA 2 15~30 VDC NPN NO 130 mA 2 / 200
46LM 8-32NB EL-LM8-3002NB 2 15~30 VDC NPN NC 130 mA 2 / 200
46LM 8-32PA EL-LM8-3002PA 2 15~30 VDC PNP NO 130 mA 2 / 200
46LM 8-32PB EL-LM8-3002PB 2 15~30 VDC PNP NC 130 mA 2 / 200
46LM 8-22A EL-LM8-2002A 2 90~230VAC SCR NO 150 mA 2 / 200
EL-LM8
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
(mm) voltage
EL-LM12

(mm) voltage
46LM 12-44A EL-LM12-4002A 2 230VAC Inductive NO 100 mA 2 / 200
46LM 12-46A EL-LM12-4004A 4 230VAC Inductive NO 300 mA 2 / 200
EL-LM12
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

(mm) voltage
EL-LM18

(mm) voltage
46LM 18-44A EL-LM18-4006A 5 230VAC inductive NO 100 mA 1 / 100
46LM 18-48A EL-LM18-4008A 8 230VAC inductive NO 300 mA 1 / 100
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
EL-LM18

(mm) voltage
EL-LM22
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CAPACITIVE SENSORS – SERIES CM XX
Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two coaxial electrodes, a
condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects
depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on
the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid
which is oil and water resistant.
TECHNICAL DATA
• IP code: IP 54

(mm) voltage
46CM 12-32NA EL-CM12-3004NA 0~4 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100
46CM 12-32NB EL-CM12-3004NB 0~4 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100
46CM 12-32PA EL-CM12-3004PA 0~4 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100
46CM 12-32PB EL-CM12-3004PB 0~4 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100
EL-CM12
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended Catalogue Type Start Power Type of Type of Output Packing /
(mm) voltage
46CM 18-38NA EL-CM18-3008NA 0~8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100
46CM 18-38NB EL-CM18-3008NB 0~8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100
46CM 18-38PA EL-CM18-3008PA 0~8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100
46CM 18-38PB EL-CM18-3008PB 0~8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100
46CM 18-28A EL-CM18-2008A 0~8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1/100
EL-CM18

(mm) voltage
46CM 24-12NA EL-CM24-3012NA 8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100
46CM 24-12NB EL-CM24-3012NB 8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100
46CM 24-12PA EL-CM24-3012PA 8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100
46CM 24-12PB EL-CM24-3012PB 8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100
46CM 24-12A EL-CM24-2012A 8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1/100
EL-CM24
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

(mm) voltage
46SM 12-31NA EL-SM12-3110NA 10 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 2/200
46SM 12-31NB EL-SM12-3110NB 10 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 2/200
46SM 18-31PA EL-SM18-3110PA 10 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100
46SM 18-31PB EL-SM18-3110PB 10 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100
46XM 18-35A EL-XM18-305PMI 5 15~30 VDC inductive NO 100 mA 1/100
46XM 18-35B EL-XM18-305PMU 5 15~30 VDC inductive NC 100 mA 1/100
Note: Sensor of Hall
EL-SM12

(mm) voltage
46XM 24-38A EL-XM24-308PMI 8 15~30 VDC inductive NO 300 mA 1/100
46XM 24-38B EL-XM24-308PMU 8 15~30 VDC inductive NC 300 mA 1/100
Note: MI - current type; MU - voltage type
EL-XM24
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | PHOTO-ELECTRICAL SENSOR
PHOTO-ELECTRICAL SENSOR
Photo-electrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance
of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation – inside the sensor there is a photo signal emitter and
receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types
of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and
NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water
resistant.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power supply voltage: 15~30 VDC
• IP code: IP 67
Catalogue Type Start Type of Type of Type of Packing / Box

number distance transition contact sensor (pcs)
46G12A071 EL-G12-3A07NA 70 mm NPN Ø12; l=50 Diffuse 1/100
46G12A072 EL-G12-3A07PA 70 mm PNP Ø12; l=50 Diffuse 1/100
EL-G12
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
46G183B11 EL-G18-3B2NA 2 m NPN Ø18; l=70 Reflector 1/100
EL-G18 46G183B12 EL-G18-3B2PA 2 m PNP Ø18; l=70 Reflector 1/100
46G185C11 EL-G18-3C5NA 5 m NPN Ø18; l=70 Truth beam 1/100
46G185C12 EL-G18-3C5PA 5 m PNP Ø18; l=70 Truth beam 1/100

46G305C11 EL-G30-3C101NA 10 m NPN Ø22; l=70 Truth beam 1/52
EL-G30
46G305C12 EL-G30-3C101PA 10 m PNP Ø22; l=70 Truth beam 1/52
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | PHOTO-ELECTRICAL SENSOR

Catalogue Type Start Type of Type of Type of Packing/ Box
46G35A102 EL-G35-3A50PA 500 mm PNP NO Diffuse 1/100
46G353B11 EL-G35-3B3NA 3 m NPN NO Reflector 1/100
46G353B12 EL-G35-3B3PA 3 m PNP NO Reflector 1/100
EL-G35

46G50A101 EL-G50-3A30NA 500 mm NPN NO Diffuse 1/100
46G50A102 EL-G50-3A30PA 500 mm PNP NO Diffuse 1/100
46G503B11 EL-G50-3B4NA 4 m NPN NO Reflector 1/100
46G503B12 EL-G50-3B4PA 4 m PNP NO Reflector 1/100
46G505C11 EL-G50-3C5NA 5 m NPN NO Truth beam 1/50
46G505C12 EL-G50-3C5PA 5 m PNP NO Truth beam 1/50
EL-G50
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended

46BZJ211 EL-BZJ-211 10 mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1/50
46BZJ311 EL-BZJ-311 9mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1/50
46BZJ411 EL-BZJ-411 9mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1/50
EL-BZJ
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
POWER SUPPLIES
AUTOMATION | POWE SUPPLIES
The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage reduction and rectification units ideally suited
to provide stable power supply of systems and equipment for contact-free movement monitoring
elements (such as inductive, capacity and photo sensors, logic elements and systems, etc.). They
have small overall dimensions and can be installed on a DIN rail. The power units have metal or
plastic cases resistant to vibrations and plastic oiland waterproof covers. They are able to provide
stable output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage. Devices have built-in overload
and short circuit protection, allowing short time overload of up to 130%. Power supplies are
available with various output voltages (5, 12, 15 and 24 V DC) and different output power rates.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC • IP code: IP44
• Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output • Power indicator
voltage • Installation: DIN rail
• Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output • Cooling: Free air cooling convection
power
• Terminals: Input – 2 screw terminals; Output: 4
screw terminals;
Catalogue Type Output Output Tolerance Power Dimensions W/H/L Packing /

number Voltage Load (W) (mm) Box (pcs)
(V) (A)
46DR455 DR - 45 -5 5 5 ±2% 25 78 / 93 / 56 1/50
46DR4512 DR - 45 - 12 12 3.5 ±1% 42 78 / 93 / 56 1/50
46DR4515 DR - 45 - 15 15 2.8 ±1% 42 78 / 93 / 56 1/50
46DR4524 DR - 45 - 24 24 2 ±1% 48 78 / 93 / 56 1/16
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
DR - 45
Catalogue Type Output Output Tolerance Power Dimensions W/H/L Packing /

number Voltage Load (W) (mm) Box (pcs)
(V) (A)
46DR7512 DR - 75 -12 12 6.3 ±2% 75 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 1/18
46DR7524 DR - 75 - 24 24 3.2 ±1% 75 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 1/18
46DR2424 DRP - 240 - 24 24 10 ±1% 240 125.5 / 125.3 / 100 1/12
DRP-240-24
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | FLOAT SWATCHES

FLOAT SWITCHES
The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx series are intended for mounting on pumping
control panels. They do not use any additional sensors, but conductive probes to contact the
liquid. The unit sends low (harmless) voltage signals to the probes and once a contact between a
probe and liquid is established, the unit changes its contactors’ state. Units are available in three
variants with different number of control contacts suitable for different applications. Each contact
can transfer current of up to 5A, which is enough to ensure control over the powerful pumps’
contactors or to directly control pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. The automatic level control
units can be installed on a DIN rail.
Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed units for direct pump control. They are intended
for continuous liquid level maintenance in pools, tanks or ponds exercised through direct control
of the pumping in or out process in the respective reservoir. They are pre-wired and depending
on the chosen configuration can control either the pumping in, or pumping out of the reservoir.
They allow direct control of single phase pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. Float switches are
waterproof.
Catalogue Type Number of Output Accuracy Operating Packing / Box

number probes (No. of Load (A) Voltage (V) (pcs)
levels)
46DW001 DHC1Y - S 1 5 ±1% 230 1/100
46DW002 DHC1Y - SD 3 5 ±1% 230 1/100
46DW003 DHC1Y - T* 1 5 ±1% 230 1/100
*Note: 2 pumps control
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
DHC1Y
Catalogue Type Number of Output Accuracy Operating Packing / Box

number probes (No. of Load (A) Voltage (V) (pcs)
levels)
46DW004 QW - M 15 - 3 2 6 ±1% 230 1 / 30
46DW005 QW - 70AB 2 4 ±1% 230 1 / 20
QW - M 15 - 3
QW - 70AB
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | ROTARY SWITCHES
ROTARY SWITCHES LW26 SERIES
Documents corresponding The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with
to the product: commutated current from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric
Standard: EN 60947-1; switching on which is realized through turning of the handle to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal
EN 60947-3-1 operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are special
rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors,
electric welding machines and other consumers.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz • IP code:
• Insulation voltage: 690V ¾ IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V a panel
• Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commuta- ¾ IP65 for the breakers offered in a box
tion cycles • Cable connection: screw joining
• Operating temperature: -10 ÷ +65°C • Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N
• Humidity: 35 – 85% RH • Maximum section of the power supply con-
• Commuting capacity: up to 160A according ductors: according to the dimensions table
to the tables • Weight: according to the number of the
• Plastic: UV rays wear resistance contacts
MOUNTING
• directly to the control panel
• thickness of the surface to which it is
mounted: max
5mm
Type Front panel Joining Overall dimensions (mm) Mounting dimensions

conductor (mm)
(mm²) А B C L a b d1 d2
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY LW26-20 M1 panel 1x2.5 48 48 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
+ 3 standard
2 extended
M1 panel with 48 60 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
inscription field
LW26-25 M1 panel 1x4.0 48 48 45.2 23+12.8n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
LW26-32 M2 panel 1x6.0 64 64 58 29.2 + 12.8n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5
LW26-63 M2 panel 1x16 64 64 66 29.2 + 21.5n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5
LW26-125 M3 panel 1x35 88 88 84 35 + 26.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6
LW26-160 M3 panel 1x50 88 88 88 35 + 32.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6
* n - number of modules
Catalogue Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing /

number Box (pcs)
492101 LW26 - 10Q Q10 10 2 1/100
492161 LW26 - 16Q three-poles switching on; 16 2 1/100
motor starting and stopping;
492201 LW26 - 20Q voltage turning on/off to the 20 2 1/100
492251 LW26 - 25Q consumers 25 2 1/100
492321 LW26 - 32Q 32 2 1/72
492631 LW26 - 63Q 63 2 1/30
492951 LW26 - 125Q 125 2 1/24
492961 LW26 - 160Q 160 2 1/27
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue number Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing/
Box (pcs)
492207 LW26GS - 20/04 Q11 20 2 1/100
492257 LW26GS - 25/04 three-poles switching over; motor 25 2 1/100
starting and stopping; voltage
492327 LW26GS - 32/04 turning on/off to the consumers; 32 2 1/72
492637 LW26GS - 63/04 possibility for access control 63 2 1/30
Catalogue number Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing /

Box (pcs)
492202 LW26 - 20N N11 20 3 1/100
492252 LW26 - 25N 3-position – 2 start positions and 1 25 3 1/100
stop;for motor reversing
492322 LW26 - 32N 32 3 1/64
492632 LW26 - 63N 63 3 1/48
492952 LW26 - 125N 125 3 1/24
492962 LW26 - 160N 160 3 1/18
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Catalogue number Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing /

Box (pcs)
492253 LW26 - 25S S19 25 4 1 / 100
492633 LW26 - 63S 3-position – 2 start positions and 63 4 1 / 30
1 stop; for two speed motor control;
492953 LW26 - 125S switching over 125 4 1 / 24
492963 LW26 - 160S between charging* 160 4 1 / 18
Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Catalogue Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing/

number Box (pcs)
492025 LW26 - 25 SD S21 25 4 1/100
492063 LW26 - 63 SD 3-position switching on star/delta 63 4 1/30

number Box (pcs)
492324 LW26 - 32H H5881/3 – 85 32 3 1/64
5881/3 for welding transformer windings
492634 LW26 - 63H switching over 63 3 1/48
5881/3
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

number Box (pcs)
492205 LW26 - 20 YH5/3 YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching 20 3 1/72
over
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)
492206 LW26 - 20 LH3/3 LH3/3 - 58 for ampere meter 20 3 1/100
switching on to current
transformers
Catalogue number Type Scheme IP code: Packing/ Box (pcs)

492037 LW26 - 20-25-Q Box for LW26-20/25 IP 42 1/68
492038 LW26 - 32-Q Box for LW26-32 IP 42 1/30
492039 LW26 - 20-25-DIN Adaptor for DIN-rail 15/1500
for LW26-20/25
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Catalogue Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box

number (pcs)
492028 LW26 4.I7168/7 4.I7168/7 20 7 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Catalogue Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing/ Box

number (pcs)
492029 LW26 4.H6518/5 4.H6518/5 25 5 1/100
Catalogue Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box

number (pcs)
492030 LW30-20 LW30-20 20 3 1 / 32
492031 LW30-32 LW30-32 32 3 1 / 32
492033 LW30-40 LW30-40 40 3 1 / 32
492034 LW30-63 LW30-63 63 3 1 / 32
* Note: Possibility for access control
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Catalogue Type Scheme IP code: In (A) Levels Packing / Box

number (pcs)
492032 LW30-32 LW30-32 IP54 32 3 1 / 30
* Note: Possibility for access control
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS

BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS
Documents corresponding These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in
to the product: industrial automation systems. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to
Standard: EN 60947-1; control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal
EN 60947-5-1 lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time
current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their
contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which
operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm² can be joined.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz ¾ at closing: 20N
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; ¾ at opening: 8N
• Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC) • Operating temperature: -20 - +65°C
• Short circuit protection: safety device • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
10A gG outside in the circuit • Tightening moment of the joining conductors:
• Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commuta- 0.15Nm
tion cycles • Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1;
• Power of mechanical compression: 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm²
MOUNTING
• to a flat metal or plastic surface with thick-
ness: max 4mm
• opening with size: Ø 22.5mm5mm
BUTTON ROUND WITH SPRING REVERSE

Catalogue
number
Type Type of contacts Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour Packing / Box
(pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
401025 EL-EA25 NO+NC 6 black 10/500
401030 EL-EA31 NO 6 green 10/500
401040 EL-EA42 NC 6 red 10/500
BUTTON ROUND WITH SPRING REVERSE AND SILICON LID- IP44

Catalogue Type Type of contacts Rated current Colour Packing / Box
number (А) at 400V (pcs)
401026 EL-EA25 NO+NC 6 black 10/500

401033 EL-EA31 NO 6 green 10/500
401041 EL-EA42 NC 6 red 10/500
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCH WITH ARREST

Catalogue Type Type of contacts Rated Colour Packing / Box
number current (А) (pcs)
at 400V
401425 EL-ED25 NO+NC 6 Black 10/500
BUTTON WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE

Catalogue Type Type of Rated current Colour Diameter Packing/ Box
number contacts (А) at 230V (mm) (pcs)
401546 EL-2211T 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800
Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass | IP65

* Note: release with spinning
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ROUND BUTTONS WITH LED INDICATOR- LATCHING

401547 EL-2211DZR 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800
401548 EL-2211DZG 1NO+1NC 5 Green 22 20/800
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ROUND MOMENTARY BUTTON
Catalogue Type Type of contacts Rated current Diameter (mm) Packing/Box
401549 EL-2211F 1NO+1NC 5 22 20/800
TWO POSITION SWITCH WITH ARREST

401550 EL-22X2 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800
* Note: release with spinning
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
TWO POSITION KEY SWITCHES WITH ARREST

Catalogue Type Type of Rated current Colour Diameter Packing / Box
401551 EL-22Y2 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800
401552 EL-22Y3 2NO+2NC 5 Green 22 20/800
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
LED INDICATORS
Catalogue number Type Voltage (V) Colour Packing / Box (pcs)
401123 AD56-22-W-230 230V AC White 10 / 500
401111 AD56-22-W-110 110V AC White 10 / 500
401124 AD56-22-W-24 24V AC/DC White 10 / 500
401211 AD56-22-А-110 110V AC Amber 10 / 500
401224 AD56-22-А-24 24V AC/DC Amber 10 / 500
401223 AD56-22-А-230 230V AC Amber 10 / 500
401323 AD56-22-РG-230 230V AC Green 10 / 500
401311 AD56-22-РG-110 110V AC Green 10 / 500
401324 AD56-22-РG-24 24V AC/DC Green 10 / 500
401523 AD56-22-B-230 230V AC Blue 10 / 500
401511 AD56-22-B-110 110V AC Blue 10 / 500
401524 AD56-22-B-24 24V AC/DC Blue 10 / 500
401723 AD56-22-Y-230 230V AC Yellow 10 / 500
401711 AD56-22-Y-110 110V AC Yellow 10 / 500
401724 AD56-22-Y-24 24V AC/DC Yellow 10 / 500
401423 AD56-22-R-230 230V AC Red 10 / 500
401411 AD56-22-R-110 110V AC Red 10 / 500
401424 AD56-22-R-24 24V AC/DC Red 10 / 500
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
ROUND BUTTONS WITH SPRING REVERSE
+ 3 standard
2 extended
401021 EL 2- BA 21 NO 6 Black 20 / 300
401031 EL 2- BA 31 NO 6 Green 20 / 300
401051 EL 2- BA 51 NO 6 Yellow 20 / 300
401061 EL 2- BA 61 NO 6 Blue 20 / 300
401042 EL 2- BA 42 NC 6 Red 20 / 300
ROUND BUTTONS SWITH SPRING REVERSE

401032 EL 2- BР 31 NO 6 green 20 / 300
401043 EL 2- BР 42 NC 6 red 20 / 300
*Note: IP65 - Provided from silicon lid
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ROUND BUTTONS WITH SPRING REVERSE AND LED INDICATOR
Catalogue Type Voltage (V) Rated current Colour Packing / Box
401474 EL 2- BW3471 24V 6 Red 20 / 200
401374 EL 2- BW3371 24V 6 Green 20 / 200
401574 EL 2- BW3571 24V 6 Yellow 20 / 200
401674 EL 2- BW3671 24V 6 Blue 20 / 200
401473 EL 2- BW3471 110V 6 Red 20 / 200
401373 EL 2- BW3371 110V 6 Green 20 / 200
401573 EL 2- BW3571 110V 6 Yellow 20 / 200
401673 EL 2- BW3671 110V 6 Blue 20 / 200
401471 EL 2- BW3471 230V 6 Red 20 / 200
401371 EL 2- BW3371 230V 6 Green 20 / 200
401571 EL 2- BW3571 230V 6 Yellow 20 / 200
401671 EL 2- BW3671 230V 6 Blue 20 / 200
SWITCHES WITH ARREST

Catalogue Type Type of Rated current Colour Note Packing / Box
number contacts (А) at 400V (pcs)
401421 EL 2- BD 21 1NO 6 Black Two-positions 20 / 200
401433 EL 2- BD 33 2NО 6 Black Three-positions 20 / 200
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
BUTTONS WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE AND WITH KEY

401142 EL2-BS 142 NC 6 Red Release with 15/150
spinning
BUTTONS WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE

401642 EL 2- BС 42 1NС 6 Red Spring reverse 15 / 150
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
BUTTON WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE

Catalogue Type Type of Rated current Colour Packing/Box
401545 EL 2- BS 545 1NС + 1NO 6 Red 15 /150
*Note: release with spinning
CHANGE-OVER SWITCH WITH KEY

Catalogue number Type Type of Rated current (А) Packing/Box (pcs)
contacts at 400V
401121 EL 2- BG 21 1NO 6 20/200
*Note: two-position with switch
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended DOUBLE BUTTONS
Catalogue Type Type of Rated current Voltage (V) Packing/ Box
401844 EL 2- BW8475 1NO+1NС 6 24 AC 20/200
401845 EL 2-BW8475 1NO+1NC 6 230 AC 20/200
*Note: Green and red button + LED indicator
AUXILIARY CONTACTS
Catalogue Type Type of Colour Packing/ Box (pcs)
number contacts
401001 EL02 - BЕ101 1 NO Green 100/1000
401002 EL02 - BЕ102 1 NC Red 100/1000
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

GLIM INDICATOR LAMP
Catalogue Type Voltage (V) Dimensions Base diameter Packing / Box
number (mm) (mm) (pcs)
M030015 EL-1035 220 VAC 10x30 10 1
• Shape and color of the indicator - oval, red
• Case colour: red
• Conductor length: 20mm
TOGGLE SWITCH ON-OFF SPST

Catalogue Type Voltage (V) Rated current LED colour Dimensions Packing / Box
number (A) (mm) (pcs)
M519114 ASW-13 12 VDC 20 Red 30.5х13.5x22 1
• Function: ON/OF
• Leads: 3
• Mounting hole diameter - 12 mm
• Toggle height - 27 mm
• Operating temperature: up - 25 ºC to + 85 ºC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
SWITCH ON-OFF
Catalogue Type Voltage (V) Rated current Colour Dimensions Packing / Box
number (A) (mm) (pcs)
M300001 V 144/B 250 VAC 5 White 26.2x12x14.5 1
• Function: ON/OFF
• Leads: 3
• Mounting hole: 29x11 mm
• Operating temperature: up to 105°C
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DIN-RAIL BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS
Documents corresponding These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command
to the product: boards and panels directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits
Standard EN 60947-1 and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The
EN 60 947-5-1 t signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short
time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their
contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which
operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm² can be joined. There are also designed buttons
combined with lamps.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz • Operating temperature: -20 - +65°C
• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; • Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
• Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC) • Tightening moment of the joining conductors:
• Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG 0.15Nm
outside in the circuit • Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1;
• Rated consumed current (for indicators and 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm²
buttons combined with indicators): <20mA • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance conductors:
• Wear resistance (indicators): >2000h 0.15Nm
• Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 • Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1;
commutation cycles 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm²
• Power of mechanical compression:
¾ At closing: 20N
¾ At opening: 8N MOUNTING
• To a DIN-rail
Catalogue Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current Colour Packing/ Box
number (A) at 400V (pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 401559 ELD-RG-DIN Lamp 230V <20 Red/Green 12/240
+ 3 standard
2 extended
401560 ELD-RGB-DIN Lamp 230V <20 Red/Green/ 12/240
Blue
401500 ELD - G - DIN Lamp 230V <20 Green 12/240
401501 ELD - R - DIN Lamp 230V <20 Red 12/240
401502 ELD - Y - DIN Lamp 230V <20 Yellow 12/240
401503 ELD - B - DIN Lamp 230V <20 Blue 12/240
401504 ELD -W - DIN Lamp 230V <20 White 12/240
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BUTTONS AND SWITCHES WITH BOX
SWITCHING ON 0-1
Catalogue Type IP code Overall dimensions (mm) Type Colour Packing/
number L H W of the Box (pcs)
contact
401134 EL1-B134 IP44 68 68 50 1 NO Black 1/100
1 BUTTON WITH SPRING RETURN

contact
401102 EL1-B102 IP44 68 68 50 1 NO Green 1/100
401132 EL1-BP102 IP65 68 68 50 1 NO Green 1/100
2 BUTTONS WITH SPRING RETURN

contact
401213 EL1-B213 IP44 104 68 50 1 NC
1 NO
1 - Red
1 - Green
1/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
401233 EL1-BP213 IP65 104 68 50 1 NC 1 - Red 1/100 + 3 standard

2 extended
1 NO 1 - Green
3 BUTTONS WITH SPRING RETURN

Catalogue Type IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type Colour Packing/
contact
401339 EL1-B339 IP44 134 68 50 1 NO 1 - Green 1/50
1 NC 1 - Red
1 NO 1 - Green
401349 EL1-BP339 IP65 134 68 50 1 NO 1 - Green 1/50
1 NC 1 - Red
1 NO 1 - Green
EMERGENCY BUTTON WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE Ø40

Catalogue Type IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type Colour Packing /
contact
401174 EL1-B174 IP44 68 68 50 1 NC Red 1 / 100
• Release through turning
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL
DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL MBP TYPE
They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in
different sizes. They are connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as
a remote control of their movement. They are connected directly to the operating cable of the
telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They are designed to provide
protection from dust and moisture IP65.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz • Commuting capacity: up to 6A
• Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles • Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
• Operating temperature: -10 +65°C • IP code: IP65
• Humidity: 35 – 85% RH • Weight: according to the number of the
• Number of contacts: according to the contacts
МВР-Ахххх stop button type number of the buttons
button type:
one-speed (x81) MOUNTING
or two-speed (x91) • directly to the control cable of the telpher
number of buttons (crane)
Catalogue Type Number of Contact block and scheme Packing /

number buttons Emergency For the Box (pcs)
directions
46281 MBP-A281 2 - NO+NC 1/20
46291 MBP-A291 two speed 2 - NO+NC 1/20
46283 MBP-A2813 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
5
46283K MBP-A2813К 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
with switch
+ 3 standard 46294 MBP-A2913 two speed 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
2 extended
46294K МВР-А2913К two speed 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
with switch
46481 MBP-A481 4 - NO+NC 1/20
46483K MBP-A4813К 4+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
with switch
46493 MBP-A4913 two speed 4+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
with switch
46681 MBP-A681 6 - NO+NC 1/20
46683K MBP-A6813K 6+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
with switch
with switch
46881 MBP-A881 8 - NO+NC 1/20
46883K MBP-A8813K 8+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
with switch
46893K МВР-8913К two speed 8+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20
with switch
169 ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS

WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS
The revolving warning lights and towers are devices intended for use as status indicators in
the human-machine control systems. They are suitable for installation on control cabinets and
panels or directly on machines. They are manufactured in different colour combinations to attract
attention of operators working in a given production sector. Warning lights and towers are widely
used in almost any industrial branch. They can be mounted on movable components or such,
creating potential danger and can warn all workers for a critical situation with their blinking light
and siren. These devices are electrically connected through cables, protruding out of the lamp
casing.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 12 VAC/230VAC; 50/60 Hz; • Operating Temperature: - 20°C + 65°C
• Isolation voltage: 660V; 50/60 Hz; • Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
• Impulse voltage stability: 6000V • Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not
• Rated power: see the tables below considered as being harmful to human health
• Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse
INSTALLATION
• Warning lights are fixed to the respective
machine body with the studs protruding from
the light plastic casing.
Catalogue Type Description Voltage Rated Colour Packing /

number (VAC) Power Box (pcs)
(W)
401525R LTE1101 - R Warning light 12 10 Red 1 / 30
401525G LTE1101 - G Warning light 12 10 Green 1 / 30
401525Y LTE1101 - Y Warning light 12 10 Yellow 1 / 30
401526R LTE1101J - R Warning light + siren 12 11 Red 1 / 30
401526G
401526Y
LTE1101J - G
LTE1101J - Y
Warning light + siren
Warning light + siren
12
12
11
11
Green
Yellow
1 / 30
1 / 30
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
402525R LTE1101 - R Warning light 230 8 Red 1 / 30
402525G LTE1101 - G Warning light 230 8 Green 1 / 30
402525Y LTE1101 - Y Warning light 230 8 Yellow 1 / 30
402526R LTE1101J - R Warning light + siren 230 9 Red 1 / 30
402526G LTE1101J - G Warning light + siren 230 9 Green 1 / 30
402526Y LTE1101J - Y Warning light + siren 230 9 Yellow 1 / 30
401527R LTE1161 - R Warning light 12 35 Red 1/8
401527G LTE1161 - G Warning light 12 35 Green 1/8
401527Y LTE1161 - Y Warning light 12 35 Yellow 1/8
402527R LTE1161 - R Warning light 230 28 Red 1/8
402527G LTE1161 - G Warning light 230 28 Green 1/8
402527Y LTE1161 - Y Warning light 230 28 Yellow 1/8
401528 LTA205 - 1 Tower / flashing 12 4 1 - Red 1 / 20
401529 LTA205 - 2 Tower / flashing 12 8 2 - Red/Green 1 / 20
401530 LTA205 - 3 Tower / flashing 12 12 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20
401531 LTA205 - 3J Tower / flashing + 12 12 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20
siren
401532 LTA205 - 5 Tower / flashing 12 18 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ 1 / 20
Blue/Transparent
402528 LTA205 - 1 Tower / flashing 230 6 1 - Red 1 / 20
402529 LTA205 - 2 Tower / flashing 230 8 2 - Red/Green 1 / 20
402530 LTA205 - 3 Tower / flashing 230 10 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20
402531 LTA205 - 3J Tower / flashing + 230 11 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20
siren
402532 LTA205 - 5 Tower / flashing 230 14 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ 1 / 20
Blue/Transparent
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AUTOMATION | WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS
METAL/PLASTIC SIREN
Catalogue Type Voltage (V) Rated Power Sound level Material Packing/ Box
number (W) (dB) (pcs)
401533 MS-290A 230 60 100 Metal 1/24
401541 MS-290B 230 60 100 Plastic 1/24
SIREN
Catalogue Type Voltage (V) Rated Power Sound level (dB) Packing / Box
number (W) (pcs)
401534 MS-390 230 160 120 1 / 10
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended ALARM BELLS
Catalogue number Type Voltage (V) Sound level (dB) Packing / Box (pcs)
401535 CB-4 12 85 1 / 50
401536 CB-4 24 85 1 / 50
401537 CB-4 110 85 1 / 50
401538 CB-4 230 85 1 / 50
FIRE ALARM
Catalogue number Type Voltage (V) Sound level (dB) Packing / Box (pcs)
401540 FA-01 230 120 1 / 100
ELMARK
INSTALLATION
• Industrial plugs and sockets

• Industrial boards
• Modular distribution enclosures
• Distribution boards
• Cable insulation systems
• Cable trunking
• Insulating conduits & Cable
support systems
• Lighting protection
• Distribution boxes
• Cable terminals & Cable
accessories
• Ex-proof installation systems
• Reels, multiplugs, and accessories
• Cables
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | PLUGS AND SOCKETS
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HT/HTN TYPE
Documents corresponding to the Made of special high quality plastic with alloys against aging at sun light exposing and for increas-
product: ing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60309 and
Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2 provide reliable connection
and high protection level against electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP
44/67. They are
designed for surface or flush mounting, movable or fixed type.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated short circuit current: according to the
mounted protection in the boards
• IP code: IP 44/67
• Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
• Plugs and sockets: 6h
Catalogue Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions IP code Packing/
number (mm) Box
A B C
37013 HT-013 16 1P+N+E 230 121 84 53 44 2/10/100
37023 HT-023 32 1P+N+E 230 138 92 63 44 2/10/60
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A B C
37014 HT-014 16 3P+E 400 121 84 51 44 2/10/100
37024 HT-024 32 3P+E 400 138 92 63 44 2/10/60
37034 HT-034 63 3P+E 400 230 109 36 44 2/10
37044 HT-044 125 3P+E 400 295 124 50 44 2/10

number (mm) Box
A B C
37015 HT-015 16 3P+N+E 400 129 92 62 44 2/10/60
37025 HT-025 32 3P+N+E 400 149 97 70 44 2/10/60
37035 HT-035 63 3P+N+E 400 230 109 36 44 2/10
37045 HT-045 125 3P+N+E 400 295 124 50 44 2/10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS HT TYPE IP44

number (mm) Box
A C
37213 HT-213 16 1P+N+E 230 130 96 44 2/10/100
37223 HT-223 32 1P+N+E 230 149 90 44 2/10/60
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A C
37214 HT-214 16 3P+E 400 131 96 44 2/10/100
37224 HT-224 32 3P+E 400 149 90 44 2/10/60
37234 HT-234 63 3P+E 400 230 109 44 2/10
37244 HT-244 125 3P+E 400 290 124 44 2/10

number (mm) Box
A C
37215 HT-215 16 3P+N+E 400 139 90 44 2 / 10 / 60
37225 HT-225 32 3P+N+E 400 154 100 44 2 / 10 / 60
37235 HT-235 63 3P+N+E 400 230 100 44 2 / 10
37245 HT-245 125 3P+N+E 400 290 124 44 2 / 10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FIXED INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HT TYPE IP44

number (mm) Box
A C
37513 HT-513 16 1P+N+E 230 121 79 44 2/10/60
37523 HT-523 32 1P+N+E 230 131 83 44 2/10/60
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A C
37514 HT 514 16 3P+E 400 121 76 44 2/10/60
37524 HT 524 32 3P+E 400 131 83 44 2/10/60

number (mm) Box
A C
37515 HT 515 16 3P+N+E 400 123 79 44 2/10/60
37525 HT 525 32 3P+N+E 400 132 84 44 2/10/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FIXED INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS HT TYPE IP44

number (mm) Box
A C
37113 HT-113 16 1P+N+E 230 126 86 44 2/10/60
37123 HT-123 32 1P+N+E 230 141 97 44 2/10/60
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A C
37114 HT-114 16 3P+E 400 132 91 44 2/10/60
37124 HT-124 32 3P+E 400 141 96 44 2/10/60
37134 HT-134 63 3P+E 400 193 122 44 2/10
37144 HT-144 125 3P+E 400 220 140 44 2/10

number (mm) Box
A C
37115 HT-115 16 3P+N+E 400 129 96 44 2/10/60
37125 HT-125 32 3P+N+E 400 141 98 44 2/10/60
37135 HT-135 63 3P+N+E 400 193 122 44 2/10
37145 HT-145 125 3P+N+E 400 220 140 44 2/10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HTN TYPE IP67

number (mm) Box
A B C
37131 HTN 0131 16 1P+N+E 230 120 71 12 67 1 / 60
37231 HTN 0231 32 1P+N+E 230 150 93 17 67 1 / 40
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A B C
37141 HTN 0141 16 3P+E 400 125 79 12 67 2/60
37241 HTN 0241 32 3P+E 400 150 93 17 67 2/40
37341 HTN 0341 63 3P+E 400 230 109 36 67 10
37441 HTN 0441 125 3P+E 400 230 109 36 67 10

number (mm) Box
A B C
37151 HTN 0151 16 3P+N+E 400 133 87 12 67 2/60
37251 HTN 0251 32 3P+N+E 400 155 99.5 17 67 2/40
37351 HTN 0351 63 3P+N+E 400 230 109 36 67 10
37451 HTN 0451 125 3P+N+E 400 295 124 50 67 10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL SOCKET HTN TYPE IP67

number (mm) Box
A C
37831 HTN 2131 16 1P+N+E 230 131 90 67 2/60
37931 HTN 2231 32 1P+N+E 230 149 90 67 2/40
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A C
37841 HTN 2141 16 3P+E 400 131 76 67 2/60
37941 HTN 2241 32 3P+E 400 149 90 67 2/40
37942 HTN 2341 63 3P+E 400 271 115 67 10
37943 HTN 2441 125 3P+E 400 295 137 67 6

number (mm) Box
A C
37851 HTN 2151 16 3P+N+E 400 139 90 67 2/60
37951 HTN 2251 32 3P+N+E 400 154 100 67 2/40
37952 HTN 2351 63 3P+N+E 400 240 112 67 10
37953 HTN 2451 125 3P+N+E 400 300 126 67 6
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FIXED INDUSTRIAL SOCKET HTN TYPE IP67

number (mm) Box
A B C
37731 HTN 1131 16 1P+N+E 230 101 150 93.5 67 2/40
37631 HTN 1231 32 1P+N+E 230 114 162 93.5 67 2/40
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (mm) Box
A B C
37741 HTN 1141 16 3P+E 400 104 150 93.5 67 2/40
37641 HTN 1241 32 3P+E 400 116 162 93.5 67 2/40
37842 HTN 1341 63 3P+E 400 171 170 230 67 1/10
37844 HTN 1441 125 3P+E 400 171 170 230 67 1/6

number (mm) Box
A B C
37751 HTN 1151 16 3P+N+E 400 107 150 93.5 67 2/40
37651 HTN 1251 32 3P+N+E 400 116 162 93.5 67 2/40
37852 HTN 1351 63 3P+N+E 400 171 170 230 67 10
37854 HTN 1451 125 3P+N+E 400 171 170 230 67 6
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS FOR FLUSH MOUNTING HT TYPE IP44

number (mm) Box
A B C
37413 HT-413 16 1P+N+E 230 70 60 67 44 2/10/60
37423 HT-423 32 1P+N+E 230 80 95 79 44 2/10/60

number (mm) Box
A B C
37414 HT-414 16 3P+E 400 75 86 75 44 2/10/60
37424 HT-424 32 3P+E 400 80 95 79 44 2/10/60

number (mm) Box
37415 HT-415 16 3P+N+E 400

A B
75 85 70
C
44 2/10/60 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
37425 HT-425 32 3P+N+E 400 98 98 83 44 2/10/60 0 extended

number (mm) Box
A B C
37105 HT-105SR 16 German 230 50 63 42 44 500
type
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING

It provides plug presence in electric boards and • Operation temperature: from -10 up to +65°С
easy cabling. • Humidity: up to 85%RH
• Supply voltage: 230V Mounting method:
• Computing option: up to 16А • DIN rail
Catalogue Type Poles Packing / Box
number (pcs)
37004 German type socket for DIN rail German type 5/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | INDUSTRIAL BOARDS
INDUSTRIAL BOARD SYSTEM EC690 SERIES
Documents corresponding to the Distribution boards 690 series can be safely used for temporary installation such as construction
product: sites, markets, fairs, etc. They are entirely made up of UV-resistant halogen free technopolymer on
Standard IEC60670; CEI 23-48; CEI 23-49; ABS- base. They are suitable for outdoor use, thanks to the high impact resistance. The distribution
EN 50102 boards are fit to use in different options- movable with handle or fixed on the wall. The distribution
boards are suitable with sockets with mounting flange with screw hole center distance 60x60mm.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: shock resistant, halogen free technopolymer on ABS base with resistance to UV rays.
• Colour: grey RAL 7035
• IP code: IP65
• Resistance to mechanical shock: IK08-IK10(shocks up to 6-20j)
• Resistance to abnormal heat: up to 650°C( Glow Wire Test, Reference Standard IEC 695-2-1
• Installation temperature range: min-15°C, max+60°C
• DIN rail material: galvanized steel
• Pre-cuts for conduit or cable inlet of different sizes.
• Standards: IEC60670; CEI 23-48; CEI 23-49; EN 50102
• RoHS 2002/95/CE
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 2 VERTICAL SOCKETS
Catalogue Type Number of IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing
number modules W H D pcs/box
53EC69021 EC69021 4 65 105 337 95 1/15
EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 3 VERTICAL SOCKETS

53EC69022 EC69022 4 65 105 430 95 1/13
EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 4 SOCKETS

number modules pcs/box
5
W H D YEARS TOTAL
53EC69023 EC69023 8 65 200 430 95 1/10 WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 6 SOCKETS

53EC69025 EC69025 12 65 320 510 135 1
* All boards are not compatible with all industrial plugs and sockets we offer. Some of the equipment
requires additional adaptation, for this we recommend ordering an equipped panel, according to your
needs, published on the next two pages of the catalog.
For sockets with 60x60mm hole center distance.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 2 VERTICAL SOCKETS,

4 MODULES
Catalogue Empty board IP code
number type
German type 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E
53EC690212A1 EC69021 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690212A2 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 44
53EC690212A3 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 44
53EC690212A4 EC69021 2x16A 44
53EC690212B1 EC69021 1x16A+1x32A 67
53EC690212B2 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 67
53EC690212B3 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 67
• Dimensions W x H x D: 105 x 337 x 95mm
ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 3 VERTICAL SOCKETS,

4 MODULES
number type
German 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E
type
53EC690223A1 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 44
53EC690223A2 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690223A3 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 44
53EC690223A4 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690223A5 EC69022 2x16A 1x16A 44
53EC690223B1 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 67
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
53EC690223B2
53EC690223B3
EC69022
EC69022
1x32A
1x16A+1x32A 1x16A
1x16A+1x32A 67
67
+ 5 standard
0 extended 53EC690223B4 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67
ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 4 SOCKETS,

8 MODULES
number type
type
53EC690234A1 EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690234A2 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 44
53EC690234A3 EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690234A4 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 44
53EC690234A5 EC69023 2x16A 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690234A6 EC69023 2x16A 1x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690234B1 EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67
53EC690234B2 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 67
53EC690234B3 EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67
53EC690234B4 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 67
* If you need equipment with items other than those listed in the kits, please contact your sales
representative or send an inquiry on [email protected], to prepare an individual offer, according
to your needs.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 6 SOCKETS,
12 MODULES
number type
type
53EC690256A1 EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690256A2 EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 44
53EC690256A3 EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690256A4 EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 44
53EC690256A5 EC69025 3x16A 2x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690256A6 EC69025 2x16A 1x16A 2x16A+1x32A 44
53EC690256B1 EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 67
53EC690256B2 EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 67
53EC690256B3 EC69025 2x16A+1x32A 2x16A+1x32A 67
53EC690256B4 EC69025 1x16A+2x32A 1x16A+2x32A 67
Dimensions W x H x D: 320 x 510 x 135mm
* If you need equipment with items other than those listed in the kits, please contact
your sales representative or send an inquiry on [email protected], to prepare an
individual offer, according to your needs.
SPARE FLANGE WITH SCREWS AND GASKETS

Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs/
number W H box
53EC690F1 EC690F1 85 74 1/10
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
The flange mounted is used for closing of the factory maid openings,in case there is no switch for
it at the moment,and assures the necessary IP of the board. Another function is assuring the pos-
sibility for mounting of great number of additional appliances within assembling the board when
making a suitable opening in the flange.
Spare flange with Limit switch Spare flange with Stop button
mounted limit switch page 156 mounted stop button page 164
HANDLE WITH SCREWS

Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs/
number W H D box
53EC690MA EC690MA 134 42 25.6 1/10
It assures a convenience when carrying the board.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
ASSEMBLED MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES MATRIX, SERIES
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Enclosure connection system Helps easier cable entrance Corner, 4mm thickness for Vertical profiles set - Top
(with Nails). from under plinth. much stronger and stopper for much higher
useful for all sizes. sealing.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ASSEMBLED MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES WITHOUT
MOUNTING PLATES SET MATRIX, SERIES
FEATURES MAIN INFORMATION
• Latest moduler system • Series: MATRIX
• Possibility to dismantled after initial • Application: Multi-purpose
assembling • Mounting: Floor-standing
• Easy montage. Installation in 8 - 10 minute. • Items included in the set
• Base covers can be removed from 4 corners. ¾ Vertical profiles, SET
This feature provides ease of transportation ¾ Tor cover panel
and assembly. ¾ Front door
• Mounting plate with adjustable depth, ¾ Back panel
specially designed for automation ¾ Enclosure ground plint
¾ Housing for ground mounting
• Dimensions WxHxD:
¾ 600x2000x600mm
¾ 800x2000x600mm

number W H D Box
53SET6060 Matrix-600 600 2000 600 1
53SET8060 Matrix-800 800 2000 600 1
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
H
2 extended
H
100
100
D D W W
100
D W
YAN GÖRÜNÜŞ
YAN GÖRÜNÜŞ ÖN GÖRÜNÜŞ
ÖN GÖRÜNÜŞ
YAN GÖRÜNÜŞ ÖN GÖRÜNÜŞ
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ASSEMBLED MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES WITHOUT

MOUNTING PLATES, INCLUDED IN THE SET:
53SET6060
¾ 53DPT200: DPT-Vertical profiles 2000 (mm): 1 set
¾ 53UKT6060: UKT- top panel set for 600x2000x600 (mm): 1 set
¾ 53OKT60200: OKT- Front door for 600x2000x600 (mm): 1 set
¾ 53SKT60200: SKT- Side/back panel SET for 600X2000 (mm)- 1 set
¾ 53BTZ6060: BZT- Housing for ground mounting 600X2000X600: 1 set
53SET8060
¾ 53DPT200: DPT-Vertical profiles 2000 (mm): 1 set
¾ 53UKT8060: UKT- top panel set for 800x2000x600 (mm): 1 set
¾ 53OKT80200: OKT- Front door for 800x2000x600 (mm): 1 set
¾ 53SKT80200: SKT- Back panel SET for 800X2000 (mm)- 1 set
¾ 53BTZ8060: BZT- Housing for ground mounting 800X2000X600: 1 set
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DPT- VERTICAL PROFILES, SET

Catalogue Type Length (mm) QTY in the SET Packing/SET
number
53DPT200 DPT-2000 2000 4 1
UKT- TOP PANELS, SET

Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET
number W D
53UKT6060 UKT-600 600 600 1
53UKT8060 UKT-800 800 600 1
*SET Included: Panel and all fixing elements
LE
C AB
D-48
I E
D-6
PL AC
AP SP
5 YEARS TOTAL
TOP PANEL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended SKT- SIDE AND BACK PANELS
number H W
53SKT60200 SKT-600 2000 600 1
53SKT80200 SKT-800 2000 800 1
*Panel with dimensions 600x2000mm is suitable for side and back

cover for enclosures with width of 600mm
*Panel with dimensions 800x2000mm is suitable only for back
cover for enclosures with width of 800mm
*SET Included: Panel and all fixing elements
AN AB AKE
İR
AL NIELA APBL
İL
H-100
AAR K A
LL BİTLIC
H-4
KU SAAPP
W/D - 100
W/D-100
W/D-4
W/D-4
SIDE PANEL
SABİT KAPAK
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BZT- HOUSING (PLINTH) FOR GROUND MOUNTING
number W H
53BTZ6060 BZT-600 600 600 1
53BTZ8060 BZT-800 800 600 1
D-6
W-6
100
AOT- BOTTOM PLATE SET
number W D
53AOT6060 АОT-600 600 600 1
53AOT8060 АОT-800 800 600 1
*SET Included: all needed elements and fixing accessories:

¾ Bottom plate rail;
¾ Bottom plate corner;
¾ Bottom plate brushes.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
W-140
W-49
Bottom plate rail and Itself can Bottom Plate Corner Plastic can be Bottom Plate Brushes can be
be put on enclosure anytime. attached after assembly. added after assembly.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MPT- MOUNTING PLATE SET

Catalogue Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number Type W H SET
53MPT60200 MPT-600 600 2000 1
53MPT80200 MPT-800 800 2000 1
* SET Included:
¾ Mounting plate;
¾ Fixing accessories.
TE
LA
GP
H-125
TIN
H
UN
MO
MPR- MOUNTING PLATE RAIL SET
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue Type Depth (mm) Packing/ SET
+ 3 standard
2 extended 1 number
53MPR60 MPR-600 600 1
2
MPR - Mounting Plate Fixings
1 2 3
Rail and wheel system makes mounting plate

installation easier.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MAT- MIDDLE CONNECTION PLATE
Catalogue Type Height (mm) Packing/ SET
number
53MAT200 MAT-2000 2000 1
*SET Included:
¾ Middle connection plate;
¾ Fixing accessories for fastening.
MIDDLE CONNECTION PLATE

E
AT
E
AT
PL
PL
H-150
G
G
IN
H
IN
NT
NT
OU
OU
M
M
MAT- Middle Connection Plate Fixings
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
1 2
2
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ОТT- AUTOMATION MOUNTING PLATES

number W H
53OTT60200 OTT-600 600 2000 1
53OTT80200 OTT-800 800 2000 1
B
H
* SET Included:
¾ Automation mounting plate;
¾ Fixing accessories for fastening.
I
C
SA
E
AT
H-115
PL
H-115
N
HH
G
IN
BA
NT
OU
TA
M
OTT- Automation Plate Fixings
W
B
H
D
D W
W
H-H
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended YBT- HORIZONTAL SPLITTING SET
Catalogue Type Width (mm) Packing/ SET
number
53YBT60 YBT-600 600 1
53YBT80 YBT-800 800 1
* SET Included:
¾ Horizontal splitting element;
W-106,5
YBT-Horizontal Splitting Fixings
Side Gaskets for higher protection at the point of connect.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DBT- VERTICAL SPLITTING SET
number
53DBT200 DBT-2000 2000 1
* SET Included:
¾ Vertical splitting element;
H-106,5
H-106,5
DBT- Vertical Splitting Fixing Sets
100
24
Gaskets for higher protection and tightness at the point of connect.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
PPT- COVER PLATE MOUNTING SET + 3 standard
2 extended

number W H
53PPT60200 PPT-600 600 2000 1
53PPT80200 PPT-800 800 2000 1
* SET Included:
¾ Cover plate;
H-102
H-102
PPT - Cover Plate Mounting Set
84
W-95
W-95
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PWT- COVER PLATES FOR 24/36 MODULES, SET
H-1
Catalogue Type Number of Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET
number modules W H
53PWT6020 PWT-600 24 600 200 1
53PWT8020 PWT-800 36 800 W-115
200 1
* SET Included:
PWT- Cover plate for MCB’s ¾ Cover plate;
H-1
H-1
M
M
W-115
W-115
Special design locking system for cover plates.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
PRT- COVER PLATES, SET
number W H
53PRT6020 PRT-600/200 600 200 1
53PRT8020 PRT-800/200 800 200 1
53PRT6050 PRT-600/500 600 500 1
53PRT8050 PRT-800/500 800 500 1
* SET Included:
PRT- Blank cover plate set
¾ Cover plate;
Special design locking system for cover plates.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

RAT- DIN RAIL FIXING, SET
Catalogue Type Width (mm) Packing/ SET
number
53RAT60 RAT-600 600 1
53RAT80 RAT-800 800 1
64,5 64,5
* SET Included:
¾ DIN rail;
Rail Fixing Set

W-145
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
DAT- DEPTH ADJUSTMENT, SET + 3 standard
2 extended
Catalogue Type Length (mm) Packing/ SET

number
53DAT12 DAT-12 01.A.DAT.M.12
149 1
53DAT22 DAT-22 249 1
01.A.DAT.M.12
*SET Included:
¾ Depth adjustment element;
149
149
01.A.DAT.M.22
DAT- Depth Adjustment Set

01.A.DAT.M.22
249
249
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TDT- INTERNAL VERTICAL CARRIER PROFILE, SET

number
53TDT200 TDT-2000 2000 1
* SET Included:
¾ Internal profile;
H-96
AET- HEAVY EQUIPMENT, SET
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Catalogue Type Width (mm) Packing/ SET
+ 3 standard
2 extended
number
53AET60 AET-600 600 1
53AET80 AET-800 800 1
* SET Included:
¾ Internal profile;
KTT- CABLE FIXING, SET

Catalogue number Type Width (mm) Packing/ SET
53KTT60 KTT-600 600 1
53KTT80 KTT-800 800 1
* SET Included:
¾ Cable fixing element;
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ATT-1 SINGLE LIFTING LUG, SET
number W H D
53ATT001 ATT-1 75 65 50 1
30
* SET Included:
¾ Single lifting lug;
65
75 50
15
ATT-2 DOUBLE LIFTING LUG, SET

number W H D
53ATT002 ATT-2 160 65 50 1
* SET Included: 30
¾ Double lifting lug;
65
160 50
15
110
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
CMT- DRAWER MODULE, SET

Catalogue number Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET
W D
53CMT6060 CMT-600 600 600 1
53CMT8060 CMT-800 800 600 1
* SET Included:
248
¾ Drawer module;
W-136
D-8
W-101
338
D-8
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
LPT- LAPTOP TABLES, SET

number W
53LPT60 LPT-600 600 1
53LPT80 LPT-800 800 1
* SET Included:
¾ Laptop table;
¾ Additional accessories.
LPT - Laptop table set
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
304
2 extended
400 300 35
W-130
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

UHT- ROOF VENTILATION, SET
Catalogue number Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET
W D
53UHT6060 UHT-600 600 600 1
53UHT8060 UHT-800 800 600 1
* SET Included:
150
¾ Ventilation roof;
¾ Additional accessories.
W D
W-110
W
D-110
D
OKT- BLANK FRONT DOORS

number W H
53OKT60200 OKT-600 600 2000 1
53OKT80200 OKT-800 800 2000 1
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
LA I
A AP
N Bİ PI
R
İM K
LA A A
Lİ
A NILEA KBLE
ES N
H-150
K IÖ
H-5
A AR NCA
LL ÖLI
M L
H-150
H-5
U ZPP
A M
I
K DÜA
C CA
W-170
W-170 W-260
W-6
W-6 W-6
BLANK FRONT
DÜZ ÖN KAPI CAMLI ÖN
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THERMOSTATS
ACCESSORIES FOR MODULAR DISTRIBUTION
MODELS
ENCLOSURESUNIT PTHT PTVT
CONTACT FUNCTION
TEMPERATURE SETTING RANGE

MECHANICAL THERMOSTAT FOR HEATERS
COLOUR OF POTENTIOMETER
TECHNICAL DATA
250V AC / 120V AC
SENSOR TYPE
• Rated current: 10A
• Temperature setting range: 0-60°C
CONTACT TYPE
• Type of switch function:SERVICE
NC LIFE
• Contact type: Snap action
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
• Colour of potentiometer: Red
• Sensor type: Bimetal PLASTIC MATERIAL
• Electrical connection: 2-Pole terminal
PROTECTION DEGREE
• Material: UL94 V0 ABS flame retardant
• Protection degree: IP20OPERATING TEMPERATURE
STORAGE TEMPERATURE
• Mounting: On DIN rail
MOUNTING
• Installation position: Variable
• Sizes (HxWxD): 61x34x38 mm POSITION
INSTALLATION
CONFORMITY
Catalogue Rated Contact Temperature Potentiometer Packing/
number current (A)
DIMENSIONSfunction
HxWxD range (C°) colour Box
53300 10 WEIGHT NC 0-60° Red 1
THERMOSTATS
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
MODELS
CONTACT FUNCTION
UNIT PTHT PTVT
+ 2 standard
1 extended 39
MECHANICAL THERMOSTAT FOR FANS
TECHNICAL DATA
250V AC / 120V AC
SENSOR TYPE
• Temperature setting range:CONTACT
0-60°C TYPE
• Type of switch function: NO SERVICE LIFE
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
• Colour of potentiometer: Blue
PROTECTION DEGREE
• Protection degree: IP20 OPERATING TEMPERATURE
STORAGE TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
• Sizes (HxWxD): 61x34x38 mm INSTALLATION POSITION
CONFORMITY
Catalogue Rated Contact Temperature Potentiometer Packing/
number current (A) function
DIMENSIONS HxWxD range (C°) colour Box
53301 10 WEIGHTNO 0-60° Blue 1
39
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE THERMOSTAT

MODELS UNIT PTHVT
CONTACT FUNCTION

DUAL THERMOSTAT FOR FANS
TECHNICAL DATA 250V AC / 120V AC
SENSOR TYPE
• Temperature setting range: 0-60°C
CONTACT TYPE
• Type of switch function: NC+NO
SERVICE LIFE
• Colour of potentiometer: Red + CONNECTIONS
ELECTRICAL Blue
PROTECTION DEGREE
• Protection degree: IP20OPERATING TEMPERATURE
STORAGE TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
• Sizes (HxWxD): 65x59x42 mm
INSTALLATION POSITION
Catalogue Rated CONFORMITYContact Temperature Potentiometer Packing/

number current (A) function
DIMENSIONS HxWxD
range (C°) colour Box
53302 10 NC+NO 0-60° Red+Blue 1
WEIGHT
New!
HYGROSTAT
MODELS 40UNIT PHG02
POWER SUPPLY
SETTING RANGE
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
1 extended
CURRENT
MECHANICAL HYGROSTAT
DIFFERENTIAL
TECHNICAL DATA SENSOR TYPE
• Setting range: 10-90% RH ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
• Colour of potentiometer: Black
• Sensor type: Polyamide ribbon ELECTRICAL SECTION WIRES
• Differential: 5% OPERATING TEMPERATURE
STORAGE TEMPERATURE
• Working temperature: -25~+60°C PROTECTION DEGREE
• Mounting: On DIN rail COLOUR
• Sizes (HxWxD): 94x56x54 mm MOUNTING
Catalogue Rated Humidity

DIMENSIONS HxWxD Potentiometer Packing/
number current (A) WEIGHT
range (% RH) colour Box
53303 5 10-90 Black 1
CONFORMITY
41
ELMARK
GO TO THE FEATURES UNIT PSHT 030 PSHT 050 PSHT 075
1st PAGE
HEATING CAPACITY W 30 50 75
POWER SUPPLY V 100-250V AC DC

MAX. CURRENT A 2A 2A 4A
HEATING ELEMENT TYPE - PTC RESISTOR, SELF REGU

PTC SLIM HEATERS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION - ELECTRONIC THERMAL OV
TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS - 3 POLE TERMINAL N-
• Rated voltage: 100-250V AC/DC
• Heating element type: PTC resistor, self regulating
PROTECTION CLASS IEC - CLASS II
• Over current protection: Electronic thermal overload
• Electrical connection: 3-Pole terminalPROTECTION DEGREE EN60529 - IP20
• Protection class: II OPERATING TEMPERATURE C -45 / +70
• Working temperature: -25~+70°C STORAGE TEMPERATURE C -45 / +70
• Radiator: Aluminum profile, anodized
• Mounting: On DIN rail RADIATOR - ALLUMINIUM PROFILE, AN
• Installation position: Best efficiency in vertical position
MOUNTING - CLIP FOR MOUNTING on DIN
Catalogue Power Rated Dimensions (mm)

INSTALLATION POSITION - Packing/
BEST EFFICIENCY IN VERTICA
number (W) current (A) H W D Box
DIMENSIONS HxWxD mm 148x80x27 148x80x27 166x80x27
53318 30 2 148 80 27 1
WEIGHT kg 190 190 225
53319 50 2 148 80 27 1
53320 100 4 166
CONFORMITY 80 27
- 1
CODE A
PSHT 030
W
C
PSHT 050
HA D
B
PSHT 075
PSHT 100
PSHT 150
52
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
1 extended
FANS WITH FILTERS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 250V AC, 50/60Hz
• Over current protection: Impedance
• Electrical connection: Lead wire
• IP Degree: IP54
• Flow direction: Outside-in
• Plastic material: UL94 V0 ABS flame retardant
• RAL: 7035
• Mounting: via clips (fast clip on)
Catalogue Power Air flow Current Noise Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number (W) rate (m³/h) consumption level (bB) H W D Box
(A)
53314 14 30 0.08 28 120 120 58.5 1
53315 26 100 0.14 42 160 160 69 1
53316 26 125 0.14 42 210 210 98 1
53317 37 240 0.23 52 260 260 103 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FILTERS
TECHNICAL DATA
• IP Degree: IP54
• Plastic material: UL94 V0 ABS flame retardant
• RAL: 7035
• Mounting: via clips (fast clip on)
Catalogue Dimmensions (mm) Packing/

number H W D Box
53310 120 120 20.5 1
53311 160 160 31 1
53312 210 210 31 1
53313 260 260 31 1
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
1 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING- DELTA SERIES
Documents corresponding to the The metal distribution boxes have wide range of application for mounting in buildings under
product: construction or new communal objects, offices, shops, house facilities. Inside the box, could be
Standard IEC60439-3 mounted circuit elements for protection in the electrical installation. They are made of high quality
electro-galvanized steel sheet and provide proper prevention from fire. They are shock-proof as
well. The box is also equipped with zero and ground terminals.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel • Mounting type: Surface
sheet • Colour of body: grey
• Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz • IP code: IP40
• Single phase: 4; 8; 12; 16 modules • Fire resistance: 960°C/30s
• Triple phase: 4; 6; 8; 10; 12 modules • Humidity: Max.95%
• Steel thickness: 1,0mm • Storage temperature: -40+75°C
• MCB mounting design: Din-rail • Specification: CE, ROHS, BS, EN,EIC60439-3
• Main switch rated current: MCB125A
SINGLE PHASE METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES, DELTA SERIES

Catalogue Type Number Module Material Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number of poles capacity L H W Box
600104N Delta 1/4 1 4 Metal 226 226 95 1/10
600108N Delta 1/8 1 8 Metal 298 226 95 1/10
600112N Delta 1/12 1 12 Metal 370 226 95 1/10
600116N Delta 1/16 1 16 Metal 442 226 95 1/10
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
THREE PHASE METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES, DELTA SERIES

Catalogue Type Number Module Material Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number of poles capacity L H W Box
600304N Delta 3/4 3 4 Metal 506 350 105 1/10
600306N Delta 3/6 3 6 Metal 560 350 105 1/10
600308N Delta 3/8 3 8 Metal 614 350 105 1/10
600310N Delta 3/10 3 10 Metal 668 350 105 1/10
600312N Delta 3/12 3 12 Metal 722 350 105 1/10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

METAL CONSUMER UNITS - ZETA SERIES
Documents corresponding to the The metal distribution boxes have wide range of application for mounting in buildings under
product: construction or new communal objects, offices, shops, house facilities. Inside the box, could be
Standard IEC60439-3 mounted circuit elements for protection in the electrical installation. They are made of high quality
electro-galvanized steel sheet and provide proper prevention from fire. They are shock-proof as
well. The box is also equipped with zero and ground terminals.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel • IP code: IP40
sheet • Fire resistance: 960°C/30s
• Modules: 30; 36; 45; 60; 72 • Humidity: Max.95%
• Steel thickness: 1,2mm • Storage temperature: -40+75°C
• Rated voltage In (A): 100A • Specification: CE, ROHS, EIC60439-3
• Mounting type: Surface
• Colour of body: White RAL7035
• Colour of door: White RAL7035
METAL CONSUMER UNIT ENCLOSURES, ZETA SERIES

Catalogue Type Number of Number of Material Dimensions (mm)
number ways rows L H W
55030 Zeta 30 30 2 Metal 428 428 110
55036 Zeta 36 36 2 Metal 482 428 110
55045 Zeta 45 45 3 Metal 428 578 110
55060 Zeta 60 60 4 Metal 428 728 110
55072 Zeta 72 72 4 Metal 482 728 110
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Zero and ground terminals included
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS K SERIES, IP54

• Rated voltage: up to 1000V • Vertically on flat surface
• Material: steel
• Thickness: 0,70 mm
• RAL 7035
• Mounting plate: Galvanized
• IP code: IP 54
Catalogue number Type Thickness of Dimensions (mm) Packing/

metal sheet (mm) L H W Box
53020K CPK 20/25/15 0.7 200 250 150 1
53030K CPK 20/30/15 0.7 200 300 150 1
53026K CPK 25/30/15 0.7 250 300 150 1
53040K CPK 30/40/20 0.7 300 400 200 1
53045K CPK 35/45/20 0.7 350 450 200 1
53050K CPK 40/50/20 0.7 400 500 200 1
53060K CPK 40/60/20 0.7 400 600 200 1
53070K CPK 50/70/20 0.7 500 700 200 1
53080K CPK 60/80/25 0.7 600 800 250 1
L W
3
H
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS JXF SERIES, IP65
Documents corresponding to the Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output
product: conductors, grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of
Standard EN 62208; single steel sheet, treated with decorative powder coating.
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 TECHNICAL DATA MOUNTING
• Maximum current: up to 1250A
• Material: steel
• Mounting plate: Galvanized
• RAL 7032
• Coating: powder style painting
• IP code: IP 65
Catalogue Type Thickness of Nominal Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number metal sheet working L H W Box
(mm) current In (A)
53025 JXF 25/25/15 1.0 80 250 250 150 1
53026 JXF 25/30/15 1.0 100 300 250 150 1
53030 JXF 30/25/15 1.0 100 250 300 150 1
53031 JXF 30/40/20 1.0 160 400 300 200 1
53040 JXF 40/30/20 1.0 160 300 400 200 1
53041 JXF 40/50/20 1.2 250 500 400 200 1
53044 JXF 40/40/20 1.2 250 400 400 200 1
53050 JXF 50/40/20 1.2 250 400 500 200 1
53051 JXF 40/60/20 1.2 250 600 400 200 1
53060 JXF 60/40/20 1.2 250 400 600 200 1
53066 JXF 60/60/20 1.2 250 600 600 200 1
53070
53080
JXF 70/50/20
JXF 80/60/25
1.2
1.5
350
400
500
600
700
800
200
250
1
1 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
53100 JXF 100/80/30 1.5 630 800 1000 300 1 2 extended
53120 JXF 120/80/30 1.5 630 800 1200 300 1

53140 JXF 140/80/30 1.5 800 800 1400 300 1
53188 JXF 180/80/30 1.5 1000 800 1800 300 1
53180 JXF 180/100/30* 1.5 1250 1000 1800 300 1
Note: *Metal boxes with double door
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
STAINLESS STEEL METAL BOARDS SXF SERIES
Documents corresponding to the Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output
product: conductors, grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of
Standard EN 62 208; single stainless steel sheet.
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 The mounting plate is treated with anti-corrosion and decorative powder coating. They are used in
case of special requirements regarding the exposure of corrosion.
• Maximum current: up to 800A
• Material: stainless steel
• IP code: IP 65
Catalogue Type Thickness of metal Dimensions (mm) Packing

number sheet L H W / Box
(mm)
54025 SXF 25/25/15 1.0 250 250 150 1
54030 SXF 30/25/15 1.0 250 300 150 1
54040 SXF 40/30/20 1.0 300 400 200 1
54050 SXF 50/40/20 1.2 400 500 200 1
54060 SXF 60/40/20 1.2 400 600 200 1
54070 SXF 70/50/20 1.2 500 700 200 1
54080 SXF 80/60/25 1.5 600 800 250 1
54100 SXF 100/80/30 1.5 800 1000 300 1
54120 SXF 120/80/30 1.5 800 1200 300 1
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS WITH TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
Documents corresponding to the The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following
product: metal and plastic electric control boxes and boards with ELMARK automation:
Standard EN 60439-1; • Tower Mounted Switchgear
EN 60 439-3 • Low Voltage Meter Box
• Low Voltage Main Switchboard
• Distribution Switchboard
• Power Compensation System
Low Voltage Main

Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO Switchboard Type GRT
Power Compensation System

Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT Type CCU
Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | DISTRIBUTION BOXES
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTING, IP40
Documents corresponding to the PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING

product:
Standard EN 60670-24 MINI SERIES, IP40
Catalogue Type Number of Module capacity Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number rows (number of L H W Box
devices)
60106 Mini 1 1 1 40 150 65 1/120
60107 Mini 2 1 2 55 150 65 1/84
60108 Mini 4 1 4 95 150 65 1/48
Documents corresponding to the PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR FLUSH MOUNTING

product:
Standard EN 60670-24
ATTIS SERIES, IP40
The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in
reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats
electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening
upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high tem-
perature with IP code: IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the
current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for
3
the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
TECHNICAL DATA
+ 3 standard
0 extended • Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz • Number of rows:
• Door colour: Transparent ¾ Single row for 6, 9, 12 and 16 modules
• Mounting type: Surface;Flush ¾ Double rows for 16; 24 and 36 modules
• Number of modules: 6; 9; 12; 16; 24; 36 • Material: ABS for body and PC for door
• IP code: IP40 • Fire resistance: 360°C/30s

devices)
60026 Attis 6 1 6 185 140 90 1/30
60096 Attis 9 1 9 220 164 90 1/20
60126 Attis 12 1 12 305 205 90 1/16
60166 Attis 16 1 16 355 220 90 1/16
60176 Attis 16 2 16 231 285 90 1/16
60246 Attis 24 2 24 313 345 96 1/8
OPEN 60366 Attis 36 3 36 315 440 96 1/5
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTING PDB1 SERIES, IP40
The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in recon-
struction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical
current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to
90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with
IP rate IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading
parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and
earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
• fire resistance rate: UL 94
• IP code: IP 40
BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, PDB1 SERIES, IP40

Catalogue Type Number Module Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number of rows capacity L H W Box
(number of
devices)
60040 PDB1 4 1 4 110 205 75 1/20
60060 PDB1 6 1 6 150 205 75 1/20
60080 PDB1 8 1 8 190 205 75 1/20
60120 PDB1 12 1 12 260 205 75 1/10
60180 PDB1 18 1 18 365 220 75 1/10
60240 PDB1 24 2 24 270 330 75 1/10
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
BOXES FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, PDB1 SERIES, IP40

Catalogue Type Number of Module Dimensions (mm) Packing /
number rows capacity L H W Box
(number of
devices)
60041 PDB1 4 1 4 110 205 75 1/20
60061 PDB1 6 1 6 150 205 75 1/20
60081 PDB1 8 1 8 190 205 75 1/20
60121 PDB1 12 1 12 260 205 75 1/10
60181 PDB1 18 1 18 365 220 75 1/10
60241 PDB1 24 2 24 270 330 75 1/10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTING IP40,

BLUE SERIES
Documents corresponding to the The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in recon-
product: struction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical
Standard EN 62 208; current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with
IP rate IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading
parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and
earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Door colour: Transparent blue • Material: ABS for body and PC for door
• Mounting type: Surface;Flush • Fire resistance: 650°C/30s
• Number of modules: 12; 18; 24; 28; 36 • Ambient temperature(°C): -5 +65°C, max. 95%
• IP code: IP40 humidity
• Number of rows: • Colour: White RAL 9003
¾ Single row for 12 and 18 modules • Storage temperature(°C): -40 +75°C
¾ Double rows for 24; 28 and 36 modules
BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, BLUE SERIES

devices)
60122 Blue 12 1 12 300 204 102 1/10
60182 Blue 18 1 18 410 204 102 1/10
60242 Blue 24 2 24 300 294 109 1/5
60282 Blue 28 2 28 310 354 109 1/5
60362 Blue 36 2 36 410 294 109 1/5
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
BOXES FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, BLUE SERIES

devices)
60123 Blue 12 1 12 317 220 102 1/10
60183 Blue 18 1 18 426 220 102 1/10
60243 Blue 24 2 24 317 310 109 1/5
60283 Blue 28 2 28 294 338 109 1/5
60363 Blue 36 2 36 426 310 109 1/5
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MOISTURE-PROOF DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING HK SERIES, IP65
Documents corresponding to the The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in recon-
product: struction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical
Standard EN 62 208; installation current circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 to 90°. They are made of white non self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high tempera-
ture. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP code: IP65. The mounted device in the
box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail
for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. For direct
wall mounting with screws.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 690V; 50Hz
• Cover material: PC
• Body material: ABS
• IP code: IP65
• Colour: RAL7035
• Mounting type: Surface
• Supplied with removable earth/neutral bar
Catalogue Type Number Module capacity IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number of rows (number of L H W Box
devices)
60001 ELM-HK05 1 5 65 140 100 140 1
60002 ELM-HK08 1 8 65 195 103 195 1
60003 ELM-HK12 1 12 65 270 103 195 1
60005 ELM-HK18 1 18 65 375 103 195 1
L W
H 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, IP54/IP65
L W Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines.
Boards are made of ABS and polyester. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, • Material: ABS & Polyester
oils, salts, etc. • IP code: IP54 & IP65
H • Rated Voltage: up to 690V • Colour: RAL7035 grey
• Maximum Current: up to 800A • Recyclable
• Thermal Deformation: over 240°C • Adjustable mounting plate position
• Operating Temperature: -35°C + 65°C
MOUNTING
• Vertically on flat surface
ABS DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CP SERIES - GRAY DOOR

Catalogue Board Type Material IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number L H W Box
5312821130 CP5001 ABS IP54 210 280 130 1
5313525150 CP5002D ABS IP54 250 330 150 1
5313040165 CP5003 ABS IP54 300 400 165 1
5313040195 CP5003D ABS IP54 300 400 195 1
5313550195 CP5007 ABS IP54 350 500 195 1
5314050245 CP5004D ABS IP54 400 500 245 1
5314060200 CP5005 ABS IP54 400 600 200 1
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ABS DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CP SERIES- TRANSPARENT DOOR
Catalogue Board Type Material IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number L H W Box
5312128130T CP5011 ABS IP65 210 280 130 1
5312535150T CP5012D ABS IP65 250 330 150 1
5313040165T CP5013 ABS IP65 300 400 165 1
5313040195T CP5013D ABS IP65 300 400 195 1
5313550195T CP5017 ABS IP65 350 500 195 1
5314050245T CP5014D ABS IP65 400 500 245 1
5314060200T CP5015 ABS IP65 400 600 200 1
POLYESTER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CP SERIES - GRAY DOOR

Catalogue Board Type Material IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing /
number L H W Box
5333020150 CP501 Polyester IP65 200 300 150 1
5333040180 CP504 Polyester IP65 300 400 180 1
5334050190 CP505 Polyester IP65 400 500 190 1
5334060200 CP506 Polyester IP65 400 600 200 1
5335080255 CP507 Polyester IP65 500 800 255 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ABS - PP SERIES, IP65
Documents corresponding to the Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines.
product: They can also be used as meter boxes. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays.
Standard EN 60439 -1 TECHNICAL DATA
EN 60439 -5
• Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, • Operating Temperature: -35°C + 65°C
L W alkali, oils,salts, etc. • Colour: RAL7035 grey
• Rated Voltage: up to 690V • Recyclable
• Maximum Current: up to 800A • Adjustable mounting plate position
• Thermal Deformation: over 240°C
MOUNTING
H • Vertically on flat surface
ABS HALOGEN FREE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

HALOGEN
PP SERIES- GRAY DOOR
FREE
Catalogue Board Type Material Dimensions (mm) Packing /
number L H W Box
5312030130 PP 3001 ABS 200 300 130 1
5312535150 PP 3002 ABS 250 350 150 1
5313040170 PP 3004 ABS 300 400 170 1
5313040220 PP 3005 ABS 300 400 220 1
5313550190 PP 3006 ABS 350 500 190 1
5314050240
5314060190
PP 3007
PP 3008
ABS
ABS
400
400
500
600
240
200
1
1
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
Note: Open door angle 180°
ABS HALOGEN FREE DISTRIBUTION MODULE BOARDS

HALOGEN
PP SERIES- TRANSPARENT DOOR
FREE
Catalogue Board Type Material Dimensions (mm) Packing /
number L H W Box
5322535150 PP 3112-18modules ABS 250 350 150 1
5323040170 PP 3114-24modules ABS 300 400 170 1
5323550190 PP 3116-45modules ABS 350 500 190 1
5324060190 PP 3118-60modules ABS 400 600 200 1
Note: Transparent door
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | CONNECTION TUBES
NON-ISOLATED CONNECTION TUBES
CONNECTION TUBES - GTY TYPE

Copper pipes with galvanic tin coating, used for TECHNICAL DATA
joining of copper rigid or multicore conductors • Material: copper alloy
with different sections. The assembling is made • Coating: tin
by mechanical pressing with crimping tool. • Application: general
Catalogue Type Length Outer Inner Cable cross Packing/ Box (pcs)
number L (mm) diameter diameter section
D (mm) d (mm) (mm²)
59213 GTY-4 20 5 3 4 1000/16000
59201 GTY-6 25 5.3 3.7 6 500/1500/12000
59202 GTY-10 30 6.3 4.5 10 500/1500/12000
59203 GTY-16 35 7.5 5.7 16 100/200/4800
59204 GTY-25 40 9 7.2 25 100/500/2000
59205 GTY-35 45 10.8 8.5 35 100/200/1600
59206 GTY-50 50 12.5 9.8 50 20/200/1600
59207 GTY-70 55 14.5 11.5 70 10/100/800
59208 GTY-95 60 17 13.7 95 10/80/640
59209 GTY-120 65 19 15 120 10/60/480
59210 GTY-150 70 21 16.7 150 10/50/400
59211 GTY-185 75 23 18.5 185 10/40/320
59212 GTY-240 80 26 21 240 10/30/240
BIMETALLIC CONNECTION TUBE - GTL TYPE

Pipes made of two metals – copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for
joining copper and aluminum conductors – rigid or multicore conductors with different section.
The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt
terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against electrochemical corrosion got at
two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current feed. They
are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: copper aluminum alloy
• Coating: none
• Application: general for joining of two types
of conductors
Catalogue Type d1 D1 d2 D2 l1 l2 L Packing/Box(pcs)
number
59214 GTL-16 5 9 6 10 30 30 75 20/200/1200
59215 GTL-25 6 10 7 12 30 33 82 20/400/1500
59216 GTL-35 7 11 8.5 14 30 40 90 20/300/1000
59217 GTL-50 8.5 13 9.8 16 32 42 95 20/800
59218 GTL-70 9.5 15 11.5 18 38 50 105 10/600
59219 GTL-95 11.5 17 13.5 21 40 50 110 10/500
59220 GTL-120 13.5 19 15 23 42 55 112 10/400
59221 GTL-150 15 21 17 25 44 55 118 10/350
59222 GTL-185 17 23 18.5 27 46 60 125 10/300
59223 GTL-240 19 26 21 30 54 60 130 10/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | CABLE TERMINALS

NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS
CABLE TERMINALS NON-ISOLATED - JM TYPE

They are used for joining copper conductors - multicore conductors with different section to
electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection
at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection
stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are
made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through crimping pliers,
through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard
length SC and extended base JM. They are manufactured under modern technology and have
high quality and long exploitation period.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: copper alloy
• Coating: tin
• Application: general for joining conductors
to electrical devices.
Catalogue Type d1 (mm) D (mm) d2 (mm) L (mm) Packing / Box (pcs)

number
59240 JM - 2.5/6 2.2 4.5 6 24 1000/3000/24000
59241 JM - 4/6 3.0 4.8 6 24 1000/2000/16000
59035 JM - 6/6 3.8 5.5 6 24 500/2000/16000
59059 JM - 6/8 3.8 5.5 8 24 500/2000/16000
59036 JМ - 10/6 4.8 6.8 6 25.5 100/1500/12000
59037 JM - 10/8 4.8 6.8 8 25.5 500/1500/12000
59038 JM - 16/6 5.5 7.5 6 30.5 400/800/6400
59039 JM - 16/8 5.5 7.5 8 30.5 400/800/6400
59040 JM - 16/10 5.5 7.5 10 30.5 400/800/6400
59041 JM - 25/8 7 9 8 34 100/500/4000
59042 JM - 25/10 7 9 10 34 250/500/4000
59043 JM - 35/8 8.2 10.5 8 38 200/400/3200
59044 JM - 35/10 8.2 10.5 10 38 200/400/3200
59045 JM - 35/12 8.2 10.5 12 38 200/400/3200
59046 JM - 50/8 9.8 12.5 8 45 100/200/1600
59047 JM - 50/10 9.8 12.5 10 45 100/100/1600
59048 JM - 50/12 9.8 12.5 12 45 100/200/1600
59049 JM - 70/10 11.5 14.5 10 50 80/100/1280
59050 JM - 70/12 11.5 14.5 12 50 80/100/1280
59051 JM - 95/10 13.8 17.5 10 55.5 50/200/800
59052 JM - 95/12 13.8 17.5 12 55.5 50/200/800
59053 JM - 120/10 15.5 19.5 10 63 30/60/480
59054 JM - 120/12 15.5 19.5 12 63 30/60/480
59055 JM - 150/12 16.5 21 12 71 10/50/400
59056 JM - 185/12 18.8 23.5 12 78 10/40/320
59057 JM - 185/16 18.8 23.5 16 78 10/40/320
59058 JM - 240/16 21.3 26.5 16 92 10/30/240
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS
BIMETALIC NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS FOR CRIMPING DTL

They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multicore conductors with different section to
electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at
tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability
against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of
copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special technology the copper
terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic
pressing of the terminal and conductor.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: copper aluminum;
• Application: general for joining conductors
to electrical devices.
Catalogue Type d1 D d2 L l B Packing / Box

number (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs)
59224 DTL - 1 - 16 6 11 8 70 30 16 20 /200 /1440
59225 DTL - 1 - 25 7 12 8 75 34 18 20 /180 /1080
59226 DTL - 1 - 35 8.5 14 10 85 38 20.5 20 /100 /600
59227 DTL - 1 - 50 9.8 16 10 90 40 23 20 /70 /420
59228 DTL - 1 - 70 11.5 18 12 102 48 26 10 /60 /360
59229 DTL - 1 - 95 13.5 21 12 112 50 28 10 /40 /180
59230 DTL - 1 - 120 15 23 14 120 53 30 10 /30 /120
59231 DTL - 1 - 150 16.5 25 14 126 56 34 5 /25 /120
59232 DTL - 1 - 185 18.5 27 16 133 58 37 5 /20 /120
59233 DTL - 1 - 240 21 30 16 140 60 40 4 /12 /72
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS
COPPER CABLE WIRE FORK TERMINAL CONNECTOR

Catalogue Type Length (mm) Colour Conductor Packing (pcs.) Packing / Box
number (mm²) (pcs.)
59080 SVS1.25-4 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 10/240
59081 SVS1.25-5 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/180
59082 SVS1.25-6 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/180
59083 SVS 2-4 21.0 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/180
59084 SVS 2-5 22.5 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/180
59085 SVS 2-6 27.6 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/120
59086 SVS 5.5-4 24.5 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60
59087 SVS 5.5-5 27.9 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60
59088 SVS 5.5-6 27.9 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - CHS TYPE

Catalogue Type Length (mm) Conductor Packing / Box Packing / Box
number (mm²) (pcs.) (pcs.)
59115 CHS3 18.1 0.25-1.5 100 250
59116 CHS4 20.1 1.5-2.5 100 200
59117 CHS5 25.5 4.0-6.0 100 200
59118 CHS6 27.3 8.0 100 100
ISOLATED CABLE JOINTS

Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors
with section up to 6mm². It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the
possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic
pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different
conductor sections.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Coating: polyvinylchloride
• Application: general for joining of copper conductors
Catalogue Type Length (mm) Colour Conductor Packing (pcs.) Packing / Box
number (mm²) (pcs.)
59015 PVT 1.25 16 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/300
59001 BV 1.25 25 Red 0.5-1.0 100 10/120
59034 PVT 2 16 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/300
59002 BV 2 25 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/60
59014 PVT 5.5 20 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60
59003 BV 5.5 25 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MDD/FDD TYPES

They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with
polyvinyl chloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores
from bending and breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct
contact to the current - carrying parts. They are used for conductors with section up to 6 mm. The
connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and cable.
The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured
under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. All insulated cable
terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing
TECHNICAL DATA
• Coating: polyvinyl chloride
• Application: general for joining copper
conductors
Catalogue Type Shape Colour Conduc- Shoe Packing Packing /

number tor (mm²) width (pcs.) Box (pcs.)
59012 MDD 1.25 - 187 Male Red 0.5-1.0 187 100 10 / 240
59009 MDD 1.25 - 250 Male Red 0.5-1.0 250 100 10 / 240
59013 MDD 2 - 187 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 187 100 10 / 240
59011 MDD 2 - 250 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 250 100 10 / 180
59010 MDD 5.5 - 250 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 250 100 10 / 120
59008 FDD 1.25 - 187 Female Red 0.5-1.0 187 100 20 / 240
59006 FDD 1.25 - 250 Female Red 0.5-1.0 250 100 15 / 180
59007 FDD 2 - 187 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 187 100 20 / 240
59004 FDD 2 - 250 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 250 100 10 / 180
59005 FDD 5.5 - 250 Female Yellow 4.0-6.0 250 100 10 / 120
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - E TYPE

Catalogue Type Colour Terminal Conductor Packing (pcs.) Packing/ Box
number length (mm) (mm²) (pcs.)
59023 Е0508 White 8 0.5 100 50/600
59024 Е7508 Blue 8 0.75 100 50/600
59025 Е1008 Red 8 1.0 100 50/600
59026 Е1510 Black 10 1.5 100 30/360
59027 Е2512 Grey 12 2.5 100 30/300
59028 Е4012 Orange 12 4.0 100 20/240
59029 Е6018 Green 18 6.0 100 5/120
59030 Е10-18 Dark green 18 10 100 8/96
59031 Е16-18 Milky yellow 18 16 100 6/60
59032 Е25-16 Black 16 25 100 5/36
59033 Е35-25 Grey-yellow 25 35 100 2/24
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

TWIN ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS- TE TYPE
Catalogue Type Colour Terminal Conductor Packing (pcs.) Packing / Box
number length (mm) (mm²) (pcs.)
59023TE TE0508 White 8 2x0.5 100 50/600
59024TE TE7508 Blue 8 2x0.75 100 50/600
59025TE TE1008 Red 8 2x1.0 100 50/600
59026TE TE1508 Black 8 2x1.5 100 30/360
59027TE TE2510 Grey 10 2x2.5 100 30/300
59028TE TE4010 Orange 10 2x4.0 100 20/240
59029TE TE6014 Green 14 2x6.0 100 5/120
59030TE TE10-14 Dark green 14 2x10.0 100 8/96
59031TE TE16-14 Milky yellow 14 2x16.0 100 6/60
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - PTV TYPE

Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors
with section up to 6mm². It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the
possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic
pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different
conductor sections.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Coating: polyvinyl chloride
• Application: general for joining of copper conductors
Catalogue Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing /

number (mm²) width (pcs.) Box (pcs.)
59101 PTV 1.25 - 10 Male Red 0.25-1.0 1.9 100 20/240
59102 PTV 1.25 - 12 Male Red 0.25-1.0 1.9 100 20/240
59103 PTV 2 - 10 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 1.9 100 20/240
59104 PTV 2 - 12 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 1.9 100 15/180
59105 PTV 5.5 - 13 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 2.9 100 8/96
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - RVL TYPE

Catalogue Type Size of the Colour Conductor Packing Packing / Box
number opening (mm²) (pcs.) (pcs.)
(mm)
59021 RVL 1.25-4 4 Red 0.5-1.0 100 20/240
59022 RVL 1.25-5 5 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/180
59018 RVL 2-4 4 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/180
59019 RVL 2-5 5 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/120
59020 RVL 5.5-4 4 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8/96
59016 RV 5.5-5 5 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8/96
59017 RV 5.5-6 6 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8/96
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - PBDD TYPE

Catalogue Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing/
59106 PBDD 1.25 - 250 Male Red 0.25-1.0 6.3 100 5/60
59107 PBDD 2 - 250 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 6.3 100 5/60
59108 PBDD 5.5 - 250 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 6.3 100 5/60
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MPD TYPE

59109 MPD 1.25 - 156 Male Red 0.25-1.0 6.3 100 10/240
59110 MPD 2 - 195 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 6.3 100 10/120
59111 MAPD 5.5 - 195 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 6.3 100 10/120
ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MDFN/FDFNY

59112 MDFN 1.0 - 250 Male Red 0.25-1.0 4 100 5/60
59113 MDFN 2 - 250 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 4 100 5/60
59114 MDFN 5 - 250 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 5 100 4/48
59242 FDFNY 1.0 - 250 Female Red 0.25-1.0 4 100 10/60
59243 FDFNY 2 - 250 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 4 100 10/60
59244 FDFNY 5 - 250 Female Yellow 4.0-6.0 5 100 10/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | CABLE TRUNKING

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2

Cable trunking are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in office and
residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems and allow quick
adaptation if necessary to rearrange the interior. Fast and simple installation. In combination with a
wide range of accessories, building irregularities are quickly overcome. Non- flammable material, easy
to cut and paint.
Catalogue Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing

number (pcs)
5621212 Plastic cable trunking CT2 12x12 2m White 100
5621510 Plastic cable trunking CT2 15X10 2m White 100
5623016 Plastic cable trunking CT2 30Х16 2m White 70
SWITCHES AND SOCKETS FRAMES FOR CABLE TRUNKING

Cable trunking frames are decorative solution for installation of switches and sockets on places where
their normal mounting is not possible. The assembly set includes subframe and main white frame.
Universal sizes, suitable for mounting of switches and sockets from different manufacturers. Single,
double and triple frames are offered.
Catalogue Type Used for cable Colour Packing (pcs)

number trunking
562100441 Single frame 100X40/100X60 White 20
562100442 Double frame 100X40/100X60 White 14
562100443 Triple frame 100X40/100X60 White 5
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
OUTSIDE CORNER
Catalogue Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing
number (pcs)
56212121 Outside corner 12x12 White 50
56215101 Outside corner 15X10 White 50
56230161 OUTSIDE CORNER 30Х16 White 48
INSIDE CORNER
number (pcs)
56212122 Inside corner 12x12 White 50
56215102 Inside corner 15X10 White 50
56230162 Inside corner 30Х16 White 35
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

T- CORNER
number (pcs)
56212123 T- corner 12x12 White 50
56215103 T- corner 15X10 White 50
56216163 T- corner 16X16 White 50
56225163 T- corner 25X16 White 20
56230163 T-corner 30X16 White 40
56225253 T- corner 25X25 White 20
56240163 T- corner 40X16 White 30
56240253 T- corner 40X25 White 30
56240403 T- corner 40X40 White 30
56260403 T- corner 60X40 White 16
56260603 T- corner 60X60 White 16
56280403 T- corner 80X40 White 8
56280603 T- corner 80X60 White 8
562100403 T- corner 100X40 White 8
562100603 T- corner 100X60 White 8
L- CORNER
number (pcs)
56212124 L- corner 12x12 White 50
56215104 L- corner 15X10 White 50
56216164 L- corner 16X16 White 50
56225164 L- corner 25X16 White 30
56230164 L-corner 30X16 White 50
56225254 L- corner 25X25 White 30
56240164 L- corner 40X16 White 30
56240254 L- corner 40X25 White 30
56240404 L- corner 40X40 White 30
56260404 L- corner 60X40 White 16
56260604 L- corner 60X60 White 16
56280404 L- corner 80X40 White 12
56280604 L- corner 80X60 White 12
562100404 L- corner 100X40 White 8
562100604 L- corner 100X60 White 8
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CONNECTOR
number (pcs)
56212125 Connector 12x12 White 50
56215105 Connector 15X10 White 50
END CAP
number (pcs)
56212126 End cap 12x12 White 50
56215106 End cap 15X10 White 50
56216166 End cap 16X16 White 50
56225166 End cap 25X16 White 50
56230166 End cap 30X16 White 100
56225256 End cap 25X25 White 50
56240166 End cap 40X16 White 30
56240256 End cap 40X25 White 30
56240406 End cap 40X40 White 30
56260406 End cap 60X40 White 50
56260606 End cap 60X60 White 50
56280406 End cap 80X40 White 60
56280606 End cap 80X60 White 60
562100406 End cap 100X40 White 50
562100606 End cap 100X60 White 50
SEPARATOR
Catalogue Type Length (m) Used for cable trunking Colour Packing
number (pcs)
56261111 SEPARATOR 40 2 100x40 White 40
56261112 SEPARATOR 60 2 100x60 White 40
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 ECONOMIC SERIES
number (pcs)
5621212E CT2 ECONOMIC 12x12 2m White 100
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING SELF-ADHESIVE

Catalogue number Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing
m/pcs
5621212A 12x12 2m White 250/125
5621510A 15x10 2m White 250/125
5621616A 16х16 2m White 250/125
5622010A 20х10 2m White 200/100
5622516A Plastic cable trunking 25x16 2m White 100/50
5623016A self-adhesive 30X16 2m White 140/70
5622525A 25х25 2m White 100/50
5624016A 40x16 2m White 50/25
5624025A 40x25 2m White 80/40
5624040A 40x40 2m White 80/40
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING SELF-ADHESIVE

m/pcs
5621212AE 12x12 2m White 250/125
5621510AE 15x10 2m White 250/125
5621616AE 16x16 2m White 250/125
5622010AE 20x10 2m White 200/100
5622516AE Self-adhesive CT2 Economic 25x16 2m White 100/50
5623020AE series 30x20 2m White 140/70
5622525AE 25x25 2m White 100/50
5624016AE 40x16 2m White 50/25
5624025AE 40x25 2m White 80/40
5624040AE 40x40 2m White 80/40
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - DARK WALNUT

m/pcs
5621212DW 12x12 2m Dark walnut 250/125
5621510DW 15x10 2m Dark walnut 250/125
5621616DW Plastic cable trunking dark 16x16 2m Dark walnut 250/125
5622516DW walnut 25x16 2m Dark walnut 150/75
5622525DW 25x25 2m Dark walnut 100/50
5624025DW 40x25 2m Dark walnut 80/40
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - LIGHT BEECH

m/pcs
5621212LB 12x12 2m Light beech 250/125
5621510LB 15x10 2m Light beech 250/125
5621616LB 16x16 2m Light beech 250/125
Plastic cable trunking light beech
5622516LB 25x16 2m Light beech 150/75
5622525LB 25x25 2m Light beech 100/50
5624025LB 40x25 2m Light beech 80/40
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - PEAR

m/pcs
5621212P 12x12 2m Pear 250/125
5621510P 15x10 2m Pear 250/125
5621616P 16x16 2m Pear 250/125
Plastic cable trunking pear
5622516P 25x16 2m Pear 150/75
5622525P 25x25 2m Pear 100/50
5624025P 40x25 2m Pear 80/40
SLOTTED PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2

(pcs)
5622525S 25x25 2m Grey 196
5622540S 25x40 2m Grey 64
5624040S 40x40 2m Grey 64
5624060S Slotted plastic cable 40x60 2m Grey 60
5626040S trunking CT2 60x40 2m Grey 60
5626060S 60x60 2m Grey 48
5628060S 80x60 2m Grey 40
56210060S 100x60 2m Grey 32
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FLOOR TYPE PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2
(pcs)
5627020F 70x20 2m Grey 25
5627520F 75x20 2m Grey 40
5629020F 90x20 2m Grey 20
5625012F/WH Floor type plastic cable 50x12 2m White 50
5626015F/WH trunking CT2 60x15 2m White 60
5627020F/WH 70x20 2m White 25
5627520F/WH 75x20 2m White 40
5629020F/WH 90x20 2m White 20
AIR CONDITIONING TRUNKING

m/pcs
5627560 PLASTIC TRUNKING 75x60 2 White 15/30
AIR CONDITIONING TRUNKING ACCESSORIES

Catalogue Type Used for cable Colour Packing pcs
number trunking
56275601 OUTSIDE CORNER 75x60 White 24
56275602 INSIDE CORNER 75x60 White 24
56275604 L- CORNER 75x60 White 18
56275605 CONNECTOR 75x60 White 40
56275606 INTERNAL CAP 75x60 White 30
56275607 EXTERNAL CAP 75x60 White 18
56275608 WALL PENETRATION 75x60 White
56275609 CABLE HOLDER 75x60 White
56275601 56275601 56275602 56275602 56275604 56275605
56275606 56275606 56275607 56275607 56275608 56275608
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CORNER TRUNKING
number m/pcs
5622323 Plastic cable trunking 23X23 2 White 60/120
CORNER TRUNKING ACCESSORIES

Catalogue Type Used for cable Colour Packing pcs
number trunking
56223233 T- corner 23X23 White 60
56223234 L- corner 23X23 White 60
56223236 End cap 23X23 White 100
KITCHEN COUNTER CORNER CABLE TRUNKING

Catalogue Type Size Length (m) Colour Packing pcs
number
56225K Plastic trunking 25 2 White 30
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING SYSTEMS
Good cable organization ensures optimal performance and simplifies subsequent maintenance of
the cable system, make easy day-to-day operation, operational efficiency, optimal performance,
and the facility’s ability to change and grow over its lifetime.
DESCRIPTION
• Material: Pre-galvanized steel according to EN 10346:2011
• Length: 2500 mm
• Width: from 80 mm to 240 mm
• Height: 30mm
• Thickness: 1.2 mm
Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs

number H W L
57080302500 Single sector cable tray 30 80 2500 1
570160302500 Double sector cable tray 30 160 2500 1
570240302500 Three sector cable tray 30 240 2500 1
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS

number H W D
570010 Connector for single sector cable tray 30 80 50 1
570011 Connector for double sector cable tray 30 160 50 1
570012 Connector for three sector cable tray 30 240 50 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
END CAP FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS

number H W D
570013 End cap for single sector cable tray 30 80 50 1
570014 End cap for double sector cable tray 30 160 50 1
570015 End cap for three sector cable tray 30 240 50 1
VERTICAL BEND FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS

number H W
570016 Vertical bend for all sizes cable trays 120 350 1
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT HOLDERS FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS

number H W
570017 Level adj. holder for single sector cable tray 20 80 1
570018 Level adj. holder for double sector cable tray 20 160 1
570019 Level adj. holder for three sector cable tray 20 240 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

VERTICAL BEND FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS
Catalogue Type Thickness Base size Packing pcs
number (mm)
570020 Cable tray level adjustment element M8 40x40 1
EMPTY JUNCTION BOX FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS

number H W L
570002 Empty box for all type cable tray 65 350 350 1
COVER PLATE FOR UNDERFLOOR JUNCTION BOX

number Thickness W L
570003 Cover for underfloor junction box 1.5 268 268 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOCKET CASE FOR UNDERFLOOR JUNCTION BOX

Catalogue Type Number of Dimensions (mm) Packing
number modules Thickness W L pcs
570001 Socket case for underfloor 18 1.5 268 268 1
junction box 57002
*Socket case can be assembled with 8 modules 45x45mm and 2 modules 22x45mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

INSULATING CONDUITS
FLEXIBLE DOUBLE COAT CORRUGATED PIPE

TECHNICAL DATA
• Material- HDPE; • Minimum bending radius: 350 mm;
• Compresion resistance- 450 N/ 5 cm; • Temperature assembly resistance: -5 - +60 °C;
• Colour- red • Halogen free
Catalogue number Type Inner Diame- Outer Diame- Packing (m)

ter (mm) ter (mm)
M006017 Flexible double coat corrugated 52 63 25
pipe
SPIRAL FOR CABLES

Catalogue Type Colour Internal External Coil length
number diameter diameter (m)
(mm) (mm)
500SP6T Spiral 6x8mm Transparent 6 8 25
500SP6B Spiral 6x8mm Black 6 8 25
NYLON CABLE DRAW TAPE EC

Catalogue Type Diameter Length (m) Colour Packing (pcs)
number (mm)
500305 3 5 Transparent 1/340
Nylon cable draw tape
500315 3 15 Transparent 1/120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Documents corresponding to SELF-EXTINGUISHING PLIABLE CONDUITS EC

the products: TECHNICAL DATA
Standard EN 61386-1
EN61386-22; RAL- 7035 • Material: technopolymer on PVC base;
• Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94;
• Compression resistance: 320N;
Catalogue Type Inner Outer Packing

number Diameter Diameter (m)
(mm) (mm)
500M16 Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 10.7 16 100
500N16 Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 10.7 16 100
SPIRAL FLEXIBLE PVC CONDUITS- UV RAYS RESISTANT EC

TECHNICAL DATA
• Material (spiral+cover): shock resistance • Installation temperature: -15/+70°C;
technopolymer on PVC base; • Operating temperature: -5/+65°C;
• Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94; • Type: UV rays resistance.
• Compression resistance: 320N;
Catalogue Type Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Packing (m)
number (mm) (mm)
500UV12 12 16,2 30
500UV14 14 18,2 30
500UV16 16 20,2 30
UV flexible PVC conduit
500UV20 20 24,2 30
500UV25 25 29,6 30
500UV32 32 37,2 30
PVC INSULATED STEEL SPIRALS

TECHNICAL DATA
• Material - Galvanized steel, helically wound, flexible steel conduit with PVC coating
• PVC-resistance against corrosion
• Colour- black
• Operating temperature: -5/+65
Catalogue Type Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Packing (m)

number (mm) (mm)
500P11 11 15,2 50
500P14 14 18,4 50
500P16 PVC insulated steel 16 20,4 50
500P18 spirals 18 22,4 50
500P26 26 30,4 25
500P37 37 42,4 25
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

HALOGEN FREE RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS & ACCESSORIES
HALOGEN FREE NON-FLAMMABLE PLIABLE CONDUITS

HALOGEN
TECHNICAL DATA
FREE • Material: technopolymer
• Self extinguishing
• Compression resistance: 320N
Catalogue Type Inner diameter Outer diameter Packing

number (mm) (mm) (m)
500M16HF 11.2 15.7 100
500M20HF 14.4 19.85 100
500M25HF Halogen free conduit 19.1 27.4 50
500M32HF 24.85 31.6 50
500M40HF 32.3 40 25
HALOGEN FREE RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS, EC- LSZH

HALOGEN
This series rigid insulating conduits are low-smoke, halogen-free (LSZH) electrical conduits that
FREE virtually eliminate the release of the toxic gases found in PVC products.
Current trends show increasing use of LSZH conduit, where smoke from fire presents an increased
hazard to people. They are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in
office and residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems.
Fast and simple installation. Non-flammable material, easy to cut and paint.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: Halogen free technopolymer according to EN 50267-2-1, EN 50267-1-2, EN 60754-1;
EN 60754-2
• Low smoke according to EN 61034-1, EN 61034-2
• Resistance to flame propagation: Self extinguishing in less than 30 seconds.
• Compression resistance: 320N
• RAL 7035
Catalogue Type External Length Colour IP code Packing

number diameter (m) (pcs)
(mm)
50016HF 16 3 Grey IP40 34
50020HF LSZH cable 20 3 Grey IP40 34
50025HF conduit, 25 3 Grey IP40 20
50032HF with sleeve 32 3 Grey IP40 10
50040HF 40 3 Grey IP40 10
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ACCESSORIES FOR HALOGEN FREE RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS

HALOGEN
IP67 EC- LSZH
FREE
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: co-moulding low emission smoke technopolymer.
• Self-extinguishing V2 degree to UL94
• Resistance to abnormal heat: up to up to 850°C
• O-ring to compensate the conduit tolerances
• RAL- 7035
• IP code: IP67
HALOGEN FREE LONG BEND 90° IP67 EC- LSZH

Catalogue Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/ Box
number conduit Ø (mm) (pcs)
500BK16HF 16 67 Grey 10/150
500BK20HF 20 67 Grey 10/100
500BK25HF Halogen free 25 67 Grey 10/100
bend 90°
500BK32HF 32 67 Grey 10/50
500BK40HF 40 67 Grey 5/20
HALOGEN FREE COUPLING IP67 EC- LSZH

HALOGEN
FREE Catalogue
number
Type Used for cable
conduit Ø (mm)
IP code Colour Packing/ Box
(pcs)
500C16HF 16 67 Grey 10/250
500C20HF 20 67 Grey 10/200
500C25HF Halogen free 25 67 Grey 10/150
coupling
500C32HF 32 67 Grey 10/100
500C40HF 40 67 Grey 5/50
HALOGEN FREE CONDUIT CLIPS- LSZH

HALOGEN
Catalogue Type Used for cable Colour Packing/Box (pcs)
FREE number conduit Ø (mm)
500CC16 16 grey 100/1500
500CC20 20 grey 100/1000
500CC25 Halogen free 25 grey 100/1000
conduit clips
500CC32 32 grey 50/800
500CC40 40 grey 50/400
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PVC SELF-EXTINGUISHING RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS EC
Documents corresponding to Rigid insulating conduit are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in
the products: office and residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems.
Standard EN 61386-1 Fast and simple installation. In combination with a wide range of accessories, building irregulari-
EN 61386-21 ties are quickly overcome. Nonflammable material, easy to cut and paint.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Material - shock resistance technopolymer on rigid PVC base
• Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
• Compression resistance- 320N
Catalogue Type External Length (m) Colour IP code Packing

number diameter (pcs)
(mm)
50016/2 16 2 Grey 40 34
50016 16 3 Grey 40 34
50020/2 20 2 Grey 40 34
50020 20 3 Grey 40 34
50025/2 Plastic cable conduit, 25 2 Grey 40 20
50025 with sleeve 25 3 Grey 40 20
50032/2 32 2 Grey 40 10
50032 32 3 Grey 40 10
50040/2 40 2 Grey 40 10
50040 40 3 Grey 40 10
ACCESSORIES FOR PVC SELF-EXTINGUISHING RIGID INSULATING

CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE SPIRAL CONDUITS, IP 65 EC
Documents corresponding to TECHNICAL DATA
the products: • Material- shock resistant technopolymer on
Standard EN 61386-1 PVC base
EN61386-21 • Self-extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
• Glow wire test: up to 960°C
• O-ring to compensate the conduit tolerances
• RAL- 7035
PVC BEND FLEXIBLE

Catalogue Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/
number conduit Ø (mm) Box (pcs)
500FB16 16 65 Grey 50/200
500FB20 20 65 Grey 50/200
PVC bend flexible
500FB25 25 65 Grey 35/140
500FB32 32 65 Grey 20/80
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PVC BEND 90°

500BB16 16 65 grey 100/1000
500BB20 20 65 grey 50/600
500BB25 PVC bend 90° 25 65 grey 25/300
500BB32 32 65 grey 100
500BB40 40 65 grey 100
CONDUIT-CONDUIT PVC JOINT

500CM16 16 65 grey 10/350
500CM20 20 65 grey 10/350
500CM25 Conduit-conduit PVC joint 25 65 grey 10/200
500CM32 32 65 grey 10/100
500CM40 40 65 grey 5/80
CONDUIT-BOX PVC JOINT

500CB16 Conduit-box PVC joint 16 65 grey 10/350
500CB20 20 65 grey 10/350
500CB25 25 65 grey 10/200
500CB32 32 65 grey 10/100
500CB40 40 65 grey 5/80
PVC RIGID CONDUIT - FLEXIBLE SPIRAL CONDUITS JOINT

Catalogue Type Conduit Flexible IP code Colour Packing/
number Ø(mm) spiral Ø Box (pcs)
(mm)
500DD16 PVC rigid conduit - flexible 16 12 65 grey 10/350
500DD20 spiral conduits joint 20 16 65 grey 10/350
500DD25 25 20 65 grey 10/200
500DD32 32 25 65 grey 10/100
500DD40 40 32 65 grey 5/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ACCESSORIES FOR PVC SELF-EXTINGUISHING RIGID INSULATING
CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE SPIRAL CONDUITS, IP40 EC
Documents corresponding to TECHNICAL DATA

the products: • Material- shock resistant technopolymer on PVC base
Standard EN 61386-1 • Self-extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
EN61386-21 • Glow wire test: up to 960°C
• RAL- 7035
PVC BEND FLEXIBLE

Catalogue Type Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box
500FK16 16 44 grey 50/200
500FK20 20 44 grey 50/200
PVC bend flexible
500FK25 25 44 grey 35/140
500FK32 32 44 grey 20/80
PVC BEND 90°

500BK16 16 40 grey 100/1000
500BK20 20 40 grey 50/600
500BK25 PVC bend 90° 25 40 grey 25/300
500BK32 32 40 grey 100
500BK40 40 40 grey 100
PLASTIC BEND SMALL 90°

500SK16 16 40 grey 100/400
500SK20 Plastic bend small 20 40 grey 100/300
500SK25 90° 25 40 grey 100/200
500SK32 32 40 grey 50/150
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PVC T-JOINT
500T16 16 40 grey 100/300
500T20 20 40 grey 100/200
PVC T-joint
500T25 25 40 grey 50/100
500T32 32 40 grey 50/100
PVC COUPLING
500C16 16 40 grey 100/1200
500C20 20 40 grey 100/800
500C25 PVC coupling 25 40 grey 50/500
500C32 32 40 grey 25/250
500C40 40 40 grey 25/150
HALOGEN FREE CONDUIT CLIPS- LSZH

HALOGEN
FREE number conduit Ø (mm)
500CC16 16 grey 100/1500
500CC20 20 grey 100/1000
500CC25 Halogen free 25 grey 100/1000
conduit clips
500CC32 32 grey 50/800
500CC40 40 grey 50/400
PVC CONDUIT CLIPS

number conduit Ø (mm)
500CS16 16 grey 100/1000
500CS20 PVC conduit clips 20 grey 100/1000
with plug and steel
500CS25 screw 25 grey 100/800
500CS32 32 grey 50/400
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PVC CONDUIT CLIPS
number conduit Ø (mm)
500CО16 16 grey 100/1000
500CО20 PVC collar conduit 20 grey 100/1000
500CО25 clips 25 grey 100/800
500CО32 32 grey 50/500
PVC MODULAR FIXING GUIDE FOR CLIPS

Catalogue Type Length Colour Packing
number (mm)
500BC PVC modular fixing guide for clips 200 grey 400
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
METAL CABLE TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES
CABLE TRAY
The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production
premises for direct mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and
accessories with standard lengths and sizes. They allow quick construction of cable systems with
many angles and derivations.
Catalogue number Type Size (mm) Thickness Length Packing/Box

(mm) (mm) (pcs)
56050825U CT1 UT Cable tray 40x50 0.6 2500 1
For joining cable tray section together use screw SET M8 with catalogue
number: 568SET or M6 SET with catalogue number 566SET. Recommended
quantities of bolt and nut sets for cable trays connection are: 2 sets for 50mm
cable trays and 3 sets for everyone else.
CABLE TRAY COVER

(mm) (mm) (pcs)
56050825C CT1 Cable tray cover 15x50 0.6 2500 1
For joining cable covers section together use screw SET M8 with catalogue
number: 568SET or M6 SET with catalogue number 566SET. Recommended
quantities of bolt and nut sets for cable trays connection are: 2 sets for 50mm
cable trays and 3 sets for everyone else.
COUPLER FOR TRAYS

(mm) (mm) (pcs)
56250C CT1 Coupler for trays 40 1.2 175 1
with the same size
To install 2 trays use 2pcs 56250C and 8 SETs of bolt and nuts with catalogue
numbers: 566SET or 568SET
ADJUSTABLE VERTICAL CONNECTOR

Catalogue Type Length Height Thickness Packing/
number (mm) (mm) (mm) Box (pcs)
56300LC CT1 Adjustable vertical connector - set (2 pcs ) 300 40 1.2 1
To install 2 trays use 1 SET 56300LC and 10 SETs of bolt and nuts with cata-
logue number: 566SET and 568SET
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ADJUSTABLE HORIZONTAL CONNECTOR
Catalogue Type Length Height Thickness Packing/
56301LC CT1 Adjustable horizontal connector 175 40 1.2 1
To install 2 trays use 2pcs 56301LC and 8 SETs of bolt and nuts with cata-
logue number: 566SET and 568SET
HANGING C TYPE RAIL

Catalogue Type Length Size Thickness Packing/
5690106 CT1 Hanging C type rail 2000 27x18 1.2 1
Slotted hole size: 8.5x20 mm| Round hole size: D-11 mm| Mounting: with
threaded rod and nuts
ADD ON 90° HORIZONTAL CORNER BEND

Catalogue Type Height Tickness Packing/Box
5690101 CT1 Add on 90° horizontal corner bend 40 1 1
To install 2 trays use bolt and nuts with catalogue number: 566SET and 568SET
ANGLE 90°
Catalogue number Type Thickness (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
5690100 Angle 90° 0.8 100x100 1
5690150 Angle 90° 0.8 150x150 1
5690200 Angle 90° 0.8 200x200 1
5690300 Angle 90° 1 300x300 1
ANGLE COVER 90°

Catalogue number Type Metric bolt diam- Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
eters
5690100C Angle cover 90° 1.5 100x100 1
5690150C Angle cover 90° 1.5 150x150 1
5690200C Angle cover 90° 1.5 200x200 1
5690300C Angle cover 90° 1.5 300x300 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ADD ON TEE HORIZONTAL BEND

Catalogue Type Width Height Thickness Packing/
5690102 CT1 Add on tee horizontal bend 100 100 40 1 1
5690105 CT1 Add on tee horizontal bend 300 300 40 1.2 1
To install 2 trays use bolt and nuts with catalogue number: 566SET and 568SET
WALL BRACKET
Catalogue Type Tray width Length Packing/Box
56050S CT1 Wall bracket 50 50 60 1
56100S CT1 Wall bracket 100 100 110 1
56150S CT1 Wall bracket 150 150 160 1
56200S CT1 Wall bracket 200 200 210 1
56300S CT1 Wall bracket 300 300 310 1
CEILING/WALL BRACKET
Catalogue Type Length Height Packing/Box
56100OB CT1 OMEGA Ceiling/Wall bracket 100 145 200 1
THREADED HANGING ROD

Catalogue Type Thread Length Grade Packing/Box
number (mm) (pcs)
M517079 Threaded hanging rod M6 1000 4.8 100
Application: Suitable for fixing skirting, stud battens to wall and long runs of
shelf support
BOLT AND NUTS, SET

Catalogue Type Thread metric Length Packing/Box
566SET CT1 Bolt and nuts, SET M6 15 1/500
568SET CT1 Bolt and nuts, SET M8 15 1/500
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

WIRE MESH CABLE TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES
WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY

Wire Mesh tray is generally used for telecommunication and fiber optic applications and are
installed on short support spans. This type of cable trays cable provide lots of options for cable
management which is especially important at their frequent entry and exit. The purpose of a cable
tray system is to support, route, and protect cable and is part of the cable management system.
Catalogue Type Size Thickness Length Packing/

560100604WM CT2 Wire mesh cable tray 60x100 4 2500 1
HANGING RAIL/ CENTRAL SUPPORT

Catalogue Type Length Width of Packing/Box
number (mm) tray (mm) (pcs)
5690160MW CT2 Hanging rail/ Central support 160 100 1/50
Material: Pre-galvanized steel
CONNECTOR FOR WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY

Catalogue Type Length Packing/
number (mm) Box (pcs)
56250CMW Boltless connector for wire mesh cable tray 220 1/50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
WALL MOUNTING SUPPORT

Catalogue number Type Length Width of Packing/
(mm) tray (mm) Box (pcs)
56130SMW CT2 WALL MOUNTING SUPPORT 130 100 1/50
WALL BRACKET & BOXES FIXING SUPPORT

Catalogue number Type Size Packing/
(mm) Box (pcs)
56251MW CT2 WALL BRACKET & BOXES FIXING SUPPORT 85x75 1/50
EARTHING CLAMP
Catalogue Type Section Thread Packing/
number (mm2) (mm) Box (pcs)
56070G CT2 Earthing clamp 70 M6 1/100
Material: Brass
GROUNDING STRAP
Catalogue Type Section Length Packing/
number (mm2) (mm) Box (pcs)
56100SG CT2 Grounding strap 6 80 1/100
Material: Tin plated copper

Mounting: with boltless connector with catalogue number 56250CMW
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | LIGHTNING PROTECTION

LIGHTNING PROTECTION
AIR-TERMINATION ROD
Catalogue Model Length Diameter Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm) (mm)
ME014066 101 VL2000 2000 10/16 1/10
ME014071 101 VL2500 2500 10/16 1/10
ME014063 101 VL3000 3000 10/16 1/10
ME014069 101 VL3500 3500 10/16 1/10
Suitable for wind loads according to Eurocode 1: DIN EN 50164 - 2. Last meter is
tapered up Ø16 mm to Ø10mm, material: AlMgSi. Matches stand system FangFix.
Material: Aluminum.
STAND FOR AIR-TERMINATION ROD, FANGFIX SYSTEM

number (mm) (mm)
M014102 F-FIX-16 373 84/119 1
System consists of FangFix stone with base and clamp. FangFix clamp made of
VA. Lightning current tested with 100 kA (10/350). 16 kg stone with high level of
stability. Quick and easy mounting of interception rod using anchors. Concrete,
frost-resistant. The FangFix stone can be stacked.
PROFILE EARTHING ROD WITH CONNECTION LUG

Catalogue Model Length Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm)
M014007 213 1500 DIN 1500 1
Cross-profile 50 x 50 x 3 mm. With connecting strap. Hot-dip galvanized. 1

through hole with diameter 13 mm. 2 through holes with diameter 11 mm. For
the construction of earthing systems e.g. antenna or earthing of building site
distribution boards. Material: Steel
EARTHING ROD WITH STRIP

Catalogue Model Rog Strip Rog thick- Strip Rog Strip
number length length ness thickness width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
M014048 50/50/5 1500 1500 5 3 50 30
M014012 60/60/6 1500 1500 6 3 60 40
Cold galvanized: have been coated in zinc to make them corrosion resistant.
Material: Steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
COPPER-BONDED EARTHING ROD, THREADED

number (mm) (mm)
ME014011 EL-ER17 1500 17.2 1/10
It guarantees trouble-free removal of energy up to 50 years since the copper

layer does not allow corrosion. Can be extended to the desired length with
brass couplers. 99.9% pure electrolytic copper coating 300μm Rods have a
high steel Q 235 core and tip that provide superior strength when driving.
Copper coating will not crack when bent or tear when driven
COUPLERS FOR THREADED RODS

Catalogue Model Length Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm)
ME014012 EL-CTR 68 1
To connection two or many threaded copper-bonded ground rods.
COUPLERS FOR THREADED RODS

Catalogue number Model Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
ME014013 EL-DS 58 1
Material: Tempered steel.

Depending on the hardness of the soil, usually 1pc. enough for an object.
CONNECTORS EARTHING ROD TO STRIP / CONDUCTOR

Catalogue Model Length Width Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm) (mm)
ME014014 EL-1204 65 65 1/45
Material: stainless steel 304

Conductor size: 50mm² stranded
Strip size: max. 40x4mm
HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STRIP FOR EARTH

Catalogue Model Length Thickness Width Packing/Box
number (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs)
ME301090 EL-EP 40x4 39.6 4 40 1
Continuously hot dip galvanized Earthing strip, DD11.

Zinc coating: 500g/m2 =80mk.
For lightning protection, earthing systems and ring equipotential bonding.
Material: Steel.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COLD GALVANIZED STRIP FOR EARTH
Catalogue Model Length Thickness Width Packing/Box
M014008 40/4 6 4 40 1
Coated in zinc to make them corrosion resistant.

Material: Steel.
ALUMINUM ROUND CONDUCTOR

number (mm) (mm)
ME301092 EL-LP 8 140 8 1/140
ME301096 EL-LP 11 100 11 1/100
Conductor material: AlMgSi.

EL-LP 8 - without isolation.
EL-LP 11- with not flammable halogen free isolation.
CABLE HOLDER FOR FLAT ROOFS

Catalogue Model Length Width Height Packing/Box
ME301082 EL- RCH 144 92 66 1
Fixing the wire on flat roofs.

Plastic stabilized PE against UV radiation with inserted concrete block.
EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING BAR

ME301084 EL-EBR 182 52 42 1
Equipotential busbar for equipotential bonding to DIN VDE 0100-410/-540 and

DIN 62561-15.
Material of bar: Ms.
Material of clamps: St galvanized.
Connection options: 7 single or multi-wire cables 25 mm2 or fine-wire cables to
16 mm2 (max. D - 7 mm) 1 D8-12 mm 1 up to 30x5 / D8-12 mm.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
VARIABLE EARTHING CONNECTOR FOR ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS

Catalogue Model Length Width Packing/Box
ME301088 EL-V 38 40 1
Material: Aluminum- AlCu4MgSi(A).

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm.
Type of fastening screw: Hexagonal bolt.
SCREW-LESS CABLE BRACKET FOR EARTHING CONDUCTORS

ME301006 EL-VA 24.2 22 33.4 1/50
Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 mm & 11 mm.
ATTACHING CLAMP
ME014070 EL-AC 78 40 36 1/100
Attaching the round conductors to metal parts of the premises
ROOF GUTTER CLAMP

ME301008 EL-RGC 50 45 1/100
Suitable for all bulge and bead thicknesses

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm
Material: Steel
CROSSBAR FOR EARTHING CONDUCTOR

M301083 156 K8-10 ST 43 20 1/100
Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm. Hot-dip galvanized.

Material: Steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ROD HOLDER
M014014 113 Z-16 56 20 1/10
For interception and earth entry rods 101 VL. Installed with crossbar and
hexagonal bolts M6 x 16. With female thread M8 or through hole with D- 7 mm.
Material: Die-cast zinc, Galvanized.
BRIDGE CONNECTOR FOR ROD HOLDER

M014054 226 8-10 70 30 1/20
For fitting round conductors with D 8 and 10 mm to earthing rods or flat strip
30x3.5. Including 2 hexagonal bolts M8 x 20 high-grade stainless steel (V2A).
Conforms to the requirements according to VDE 0185-305 (IEC 62305).
Material: Steel, Hot-dip Galvanized.
EARTH CONNECTION TERMINAL FOR CONDUCTOR TO STRIP

M031239 937 50 60 25 1/10
For round conductor and flat strips. Suitable for cable 50 mm² and strips with
width 40 mm. With 2 hexagonal bolts M6 x 20 mm.
Material: Steel, Hot-dip galvanized.
CROSS-CONNECTORS FOR STRIPS AND CONDUCTORS

ME301087 EL-1203 65 65 1/45
Material: stainless steel 304

Conductor size: 50mm² stranded
Strip size: max. 40x4mm
SPACER CLIP FOR STRIPS

Catalogue Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Packing/Box
number (pcs)
M301059 831 40 M6 65 14 14 1/10
Suitable for strips with width 40 mm.

With thread M6 and 2 hexagonal bolts M6 x 16 (F).
Hot-dip galvanized.
Material: Steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
BRIDGE CONNECTOR FOR ROD HOLDER

M014017 288 DIN 170 30 1/20
With 1 attaching hole with D- 11 mm.

With 2 x 4 mounting hole with D- 5.2 mm.
With 2 x 2 mounting hole with D- 6.9 mm.
Material: Aluminum.
INSPECTION DOOR
M500684 5800 VZ 180 13.5 230 1
Lightweight design for flush-mounted separation points.

Claw length approx. 80 mm.
Strip galvanized.
Material: Steel.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DISTRIBUTION BOXES
FLUSH MOUNTING JUNCTION BOX EC350 SERIES

TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: up to 1000V
• Box material: Shock resistant technopolymer
• Screw material: Anticorrosive galvanized steel
• For quick and easy cables or conduits inlet- Side are pre-cutting
• By the separator it is possible to divide the box into separate sections for
different circuits
• IP code: IP40
Catalogue Type Description Box dimensions (mm) Packing /

number L H W Box
1927410 EC350C4 Junction box 152 100 70 1/80
1927411 EC350C6 Junction box 196 152 70 1/40
1927412 EC350C7 Junction box 294 152 70 1/28
1927413 EC350C8 Junction box 392 152 70 1/20
1927415 EC3500S Separator 10/100
CONSOLE FOR BRICK AND CONCRETE FOR ITALIAN STANDARD

MODULAR SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
Catalogue Type Length Width Depth Packing
24207 1-3 Module Console Box 95 70 48 10/400
24208 4 Module Console Box 118 70 48 10/240
24210 Console Box Spacer 20/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
UNIVERSAL CONSOLE BOX-FLUSH MOUNTING

Catalogue Type Diameter Packing
number (mm) (pcs)
1927302 Console box - Ø65 65 300
CONSOLE BOX MULTI

Catalogue Type Diameter Packing (pcs)
number (mm)
1927301 Console box multi- Ø65 65 250
CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD

Catalogue Type Packing
number (pcs)
19274 Single 240
19275 Double 120
19276 Triple 60
19278 Quadruple 50
19279 Fivefold 25
CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD ITALIAN TYPE

Catalogue Type Packing (pcs)
number
24205 Triple Console box for plasterboard 160
24206 Quadruple Console box for plasterboard 150
Suitable for all bulge and bead thicknesses.

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 mm and 11mm.
Material: Steel.
CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD ITALIAN TYPE

Catalogue number Type Packing (pcs)
26636 Sixfold Console box for plasterboard 10/160
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DISTRIBUTION BOXES - SQUARE TYPE
Catalogue Type Size Packing
number L W H (pcs)
1927402 Distribution Box 80/80/50 80 80 50 100
without screws
DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR PLASTERBOARD - SQUARE TYPE

Catalogue Type Size Packing
number L W H (pcs)
DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR PLASTERBOARD - ROUND TYPE

number (mm) (pcs)
1927403 Distribution box Ø65 65 240
DISTRIBUTION BOXES - ROUND TYPE

number (mm) (pcs)
CAP WITH FASTENING CLIPS

Catalogue Type Suitable for holes with Packing (pcs)
number diameter (mm)
19277 Cap with clips 60-90 1/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
INSTALLATION | W-PROOF JUNCTION BOXES 1st PAGE
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES
Documents corresponding to the WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP44, IP55

product: Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension
Standard: EN 60670-1 or tapping at cable installations laying. Made of ABS material with openings for input - output
conductors, with rubber gasket to provide the corresponding IP code. Resistant to chemical,
thermal and UV rays. Direct wall mounting with screws.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: up to 1000V
• Material: ABS
• IP code: IP 55
Catalogue Box type Box dimensions Gasket dimensions IP code Packing/

number (mm) (mm) Box
D L W H d c
8070 WB50/50 50 - - 50 22.5 17 44 500
8071 WB80/50 80 - - 50 22.5 17 44 200
8072 WB85/85/50 - 85 85 50 22.5 18.5 44 200
8073 WB100/100/70 - 100 100 70 30 23 54 100
8076 WB150/110/70 - 150 110 70 28 23 54 60
8074 WB150/150/70 - 150 150 70 35 29 54 60
8075 WB200/100/70 - 200 100 70 35 29 54 50
8077 WB200/155/80 - 200 155 80 35 29 54 30
8078 WB255/200/80 - 255 200 80 35 29 54 30
8079 WB300/250/120 - 300 250 120 35 29 54 20
8080 WB400/350/120 - 400 350 120 35 29 54 5
ELMARK
GO TO THE
INSTALLATION | W-PROOF JUNCTION BOXES

1st PAGE
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP55

Catalogue Box type Box dimensions (mm) Colour IP code Packing /
number L H W Box
8023 CP 1020 90 43 40 Grey 55 1/456
8024 CP 1021 75 75 40 Grey 55 1/280
8025 CP 1022 85 85 40 Grey 55 1/224
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP65

Catalogue Box type Box dimensions (mm) Hole/pcs IP code Packing/
number L H W d Box
8091 WBG 50/50 50 50 50 25 4 55 300
8092 WBG 80/50 80 80 50 25 4 55 240
8093 WBG 85/85/50 85 85 50 25 7 55 200
8001 WBG 100/100/70 100 100 70 27 7 65 100
8002 WBG 150/110/70 150 110 70 27 10 65 60
8003 WBG 150/150/70 150 150 70 27 7 65 60
8004 WBG 200/100/70 200 100 70 27 8 65 50
8005 WBG 200/155/80 200 155 80 35 10 65 30
8006 WBG 200/200/80 200 200 80 35 12 65 30
8007 WBG 255/200/80 255 200 80 35 12 65 30
8008 WBG 300/250/120 300 250 120 35 12 65 20
8009 WBG 400/350/120 400 350 120 35 16 65 5
WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP54 WITH KNOCK OUTS

Catalogue Box type Box dimensions (mm) Colour IP code Packing /
number L H W Box
8032 CP 1259 80 120 120 Grey 54 1/35
8033 CP 1261 150 110 140 Grey 54 1/16
8034 CP 1262 190 145 140 Grey 54 1/10
8035 CP 1263 250 200 160 Grey 54 1/6
8036 CP 1264 310 230 180 Grey 54 1/6
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | SUPPLY BUSBARS & RAILS
SUPPLY BUSBARS & DIN RAIL
SUPPLY BUSBAR
• Enables the supply of a group of conductors • Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
• Provides simultaneous supply • Isolating voltage: 500V
• Conducting section – electro technical copper • Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of
• Insulation of the conducting section the outer parts: 960°С/3sec.
• Rated current (phase): 63/100A
CONNECTING
• To the joining terminal of the breaker
Catalogue Type Length Poles In with one In with two Packing/ Box
number (copper (m) (number) point points of (pcs)
busbar) of power power supply
supply
14163 1P 63 1 54 63А 90А 20/100
14190 1P 100 1 54 100A 120A 20/100
14263 2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 10/50
14363 3P 63 1 18 63А 90А 6/30
14390 3P 100 1 18 100A 120A 5/50
14463 DP 1N 1 56 63A 90A 10/50
14190T C100 1P 1 - 125A 150A 20/100
14290T C100 2P 1 - 125A 150A 10/50
14390T C100 3P 1 - 125A 159A 5/20
14163U U 1P 63 1 54 63A 90A 20/100
14263U U 2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 10/50
14363U U 3P 63 1 18 63A 90A 6/30
14463U U 4P 63 1 13 63A 90A 5/20
MOUNTING (DIN) RAILS

• Serves for mounting breakers, residual current • Brass alloy with galvanic cover for 14001
devices, contactors and other elements • Cold galvanized brass alloy for 14001G
• Provides a firm fixation of the elements • Factory drilled mounting openings
• Length: 1m
CONNECTING
• With bolts or other fixing elements to the
mounting surface
Catalogue Length (m) Packing / Box (pcs)

number
14001 1m 20 / 100
14001G 1m 20 / 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TERMINALS
INSTALLATION | TERMINALS
ZERO TERMINALS
SP 031 Catalogue Rail type Dimensions Packing/ Box
number (mm) (pcs)
Length Height Width
14204 SP 029-4 82.9 21.5 12 10/500
14206 SP 029-6 100.9 21.5 12 10/800
14208 SP 029-8 118.9 21.5 12 20/300
14210 SP 029-10 136.9 21.5 12 20/300
14212 SP 029-12 182.4 21.5 12 20/250
SP 029 14304 SP 031-4 59.5 31.5 12.4 5/400
14306 SP 031-6 76.5 31.5 12.4 5/400
14308 SP 031-8 93 31.5 12.4 5/400
14310 SP 031-10 111 31.5 12.4 5/400
14312 SP 031-12 128 31.5 12.4 5/300
ZERO RAILS
They represent a brass rail with rectangular TECHNICAL DATA
section with factory made openings for the • Material: brass for the current leading ele-
conductors and bolts for clamping of the ments
conductor. They are offered in types with • Insulation material: plastic
insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used • Colour: gray/blue
in the electrical distribution boxes for zeroing • Application: general
and earthing. • Ambient temperature: -40 to +65°C
Catalogue Rail type Dimensions Bolt Number of Packing/

number (mm) terminals Box (pcs)
Length Height Width Diameter
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
14002 Brass 1000 7.8 6 5 M4 54 100
14012 Zero insulated 250 - - 5 M4 16 200
TERMINAL BLOCKS TBH TYPE

Catalogue Type Pieces In (А) Un (V) Colour Section of the Packing /
number in a strip conductor Box (pcs)
(mm²)
31003 TBH 3A 12 3 660 Semitransparent Up to 1.5 10 / 1000
31006 TBH 6A 12 6 660 Semitransparent Up to 4 10 / 1000
31010 TBH 10A 12 10 660 Semitransparent Up to 6 10 / 500
31015 TBH 15A 12 15 660 White Up to 6 10 / 500
31020 TBH 20A 12 20 660 White Up to 10 10 / 400
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FIXED TERMINAL BLOCKS - LTU2 UK SERIES

Fixed terminal blocks with universal application into electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail
mounting. Variety of sizes for optimum using of available space by selection of appropriate
terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.
Catalogue Type Section of the Size of the terminal In Un Colour Packing/

number conductor (mm²) (mm) (А) (V) Box (pcs)
Single- Multi- L H W
core core
31033 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Grey 50/3000
31032 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Red 50/3000
31031 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Black 50/3000
31035 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Blue 50/3000
Catalogue Type Section of the Size of the terminal In (А) Un (V) Colour Packing/
number conductor (mm²) (mm) Box (pcs)
core core
31053 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Grey 50/2000
31052 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Red 50/2000
31051 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Black 50/2000
31055 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Blue 50/2000
core core
31063 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Grey 50/1000
31062 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Red 50/1000
31061 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Black 50/1000
31065 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Blue 50/1000
core core
31103 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Grey 50/1000
31102 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Red 50/1000
31101 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Black 50/1000
31105 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Blue 50/1000
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

core core
31163 LTU2UIK 16 2.5-25 4-16 42.5 47 12.2 101 800 Grey 30/1200
31353 LTU2UIK 35 10-35 10-35 55 62 15.2 125 800 Grey 20/400
FIXED TERMINAL BLOCKS - JD SERIES

Two-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect grounded conductors.
Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.

core core
31054 5JD 0.2-4 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 34 800 Yellow-green 50/1000
31064 6JD 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 37 800 Yellow-green 50 /1000
31104 10JD 0.5-10 0.5-6 42.5 47 8.2 61 800 Yellow-green 50/1000
31164 16JD 2.5-25 2.5-16 42.5 47 12.2 108 800 Yellow-green 50/600
31354 35JD 2.5-35 2.5-35 42.5 47 15 135 800 Yellow-green 20/400
MARKING TAGS - ZB TYPE

Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, different voltages and fixing
of elements for DIN-rail mounting.
Catalogue Type Pieces in a strip Colour Size Packing / Box

number (mm) (pcs)
31906 ZB6 20 White 6 100/1200
31908 ZB8 10 White 8 100/1200
END COVER
Catalogue Type Colour Thickness (mm) Packing/ Box
number (pcs)
31901 EC grey 8 200 / 6000
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
UNIVERSAL END FIXED PIECES E/UK TYPE

Catalogue Type Colour Thickness (mm) Packing/ Box

number (pcs)
31902 E/UK Grey 5 200/2400
DOUBLE DECK TERMINAL BLOCKS

Catalogue Type Section of the Rated Rated Colour Dimensions Packing
number conductor (mm²) current voltage (mm) (pcs.)
Single- Multi-core (А) (V) L H W
core
31056D DDTB4/5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 32 500 Beige 59.9 54 6 50/1000
31053D DDTB4/5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 32 500 Grey 59.9 54 6 50/1000
31901D End cover for Grey 54 43.5 1.5 200/6000
DDTB4/5N
INSULATING MOUNTING TERMINAL - TB25

FUNCTIONS
• Provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm² to power supply busbar
• Provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker
• Provides enough contact surface of the conductor
• Brass alloy with galvanic cover
• Fabric isolated with plastic cover
• Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables
• Rated current: up to 63A
• IP code: IP>20
• Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm²
Catalogue Type Section of the Rated current Packing / Box

number conductor (mm²) In (A) (pcs)
31025 TB 25 2.5 to 35 63 20 / 2000
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
UNIPOLAR DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR COPPER AND
ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Housing material: PA Nylon
• Terminal material: tin plated brass
• Grade of flame retardant: UL94v-0
• Mounting: DIN rail or screw fixing
Catalogue Type Current Quantity cross sections Dimensions Packing

number (A) mm² (mm) (pcs.)
L H W
319080 PPDTB80 80A 1x 6-16 mm² 30 69 49 200
4x 2.5-6 mm²
2x 2.5-16 mm²
319125 PPDTB125 125A 1x 10-35 mm² 29 77 46 150
6x 2.5-16 mm²
319160 PPDTB160 160A 1x 10-70 mm² 29 77 46 150
6x 2.5-16 mm²
319250 PPDTB250 255A 1x 35-120 mm² 47 96 50 150
8x 2.5-16 mm²
4x 2.5-10 mm²
319400 PPDTB400 400A 1x 95-185 mm² 47 96 50 60
8x 2.5-16 mm²
4x 2.5-10 mm²
TERMINAL BLOCKS TBF TYPE

Catalogue Type Pieces in Section of the Rated Rated Dimensions Packing
number a terminal conductor current voltage (mm) (pcs.)
(mm²) (A) (V) L H W
31021 2 terminal block 2 4 mm² 32 400 12.4 14.5 20.5 5000
FAST LIGHTING CABLE CONNECTOR

Catalogue Type Pieces in Section of the Rated current Rated voltage Packing
number a terminal conductor (A) (V (pcs.)
(mm²)
31024 Lighting 3 1.0-2.5mm²/ 25 400 1500
connector 0.5-2.5 mm²
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
QUICK CONNECTION TERMINAL BLOCK


number a terminal conductor (mm²) current voltage (mm) (pcs.)
(A) (V) L W H
31026 2P- 4 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 25.5 14.4 1/100
2 in/2 out
31027 3P- 6 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 30.5 14.4 1/70
3 in/3 out
31028 5P- 10 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 40.5 14.4 1/50
5 in/5 out

Catalogue Type Pieces in Section of the Rated Rated Dimensions (mm) Packing
number a terminal conductor (mm²) current voltage L W H (pcs.)
(A) (V
31029 2P- 6 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 25.9 14.55 1/50
2 in/ 4 out
31030 2P- 8 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 35.9 14.55 1/50
2 in/ 6 out

Catalogue Type Pieces in Section of the Rated Rated Dimensions (mm) Packing
number a terminal conductor (mm²) current voltage L W H (pcs.)
(A) (V
31034 3P- 9 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 35.9 14.6 1/50
3 in/ 6 out
31036 3P- 12 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 48.5 14.6 1/50
3 in/ 9 out
MODULE TERMINAL BLOCK FOR QUICK CABLE CONNECTION

number a terminal conductor (mm²) current voltage (mm) (pcs.)
(A) (V L W H
31037 1P- 2 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 39.3 8.5 14.5 1/100
1 in/ 1 out
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | CONSUMABLES
CONSUMABLES
Standard: EN 60 423; 48580-81

CABLE GLANDS PG TYPE
Plastic pipes supplied with the corresponding TECHNICAL DATA
gaskets and nuts. Designed to provide neces- • Material: polyethylene (PE)
sary IP code on the points where conductors • Colour: gray
pass through the walls of the electric distribu- • Application: general
tion boxes. All cable gland elements are made • Ambient temperature: -40 to +65°C
of high quality plastic (PE) and rubber. • IP 68
Catalogue Type Overlap- Dimensions (mm) Packing/ Box
number ping field (pcs)
T B d D L1 L2
500070 PG-7 3.5-6.8 16.3 18 12 6.6 10 22 100/4000
500090 PG-9 5-8 18.9 21.7 15.5 8.5 10 25 100/4000
500110 PG-11 6-10 21.7 23.5 18.5 10.4 8.5 29 100/3000
500135 PG-13.5 7-12 23.6 26.5 20 13 10 29 100/2000
500160 PG-16 8-14 26.5 29.3 21.5 14 9 29 100/2000
500190 PG-19 9-17 29 32 23 17 12 29 100/2000
500210 PG-21 10-18 32.3 35.6 28 19 12 35 100/1000
500250 PG-25 15-22 32.6 32.6 29.8 24 13 31 100/1000
500290 PG-29 16-24 41.1 45.4 36 26 12.5 40 50/500
500360 PG-36 18-28 52 58 46 31.5 12.5 45 50/350
500420 PG-42 26-36 57.4 61.9 51 37.6 17.5 47 20/200
500480 PG-48 32-39 65.2 70.7 58 43 21 50 20/200
CABLE CONNECTOR
The cable connectors are hopeful way for assembling both cables. The high-temperature and
water resistant stability assure to the connector assure a high degree of security even in extreme
conditions.
Catalogue Type Section of the Length Diameter Cable IP code Packing /

number conductor (mm) (mm) glands Box (pcs)
(mm²) type
31072 Cable connector 11 2x0.5-2.5 78.3 26.2 PG11 68 50
59245 Cable connector 16 5x1.5- 2.5 115 26.5 PG16 67 50
59246 Cable connector 21 5x4-6 124 33.5 PG21 67 50
Y-TYPE CABLE CONNECTORS

TECHNICAL DATA
• Material: polyethylene (PE)
• Colour: gray
• Application: general
• IP 68
Catalogue Terminal Section of the Rated Length Diameter Cable IP code Packing/
number pieces conductor current (mm) (mm) glands Box (pcs)
(mm²) (A) type
31074 3 pin 0.5-4 24 139.7 32.56 M25 IP68 1
31075 5 pin 0.5-4 24 139.7 32.56 M25 IP68 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
WATERPROOF TERMINAL BOX

Catalogue Type Section of the Rated cur- Voltage Material Packing/
number conductor (mm²) rent (A) (V) Box (pcs)
31071 Terminal box IP44 0.5-4.0 6 450 Polycarbonate 1
31070 Terminal box IP65 0.5-2.5 10 450 Polycarbonate 1
Terminal box IP65
Terminal box IP44
SUPPORT INSULATOR FOR LOW VOLTAGE

Support insulators are used in control and TECHNICAL DATA
distribution cabinets mounting when bars • Rated voltage: 1000V
isolation is required. Provides reliable insulation • Insulating voltage: 5000 V
of live parts. • Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C
Catalogue Type Impulse Strength Fasting Bolt Dimensions (mm) Packing
number voltage strength H W a ø (pcs.)
(kV)
31725 SM 25 6 500 6 6 25 30 13 23 10/600
31730 SM 30 8 550 8 8 30 32 10 27 10/500
31735 SM 35 10 600 10 8 35 32 10 28 10/400
31740 SM 40 12 650 12 8 40 40 10 33 10/240
31751 SM 51 15 1000 20 8 51 50 12 28 10/240
31776 SM 76 25 1500 40 10 76 45 16 34 10/120
CABLE FIXING CLIPS

Support insulators are used in control and TECHNICAL DATA
distribution cabinets mounting when bars iso- • Rated voltage: 1000V
lation is required. Provides reliable insulation • Insulating voltage: 5000 V
of live parts. • Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C
Catalogue number Type Diameter (mm) Packing (pcs) Packing/ Box

(pcs)
500004 CHR-4 4 100 100/500
500005 CHR-5 5 100 100/ 500
500006 CHR-6 6 100 100/ 300
500007 CHR-7 7 100 100/ 300
500008 CHR-8 8 100 100/ 250
500009 CHR-9 9 100 100/ 200
500010 CHR-10 10 100 100/ 200
500012 CHR-12 12 100 100/ 100
500014 CHR-14 14 100 100/ 50
500016 CHR-16 16 100 100/ 50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSULATING TAPES
PVC INSULATING TAPE

Soft, flexible with good adhesiveness and flame retardant. Working temperature: 0-80°C.
Electrical strength: 40kV/mm
Catalogue Colour Thickness (mm) Width Length Packing/ Box

number (mm) (m) (pcs)
51011 Black 0.15 19 10 1/300
51012 White 0.15 19 10 1/300
51013 Blue 0.15 19 10 1/300
51014 Red 0.15 19 10 1/300
51015 Yellow / Green 0.15 19 10 1/300
51021 Black 0.15 19 20 1/200
51022 White 0.15 19 20 1/200
51023 Blue 0.15 19 20 1/200
51024 Red 0.15 19 20 1/200
51025 Yellow / Green 0.15 19 20 1/200
PVC INSULATING TAPE 3M TEMFLEX 1500

Catalogue Colour Thickness Width Length (m) Packing/Box
M151016 Black 0.15 19 20 10/100
BLACK SELF - AMALGAMATING HIGH VOLTAGE TAPE BISHOP 963

69kV | Waterproof | UV-Resistant | Moisture, corrosion and chemical resistance
Catalogue Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box

number (pcs)
M051004 Black 19 9 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ALUMINUM TAPE
Ideal for temporary exhaust pipe repair heating, ventilation - electrics and electronics insulation
and construction industries
Catalogue number Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs)

M499469 Aluminium 50 10 1
DUCT TAPE
Ideal for temporary exhaust pipe repair heating, ventilation - electrics and electronics insulation
and construction industries.
Catalogue number Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs)

51055 Grey 50 25 1
M499153 Black 50 25 1
MASKING TAPE
Support insulators are used in control and distribution cabinets mounting when bars isolation is
required. Provides reliable insulation of live parts.
Catalogue number Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs)

M516400 25 50 1
M516401 50 50 1
DOUBLE SIDED MOUNTING TAPE

M516402 25 5 1
M516403 50 25 1
HAZARD TAPE
M500179 50 100 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES
Standard: EN 60 684 HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES ZDG TYPE

Thin-wall heat shrinkage tubes are used for insulation of cable connection, at conductors repair to
protect the cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and mois-
ture, for restoring the cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at temperature
higher than 120°C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain degree. The material has high temperature
and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called permanently netted plastic. This
material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy electron rays so
that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that the pipe is heated to
the boiling point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the pipe is sharply refrig-
erated and the molecules stay in the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time. Heating the
pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given cable) the crystals melt again but due to the net
structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the cable, pressing it and not
allowing the moisture to get under the pipe.
TECHNICAL DATA • Condition of the material during fire
• Material: triple cross - linked polyolefin exposure: slight burning
• Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, • The material does not emit hazardous
green, white substances
• Shrinkage ratio: min 2 : 1 • Insulation resistance: 1х 10 12 Ω/cm
• Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100°C • Application: general
• Shrinkage temperature: min 120°C • Insulating voltage 1000 V
Catalogue Type D1 (mm) D2 (mm) S (mm) Packing / Box
number * (m)
301001x ZDG 1 0.5 0.04 200/4000
301115x ZDG 1.5 0.75 0.04 200/4000
301002x ZDG 2 1.0 0.05 200/4000
301003x ZDG 3 1.5 0.05 200/2000
301004x ZDG 4 2.0 0.08 100/1700
301005x ZDG 5 2.5 0.08 100/1200
301006x ZDG 6 3.0 0.08 100/1000
301007x ZDG 7 3.5 0.08 100/1000
301008x ZDG 8 4.0 0.08 100/1500
301009x ZDG 9 4.5 0.08 100/1500
301010x ZDG 10 5.0 0.08 100/1500
301011x ZDG 11 5.5 0.08 100/1500
301012x ZDG 12 6.0 0.08  100/1200
301013x ZDG 13 6.5 0.08 100/1200
301014x ZDG 14 7.0 0.08 100/1200
301015x ZDG 15 7.5 0.08 100/1200
301016x ZDG 16 8.0 0.08 100/1200
301018x ZDG 18 9.0 0.08 50/600
301020x ZDG 20 10 0.08 50/500
301022x ZDG 22 11 0.08  50/500
301025x ZDG 25 12.5 0.08 25/600
301028x ZDG 28 14 0.08 25/300
301030x ZDG 30 15 0.08 25/300
301035x ZDG 35 17.5 0.08 25/300
301040x ZDG 40 20 0.08 25/250
301050x ZDG 50 25 0.08 25/200
301060x ZDG 60 30 0.08 25/300
301070x ZDG 70 35 0.08 25/250
301080x ZDG 80 40 0.08 25/100
301090x ZDG 90 45 0.08 25/150
301100x ZDG 100 50 0.08 25/100
301120x ZDG 120 60 0.08 25/200
301150x ZDG 150 75 0.08 25/100
Note: At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the
colour must be added: B – blue; R – red; K - black; G - green; Y – yellow;
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES WITH GLUE GL TYPE

Catalogue Type Colour Diameter before Wall thickness Shrinkage Packing
number shrinking (mm) ratio (m)
(mm)
3010024GL GL Black D2.4 (≥2.4) 0.7±0.15 3:1 200
3010032GL GL Black D3.2 (3.5±0.3) 0.9±0.15 3:1 200
3010048GL GL Black D4.8 (5.2±0.3) 1.0±0.15 3:1 100
3010064GL GL Black D6.4 (6.8±0.4) 1.2±0.15 3:1 100
3010079GL GL Black D7.9 (8.4±0.4) 1.3±0.15 3:1 100
3010095GL GL Black D9.5 (9.9±0.4) 1.4±0.15 3:1 1,22
3010127GL GL Black D12.7 (13.2±0.5) 1.6±0.20 3:1 1,22
3010150GL GL Black D15.0 (15.6±0.5) 1.8±0.20 3:1 1,22
3010191GL GL Black D19.1 (19.6±0.5) 2.0±0.20 3:1 1,22
3010254GL GL Black D25.4 (25.4±0.8) 2.1±0.20 3:1 1,22
3010300GL GL Black D30.0 (≥30) 2.2±0.20 3:1 1,22
3010390GL GL Black D39 (≥40) 2.4±0.20 3:1 1,22
3010500GL GL Black D50 (≥50) 2.7±0.25 3:1 1,22
3010640GL GL Black D64 (≥60) 3.0±0.25 3:1 1,22
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CABLE TAGS – SETS
Catalogue Type Section Number Packing/ Catalogue Type Section Number Packing/
number (mm) in a roller Box (pcs) number (mm) in a roller Box (pcs)
318000 EC-0-0 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318010 EC-1-0 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318001 EC-0-1 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318011 EC-1-1 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318002 EC-0-2 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318012 EC-1-2 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318003 EC-0-3 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318013 EC-1-3 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318004 EC-0-4 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318014 EC-1-4 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318005 EC-0-5 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318015 EC-1-5 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318006 EC-0-6 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318016 EC-1-6 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318007 EC-0-7 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318017 EC-1-7 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318008 EC-0-8 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318018 EC-1-8 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
318009 EC-0-9 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 318019 EC-1-9 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800a EC-0-a 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801a EC-1-a 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800b EC-0-b 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801b EC-1-b 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800R EC-0-R 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801R EC-1-R 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800S EC-0-S 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801S EC-1-S 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800T EC-0-T 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801T EC-1-T 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800N EC-0-N 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801N EC-1-N 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800P EC-0-P 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801P EC-1-P 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800E EC-0-Е 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801E EC-1-Е 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800A EC-0-А 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801A EC-1-А 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800B EC-0-B 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801B EC-1-B 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800C EC-0-C 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801C EC-1-C 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
31800Q EC-0-Q 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 31801Q EC-1-Q 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150
Catalogue Type Section Number Packing/ Catalogue Type Section Number Packing/
number (mm) in a roller Box (pcs) number (mm) in a roller Box (pcs)
318020 EC-2-0 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318030 EC-3-0 5 - 7.2 250 150
318021 EC-2-1 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318031 EC-3-1 5 - 7.2 250 150
318022 EC-2-2 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318032 EC-3-2 5 - 7.2 250 150
318023 EC-2-3 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318033 EC-3-3 5 - 7.2 250 150
318024 EC-2-4 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318034 EC-3-4 5 - 7.2 250 150
318025 EC-2-5 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318035 EC-3-5 5 - 7.2 250 150
318026 EC-2-6 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318036 EC-3-6 5 - 7.2 250 150
318027 EC-2-7 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318037 EC-3-7 5 - 7.2 250 150
318028 EC-2-8 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318038 EC-3-8 5 - 7.2 250 150
318029 EC-2-9 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 318039 EC-3-9 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802a EC-2-a 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803a EC-3-a 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802b EC-2-b 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803b EC-3-b 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802R EC-2-R 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803R EC-3-R 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802S EC-2-S 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803S EC-3-S 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802T EC-2-T 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803T EC-3-T 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802N EC-2-N 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803N EC-3-N 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802P EC-2-P 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803P EC-3-P 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802E EC-2-Е 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803E EC-3-Е 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802A EC-2-А 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803A EC-3-А 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802B EC-2-B 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803B EC-3-B 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802C EC-2-C 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803C EC-3-C 5 - 7.2 250 150
31802Q EC-2-Q 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 31803Q EC-3-Q 5 - 7.2 250 150
ELMARK
EXPLOSION PROOF
INSTALLATION
SYSTEMS
EX ZONES- EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE
INSTALLATION | EX-PROOF SYSTEMS

ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU is a directive that applies to protective systems against explosions as well as all equipment used in or related to
explosive atmospheres, such as electrical and non-electrical equipment, components and safety devices, control and adjustments necessary
for the safe operation of this equipment and protective systems.
Devices falling within the scope of the European Directive and responding to the essential requirements for the safety and health are identi-
fied by a marking plate on which the logo appears.
LABELING OF ЕXPLOSION PROOF EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO ATEX 2014/34/EU

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
STARTERS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE WITH 1 BUTTON

FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, IP65
TECHNICAL DATA
• Application: Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
• Terminals: for power conductors up to 2.5mm²
• Mounting: Surface
• IP Code: 65
• Marking
II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db
II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb
Catalogue Entry QTY Button type Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number L H H1 D Box
720001 1 1 start 100 128 106 82 1
720002 2 1 start 100 150 106 97 1
720003 1 1 stop 100 128 106 82 1
720004 2 1 stop 100 150 106 97 1
720005 1 1 key I-0 100 128 106 82 1
720006 2 1 key I-0 100 150 106 97 1
STARTERS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE WITH 2 BUTTONS

FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, IP65
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY TECHNICAL DATA
+ 5 standard
0 extended
• IP Code: 65
• Marking
II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db
II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb
Catalogue Entry QTY Button type Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number L H H1 D Box
720009 1 2 start 100 128 106 82 1
720010 2 2 start 100 150 106 97 1
720011 1 2 stop 100 128 106 82 1
720012 2 2 stop 100 150 106 97 1
720013 1 1 start + 1 stop 100 128 106 82 1
720014 2 1 start + 1 stop 100 150 106 97 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING, IP65
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 20 ÷ 30V AC/DC 170 ÷ 250 V AC 50 Hz
• IP Code: 65
• Marking
• II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db
• II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb
Catalogue Entry QTY Light type Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number L H H1 D Box
720007R 1 1 red 100 128 106 82 1
720008R 2 1 red 100 150 106 97 1
720007G 1 1 green 100 128 106 82 1
720008G 2 1 green 100 150 106 97 1
720015RG 1 1 red+ 1 green 100 128 106 82 1
720016RG 2 1 red+ 1 green 100 150 106 97 1
INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE FOR SURFACE

MOUNTING, IP65
TECHNICAL DATA
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
• Buttons rated voltage: 400V AC
• Indicators rated voltage: 20 ÷ 30V AC/DC 170 ÷ 250 V AC 50 Hz
• Button rated current: 6A
• IP Code: 65
• Marking
• II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db
• II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb
Catalogue Entry QTY Button type Light type Dimensions (mm) Packing/
number L H H1 D Box
720017 1 1 start 1 green 100 128 106 82 1
720018 2 1 start 1 green 100 150 106 97 1
720019 1 1 stop 1 red 100 128 106 82 1
720020 2 1 stop 1 red 100 150 106 97 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
STARTERS AND INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE

FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, IP65
TECHNICAL DATA
• Application: Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 • Mounting: Surface
• Buttons rated voltage: 400V AC • IP Code: 65
• Indicators rated voltage: 20 ÷ 30V AC/DC • Marking
170 ÷ 250 V AC 50 Hz II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db
• Button rated current: 6A II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb
• Terminals: for power conductors up to
2.5mm²
Catalogue Button type Light type Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number L H D Box
720030 1 start Without 100 106 77 1
720031 1 stop Without 100 106 77 1
720032 1 key I-0 Without 100 106 77 1
720033G Without 1 green 100 106 77 1
720033R Without 1 red 100 106 77 1
720034 2 start Without 100 106 77 1
720035 2 stop Without 100 106 77 1
720036 1 start + 1 stop Without 100 106 77 1
720037RG Without 1 red+ 1 green 100 106 77 1
720037G Without 2 green 100 106 77 1
720037R Without 2 red 100 106 77 1
720038 1 start 1 green 100 106 77 1
720039 1 stop 1 red 100 106 77 1
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
STARTERS AND INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE

FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, IP65
TECHNICAL DATA
• Application: Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 • IP Code: 67
• Rated voltage: 400V AC • Material: Aluminum
• Working temperature: -40~+80°C • Colour: Grey
• Terminals: for power conductors up to • Marking
2.5mm² II 2D Ex t IIIC T80°C IP67 Db
• Mounting: Surface II 2G Ex e II T6 Gb
Catalogue Entry QTY Entry size Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number L H D Box
720050 3 3 x М20х1.5 185 195 70 1
720051 3 3 x М25х1.5 185 195 70 1
720052 4 4 x М20х1.5 185 195 70 1
720053 4 4 x М25х1.5 185 195 70 1
720054 3 3 x М20х1.5 + 1 hook 185 195 70 1
720055 3 3 x М25х1.5 + 1 hook 185 195 70 1
720056 3 3 x 3/4 185 195 70 1
720057 4 4 x 3/4 185 195 70 1
720058 3 2 x М20х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1
720059 3 2 x М25х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1
720060 4 3 x М20х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1
720061 4 3 x М25х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

CABLE GLANDS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE, IP67
TECHNICAL DATA
• Application: Zone 1, 2, 20, 21, 22
• IP Code: 67
• Material: Brass and rubber
• Marking
II 2D Ex t IIIC T80°C IP67 Db
II 2G Ex e II T6 Gb
Catalogue Model Cable outer Connecting Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number diameter thread L T B Box
720070 CENT S4 7.00- 8.50mm М20х1.5 42 M20 15 1
720071 CENT S5 8.00- 10.00mm М20х1.5 42 M20 15 1
720072 CENT S2 10.00- 12.00mm М20х1.5 42 M20 15 1
720073 CENT S3 12.00- 15.00mm М25х1.5 43.5 M25 15 1
720074 CENT S7 15.00- 17.00mm М25х1.5 43.5 M25 15 1
EX-PROOF STOPPER FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE, IP67

TECHNICAL DATA
5
• Application: Zone 1, 2, 20, 21, 22
YEARS TOTAL
• Working temperature: -40~+80°C WARRANTY
• IP Code: 67
+ 5 standard
• Material: Brass and rubber 0 extended
• Marking
II 2D Ex t IIIC T80°C IP67 Db
II 2G Ex e II T6 Gb
Catalogue Connecting Dimensions (mm) Packing/

number thread L B Box
720075 М20х1.5 20 15 1
720076 М25х1.5 20 15 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
EX-PROOF LIGHTING
EX-PROOF CEILING & WALL LAMPS, IP67
cold 720100
LED WHITE
6500K ex-proof
TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: Explosion Proof LED Ceiling Lamp
• Power: 24W
• Lumens: 2400lm
• Efficiency: 100lm/W
• LED Chip: SAMSUNG
• CRI≥80
• Lamp Class: I
170 mm
• Temperature operating range: from -40°C to + 45°C

• Material: Aluminum & PC
• IP Code: 67
II 2G Ex Db mb IIB +H2 T6 Gb
II 2D Ex tb mb IIIC T85°C IP67 Db
165 mm
cold 720105
LED
3
WHITE
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 6500K ex-proof TECHNICAL DATA
+ 3 standard
0 extended
• Type: Explosion Proof LED Ceiling / Wall Lamp
• Power: 20W
• Lumens: 2000lm
• CRI≥80
• Lamp Class: I
235 mm
• IP Code: 67
• Width: 55 mm
136 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

cold 720102
LED WHITE
6500K ex-proof TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: Explosion Proof LED Ceiling Lamp
• Power: 70W
• Lumens: 6300lm
• CRI≥80
200 mm
• Lamp Class: I
• IP Code: 67
320 mm • Width: 470mm
cold 720103
LED WHITE
6500K ex-proof TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: Explosion Proof LED Wall Lamp for
Pipe 3/4
• Power: 70W
• Lumens: 6300lm 3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Efficiency: 90lm/W + 3 standard
0 extended
200 mm
• CRI≥80
• Lamp Class: I
410 mm • IP Code: 67
• Width: 470mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
EX-PROOF HIGH BAY & CEILING/WALL LAMP, IP67

cold 720104
LED WHITE
6500K ex-proof
TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: Explosion Proof LED High Bay
• Power: 150W
• Lumens: 13000lm
• CRI≥80
420 mm
• Lamp Class: I
• Temperature operating range:
from -40°C to + 40°C
420 mm
• Width: max.280 mm
• IP Code: 65
cold 720101
LED WHITE
6500K ex-proof
TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: Explosion Proof LED Wall Lamp
• Power: 70W
• Lumens: 6500lm
3
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• CRI≥85
• Lamp Class: I
+ 3 standard
200 mm
0 extended • Temperature operating range:

• IP Code: 67
470 mm
EMERGENCY EX-PROOF LAMP, IP67

cold
LED WHITE
6500K ex-proof
720106
TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: Explosion Proof LED EXIT Light
• Battery: 3,6V, 60mAh, Ni-Cd
• Emergency Work Time: 3h
• CRI≥80≥6.5cd/m²
• Lamp Class: I
• Temperature operating range:
280 mm
• IP Code: 65
420 mm
ELMARK
CABLE REELS &
CABLES
• Cable reels
• Multiplugs and accessories
• Outside power cables
• Inside power cables
• Installation conductors
• Cables with rubber insulation
• Communication cables
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION | CABLE REELS
CABLE REELS
CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL PROTECTION - MAK - 2A

Catalogue Cable Cable Cable Packing / Box
number type specification length (m) (pcs)
47911 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 10 4
CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL PROTECTION - MAK - 3

Catalogue number Cable type Cable Cable Packing / Box
specification length (m) (pcs)
47921 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 20 4
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL PROTECTION - MAK - 4
Catalogue number Cable type Cable Cable Packing / Box
specification length (m) (pcs)
47927 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 25 2
47940 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 40 1
47950 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 50 2
CABLE REEL - HJR TYPE, IP 44

Catalogue Type Cable type Cable Cable Packing / Box
number specification length (m) (pcs)
47960 HJR - 10AP H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm2 25 2
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CABLE REEL - HJR TYPE, IP 44
INSTALLATION | CABLE REELS

47959 HJR - 10P H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm2 50 1
CABLE REEL - GEH TYPE, IP 44

47961 GEH-39 H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm2 27+3 1
CABLE REEL - GEH TYPE, IP 44

3
number specification length (m) (pcs) YEARS TOTAL
47962 GEH-40 H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm2 47+3 1 WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
EMPTY CABLE REEL 029A

Catalogue Suitable for cable type Outlets Packing / Box
number (pcs)
47910 H05VV-F 3G1.5mm2- max 40m/ 4 socket 1
3G1.0mm2- max 50m 16A/230V
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MULTIPLUGS
DESKTOP MULTIPLUGS WITH 3 GERMAN + 2 USB SOCKETS +

ON/OFF KEY, SET
• Material: Aluminum alloy + PC
• Cable type: 3G1.5mm²
• Cable length: 2 meters
• USB Output: 2x5V/2.1A
Catalogue Type Colour Functional Length Diameter Cut size Packing /

number part colour (mm) (mm) (mm) Box (pcs)
47006 5 mod Silver Black 367 60 61 1/20
THREE WAY CLIP MULTIPLUG

Catalogue Cable type Cable Cable Colour Material
number specification length (m)
47003 H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m White & Grey PP+ABS
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
EXTENSION CORDS
Catalogue Type Cable type Cable Cable length Cable colour
number specification (m)
47333 Extension cord H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 10 Orange
47334 Extension cord H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 15 Orange
POWER CABLE
Catalogue number Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Cable colour
47001 H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 White
Note: Warranty not available.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MULTIPLUGS
INSTALLATION | MULTIPLUGS
MULTIPLUGS 3 HOLES WITH KEY
47332 3 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/40

47432 4 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/40

3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
number specification length (m) (pcs) + 3 standard

0 extended
47632 6 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/25

47732 8 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/25
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MULTIPLUG - HX-3N TYPE

Catalogue Type Cable type Cable Cable Packing (pcs)

47031 HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 40
47080 HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5 / 40
47081 HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5 / 40
Max.3500W,16/250~

47041 HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 50
47082 HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 30
47083 HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 25
Max.3500W,16/250~

3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended number specification length (m)
47061 HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 50
47063 HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 40
47065 HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 40
Max.3500W,16/250~
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MULTIPLUG WITH KEY HKX-3N TYPE
Catalogue Type Cable type Cable Cable Packing
47131 HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 5/40
47133 HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5/30
47135 HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5/25
Max.3500W,16/250~

Catalogue Type Cable type Cable Cable Packing
47142 HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 5/40
47143 HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5/30
47145 HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5/25
Max.3500W,16/250~

Catalogue
number
Type Cable type Cable
specification
Cable
length (m)
Packing
(pcs)
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
47162 HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 5 / 40
47163 HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 5 / 30
47165 HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 5 / 25
Max.3500W,16/250~
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ADAPTERS - DOUBLE | WHITE

Catalogue Type Colour Rated Rated Packing

number current power (pcs)
in (A) in (W)
192213 Adapter double White 16 3500 50
192211 Adapter double with key White 16 3500 50
ADAPTERS - TRIPLE | WHITE

in (A) in (W)
192209 Adapter triple White 16 3500 40
192207 Adapter triple with key White 16 3500 40
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
ADAPTERS - DOUBLE | GRAPHITE
in (A) in (W)
192212 Adapter double Graphite 16 3500 50
192210 Adapter double with key Graphite 16 3500 50
ADAPTERS - TRIPLE | GRAPHITE

in (A) in (W)
192208 Adapter triple Graphite 16 3500 40
192206 Adapter triple with key Graphite 16 3500 40
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MULTISOCKET
in (A) in (W)
192216 Multisocket double Black 16 3500 60
192217 Multisocket double White 16 3500 60
192218 Multisocket triple Black 16 3500 60
192219 Multisocket triple White 16 3500 60
RUBBER FEMALE TRIPLE SOCKET

Catalogue Type Rated Colour Poles Packing
number current (pcs)
in (A)
192140/BL Trippe socket 16A Black 1P+N+E 1/10/60
RUBBER MULTISOCKET
number current in power in (pcs)
(A) (W)
192120/WH Multisocket triple White 16 3500 20
192120/BL Multisocket triple Black 16 3500 20
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
RUBBER SCHUKO SOCKETS

Catalogue Type Colour Rated current Material Packing (pcs)

number In (A)
192119/WH Socket White 16 Rubber 25
192119/BL Socket Black 16 Rubber 25
RUBBER FEMALE SOCKET PLUG

Catalogue Type Rated current Colour Poles Packing (pcs)
number In (A)
192136/BL Rubber socket 16A Black 2P+E 1/30/180
plug
RUBBER SCHUKO PLUG

Catalogue Type Rated current Colour Material Packing (pcs)
number In (A)
192118/WH Plug 16 White Rubber 25
192118/BL Plug 16 Black Rubber 25
192118/R Plug 16 Red Rubber 25
RUBBER MALE SCHUKO PLUG

number In (A)
192135/BL Rubber plug 16A Black 2P+E 1/50/300
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FEMALE PLUG
number In (A)
192128/WH Female plug 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300
MALE PLUG WITH LIGHTED BUTTON

number In (A)
192127/WH Male plug with 16 White 1P+N+E 1/40/240
button
ANGLE SCHUKO PLUG

number In (A)
192129/WH L- type plug 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300
192129/BL L- type plug 16 Black 1P+N+E 1/50/300
MALE SCHUKO PLUG

number In (A)
192130/WH Male plug 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300
MALE SCHUKO PLUG WITH HANDLE

number In (A)
192131/WH Plug with handle 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300
192132/BL Plug with handle 16 Black 1P+N+E 1/50/300
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
BRITISH ADAPTER

number In (A)
192125/WH British Adapter 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300
UNIVERSAL PLUG ADAPTER

number In (A)
192126/WH Universal Adapter 16 White 1P+N+E 1/40/240
PLUG BAKELITE
number In (A)
19211102 Plug 16 White Bakelite 80
19211101 Plug 16 Black Bakelite 80
TWO PIN PLUG

number In (A)
192116/WH Plug 6 White PP 100
192116/BL Plug 6 Black PP 100
TWO PIN PLUG WITH EXTRACTION RING

number In (A)
192115/WH Plug 10 White PC 1/500
192115/BL Plug 10 Black PC 1/500
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TWO POLE SOCKET WITH HOOK
number In (A)
192123/BL Socket 10 Black PC 1/500
192123/WH Socket 10 White PC 1/500
BRITISH PLUG
number In (A)
192114 British plug 13 White PMMA 1/20
FOOT SWITCH
number In (A)
192124/WH Switch 10 White PC 1/100
INTERMEDIATE SWITCH
Catalogue Type Voltage Rated current Colour Packing (pcs)
number (V) In (A)
192001/WH IS-W 250 6 White 1
192001/BL IS-B 250 6 Black 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
OUTSIDE POWER CABLES

INSTALLATION | CABLES
Standards: NYY
DIN VDE 0293-308 - Colour coded acc Power cable, Cu-conductor, PVC-insulation, PVC-sheathing
DIN VDE 0276 part 603 or HD 186
DIN VDE 0295 - Wire class acc
NYY; PP00; PP00; PP00; NYY; NYY; CYY; NYY; NYY
Power cable for construction of underground distribution grids and installations of industrial and
public projects, where mechanical damages are not to be expected. Suitable for transmission and
distribution of electric power at nominal voltage u0/u 0,6/1 kV.
TECHNICAL DATA CONSTRUCTION
• Power cable acc. to DIN VDE 0276 part 603 • Solid or stranded Cu wires cl. 1 or cl. 2 acc. to
• Ambient temperature DIN VDE 0295
• Fixed installation: -30°C to +50°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• TemperatuTre of laying: min. -5°C • Inner sheath: filling compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Outer sheath: PVC compound
• Short circuit temperature: +160°C • Outer sheath colour: black
• Short circuit duration up to 5 sec. • re - round solid
• Nominal voltage Uo/U- 0.6/1 kV • rm - round multi-core
• Test voltage: AC-4 kV/50 Hz • sm - sector multi-core
• se - sector solid conductor
Catalogue Cross Wires Colour Outer Cu weight Total Packing

number section shape diameter (kg/km) weight (m)
(n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km)
833019 2x1.5 re Black 12.2 28 192 100
833020 2x2.5 re Black 12.9 46 229 100
833021 2x4 re Black 14.9 75 315 100
833022 2x6 re Black 15.9 112 382 100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
833023
833024
2x10
2х16
rm
rm
Black
Black
17.5
19.4
188
298
509
676
1
1
+ 5 standard
2 extended
833030 3x1.5 re Black 12.1 43 201 100
833031 3x2.5 re Black 12.9 70 247 100
833032 3x4 re Black 15 112 350 100
833034 3x6 re Black 16.1 168 435 100
833036 3x10 rm Black 18 282 606 1
833038 3х16 rm Black 20.1 447 828 1

833060 4x1.5 re Black 12.9 57 232 100
833061 4x2.5 re Black 13.8 93 289 100
833062 4x4 re Black 16.2 149 419 100
833063 4x6 re Black 17.4 223 525 100
833064 4x10 rm Black 19.5 376 741 1
833065 4х16 rm Black 21.8 595 1024 1

833077 5x1.5 re Black 13.7 71 272 100
833078 5x2.5 re Black 14.8 116 341 100
833079 5x4 re Black 17.4 187 494 100
833080 5x6 re Black 19 279 635 100
833081 5х10 rm Black 21.6 470 911 1
833082 5х16 rm Black 24.1 744 1262 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Standards: CBT-C
BDS 904-84 - according to construction Power cable with solid or stranded Cu wires, PVC insulation and sheathing
IEC60332-1- according to flame retardant
СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с
A cable with solid or stranded CU wires, resistant to the sun radiance and atmospheric influences.
It is suitable for spread and transfer of electrical energy if it is installed steady outside or in indoor
spaces cable trunking, electrical cable conduit, cable trays, directly into tunnels, earthworks, pits
and etc.
• Nominal voltage Uo- 0.6kV • Solid or stranded CU wires, class 1 or class 2
• Nominal voltage U- 1kV • re - round solid
• Ambient temperature- from -30°C to +50°C • rm - round multi-core
• Max. operating temperature- +70C° • sm - sector multi-core
• Temperature of laying- ≥-5°C • se - sector solid conductor
• Conductor material- Copper (Cu)
• Conductors insulation - PVC compound
• Outer stealth material-filling sheath and PVC
compound

817020 2X1 re Black 9.5 20 100 100
817021 2X1.5 re Black 10.0 28 120 100
817022 2X2.5 re Black 10.6 46 150 100
817023 2X4 re Black 12.5 73 210 100
817024 2X6 re Black 13.3 110 260 100
817025 2X10 re Black 15.2 182 370 1
817026 2Х16 rm Black 18 305 560 1

number section
(n x mm²)
shape diameter
(mm)
(kg/km) weight
(kg/km)
(m)
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
817036 3X1 re Black 9.7 28 120 100 2 extended
817037 3X1.5 re Black 10.2 42 140 100
817039 3X2.5 re Black 11.0 69 180 100
817041 3X4 re Black 13.0 110 260 100
817043 3X6 re Black 14.0 165 340 100
817045 3X10 re Black 16.0 275 480 1
817047 3Х16 rm Black 19.5 450 695 1

817067 4X1 re Black 10.4 37 140 100
817068 4X1.5 re Black 11.0 55 165 100
817069 4X2.5 re Black 11.9 91 215 100
817070 4X4 re Black 14.1 146 315 100
817071 4X6 re Black 15.4 220 410 100
817072 4X10 re Black 17.4 365 595 1
817073 4X16 rm Black 20.6 585 950 1

817083 5X1 re Black 11.2 45 160 100
817084 5X1.5 re Black 11.8 69 195 100
817085 5X2.5 re Black 12.8 114 260 100
817086 5X4 re Black 15.5 182 380 100
817087 5X6 re Black 16.8 275 500 100
817088 5х10 re Black 19,2 455 735 1
817089 5х16 re Black 23,2 745 1150 1
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSIDE POWER CABLES

Standards: H03VH-H
Flat conductor acc. to BDS IEC 60227-5 Flat conductor, flexible Cu-wires, PVC-insullation
Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 6 acc. to IEC 60228
ШВПЛ-А; PL; H03VH-H; P/L; H03VH-H; H03VH-H; H03VH-H; RVV; H03VH-H
Designed for connection of electrical appliances to the electrical grid, for connection of mobile users,
devices and appliances.
• Ambient temperature: -40°C to+50°C • Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 6 acc. to IEC 60228
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Flat conductor acc. to BDS IEC 60227-5
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300/300 V • Insulation: PVC compound
• Test voltage: 2000 V • Insulation colour: white or black-red
Catalogue Cross Colour Thickness Width Cu Total Packing

number section (mm) (mm) weight weight (m)
(n x mm²) (kg/km) (kg/km)
820001 2x0.50 White or Black-Red 6.0 3.0 9 25 100
820002 2x0.75 White or Black-Red 6.4 3.2 14 30 100
820017 2x1 White or Black-Red 6.8 3.4 19.2 31 100
820018 2x1.50 White or Black-Red 7.6 4.0 28.8 38 100
Standards: H03VV-F
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Conductor acc. to HD 21,5 S3
Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to IEC 60228
Conductor with flexible Cu-wires, PVC insulation and sheath
+ 5 standard
2 extended ШВПЛ-Б; PP/L; PP/L; PP/L; H03VV-F; H03VV-F; MYYUP; H03VV-F; H03VV-F
Conductor with parallel or stranded in a bundle insulated cores, designed for connection of
electrical appliances to the electrical grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and appliances.

• Variant of the conductor: H03VVH2-F - flat type • Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to IEC 60228
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Sheafing: PVC compound
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300/300 V • Outer sheath colour: white
• Test voltage: 2000 V
Catalogue Type Cross Colour Thickness Width Cu Total Packing

number (flat) section (mm) (mm) weight weight (m)
(n x mm²) (kg/km) (kg/km)
820004 H03VVH2-F 2x0,5 White 6.0 3,6 10,0 30 100
820006 H03VVH2-F 2x0,75 White 6.4 3,9 14,5 39 100
Catalogue Type Cross Colour Outer Cu weight Total Packing

number (round) section diameter (kg/km) weight (m)
820003 H03VV-F 2X0,5 White 9.5 100 25 100
820007 H03VV-F 3X0.5 White 10.0 120 30 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Standards: H05VV-F
Flexible cable acc. to HD 21.5 S3, Conductor with flexible Cu-wires, PVC insulation and sheath
DIN VDE 0281 part 5
Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to ШВПС; PP/J; PP/J; PP/J; H05VV-F; H05VV-F; MYYM; H05VV-F; H05VV-F
DIN VDE 0295, IEC 60228
Colour coding: acc. to DIN VDE 0293-308 Conductor with parallel or stranded in a bundle insulated cores, designed for connection of electrical
appliances to the electric grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and appliances.
• Variant of the conductor: H05VVH2-F - flat type • Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 0295,
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C IEC 60228
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Insulation/outer sheath: PVC compound;
Catalogue Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing
number (n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m)
821001 2 x 0.75 White 7.6 14.0 62 100
821002 2x1 White 8.0 19.5 71 100
821003 2 x 1.5 White 9.0 28.0 94 100
821004 2 x 2.5 White 11.0 47.0 114 100
821005 2X4 White 12.0 75.0 197 100
821008 3 x 0.75 White 8.0 21.5 74 100
821009 3x1 White 8.4 29.0 85 100
821010
821011
3 x 1.5
3 x 2.5
White
White
9.8
12.0
42.0
70.0
120
182
100
100 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
821012 3x4 White 13.0 114.0 252 100 + 5 standard
2 extended
821016 4 x 0.75 White 8.6 29.0 92 100
821017 4x1 White 9.4 38.5 109 100
821018 4 x 1.5 White 11.0 56.0 151 100
821019 4 x 2.5 White 13.0 93.5 225 100
821020 4x4 White 14.0 151.0 315 100
821024 5 x 0.75 White 9.6 36.0 115 100
821025 5x1 White 10.0 48.0 132 100
821026 5 x 1.5 White 12.0 70.0 188 100
821027 5 x 2.5 White 14.0 117.0 280 100
821028 5X4 White 15.5 189.0 395 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS
Standards: H05V-U, H07V-U

Conductor acc. to HD 21.3 S3, DIN VDE Conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation
0281 part 3
Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to DIN VDE ПВ-А1; P; P; P; H05V-U, H07V-U; H05V-U, H07V-U (CY); H05V-U, H07V-U (FY);
0295, IEC 60228
H05V-U, H07V-U; H05V-U, H07V-U
For fixed installation in lighting networks, electric power installations, wiring of electrical
switchboards, machines and equipment.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to+50°C • Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to DIN VDE 0295,
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C IEC 60228
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: • Insulation colour:
- H05V-U 300/500 V - Blue: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm²
- H07V-U 450/750 V - Red: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm²
• Test voltage: - Black: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm²
- H05V-U 2000 V - White: available cross sections up 0.5 to 4 mm²
- H07V-U 2500 V - Yellow-Green: available cross sections up 0.5 to
10 mm²
- Brown: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm²
Catalogue Type Cross section Outer Cu weight Total weight Packing

number (n x mm²) diameter (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m)
822001 H05V-U 0.5 2.4 4.5 9 100
822002 H05V-U 0.75 2.6 7.0 12 100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
822003 H05V-U 1 2.8 9.0 15 100
+ 5 standard
2 extended Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number:
BL – blue; R – red; B - black; W- white; YG- yellow green; BR- brown

822004 H07V-U 1.5 3.3 13.5 21 100
822005 H07V-U 2.5 3.9 22.0 33 100
822006 H07V-U 4 4.4 35.0 48 100
822007 H07V-U 6 4.6 52.5 68 100
822008 H07V-U 10 6.4 87.5 113 100
Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number:
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Standards: H05V-K, H07V-K

PVC conductor acc. to HD 21.3 S3, Conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation
DIN VDE 0281 part 3
Flexible Cu wires cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE ПВ-А2; PF; P/F; P/F; H05V-K, H07V-K; H05V-K, H07V-K (CYA); MYF;
0295, IEC 60228
H05V-K, H07V-K; H05V-K, H07V-K
For fixed installation wiring of electrical switchboards, machines and equipment, where small
bending radius is required.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to+50°C • Flexible Cu wires cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, IEC
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C 60228
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: • Insulation colour:
- H05V-K 300/500 V - Blue: available cross sections up 0.5 to 25 mm²
- H07V-K 450/750 V - Red: available cross sections up 0.5 to 25 mm²
• Test voltage: - Black: available cross sections up 0.5 to 25 mm²
- H05V-K 2000 V - White: available cross sections up 0.5 to 4 mm²
- H07V-K 2500 V - Yellow-Green: available cross sections up 0.5
to 25 mm²
- Brown: available cross sections up 0.5
to 10 mm²

823002 H05V-K 0.5 2.6 5.0 10 100
823003 H05V-K 0.75 2.8 7.0 13 100
823004 H05V-K 1 3.0 9.5 16 100

7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
number (n x mm²) diameter (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) + 5 standard

2 extended
823005 H07V-K 1.5 3.5 14.0 23 100
823006 H07V-K 2.5 4.2 23.0 36 100
823007 H07V-K 4 4.8 36.5 52 100
823008 H07V-K 6 6.3 57.0 74 100
823009 H07V-K 10 7.6 96.0 131 100
823010 H07V-K 16 8.8 151.0 195 100
823011 H07V-K 25 11.0 235.0 300 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Standards: NYIFY-O/J
Flat conductor acc. to BDS 4305-90 Flat installation conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation, PVC-sheath
Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to BDS 904-84
ПВВ-МБ1; PG; PP/R; PP/R; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYFAZ
Installation conductor with parallel Cu-wires for fixed installation in lighting networks and electric
power installations.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to BDS 904-84
• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C • Insulation: PVC compound
• Max. operating temperature: +70°C • Sheath: PVC compound
Catalogue Cross section Colour Conductor Conductor Cu weight Total Packing

number (n x mm²) Thickness Width (kg/km) weight (m)
(mm) (mm) (kg/km)
834001 2x1 White 3.70 10.30 17.9 55 100
834002 2x1.5 White 4.10 11.20 26.6 65 100
834003 2x2.5 White 5.00 12.90 44.3 97 100
834004 2x4 White 5.60 14.20 70.6 135 100
834005 2x6 White 6.50 16.00 104.4 190 100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
Catalogue Cross section Colour Conductor Conductor Cu weight Total Packing

number (n x mm²) Thickness Width (kg/km) weight (m)
(mm) (mm) (kg/km)
834007 3x1 White 3.70 14.00 26.8 73 100
834008 3x1.5 White 4.10 15.30 39.8 95 100
834009 3x2.5 White 5.00 16.90 66.4 142 100
834010 3x4 White 5.60 19.80 104.2 200 100
834011 3x6 White 6.50 22.50 156.5 280 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Standards: NYM
DIN VDE 0295; IEC 60228- according Multi-core conductor with Cu wires and PVC insulation
to construction DIN VDE 0250-204-
according to multi-core conductors NYM; PGP; PGP; PP-Y; PGP; NYM; NYM; NYM; NYM; NYM
IEC60332-1- according to flame retardant
For fixed instalations in , or on under plasterboard, in lighting networks in dry places. Can be used
and in damp or wet rooms, in wall and concrete, in switchboards and machines. Is suitable for out-
door use if cable is protected against direct sunshine.
• Nominal voltage: Uo- 300V; U- 500V • Solid CU wires, class 1 and class 2 for cross
• Ambient temperature- from -20°C to +50°C section above 10mm²
• Max. operating temperature- +70C°
• Installation temperature- ≥-5°C
• Conductor material- Copper (Cu)
• Conductors insulation - PVC compound
• Outer sheath material - filling sheath and PVC
compound
Catalogue Cross section Colour Outer diameter Total weight Packing

number (n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (m)
832008 2x1.5 Grey 8.8 120 100
832009 2x2.5 Grey 10.0 160 100
832010 2x4 Grey 11.0 220 100
832011 2Х6 Grey 12.0 250 100
832012 2x10 Grey 15.0 420 1
7
Catalogue Cross section Colour Outer diameter Total weight Packing YEARS TOTAL
number (n x mm²) (mm) (kg/km) (m) WARRANTY
832016 3x1.5 Grey 9.2 136 100 + 5 standard
2 extended
832017 3x2.5 Grey 10.5 190 100
832018 3x4 Grey 11.5 260 100
832019 3Х6 Grey 13.0 330 100
832020 3x10 Grey 16.5 520 1

832023 4x1.5 Grey 10.0 160 100
832024 4x2.5 Grey 11.3 230 100

832031 5x1.5 Grey 11.0 190 100
832032 5x2.5 Grey 12.0 270 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CABLES WITH RUBBER INSULATION

Standards: H05RR-F
DIN VDE 0295; IEC 60228- according to
Rubber flexible cable
construction DIN VDE 0293-308 and HD
186- according to colour coating DIN ШКПЛ; GG/J; GG/J; GG/J; H05RR-F; H05RR-F; MCCM; H05RR-F; H05RR-F
VDE 0482-332-1-2;
IEC60332-1-according to flame retardant
For connection of electrical appliances and consumers with low and middle mechanical stress
to Alternating Current (AC). It has wide use in household, office, for cable reels, for connecting of
mobile consumers and etc.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300V/500V
• Ambient temperature: from -30°C to +60°C
• Conductor material: Copper (Cu) wires, class 5
• Conductors insulation: Rubber EPR
• Outer sheath material: Rubber EPR
Catalogue Cross Type Colour Outer Cu weight Total Packing

number section diameter (kg/km) weight (m)
814002 2X1 H05RR-F Black 6.1 - 8.0 19.0 71.0 100
814003 2X1.5 H05RR-F Black 7.6 - 9.8 29.0 99.0 100
814004 2X2.5 H05RR-F Black 9.0 - 11.6 48.0 148.0 100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Catalogue Cross Type Colour Outer Cu weight Total Packing
+ 5 standard
2 extended
814007 3X1 H05RR-F Black 6.5 - 8.5 29.0 88.0 100
814008 3X1.5 H05RR-F Black 8.0 - 10.4 43.0 125.0 100
814009 3X2.5 H05RR-F Black 9.6 - 12.4 72.0 175.0 100
814010 3X4 H05RR-F Black 11.3 - 14.5 115.0 246.0 100

814012 4X1 H05RR-F Black 9.0 - 11.6 58.0 165.0 100
814013 4X1.5 H05RR-F Black 9.0 - 11.6 58.0 165.0 100
814014 4X2.5 H05RR-F Black 10.7 - 13.8 96.0 225.0 100
814015 4X4 H05RR-F Black 12.7 - 16.2 154.0 315.0 100
814017 4X6 H05RR-F Black 14.2 - 18.1 231.0 440.0 100

814020 5X1.5 H05RR-F Black 9.8 - 12.7 72.0 185.0 100
814021 5X2.5 H05RR-F Black 11.9 - 15.3 120.0 275.0 100
814022 5x4 H05RR-F Black 15,6-19,9 187 475 100
814023 5x6 H05RR-F Black 17.5-22.2 288 635 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
COMMUNICATION CABLES
Construction: UTP
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24
LAN cable, stranded in pairs, cat. 5e
CU-wires - 4x2x0.24
UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP CAT5E
Cable, stranded by pairs, used for transmission of digital signals with high speed of transmission.
Suitable for setting computer systems for data transmission, measuring and control systems with
proper resistance to electromagnetic influences.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • 879002 - CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm,
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C acc. to IEC 60228
• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω • 879017 - CU wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm,
• Loop resistance: ≤ 192 0/ km acc. to IEC 60228
• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • Insulation: PE compound
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs
• Operating capacity: ≤ 55,8 nF/km • Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH
• Cable diameter: 5 mm compound
• Cable weight: 27 kg/km • Outer sheath colour: for PVC- grey
Insulation colour of stranded pairs- core a/ core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange
ring/orange; • white with green ring/green; • white with brown ring/brown.
Catalogue Material Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing

number 4 10 16 62.5 100 125 (m)
Attenuation- db/100 m 4.1 6.5 8.2 17 22 24.9
879002 CCA Cat. 5e 305
Attenuation (Next)- db 56.3 50.3 47.3 38.4 35.3 33.9
879017 CU Cat. 5e Attenuation (Next)- db 56.3 50.3 47.3 38.4 35.3 33.9 305
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
Construction: FTP
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24 LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with screen, cat. 5e
FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP CAT5E
Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil, used for transmission of digital signals with
high speed of transmission. FTP cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data
transmission, measuring and control systems and for transmission of high-frequency analogue
signals in automatic and industrial TV networks . High resistance to electromagnetic influences.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • 879001- CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm,
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C acc. to IEC 60228
• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω • Insulation: PE compound
• Loop resistance: ≤ 192 0/ km • Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs
• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • PETP foil
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Screen: laminated AI foil
• Cable diameter: 6 mm compound
• Cable weight: 31 kg/km • Outer sheath colour tor PVC- grey
Insulation colour of stranded pairs- core a/ core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange
Catalogue Material Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing

number 4 10 16 62,5 100 125 (m)
879001 CCA Cat. 5e Attenuation - db/100 m 4.1 6.5 8.2 17 22 24.9 305
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Construction: STP
CCA- wires - 4x2x0.24 LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with screen on each pair, cat. 6
Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil on each pair, used for transmission of digital
signals with high speed of transmission, with spectrum of the frequency being used up to
300 MHz for cat. 6. The cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data transmission,
measuring and control systems and for transmission of high-frequency analogue signals in
automatic and industrial TV networks and is with high resistance to electromagnetic influences.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • CCA- wires - 24 AWG; 0,57 mm acc. to IEC
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C 60228
• Characteristic Impedance: • Insulation: PE compound
- 100 Ω ± 15 Ω up to 100 MHz • Screen: laminated AI foil on each pair
- 100 Ω ± (15 +0,05(f-100)) above 100 МНz • Cable bundle: 4 stranded screened pairs
• Loop resistance: ≤ 170 Ω / km • Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH
• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% compound
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Outer sheath colour: for PVC- grey, for LSOH-
• Operating capacity: ≤ 50 nF/km orange
• Cable diameter: 7 mm
• Cable weight 42 kg/km
Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a / core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange
Catalogue Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing

number 4 10 16 62.5 100 200 300 (m)
Attenuation - db/100 m 3.8 6 7.6 15.5 19.9 29.5 35
879012 Cat. 6 305
Attenuation (Next) - db 65.3 59.3 56.2 47.4 44.3 39.8 38
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
S-FTP
LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with double-screen, cat. 5
Construction:
Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil, with braid of tinned copper wires used for
CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24
transmission of digital signals with high speed of transmission, with spectrum of the frequency
being used up to 100 MHz for cat. 5. The cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data
transmission, measuring and control systems and for transmission of high frequency analogue
signals in automatic and industrial TV networks. High resistance to electromagnetic influences.
• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C • CCA- wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm acc. to IEC
• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C 60228
• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω • Insulation: PE compound
• Loop resistance: ≤ 192 0/ km • Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs
• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% • PETP foil
• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km • Screen: laminated AI foil
• Cable diameter: 6,9 mm compound
• Outer sheath colour: for PVC - grey
Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a/core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange
Catalogue Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing

number 4 10 16 62.5 100 125 (m)
Attenuation - db/100 m 4.3 6.6 8.2 17.1 22
879011 Cat. 5 305
Attenuation (Next) - db 53 47 44 35 32
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
COAXIAL CABLE RG6 / 96

Coaxial cable, suitable for connection of TV aerials to TV receivers
RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6; RG6; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6
Suitable for high frequency equipment, measuring and control equipment and appliances, for
setting up local computer networks, and data systems, for connection of TV aerials to TV receivers.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Model - RG6 / 96;
• Material and structure of the core cable: CCS
1.02 mm;
• Type of insulation: PE 4.60 mm;
• External conductor (screen): 96 Al foil;
• Diameter and cable material: 6.9 mm PVC;
• Wave impedance: 75 ± 5 Ohm;
• Operating temperature: from -30 ° C to +70° C;
• Damping ratio: at 100 MHz 0.0637 dB/m.
• Outer sheath colour: White
Catalogue Description Insulation Outer Wave Max. Attenuation at Packing

number diameter diameter resistance capacity 200 MHz max. (m)
(mm) (mm) (Ω) (pF/m) dB/100m
856001 RG6/96 PE 4.70 8.40 PVC 75 ±3 68 12 100
COAXIAL CABLE RG59 / + 2X0.5MM2

Coaxial cable, suitable for video surveillance systems
RG59+2x0.5; RG59+2x0.5; RG59; R59; RG59+2x0.5; RG59(CCTV)+2X0.5; RG59;
RG59; RG59+2x0.5
TECHNICAL DATA 7 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
Coaxial cable: RG-59 Electrical cable: + 5 standard
2 extended
• Inner conductor: Ø 0.59 mm - CCS wire • Inner conductor: 2 x 0.5 m CU wires
• Dielectric: Ø 3.7 mm PE full • Power wires resistance: 4 Ω / 100 m
• Braid: Stranded wire Cu, Indoor coverage • Outer coating: Ø 5 mm
area: 90 % • Outer sheath colour: White
• Impedance: 75 Ω
• Outer coating: Al foil + Al braiding
• Cable attenuation at 100m section:
- 10.9 dB @ 100 MHz
- 15.2 dB @ 200 MHz
- 23.2 dB @ 450 MHz
- 32.6 dB @ 800 MHz
- 36.6 dB @ 1000 MHz
• Outer sheath colour: White
Catalogue Description Insulation Outer Wave Max. Attenuation at Packing

number diameter diameter resistance capacity 200 MHz max. (m)
(mm) (mm) (Ω) (pF/m) dB/100m
856004 RG59/ PE 3.66 8/5mm 75 ±3 53.4 12.4 100
U+2x0.5
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ALARM CABLE
Unshelled alarm cable
Алармен кабел; Alarmni kabel; Alarmni kabel; Alarmni kabl; Alarmni kabel;
Poplašný kábel; Cablu de alarmă; Riasztó kábel; Kαλώδιο συναγερμού
Suitable for the connection of detectors, sensors, infra-red as well as micro wave or mixed
technology systems to the switch board.
• Ambient temperature: -20°C to +60°C • Conductor: CCA
• Operating voltage: 300V RMS max • Insulation: PVC
• Capacitance between conductors: • Insulation colours: red, blue, yellow, black,
1KHz- 33pF/ft Nom. green, white
• Capacitance between conductors to shield: • Shield: without
1KHz-60pF/ft Nom. • Rip cord: synthetic fibers
• Damping ratio: at 100 MHz 0.0637 dB / m. • Drain wire: no
Catalogue Cross section Cable type Colour Outer diameter Packing

number (n x mm²) (mm) (m)
879016 6x0.22 CCA White 4.2 100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
TOOLS
• Electrical & Cordless tools
• Digital tools
• Hand tools
• Accessories for electrical tools
• Work & Hobby lights
• Fixings & Fasteners
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | ELECTRICAL TOOLS
ELECTRICAL PROFESSIONAL CORDED LINE
PROFESSIONAL DRILL EL-D10 59510

TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 500W
• No-load speed: 4300 r/min
• Chuck size: 0.6-6.5 mm
• Cable length: 2 m
ADVANTAGES
• 10 mm metal chuck: to tighten and hold bits steady
• Forward and reverse: ability for easy adjustment according to tasks
PROFESSIONAL
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
IMPACT DRILL EL-D14 59514

TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 600W
• No-load speed: 0-3000 r/min
• Chuck size: 13mm
• Cable length: 2m
ADVANTAGES
• Soft grip handle.
• Lockable switch.
• Variable speed.
• Aluminum gear housing.
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL IMPACT 59511

DRILL EL-D11 TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 910W
• Chuck size: 13 mm
ADVANTAGES
• Impact and drill: two modes transformed.
• 13 mm metal chuck: to tighten and hold bits steady.
• Auxiliary handle: is convenient for operation at any angle.
• Variable large trigger: switch and 360° swivel side handle for added comfort speed.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
•
•
Lock-on button: for comfortable operation.
Aluminum: die-cast gear case.
PROFESSIONAL + 5 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL TWO SPEED 59512

IMPACT DRILL EL-D12 TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 1050W
• No-load speed: 0-1200/0-3200 r/min
• Chuck size: 13 mm
ADVANTAGES
• Dual-mode selector: easily converts from rotation-only to hammer-drill mode.
• 13 mm metal chuck: to tighten and hold bits steady.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
•
•
•
Lock-on button: for comfortable operation.
Forward and reverse: ability for easy adjustment according to tasks.
2 speed: provides maximum tongue in setting 1 and maximum speed in setting 2.
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ANGLE GRINDER EL-AG04 59504

TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 750W
• Diameter of wheel: 125mm
• Thread size: M14
ADVANTAGES
• Compact and slim body: for easy operation.
• Dust proof: motor and switch.
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL LIGHT ROTARY 59513

HAMMER EL-RH13 TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 800W
• Single stroke power: 3.2J
• Impact rate: 0-5700 b/min
ADVANTAGES
• Four functions: easily converts trim.
PROFESSIONAL
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL ANGLE 59501

GRINDER EL-AG01 TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 900W
• Diameter of wheel: 125 mm
ADVANTAGES
• Compact grid design: for comfort & control.
• Cast metal gear case: increased josite durability and tool longevity.
• Spindle lock: for fast and easy wheel changes whit a single wrench.
5 YEARS TOTAL
• Epoxy-coated field windings: provides protection against abrasive dust.
PROFESSIONAL
5 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
WARRANTY
5 standard
+ 0 extended
5 standard+0 extended
•
•
Soft grid side handle: allows greater and comfortable control in multiple positions.
Compact and slim handle for easy operation, rubber coated, can be set in 2 positions.

• Power: 2000W
ADVANTAGES
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
•
•
•
Epoxy-coated field windings: provides protection against abrasive dust.
Soft grid side handle: allows greater and comfortable control in multiple positions.
Compact and slim handle for easy operation, rubber coated, can be set in 2 positions.
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

• Power: 2400W
• No-load speed: 6500r/min
ADVANTAGES
5
• Epoxy-coated field windings: provides protection against abrasive dust.
YEARS TOTAL
PROFESSIONAL WARRANTY • Soft grid side handle: allows greater and comfortable control in multiple positions.
• Compact and slim handle for easy operation, rubber coated, can be set in 2 positions.
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL 59540
MULTI TOOL EL-MT40 TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 280W
• No-load speed: 11000-21000
ADVANTAGES
• Quick blade: changing system can fit widely-used blades.
• Oscillation angle: 4 degree.
• Powerful motor: for improved durability and straighten cuts.
• Variable speed: for optimal performance and control in a variety of materials
PROFESSIONAL 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL JIG SAW EL-JS20 59520

TECHNICAL DATA
Power: 710W
No-load speed: 1500-3100r/min
Stroke distance: 23mm
Cable length: 2m

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PROFESSIONAL CORDED 59530

HEAT GUN EL-HG30 TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 1800W
• Temperature: 50/400/550 C°
• Air flow: 250/250/500L/M
ADVANTAGES
• Dual fan speed selector delivers high and low fan speed settings.
• Integrated hands free support stand allow the gun to sit upright for hands free use.
• 1800W motor delivers hight heat and multiple fan setting.

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

HEAT GUN NOZZLE 59532

FOR EL-HG30 Type: Heat gun nozzle for heat gum EL-HG30 (cat. No 59530).
CORDED HEAT GUN 59531

WITH HEAT GUN NOZZLE TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 2000W
• Temperature: 350 C°
• Switch positions: 0-I-II
ADVANTAGES
• Protection: against over-heat.
• Settings: two steps airflow.
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELECTRICAL CORDLESS LINE

TOOLS | CORDLESS LINE
12V CORDLESS DRILL EL-CD53 59553

+ BATTERY & CHARGER, SET TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage: 12V
• No-load speed: 0-400/0-1500r/min
• Max. torque: 30 (N.m)
• Torque settings: 19+1
• Battery capacity: 12V/2A
• Charger: 400mA
ADVANTAGES
• Drill gear box: two speed.
3
• Compact design: with soft grip handle.
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY • LED light: Integrated.
+ 3 standard
0 extended
20V DRILL DRIVER EL-CD50 59550

TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage: 20V
• Torque settings: 21+1
ADVANTAGES
• High performance 4-pole motor
• PCB inside: to protect the motor from over-loading
• Belt clip: for easy carrying
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Soft grip: to reduce fatigue
• Battery: Not Included. Suitable with batteries with catalogue numbers 59560 and
59561
0 extended
20V TWO SPEED IMPACT 59551

DRILL EL-CD51 TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage: 20V
• Torque settings: 21+1+1
• Impact rate: 0-6400/2400 (B/min)
• Chuck size: 13mm - all metal
ADVANTAGES
• All metal/ 2 speed transmission: for a wide range of drilling and driving applications.
• High performance 4-pole motor.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• PCB inside: to protect the motor from over-loading.
• Belt clip: for easy carrying Soft grip: to reduce fatigue.
Note: Battery is not Included. Suitable with batteries with catalogue numbers 59560 and
0 extended 59561.
20V ANGLE GRINDER EL-CAD52 59552

TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage: 20V
• No-load speed: 7000r/min
• Thread size: 14mm
ADVANTAGES
• High performance motor.
• PCB inside: to protect the motor from over-loading.
• Soft grip: to reduce fatigue.
Note: Battery is not Included. Suitable with batteries with catalogue numbers 59560 and
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
59561.
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELECTRICAL CORDLESS LINE
TOOLS | CORDLESS LINE

20V LITHIUM BATTERY EL-B60 59560
TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage: 20VDC
• Type: Li-ion
• Capacity: 2 Ah
• Charge time: 1h
• Cells: 5 pcs
ADVANTAGES
• Water protection barrier: routes water away from the electronics and out of the
battery pack.
• Smart electronics: Protect from abuse. Optimum tool performance.
3
• Temperature control frame: Extend run-time and life by minimizing heat. Operates
YEARS TOTAL
Li-ion
3 YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
WARRANTY
2 standard
+ 1 extended
below -18°C/ 0°F.
• Fully exposed cell carrier and rubber over mold: prevents pack failure from vibration
or drops.
20V LITHIUM BATTERY EL-B61 59561

TECHNICAL DATA
• Voltage: 20VDC
• Type: Li-ion
• Capacity: 4 Ah
• Charge time: 2h
• Cells: 10 pcs
ADVANTAGES
• Water protection barrier: routes water away from the electronics and out of the
battery pack.
• Smart electronics: Protect from abuse. Optimum tool performance .
3
3
YEARS TOTAL
YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
WARRANTY
• Temperature control frame: Extend run-time and life by minimizing heat. Operates
below -18°C/ 0°F.
Li-ion 2 standard
+ 1 extended
• Fully exposed cell carrier and rubber over mold: prevents pack failure from vibration
or drops.
FAST BATTERY CHARGER 59562

EL-CH62 TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated Voltage: 20VDC
• Input Voltage: 100-240VAC
FEATURES
• Diagnostics with LED.
• Short circuit protection.
• Over heating protection.
• Over charging protection.
3
3
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
YEAR TOTAL
WARRANTY
3 standard
+ 0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DIGITAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

TOOLS | DIGITAL TOOLS
DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ890G 519890

TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 600V • Temperature: -20°upto1000°С
• AC voltage: 2/ 20/ 200/ 600V • Diodes control: yes
• DC current: 2/ 20/ 200/ 10A • Buzzer: yes
• AC current: 200m/ 10A • Transistor test: yes
• Resistance: 200/ 2K/ 20K/ 200K/ 2M/ • Auto power: yes
20MΩ • Dimensions: 170х87х33mm
• Capacitors: 2η/ 20η/ 200η/ 2μ/ 20μ • Weight: 326g
• Frequency: 20kHz • Battery: 1x9V
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ850L 519850

TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2/ 20/ 200/600 V
• AC voltage : 200/ 600 V
• DC current: 200μ/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 10A
• Resistance: 200/ 2K/ 20K/ 200K/ 2MΩ
• Diodes control: yes
• Buzzer: yes
• Transistor test: yes
• Data hold: yes
• Back light function: yes
• Dimensions: 135х67х33mm
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
•
•
Weight: 147 g
Battery: 1x9V
+ 3 standard
0 extended
DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ83B 519083

TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2000m/ 20/ 200/ 400 V
• AC voltage : 200/ 400 V
• DC current: 2000μ/ 20m/ 200mA
• Resistance: 200/ 2000/ 20K/ 200K/ 2000KΩ
• Diodes control: yes
• Buzzer: yes
• Battery test (9V): yes
• Weight: 60 g
• Battery: 12V
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ5510 5195510

Measuring: humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. Automatic range
adjustment, manual value selection. LCD display showing the measured value in digits
with the size of 3 ¾. High accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in
measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. Automatic switch off.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 0.4/ 4/ 40/ 400/ 600 V • Humidity: 30% to 95%
• AC voltage : 4/ 40/ 400/ 600V • Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux
• DC current: 400μ/ 4000μ/ 40m/ 400m/ 10A • Noise level: 35 to 100dB
• AC current: 400μ/ 4000μ/ 40m/ 400m/ 10A • Circuit control: yes
• Resistance: 400/ 4K/ 40K/ 400K/ 4M/ 40MΩ • Diodes control: yes
3
• Capacitors: 4η/ 40η/ 400η/ 4μ/ 40μ/ 100μF • Weight: 310 g (including battery)
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY • Frequency: 10/ 100/ 1k/ 10k/ 100k/ 200kHz • Battery: 1x9V
• Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9% • Dimensions: 83х162х47mm
+ 3 standard
0 extended • Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DIGITAL MULTIMETER ЕМ420C 519420
Measuring: illumination, temperature and all electric values. Automatic range adjust-
ment, manual value selection. LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with
the size of 16 mm. High accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring
and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. Automatic switch off.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 600 V • Circuit control: yes
• AC voltage : 2/ 20/ 200/ 600V • Diodes control: yes
• DC current: 200μ/ 2000μ/ 20m/ 200m/ 2/ 10A • Weight: 200 g (including battery)
• AC current: 00μ/ 2000μ/ 20m/ 200m/ 2/ 10A • Battery: 3x1.5 V
• Resistance: 200/ 2K/ 20K/ 200K/ 2M/ 20MΩ • Dimensions: 75х158х35mm
• Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Battery test: 1.5/3/9/12 V
+ 3 standard
0 extended

Measuring: all electric values. Manual range adjustment. LCD display showing the mea-
sured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 ½ . High accuracy of analogue-digital conversion,
precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 1000 V • Battery test: 1.5/ 3/ 9/ 12 V
• AC voltage: 2/ 20/ 200/ 750V • Transistor test: Vce≈3V , Ib≈10μF
• DC current: 2m/ 20m/ 200m/ 10A • Circuit control: yes
• AC current: 200m/ 10A • Diodes control: yes
• Resistance: 200/ 2K/ 20K/ 200K/ 2M/ 20M/ 200MΩ • Weight: 495 g (including battery)
• Capacity: 2000p/ 20η/ 200η/ 20μF • Battery: 1x9V
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С • Dimensions: 97х200х48mm
+ 3 standard
0 extended

Measuring: temperature and all electric values. Manual range adjustment, manual value
selection. LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 ¾ . High
accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to
electro-magnetic interferences. Automatic switch off.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 1000 V • Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С
• AC voltage: 200 m/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 750V • Logical level: High > 2.0 V;
• DC current: 20μ/ 200 μ/ 2m/ 200m/ 10A Low < 0.8 V
• AC current: 20μ/ 200μ/ 2m/ 200m/ 2/ 10A • Circuit control: yes
• Resistance: 200/ 2K/ 20K/ 200K/ 2M/ 20M/ 200MΩ • Diodes control: yes
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
•
•
•
Capacitors: 2η/ 20η/ 200η/ 2μ/ 20μF
Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz
Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9%
• Weight: 495 g (including battery)
• Battery: 1x9V
• Dimensions: 97х200х47 mm
+ 3 standard
0 extended

Measuring: electric values. Automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. LCD
display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. High accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. Automatic switch off and low battery indication.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m/ 24/ 240/ 600 V • Circuit control: yes
• AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m/ 24/ 240/ 600 V • Diodes control: yes
• DC current: 240μ/ 2400μ/ 24m/ 240m/ 10A • Weight: 137 g (including battery)
• AC current: 240μ/ 2400μ/ 24m/ 240m/ 10A • Battery: 9V
• Resistance: 400Ω - 40MΩ • Dimensions: 70х126х28mm
3 YEARS TOTAL
• Capacity: 51.2ηF to 51.2μF
WARRANTY • Frequency: 50/ 500/ 5000/ 50k/ 50MHz
+ 3 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DIGITAL MULTIMETER / PEN 5193215

Measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. Automatic range adjustment, manual
value selection. LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection,
range overload indication. High accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in
measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. Automatic switch off and
low battery indication and a torch.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 200m/ 2/ 20/ 200/ 600 V • Circuit control: yes
• AC voltage: 2/ 20/ 200/ 600V • Diodes control: yes
• DC current: 20m to 200mA • Weight: 182 g (including battery)
• AC current: 20m to 200mA • Battery: 1x9V
3
• Resistance: 200/ 2K/ 20K/ 200K/ 2M/ 20MΩ • Dimensions: 57х230х30mm
YEARS TOTAL
• Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V
WARRANTY
ЕМ3215 + 3 standard
0 extended
DIGITAL CLAMP METER EM202 519202

Measuring of electric values. Manual range adjustment, manual value selection. LCD
display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3½ mm. High accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. Automatic switch off.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 1000 V • Diodes control: yes
• AC voltage: 750V • Weight: 400 g (including battery)
• AC current: 20/ 200/ 1000A • Battery: 1x9V
• Resistance: 200 kΩ • Dimensions: 99х250х43mm
• Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С
3
• Circuit control: yes
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
EM202 0 extended

Measuring of electric values. Automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. LCD
display, low battery indication, overload protection. High accuracy of analogue-digital
conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences.
Automatic switch off.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 1000 V • Circuit control: yes
• DC current: 200 / 1000A • Battery: 1x9V
• AC current: 200 / 1000A • Dimensions: 99х258х43mm
• Resistance: 200 kΩ
3
• Frequency: 2 kHz
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
EM204

Measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. LCD display and retain
function option, low battery indication and overload protection.
TECHNICAL DATA
• DC voltage: 1000 V • Diodes control: yes
• AC current: 200 / 1000A • Battery: 1x9V
• Resistance: 200 / 20 kΩ • Dimensions: 69х229х38mm
• Circuit control: yes
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
EM266
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

INFRARED TEMPERATURE METER 519520
EM520A Digital device for measuring of temperature. The temperature is measured with no
contact. It has a laser counter for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery
low indication and overload protection.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Temperature: -20° up to 320°С / -4° to 608 °F
• Distance to point size: 6:1
• Precision: ±2° C or 2% in reading
• Battery: 1x9V
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
EM520A + 3 standard
0 extended
LASER DISTANCE METER EL- 201 519001

TECHNICAL DATA • Automatic storage data: 30 times
• Colour screen: 1,8 inch
• Measure range: 40m
• Net weight: 88gr
• Measuring accuracy: ± 3mm, with a
• Dimension: 15.9x8.8x5.5 mm
0.05mm / m increment
• Lowest indication unit: 1mm FUNCTION
• Laser parameter: 635nm, 1mw • Single measurement
• Laser class: 2 • Continuous measurement
• Operating Temperature: -10°C+ 40°C • Measurement of rectangular area
• Storage temperature: -20°C + 70°C • Measurement of cubic volume
• Automatic switch-off after approx: laser • Triangle area measurement
20s • Square trapezoid area measurement
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Instrument Auto-off Time: 5 min
• Laser Auto-off Time: 20 sec
• Area accumulation
• Single Pythagorean theorem
EL- 201 + 3 standard
0 extended
• Battery: 2x1.5AAA measurement
• Battery operating life time: 5000times • Double tick plus/minus measurement
LASER DISTANCE METER EL- 201 519002

TECHNICAL DATA • Automatic storage data: 30 times
• Colour screen: 1,8 inch
• Measure range: 100m
• Net weight: 88gr
• Measuring accuracy: ± 3mm, with a
• Dimension: 15.9x8.8x5.5 mm
0.05mm / m increment
• Lowest indication unit: 1mm FUNCTION
• Laser parameter: 635nm, 1mw • Single measurement
• Laser class: 2 • Continuous measurement
• Operating Temperature: -10°C+ 40°C • Measurement of rectangular area
• Storage temperature: -20°C + 70°C • Measurement of cubic volume
• Automatic switch-off after approx: laser • Triangle area measurement
20s • Square trapezoid area measurement
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Instrument Auto-off Time: 5 min
• Laser Auto-off Time: 20 sec
• Area accumulation
• Single Pythagorean theorem
EL- 201 + 3 standard
0 extended
• Battery: 2x1.5AAA measurement
• Battery operating life time: 5000 times • Double tick plus/minus measurement
LASER LEVEL METER EL-113P 519003

TECHNICAL DATA • IP rate: IP54
• Dimension: 80×50×82.5 mm
• Horizontal precision: ±7mm/10m
• Vertical precision: ±7mm/10m AREAS OF APPLICATION:
• Auto-Leveling range: ±3.5° Indoor calibration, door, cabinet, ground,
• Laser colour: Red light 635nm wall, brick and more basic application.
• Laser class: 2
• Auto-Leveling method: The gravity
pendulum is auto-leveling.
• Amping time: <6S
• The laser line width: <3.5mm (within 10m).
• Scope of work (radius): 12m
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Working temperature: 0°C~+40°C
• The power supply: 2xAA battery
+ 3 standard
0 extended
• Working voltage: 3V
EL-113P • Working time: More than 15 hours
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
VOLTAGE TESTER 519203

The voltage tester screwdriver is used for detecting the presence of electrical voltage.
Existence of voltage is shown via lighting signal indicator located in the handle of the
screwdriver. It can detect voltage in the range from 100V to 250V. The screwdriver has
a flat tip.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Size: 3.5x140mm
• Voltage range 100-250V~
• GS, CE certificates
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
DN-8203 + 2 standard
0 extended

TECHNICAL DATA
• Size: 3.5x190mm
• Voltage range 100-500V~
• ABS+PC
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
EL-1805 + 2 standard
0 extended
NON-CONTACT VOLTAGE 519GK8

AC DETECTOR FUNCTION TECHNICAL DATA
• AC voltage detection • Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V/AC
• Indicate AC null line and live line • Handle material: ABS
• Auto power off in 5 minutes • Metal: carbon steel
• Buzzer: sound beeps when is detected AC • Light: LED
voltage • Length – 148mm
• Green light: by power ON
• RED light: by live parts detection.
• Higher flashing frequency indicates stronger
electric field
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
GK8 + 2 standard
0 extended
MULTI FUNCTIONAL 519207

VOLTAGE TESTER FUNCTION TECHNICAL DATA
• AC voltage testing • Voltage range: from 12 to 220V/AC
• Line break testing • Handle material: ABS
• Earth checking • Metal: carbon steel
• Light: LED
• Blade diameter: 4mm
• Length – 190mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
EL-8736 0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

TECHNICAL DATA
• Size: 2.0x185mm
• Voltage range 6-380V
• ABS
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
EL-EN08 + 2 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
MULTI-PURPOSE WIRING TOOL 598030

FUNCTIONS
Ergonomic molded anti-slip grid handle
Crimp insulated and non insulated cable terminals
TECHNICAL DATA
• Size: 235mm
• Cable size section: 0.75-6.0mm
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
CRIMPING PLIERS HD-005 59308

FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of naked cable terminals
TECHNICAL DATA
• Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 10mm²
• Form of the crimping head: hexagon
• Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg
• Length of the instrument: 220mm
• Packing: blister
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
HD-005
CRIMPING PLIERS G-301H 59307

FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of naked cable terminals
TECHNICAL DATA
• Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm²
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
G-301H + 2 standard
0 extended
CRIMPING PLIERS SN-003 59309

FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes
TECHNICAL DATA
• Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm²
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
SN-003
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

EL-HX26B MANUAL CRIMPING 598036
RATCHET PLIERS FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with non-isolated cable terminals
TECHNICAL DATA
• Form of the crimping element: hexagon
• Crimping sizes: 6, 10, 16, 25 mm²
• Section of the crimping conductors: 6-25 mm²
• Weight of the instrument: 0.83 kg
• Length: 350mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
EL-HX26B + 2 standard
0 extended
EL-HX50SC MANUAL 598037

CRIMPING PLIERS FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with non-isolated cable terminals.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Size of the crimping element: 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50 mm²
• Length: 390mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
EL-HX50SC 0 extended
EL-HX150SC MANUAL 598038

CRIMPING PLIERS FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with non-isolated cable terminals.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Size of the crimping element: 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150 mm²
• Length: 620mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
EL-HX150SC + 2 standard
0 extended
WIRE STRIPPER KNIFE 598031

8-28MM WITH HOOK BLADE FUNCTIONS
• Stripping circular PVC cable, rubber cable, silicone cable and teflon cable.
• Cutting depth can penetrate knurled nut to adjust moving blade.
• It can change circular shearing into linear shearing, and long stripping area adopts
spiral cutting.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Striping capacity diameter: 8-28 mm
• Length: 190mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
EL-256
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
EL-D5 AUTOMATIC 598033

WIRE STRIPPER FUNCTIONS
• For stripping the plastic or rubber insulation of the single, multiple cables and wires
of 0.5-6mm2
• With wire cutter for copper and aluminum wires, multiple strands up to 6mm2
• No damaging of the conductor core, long lifetime.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Striping capacity: 0.5-6 mm²
• Length: 190mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
EL-700D AUTOMATIC 598034

WIRE STRIPPER WITH CUTTER FUNCTIONS
• Stripping diameter can be adjusted automatically for different wire cross sections
• Precise blade design without damaging the conductor cores
• During stripping, the wire is held firm by clamping jaws
• With adjustable length stop, with a spring returns the stripper to the starting position,
long lifetime.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Striping capacity: 0.25-6 mm²
• Length: 170mm
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
AUTOMATIC WIRE STRIPPER 598032

FUNCTIONS
• Wire is automatically gripped and stripped with the same motion
• Adjustable dial
• Comfort grip handle
TECHNICAL DATA
• Size: 168mm
• Cable size section: 1.0-3.2mm
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
CUTTER 598245
FUNCTIONS
• Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors
• Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core
TECHNICAL DATA
• Length: 760mm
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

MECHANICAL CABLE CUTTING 59306
PLIERS HS-250 TYPE FUNCTIONS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Maximum section of the cable:
¾ for aluminum conductors up to 240mm²
¾ for copper conductors up to 185mm²
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended

PLIERS CC-325 TYPE FUNCTIONS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Cutting power: 15T
• Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
2 YEARS TOTAL
• Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
WARRANTY • Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg
+ 2 standard
0 extended • Packing: blister

PLIERS CC-400 TYPE FUNCTIONS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Cutting power: 15T
• Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
+ 2 standard
0 extended • Packing: blister
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HYDRAULIC TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
HYDRAULIC CRIMPING 59303

PLIERS YQK-50 TYPE FUNCTIONS
• Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the
corresponding size.
TECHNICAL DATA • Weight of the instrument: 2.8 kg
• Length: 310mm
• Form of the crimping element:
• Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with
hexagonal
viscosity 15)
• Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10,
• Metal box for the instrument
16, 25, 35, 50mm²
• A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic
• Section of the crimping conductors:
cylinder
¾ AI conductors - from 4 to 50mm²
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
¾ Cu conductors – from 4 to 50 mm²
• Element pressing power: 8T
• Width of the element: 10mm
+ 2 standard
0 extended

PLIERS YQK-300 TYPE FUNCTIONS
corresponding size
TECHNICAL DATA • Element pressing power: 100kN
• Device for automatic following of the
effort at crimping completion
• Length: 500mm
hexagonal
viscosity 23)
• Size of the crimping element: 10, 16,
25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240,
2
YEARS TOTAL 300mm²
cylinder
WARRANTY • Section of the crimping conductors:
¾ AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm²
+ 2 standard
0 extended ¾ Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm²

PLIERS KYQ-300B TYPE FUNCTIONS
corresponding size
• Length: 500mm
hexagonal
viscosity 23)
• Size of the crimping element: 16,
25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240,
2
YEARS TOTAL 300mm²
cylinder
WARRANTY • Section of the crimping conductors:
+ 2 standard ¾ AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm²
0 extended ¾ Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm²

PLIERS HT-300 TYPE FUNCTIONS
corresponding size
TECHNICAL DATA • Section of the crimping conductors:
¾ AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm²
• Crimping head turning at 360°
¾ Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm²
which facilitates the crimping of static
• Element pressing power: 60kN
conductors
• Length: 460mm
2
YEARS TOTAL hexagonal
viscosity 15)
WARRANTY • Size of the crimping element: 16,
+ 2 standard 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240,
0 extended • A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic
300mm²
cylinder
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HYDRAULIC TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

HYDRAULIC PUNCHING 54000
PLIERS WK-8 TYPE FUNCTIONS
• Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary
motion.
• Thickness of the element: 25mm
• Piercing head turning at 360°
• Form of the cutting element: round
• Size of the cutting element: Ø22.5,
viscosity 15)
28.3, 34.6, 43.2, 49.6, 61.5mm
• Piercing capacity:
¾ Sheet metal 3mm – openings up to
cylinder
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Ø30mm
¾ Sheet metal 2mm – openings up to
Ø60mm
+ 2 standard
0 extended
HYDRAULIC PUNCHING 54001

PRESS SYK-15 TYPE FUNCTIONS
• Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
TECHNICAL DATA • Piercing capacity:
¾ Sheet metal 3mm- openings up to Ø60.8mm
• Protracting piercing head supplied
¾ Sheet metal 2mm - openings up to
with a hose for the hydraulic oil that
Ø115.5mm
gives possibility for piercing openings
¾ Square opening up to 110x110mm
everywhere on the metal surface
• Element pressing power: 15T
• Form of the cutting element:
• Thickness of the element: 25mm
¾ Round
¾ Square
2
YEARS TOTAL • Size of the cutting element:
viscosity 15)
WARRANTY ¾ Square: 32x32mm
¾ Ì round openings: Ø 22.5, 28.3, 34.6,
+ 2 standard
0 extended • A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic
43.2, 9.6, 61.5mm
cylinder
ADDITIONAL SET 54002

FOR WK-8 & SYK-15 Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands: Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a
square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
VDE INSULATED 598001

COMBINED PLIERS TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Combined pliers 1000V
Size: 200 mm
1000V CrV
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

LONG NOSE PLIERS TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Long nose pliers 1000V
Size: 200 mm
1000V CrV
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

DIAGONAL PLIERS TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Cutting pliers 1000V
Size: 160 mm
1000V CrV
598013
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Cutting pliers 1000V
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Size: 180 mm
+ 3 standard
2 extended 1000V CrV

WIRE STRIPPER TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Wire stripper 1000V
Size: 160 mm
1000V CrV
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

GROOVE JOINT PLIERS TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Groove joint pliers 1000V
Size: 250 mm
1000V CrV
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended

SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Screwdriver - slotted
Size: 2.5x50 mm
1000V CrV
598007
TECHNICAL DATA
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Size: 3.5x75 mm
+ 3 standard

SCREWDRIVER- SLOTTED TECHNICAL DATA
Size: 4x100 mm
1000V CrV
598009
TECHNICAL DATA
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Size: 5.5x150 mm
+ 3 standard
VDE INSULATED 598010 598011

SCREWDRIVER- PH TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Screwdriver 1000V Type: Screwdriver 1000V
Size: PH0x75 mm Size: PH1x100 mm
1000V CrV 1000V CrV
598012
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Screwdriver 1000V
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Size: PH2x120 mm
+ 3 standard
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
MINI COMBINED PLIERS 598040

ADVANTAGES
Chrome-vanadium steel for longer life and durability
Bi-material comfort grip handle
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Mini combined pliers
Size: 115 mm
CrV
MINI DIAGONAL PLIERS 598042

ADVANTAGES
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Mini diagonal pliers
Size: 115 mm
CrV
COMBINED PLIERS ADVANTAGES

Heat treated, fully polished
598043 598044
TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Combined pliers Type: Combined pliers
Size: 160 mm Size: 180 mm
CrV CrV
DIAGONAL PLIERS 598046

ADVANTAGES
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Diagonal pliers
Size: 160 mm
CrV
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

LONG NOSE PLIERS 598047
ADVANTAGES
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Long nose pliers
Size: 160 mm
CrV
MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER 598070 598071

SLOTTED TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Screwdriver Type: Screwdriver
Size: 6x38 mm Size: 3x75 mm
CrV CrV
598072 598073
Size: 3x100 mm Size: 4x100 mm
CrV CrV
MAGNETIC SCREWDRIVER 598080 598089

PH | PZ TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
Size: PH2x38 mm Size: PZ2x38 mm
CrV CrV
MAGNETIC BIT HOLDER 598096

TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Bit holder
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
PLASTIC LEVEL 598243

ADVANTAGES
Durable acrylic vials read plumb, level, 45°
Top read window for convenience
Rubber end caps for shock-resistant
Highly visible vials with magnetic base
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Level
Length: 228.6 mm
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
6PC PRECISION 598094

SCREWDRIVER SET ADVANTAGES
Carbon steel blade with black finish
With chrome plated handle
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Screwdriver set
Slotted size: 1.4mm, 2.0mm, 2.4mm, 3.0mm
PH size: PH0, PH1
15-IN-1 MULTI-PURPOSE PLIERS 598210

ADVANTAGES
Precision punched
Machined surface
Stainless steel components
Compact folding design deal selection for general purpose use
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Multi pliers
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
ALLIGATORS CLIPS SET M500060 M500059

Type: F 275 Type: F 279
Rated current: max 5A Rated current: max 80A
Colour: Red/Black Colour: Red/Black
Length: 50 mm Length: 80 mm
M411012
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: L 150
Rated current: max 200A
Colour: Red/Black
Length: 150 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

CUTTER KNIFE 9MM 597300009
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Cutter knife
Handle material: Plastic PP
Blade material: Steel
Blade size: 83x9x0.4mm
Color: Yellow

TECHNICAL DATA
Type: E-7229 Cutter knife
Handle material: Plastic PP
Blade material: Steel
Color: Blue

TECHNICAL DATA
Type: E-82087 Cutter knife
Handle material: Plastic PP+TPR
Blade material: SK5
Color: Red
FOLDABLE KNIFE 18MM 597300022

TECHNICAL DATA
Type: E7002 Foldable knife
Handle material: Plastic PP+TPR
Blade material: SK5(1+5pcs)
Blade size: 60x19x0.5mm;
Color: Yellow
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
ALUMINUM AUTO-LOCK KNIFE 597300020

TECHNICAL DATA
Type: E-522 Auto- lock knife
Handle material: Aluminum Alloy
Blade material: SK5
Blade size: 60x19x0.5mm;
Color: Silver
ALUMINUM FIXED BLADE 598201

UTILITY KNIFE TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Aluminum utility knife
Razor-sharp tempered SK5 blade
Aluminum alloy housing
Fixed blade for more cutting power
3PC blades included
KNIFE SPARE BLADES 597310009 597310018

Type: Knife spare blades Type: Knife spare blades
Size: 9 mm Size: 18 mm
HAMMER WITH HARDWOOD ADVANTAGES

HANDLE Drop forged carbon steel. Fully heat treated & polished head
598230 598231
Type: Hammer Type: Hammer
Weight: 300 gr Weight: 500 gr
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MECHANICAL TOOLS
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

5PC DIAMOND NEEDLE FILE SET 598232
ADVANTAGES
Fine diamond grit
Perfect for machinists, gunsmiths, jewelers and hobbyists
Dipped grip handle
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Needle file
Size: 3x140mm, 150 grit
3-IN-1 STAPLE GUN SET 598246

TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Staple gun
1PC staple gun
500PC 8x1.2x11.3mm staples
500PC 12mm staples
500PC 14mm nails
1PC handy storage case
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
MAGNETIC TAPE MEASURE E-240 598247 598248

Type: E-240/319 Tape measure Type: E-240/519 Tape measure
Tape sizes: 3 m x 19 mm Tape sizes: 5 m x 19 mm
598249
TECHNICAL DATA
Type: E-240/525 Tape measure
Tape sizes: 5 m x 25 mm
CHROME PLATING 598241

TAPE MEASURE TECHNICAL DATA
Type: Tape measure
Tape length: 5m
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | CUTTING ACCESSORIES
CUTTING DISCS FOR METAL

M516300 M516301 M516302 M516303
Type: Cutting disk for Type: Cutting disk for Type: Cutting disk for Type: Cutting disk for
metal metal metal metal
Outer diameter: 115 mm Outer diameter: 115 mm Outer diameter: 125 mm Outer diameter: 125 mm
Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm
Disc width: 1.0 mm Disc width: 1.6 mm Disc width: 1.0 mm Disc width: 1.6 mm
Metal Metal Metal Metal
CUTTING DISCS FOR METAL

M516211 M516212 M516213
Type: Cutting disk for Type: Cutting disk for Type: Cutting disk for
metal metal metal
Outer diameter: 125 mm Outer diameter: 180 mm Outer diameter: 230 mm
Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm
Disc width: 3.2 mm Disc width: 3.2 mm Disc width: 3.2 mm
Metal Metal Metal
CUTTING DISCS FOR METAL A60T INOX

M516304 M516305
Type: Cutting disk for Type: Cutting disk for
stainless steel stainless steel
Outer diameter: 115 mm Outer diameter: 125 mm
Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm
Disc width: 1.0 mm Disc width: 1.0 mm
Metal Inox Metal Inox
GRINDING DISCS FOR METAL

M516219 M516220 M516307 M516308
Type: Grinding disc for Type: Grinding disc for Type: Grinding disc for Type: Grinding disc for
metal metal metal metal
Disc width: 6 mm Disc width: 6 mm Disc width: 6 mm Disc width: 6 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | CUTTING ACCESSORIES

CUTTING DISCS FOR STONE
M516216 M516306 M516217 M516218
Type: Cutting disc for Type: Cutting disc for Type: Cutting disc for Type: Cutting disc for
stone stone stone stone
Disc width: 3.2 mm Disc width: 3.2 mm Disc width: 3.2 mm Disc width: 3.2 mm
DIAMOND CUTTING DISCS WET

M516309 M516310
Type: Diamond cutting Type: Diamond cutting
disc wet disc wet
Disc width: 7 mm Disc width: 7 mm
Concrete Bricks Faience Concrete Bricks Faience
DIAMOND CUTTING DISCS TURBO

M516311 M516312
Type: Diamond cutting Type: Diamond cutting
disc TURBO disc TURBO
Disc width: 7 mm Disc width: 7 mm
Concrete Bricks Faience Concrete Bricks Faience
FLAP DISCS
M516169 M516313 M516171
Type: Flap disc for metal, Type: Flap disc for metal, Type: Flap disc for metal,
wood & stone wood & stone wood & stone
Outer diameter: 125 mm Outer diameter: 125 mm Outer diameter: 125 mm
Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm Inner diameter: 22.2 mm
Grit: A-60 Grit: A-80 Grit: A-120
Metal Wood Stone Metal Wood Stone Metal Wood Stone
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | BRUSH ACCESSORIES
TWIST KNOT WIRE WHEEL BRUSH FOR ANGLE GRINDERS

M516050
Type: Twist knot wire wheel brush
Outer diameter: 100 mm
Inner diameter: 22.2 mm
Metal
TWIST KNOT WIRE WHEEL BRUSH FOR ANGLE GRINDERS

M516068
Type: Twist knot wire wheel brush
Inner diameter: 22.2 mm
Metal
TWIST KNOT WIRE CUP BRUSH FOR ANGLE GRINDERS

M516256
Type: Cup brush
Nut size: M14x2
Metal
DRILL TWIST KNOT WIRE CUP BRUSH WITH SHANK

M516314
Type: Cup brush
Shank size: 6 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | DRILL ACCESSORIES

CORE CUTTERS FOR DRILL
M516148 M516315
Type: Core cutter for drill Type: Core cutter for drill
Concrete Concrete
HOLE CUTTERS SET

M516013
Type: Hole cutter set
Outer diameter: 26-63 mm
Set of 7 pieces
Wood
ARBOR & PILOT DRILL SDS PLUS FOR CORE CUTTERS

M516147
Type: Arbor & pilot drill SDS
Length: 160 mm
BRAD POINT DRILL FOR WOOD

M516370
Type: Brad point drill
Drill bit diameter: 4 mm; 5 mm; 6 mm; 8 mm; 10 mm
Set of 5 pieces
Wood
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DRILL BITS FOR METAL

DIN 338
HSS 4241 Metal
Catalogu Drill bit diameter Total length (mm) Working length Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm) (mm)
M516316 1.0 34 12 2/150/300
M516317 1.5 40 18 2/150/300
M516318 2.0 49 24 2/150/300
M516319 2.5 57 30 2/150/300
M516320 3.0 61 33 2/150/300
M516321 3.2 65 36 2/150/300
M516322 3.5 70 39 2/150/300
M516323 4.0 75 43 2/150/300
M516324 4.2 75 43 1/150/300
M516325 4.5 80 47 1/150/300
M516326 5.0 86 52 1/150/300
M516327 6.0 93 57 1/150/300
M516328 6.5 101 63 1/90/180
M516329 7.0 109 69 1/90/180
M516330 8.0 117 75 1/90/180
M516331 10.0 133 87 1/60/120
M516332 12.0 151 101 1/10/50
MASONRY DRILL BITS

DIN 8039
U-type flute Concrete
Catalogue Drill bit diameter Total length (mm) Working length Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm) (mm)
M516340 3.0 60 30 150/300
M516341 4.0 75 40 150/300
M516342 5.0 85 50 150/300
M516343 6.0 100 60 150/300
M516344 8.0 120 80 90/180
M516345 10.0 150 90 60/120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

CROSS HEAD DRILLS SDS-PLUS
DIN 8035 Concrete
Catalogue Drill bit diameter L1- Total length L1- Working length Packing/Box (pcs)
number (mm) (mm) (mm)
M516350 6.0 110 30 10/200
M516351 6.0 160 40 10/200
M516352 6.0 210 50 10/200
M516353 6.5 260 200 10/200
M516354 8.0 110 50 10/200
M516355 8.0 160 100 10/200
M516356 8.0 210 150 10/200
M516357 8.0 350 300 10/100
M516358 10.0 160 100 10/200
M516359 10.0 260 200 10/200
M516360 10.0 450 400 10/50
M516361 12.0 210 150 10/200
M516362 12.0 450 400 10/50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLDERING GUN
M516375
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS
Type: Soldering gun

Power: 100W
Temperature range: 600°C
With LED light
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
TIN ABSORPTION PUMP

M516380
SOLDER WIRE
M516072
Type: Solder wire
Solder alloy: Sn-60%; PB-40%
External diameter: 1 mm
Melting temperature: 180°C
Weigh: 170 g
ROSIN
M500632
APPLICATION
It serves to degrease the soldering parts and the soldering tip of the soldering iron.
Facilitates the flow of solder.
Increases efficiency of the soldering process.
Weight: 50 g
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HOT MELT GLUE GUN

M516385
TOOLS | HAND TOOLS

Type: Hot melt glue gun
Power: 100W
Temperature range: 18-200°C
Silicone pipe diameter: 11 mm
Heating time: 4-5 min
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
GLUE STICKS SET FOR GLUE GUNS

M516386
Type: Glue sticks
Pipe diameter: 11 mm
Length: 200 mm
Set of 10 pieces
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
HAND GLOVES
81001
ADVANTAGES
TECHNICAL DATA
• Crinkle latex grip offers excellent grip
Type: A174 Flex Grip Latex Glove • 13 gauge liner for a perfect fit
Usage: General purpose • Breathable seamless liner
Material: Polyester & Latex • Ergonomic design to reduce hand fatigue
Colour: Red & Black • Elasticated cuffs for a secure fit
• Retail tag which aids presentation for retail sales
81002
TECHNICAL DATA ADVANTAGES
Type: A350 DermiFlex Glove • Nitrile foam coating for excellent grip in wet and dry
Usage: General purpose conditions
Material: Nylon, Elastane & Nitrile Foam • Palm dipped to increase dexterity and ventilation
Colour: Grey & Black • 15 gauge liner for extra dexterity
• Breathable seamless liner
• Lightweight and comfortable
• Maximum EN level 4 abrasion
• ANSI A1Cut level
CATII
SAFETY EYEGLASSES
81010
Type: LEVO PW11- Dynamic High-tech Safety Eye- • Dual use with classic arms or with wide elastic band
glasses • Detachable foam offers additional protection
Usage: General purpose against shocks and dust
Material: Polycarbonate 41g • 100% metal free
Colour: Clear • Excellent ventilation through indirect vents in the
back foam
• Anti-scratch coating for added durability
• 99% UV protection
81011
Type: PW21- Indirect Vent Goggle • Indirect ventilation
Usage: General purpose • Flexible PVC frame for ultra comfort
Material: Polycarbonate & PVC • Adjustable elastic headband for a perfect fit
Colour: Transparent • Ultra lightweight for long uses
• Protects from fluid and splashes
• Excellent side protection
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

DISPOSABLE MASK
81020
Type: P251 FFP2 VALVED FOLD FLAT RESPIRATOR • Special compact vertical fold-flat design
Usage: Disposable Mask • High performance exhalation valve to reduce heat
Material: PP & PU Foam and provide comfort when used in hot and humid
Colour: White conditions
• Ultrasonic welded head straps
• Individually wrapped inside hygienic polybag
* The price is for 1 piece. Sold in a box of 20 pcs.
AIRTECH CAP
81030
Type: PS59 AIRTECH CAP · Mid peak (5cm) ideal for all uses
Usage: All Uses · Hi-Visibility colour for visibility in daylight
Material: Nylon, ABS & EVA · Cooling mesh fabric for increased breathability
Colour: Black · Inner ABS shell and soft pad for shock
Inner Shell: High Quality Shell for Excellent Protection,
Soft Pad for Extra Comfort and Shock Absorption,
Fully Vented
MICROPOROUS COVERALL
81040
Type: ST40 BIZTEX MICROPOROUS COVERALL TYPE 5/6 · Leading design made from microporous material
Usage: Protection Against Chemical Hazards · Excellent liquid and particulate barrier protection
Material: BizTech Micro · Low linting construction for minimal contamination
Colour: White · Anti-static
· Two-way front zip and sealable front flap
· Elasticated hood, ankles, cuffs and waist
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | WORKS & HOBY LIGHTS
WORK AND HOBBY LIGHTS
ALUMINIUM LIGHT BAR

100166
TECHNICAL DATA
• LED 3Watt COB
• Material: Aluminum
• Battery Type: 3xAAA
• Light Mode: On/Off
• Colour: Silver
* With Two Magnets & Velcro Strip
Е-4116
WORK LIGHT WITH ROTARY BASE

100169/G 100169/Y
• LED 3Watt COB • LED 3Watt COB
• Lumens: 200lm • Lumens: 200lm
• Material: Plastic • Material: Plastic
• Size: 130x68x39mm • Size: 130x68x39mm
• Battery Type: 3xAAA • Battery Type: 3xAAA
• Light Mode: On/Off • Light Mode: On/Off
• Colour: Green • Colour: Yellow
1 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Е-5542 * With Two Strong Magnet on Swivel Holder;
With 360° Rotary Dividual Pocket Clip and 360° Swivel Holder
+ 1 standard
0 extended
PIVOT WORK LIGHT WITH MAGNETIC BASE

100167
TECHNICAL DATA
• LED 3Watt COB
• Lumens: 240lm
• Material: Rubber
Coated
• Battery Type: 3xAA
Е-5503 • Colour: Black
* With 360° Rotary Pivot Base; With strong magnet on bottom
ALUMINUM WORK LIGHT

100168
TECHNICAL DATA
• LED 3Watt COB
• Lumens: 200lm
• Colour: Black
Е-5545 * With Strong Magnet in Swivel Hook
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ZOOM FLASHLIGHT
100172
TECHNICAL DATA
• LED 1Watt
• Material: Rubber Coated
• Size: 115x34mm
• Colour: Black
* Handstrap; Telescopic (ZOOM)
Е-6605
ZOOM FLASHLIGHT
100173
TECHNICAL DATA
• LED Type: CREE XPE
• Lumens: 200lm
• Size: 150x33mm
• Light Mode: High/Low/Strobe/
Off
• Light Distance: Zoom in- 250
Meters / Zoom Out- 100Meters
• Colour: Black
Е-1171
* Handstrap
HANDY SPOT FLASHLIGHT RECHARGEABLE 1 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 1 standard
100174 0 extended
TECHNICAL DATA
• 7LED
• Material: Plastic
• Battery Type: Rechargeable
battery
• Colour: Black & Yellow
* Direct Charge
Е-6630
MINI KEY LIGHT

100176/BL 100176/B
• LED 1.5W COB • LED 1.5W COB
• Material: Plastic • Material: Plastic
• Size: 71x34x21mm • Size: 71x34x21mm
• Battery Type: 2xCR2032) • Battery Type: 2xCR2032)
• Light Mode: High/Low/ • Light Mode: High/Low/Flash/Off
Flash/Off • Colour: Blue
• Colour: Black
* Strong Back Magnet; Colourful Carabiner
Е-5903
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
BULB SHAPE PULL LIGHT

100175/B 100175/BL 100175/P 100175/R
TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
• LED 1W • LED 1W • LED 1W • LED 1W
• Material: Plastic • Material: Plastic • Material: Plastic • Material: Plastic
• Size: 55x55x160mm • Size: 55x55x160mm • Size: 55x55x160mm • Size: 55x55x160mm
• Battery Type: 3xAAA • Battery Type: 3xAAA • Battery Type: 3xAAA • Battery Type: 3xAAA
• Light Mode: On/Off • Light Mode: On/Off • Light Mode: On/Off • Light Mode: On/Off
• Colour: Blue • Colour: Black • Colour: Pink • Colour: Red
HEADLAMP
100170
TECHNICAL DATA
• LED 3W COB
• Lumens: 200lm
• Light Mode:
¾ High
¾ Low
¾ Strobe
¾ Off
• Colour: Black
Е-3645
1 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 1 standard
0 extended
ZOOM HEADLAMP
100171
TECHNICAL DATA
• 1xXML T6 + 2xCREE XPE
• Lumens: 1200lm
• Size: 59x43mm
• Battery Type: 4xAA
• Light Mode:
¾ 1xT6 On
¾ 2 Sides XPE On/
¾ All On
¾ Strobe
¾ OFF
Е-3396 • Colour: Black
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BATTERIES
M070125 M070117
• Reference IEC: LR03 • Reference IEC: LR6
• Type: AAA • Type: AA
• Series: High energy • Series: High energy
• Voltage: 1.5V • Voltage: 1.5V
M070125 • Diameter: 10.5 mm • Diameter: 14.5 mm
M070117 • Height: 44.5 mm • Height: 50.5 mm
M070261 M070257
• Reference IEC: LR03 • Reference IEC: LR6
• Type: AAA • Type: AA
• Series: Max tech • Series: Max tech
M070261
• Voltage: 1.5V • Voltage: 1.5V
M070257
• Diameter: 10.5 mm • Diameter: 14.5 mm
• Height: 44.5 mm • Height: 50.5 mm
M070284 M070087 M070113 M070110

• Reference IEC: LR1 • Reference IEC: LR14 • Reference IEC: LR20 • Reference IEC: LR22
• Series: Professional • Type: C • Type: AAA • Type: 9V
electronic • Series: Long Life • Series: Long Life • Serie: Long Life
• Voltage: 1.5V • Voltage: 1.5V • Voltage: 1.5V • Voltage (V): 9
M070284 • Diameter: 12 mm • Diameter: 26.2 mm • Diameter: 34.2mm • Height: 48.5
• Height: 30.2 mm Height: 50 mm • Height: 61.5 mm
M070057
• Reference IEC: 3R12
• Type: 4.5V
M070110 M070057 • Series: Super Life
• Voltage: 4.5V
• Height: 67 mm
M070236 M070132
• Reference IEC: • Reference IEC: V27A
8LR932 • Type: A27 GA
• Type: A23 GA • Series: Professional
M070236 • Series: Professional electronic
electronic • Voltage: 12 V
• Voltage: 12V • Diameter: 8 mm
• Diameter: 10.3 mm • Height: 28.2 mm
Height: 8.5 mm
M070132
M070011 M070220 M070221 M070259

• Reference IEC: • Reference IEC: • Reference IEC: • Reference IEC: LR44
DL2016 DL2025 DL2032 • Type: V 13 GA
• Type: CR2016 • Type: CR2025 • Type: CR2032 • Series: Professional
• Series: Professional • Series: Professional • Series: Professional electronic
electronic electronic electronic • Voltage (V): 1.5
• Voltage: 3V • Voltage: 3V • Voltage: 3V • Diameter(mm): 11.6
• Diameter: 20 mm • Diameter: 20 mm • Diameter: 20 mm • Height: 5.4
• Height: 1.6 mm • Height: 2.5 mm • Height: 3.2 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | FIXING & FASTENERS
FIXINGS AND FASTENERS
TWINFAST THREAD SCREWS FOR DRYWALLS

• For fixings of drywall panels of standard density
• Needle S point: it drills directly metals up to 0.8 mm thick.
• 60° tapping thread.
• Coverings: Phosphated. This covering enables the adherence of the filler putty to the head of the
screw.
Catalogue Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Thread Packing/
number diameter (mm) Box (pcs)
(mm)
M317172 Plasterboard & metal 3.5 25 PH2 Needle twinfast 1000
Application: Fixing of plasterboards or isolation panels to metallic profiles of 0.8 mm

maximum thickness.
COARSE THREAD SCREWS FOR DRYWALLS

• S needle point: it allows penetrating in soft materials and in metallic materials up to 0.8 mm
thickness.
• Covering: phosphated
• Coarse thread: it allows a faster installation.
Catalogue Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Thread Packing/
number diameter (mm) Box (pcs)
(mm)
M317259 Plasterboard 3.5 25 PH2 Needle Coarse 1000
Applications: with double pitch thread, for the proper fixing of plasterboards togeth-
er or plasterboards to wood.
SELF-DRILLING SCREWS FOR DRYWALLS

• Self-drilling point and tapping thread: for use in metallic materials without pilot hole, up to 3 mm
thick.
Catalogue Material to be fixed Outer Length Recess Point Thread Packing/

number thread (mm) Box (pcs)
diameter
(mm)
M317300 Plasterboard & metal 3.5 25 PH2 Self-drilling Tapping 1000
Application: fixing of plaster boards or isolation panels to metallic profiles of 0.8 - 3.0
mm thickness.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SELF-DRILLING SCREW WITH TRUSS WASHER HEAD
• Self-drilling point and tapping thread: for use in metallic materials without pilot hole
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Material to be Outer thread Length Recess Point Packing/Box

number fixed diameter (mm) (pcs)
(mm)
M317134 Metal 4.2 13 PH2 Self-drilling 1000
Application: for metal
DRYWALL SCREW WITH WAFER HEAD AND TWINFAST THREAD

• Material: Carbon steel
Catalogue Material to be Outer Length Recess Point Thread Packing/

number fixed thread (mm) Box (pcs)
diameter
(mm)
M317230 Metal 4.2 13 PH2 Needle twinfast 1000
Application: For laminated and metal profiles
CONCRETE SCREW FOR DIRECT MOUNTING

• Covering: Zn
Catalogue number Outer thread diam- Length (mm) Recess Packing/Box (pcs)
eter (mm)
M317136 7.5 72 TX30 100
M317137 7.5 92 TX30 100
M317206 7.5 112 TX30 100
M317139 7.5 132 TX30 100
Application: Suitable for installation of PVC and wooden frames, door frames to
concrete or solid brick.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CHIPBOARD (WOOD) SCREW

• Fully threaded
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Material to be fixed Outer thread Length Recess Point Packing/

number diameter (mm) (mm) Box (pcs)
M317001 Wood & Chipboard 3.5 16 PZ2 Needle 1000
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SELF DRILLING SCREW WITH HEXAGON HEAD AND EPDM WASHER
• Covering: Znv
Catalogue Material to be fixed Outer thread Length (mm) Point Packing/Box

number diameter (pcs)
(mm)
M317306 Metal 4.8 19 Self-drilling 1000
Application: Sheet metal to steel construction.
HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS FULLY THREADED

• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs)

number
M317064 M6 16 5.6 500
M317065 M6 20 5.6 500
M317066 M6 25 5.6 500
M317067 M6 30 5.6 500
M317073 M8 20 5.6 200
M317074 M8 25 5.6 200
M317075 M8 30 5.6 200
M317076 M8 40 5.6 200
M317080 M10 30 5.6 200
M317081 M10 40 5.6 100
M317082 M10 50 5.6 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CARRIAGE BOLT
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length Grade Packing/Box

number (mm) (pcs)
M317315 M6 20 5.6 500
M317316 M6 30 5.6 500
M317317 M6 40 5.6 200
M317318 M6 50 5.6 200
M317319 M6 60 5.6 200
M317320 M6 70 5.6 200
M317321 M6 80 5.6 200
M317322 M8 30 5.6 200
M317323 M8 40 5.6 200
M317324 M8 50 5.6 200
M317325 M8 60 5.6 200
M317326 M8 70 5.6 200
M317327 M8 80 5.6 200
HEXAGON NUT
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Packing/Box (pcs)

number
M317152 M6 1000
M317153 M8 1000
M317154 M10 1000
LOCK NUT
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Packing/Box (pcs)

number
M317145 M6 1000
M317146 M8 500
M317147 M10 500
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FLAT WASHER
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Inner diameter Outer diameter Packing/Box (pcs)

number (mm) (mm)
M517076 M6 6.4 12 1000
M317216 M8 8.4 16 1000
M317217 M10 10.5 20 1000
LARGE FLAT WASHER

• Covering: Zn

number (mm) (mm)
M317236 M6 6.4 18 2500
M517203 M8 8.4 24 500
M317328 M10 10.5 30 250
SPRING-LOCK WASHER
• Covering: Zn

number (mm) (mm)
M317162 M6 6.1 11.8 1000
M317163 M8 8.1 14.8 1000
M317164 M10 10.2 18.1 1000
EPDM WASHER
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue For screw with Inner diameter Outer diameter Packing/Box (pcs)
number diameter (mm) (mm) (mm)
M317329 4.8 5.3 16 500
M317330 4.8 5.3 19 500
M317331 5.5 5.8 16 500
M317332 5.5 5.8 19 500
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DROP IN ANCHOR
• Material: Galvanized steel
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter (mm) Packing/Box

number (pcs)
M517233 M6 25 8 100
M517234 M8 30 10 100
M517235 M10 40 12 50
Application: For fixing in concrete and hard materials.
SLEEVE ANCHOR
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter Grade Packing/Box

number (mm) (pcs)
M517207 M6 45 8 6.8 100
M517208 M6 60 8 6.8 100
M517209 M8 60 10 6.8 100
M517210 M8 80 10 6.8 100
M517211 M10 70 12 6.8 50
M517212 M10 100 12 6.8 25
Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials.
HEX NUT ANCHOR

• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter Grade Packing/Box

number (mm) (pcs)
M517213 M6 45 8 6.8 100
M517214 M8 60 10 6.8 100
M517215 M8 80 10 6.8 50
M517216 M10 70 12 6.8 50
M517217 M10 100 12 6.8 25
Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

THROUGH BOLT ANCHOR
• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length Drill diameter Grade Packing/Box

M517360 M8 60 8 6.8 100
M517361 M8 80 8 6.8 70
M517362 M10 100 10 6.8 50
M517228 M10 120 10 6.8 45
M517363 M10 160 10 6.8 25
M517364 M12 100 12 6.8 35
M517365 M12 120 12 6.8 30
M517232 M12 140 12 6.8 50
Application: Non-cracked concrete and hard materials. Attaching structural steel,

facade, hand rails, racks, elevators, etc.
EYE ANCHOR BOLT

• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length (mm) Drill diameter Grade Packing/Box (pcs)

number (mm)
M517218 M6 45 8 6.8 100
M517219 M8 60 10 6.8 50
M517220 M10 70 12 6.8 25
Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials
HOOK ANCHOR BOLT

• Covering: Zn
Catalogue Thread Length Drill diameter Grade Packing/Box

M517221 M6 45 8 6.8 100
M517222 M8 60 10 6.8 50
M517223 M10 70 12 6.8 25
Application: For fixing in concrete and solid materials
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FISCHER ULTRA CUT FBS II US

APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS
• Pipeline routes • Concrete C20/25 to C50/60, cracked and non
• Suspension for individual pipes cracked
• Suspended mounting rails • Prestressed hollow concrete ceilings C30/37 to
• Prestressed concrete hollow core ceilings C50/60 for the multiple use of non-load bear-
• Cable trays ing systems
• Ventilation ducts • ETA- approval
• Perforated tapes
Catalogue Model Drill hole Min. drill hole depth Screw Packing/
number diameter for through fixings h2 length Box (pcs)
d0 (mm) (mm) (mm)
MF500460 FBS II 6 x 40/5 US 6 50 40 100
MF500461 FBS II 6 x 60/5 US 6 70 60 100
MF500462 FBS II 8 x 80 30/15 US TX 8 90 10x80 50
FISCHER ULTRA CUT WITH INTERNAL THREAD

• Pipeline routes • Concrete C20/25 to C50/60, cracked and non-
• Suspension for individual pipes cracked
• Suspended mounting rails • Prestressed hollow concrete ceilings C30/37
• Prestressed concrete hollow core ceilings to C50/60 for the multiple use of non-load
• Ventilation ducts bearing systems
• ETA- approval
Catalogue Model Drill hole Min. drill hole depth Screw Packing/
number diameter for through fixings h2 length Box (pcs)
d0 (mm) (mm) (mm)
MF500463 FBS II 6 x 35 M8/M10 I 6 45 35 100
MF500464 FBS II 6 x 55 M8/M10 I 6 65 55 100
UNIVERSAL NYLON WALL PLUGS

• Material: Nylon PA6
• Halogen free
Catalogue number Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)

M517065 6 30 200
M517298 6 50 100
M517066 8 40 200
M517067 8 60 100
M517064 10 50 100
M517062 10 70 50
Application: Suitable for general light duty fittings.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FISCHER EXPANSION PLUG WITH RIM
• Lighting, Motion detectors • Concrete
• Skirting • Vertically perforated brick
• Letter boxes • Hollow blocks made from lightweight con-
• Trellis crete
• Cavity floor slabs made from bricks and
concrete
• Perforated sand-lime brick
• Solid sand-lime brick
• Natural stone with dense structure
• Aerated concrete
• Solid panel made from gypsum
• Solid brick made from lightweight concrete
Catalogue Model Anchor length Drill hole Min. drill Wood and Packing/
number (mm) diameter d0 hole depth chipboard Box (pcs)
(mm) h1 (mm) screws ds
(mm)
MF500467 SX 6 x 30 30 6 40 4-5 100
MF500468 SX 6 x 50 50 6 50 4-5 100
MF500469 SX 8 x 40 40 8 50 5x60 50
MF500470 SX 8 x 65 65 8 75 4.5-6 50
MF500471 SX 10 x 50 50 10 70 6-8 50
MF500472 SX 10 x 80 80 10 95 6-8 25
MF500473 SX 12 x 60 60 12 80 8-10 25
MF500474 SX 14 x 70 70 14 90 10-12 25
FISCHER FRAME FIXING

• Facade, ceiling and roof substructures made • Vertically perforated brick
of wood and metal • Aerated concrete
• TV consoles • Hollow blocks made from lightweight con-
• Kitchen hanging cabinets crete
• Wardrobes • Perforated sand-lime brick
• Squared timbers • Thermal insulation blocks
• Windows • Solid block made from lightweight and normal
• Gates and doors weight concrete
• Beams • Solid brick
• Concrete ≥C12/15
• Natural stone with dense structure
Catalogue Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill Screws Min. Packing/
number length diameter d0 hole depth diameter screw Box (pcs)
(mm) (mm) for through ds (mm) length
fixing h2 ls (mm)
(mm)
MF500475 SXRL 8 x 60 60 8 70 5.5-6 65 100
MF500476 SXRL 8 x 80 80 8 90 5.5-6 85 100
MF500477 SXRL 8 x 100 100 8 110 5.5-6 105 100
MF500478 SXRL 8 x 120 120 8 130 5.5-6 125 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FISCHER DUOPOWER
• Skirting • Concert
• Cable ducts • Solid brick and solid sand-lime brick
• Pictures and Decorations • Aerated concrete
• Soap dishes, Toilet paper holder • Vertically perforated brick
• Shower curtain rails • Perforated sand-lime brick
• Letter boxes • Plasterboard
• Lighting, Motion detectors • Gypsum plasterboard and gypsum fibre-
• Signs, House numbers boards
• Hollow blocks made from lightweight con-
crete
• Cavity floor slabs made from bricks and con-
crete or similar
• Natural stone
• Chipboard
• Solid brick made from lightweight concrete
Catalogue Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill Wood and Packing/Box
number length diameter hole depth chipboard (pcs)
l (mm) d0 (mm) h1 (mm) screws ds
(mm)
MF500479 DUOPOWER 5 x 25 25 5 35 3-4 100
MF500480 DUOPOWER 6 x 30 30 6 40 4-5 100
MF500481 DUOPOWER 6 x 50 50 6 60 4-5 100
MF500482 DUOPOWER 8 x 40 40 8 50 4.5-6 100
MF500483 DUOPOWER 8 x 65 65 8 75 4.5-6 50
MF500484 DUOPOWER 10 x 50 50 10 60 6-8 50
MF500485 DUOPOWER 10 x 80 80 10 90 6-8 25
MF500486 DUOPOWER 12 x 60 60 12 70 8-10 25
MF500487 DUOPOWER 14 x 70 70 14 80 10-12 20
FISCHER DUOTEC
• Kitchen hanging cabinets • Gypsum plasterboard
• Living room cabinets • Gypsum fibreboard
• Shelves • Wooden panels, such as OSB boards, chip-
• Wardrobes board, MDF sheets
• Handrails • Steel plates
• Pictures • Plastic boards
• Mirrors • Hollow blocks made from concrete
• Lamps
• Heavy hanging baskets
Catalogue Model Anchor Drill hole Min. drill Wood and Packing/Box
number length diameter hole depth chipboard (pcs)
l (mm) d0 (mm) h1 (mm) screws ds
(mm)
MF500488 DUOTEC 10 50 10 12-55 4.5-5 50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FISCHER METAL CAVITY FIXING HM WITH METRIC SCREW
• Pictures • Gypsum plasterboard and gypsum fibreboards
• Lighting • Cavity floor slabs
• Light shelves • Light building boards made of wood wool
• Towel rails • Chipboard
• Mirror cabinets • Plywood boards
• Curtain rails
• Sub-structures
Catalogue Model Anchor Drill hole Panel thick- Min. drill Packing/Box
number length diameter ness hole depth (pcs)
l (mm) d0 (mm) dp (mm) h1 (mm)
MF500457 HM 4x32 S 32 8 3-13 40 50
MF500458 HM 6x52 S 52 12 7-21 58 50
FISCHER PLASTERBOARD METAL PLUGS GKM

• Pictures • Gypsum fibreboard
• Lighting • Gypsum plasterboard
• Electrical installations
• Fitting accessories
Catalogue Model Anchor Min. thickness to Screw ds x ls Packing/Box
number length first supporting (mm) (pcs)
l (mm) layer t (mm)
MF500443 GKM 31 35 4-5 100
FISCHER INSULATION FIXING

• Fasade construction (ETICS) • Non-plastered, pressure-resistant insulating
• Insulating construction boards
• Electric construction • Plastered, pressure-resistant insulating boards
• Refrigerated and climate construction
Catalogue Model Anchor Min. bolt Max. bolt Wood and chip- Packing/
number length penetration penetration board screws ds Box (pcs)
l (mm) (mm) screw (mm) (mm)
MF500455 FID 50 50 50 40 4-5 50
MF500456 FID 90 90 90 80 6 25
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
WALL PLUG FOR PLASTERBOARD

• Material: polyethylene
Catalogue Type Color Bore diam- a b Packing
number eter (mm) (mm) (pcs)
(mm)
500443 Wall plug for plasterboard Grey 6-7 30 19 25
PLASTERBOARD PLUGS
• Material: polyethylene
Catalogue number Drill diameter (mm) Wall thickness (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
M517273 10 10 4.3x40 25
M517274 10 17 4.3x50 25
FRAME FIXINGS PLUGS WITH SCREWS

• Material: PLUG-Nylon PA6; SCREW- Zink-plated steel
• Halogen free
Catalogue number Plug diameter (mm) Length(mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
M317340 8 80 100
M317341 8 100 100
M317342 8 120 50
M317343 10 80 50
M317344 10 100 50
M317345 10 120 50
M317346 10 140 50
Application: Suitable for heavy ribbing ensures a tight hold in aerated blocks
NYLON HAMMER FIX

• Halogen free
Catalogue number Plug diameter (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
M517180 6 40 200
M517281 6 50 200
M517282 6 60 200
M517283 6 80 200
M517074 8 60 100
M517284 8 80 100
M517285 8 100 100
M517286 8 120 100
Application: Suitable for fixing skirting, stud battens to wall and long runs of shelf
support
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FISCHER ANGLE SCREW SET
• SET: 2 pcs
Catalogue number Model Plug size (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
MF500465 WDL 14L/95 14 8.8/95 2/50
MF500466 WDL 14L/120 14 8.8/120 2/50
FISCHER ANGLE SCREW SET

• SET: 2 pcs
Catalogue number Plug size (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
M517156 12x60 10x75 1
Application: Suitable for heavy ribbing ensures a tight hold in aerated blocks
HOOK SCREW WITH PLUG

Catalogue number Plug size (mm) Screw size (mm) Packing/Box (pcs)
M517289 6x30 4x35 100
M517318 8x40 5x42 100
FISCHER SPRING TOGGLE

• Pictures • Gypsum plasterboard and gypsum fibre-
• Lighting boards
• Cavity floor slabs made from bricks and
concrete
• Chipboard
• Plywood
Catalogue Model Anchor Drill hole Panel Thread Packing/Box
number length diameter thickness Ø x length (pcs)
l (mm) d0 (mm) dp (mm) (mm)
MF500459 KDH 4 95 14 35 M4x70 25
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREADED HANGING ROD

• Covering: Zn
Catalogue number Thread Length (mm) Grade Packing/Box (pcs)
M517079 M6 1000 4.8 100
M517080 M8 1000 4.8 50
M517078 M10 1000 4.8 40
PERFORATED STEEL STRAP WITH PE PLASTIC JACKETING

APPLICATIONS
For securing, supporting and strapping of cable, trunking and ducting.
Use for joist strutting, window frame and sill fixing, fencing repairs and construction, hanging
ductwork.
Catalogue Model Width Thickness Hole diameter Length Packing/
number (mm) (mm) (mm) (m) Box (pcs)
M318155 5055 L PE I 14 13 3 5.2 10 1
PERFORATED STEEL STRAP IN UNCOLING BOX

APPLICATIONS
For securing, supporting and strapping of cable, trunking and ducting.
Use for joist strutting, window frame and sill fixing, fencing repairs and construction, hanging
ductwork.
Catalogue Model Width Thickness Hole diameter Length Packing/
number (mm) (mm) (mm) (m) Box (pcs)
M318154 5055 LI12 FS 12 1 5.2 10 1
HARDENED STEEL NAILS, SIKO

Catalogue Model Length Diameter Packing/Box
M499108 Siko 16 16 2 100/2000
M499489 Siko 30 30 2 100/1000
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TOOLS | CABLE FIXINGS ACCESSORIES

CABLE TIE HOLDER
Catalogue Type Colour Bore Dimensions Packing
number diameter (mm) (pcs)
(mm) a b D W1 W2 L
500046 МТ-8 White 8 9.7 6.3 9.9 12.7 12.6 43 100
500047 МТ-8 Black 8 9.7 6.3 9.9 12.7 12.6 43 100
CABLE TIE MOUNTS ADHESIVE

Catalogue Type Colour Dimensions Packing
number (mm) (pcs.)
L W H T
500041 МТ-25 White 25 25 7.5 6.2 100
500042 МТ-25 Black 25 25 7.5 6.2 100
500043 МТ-30 White 30 30 8.7 6.4 100
500039 МТ-30 Black 30 30 8.7 6.4 100
CABLE TIE BASES FIXED WITH SCREWS

Catalogue Type Colour Dimensions Packing
number (mm) (pcs)
a b L d D
500048 CTH-2C White 22 16.5 9 5.8 9.5 100

500038 CTH-2C Black 22 16.5 9 5.8 9.5 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CABLE TIES - WHITE

Catalogue number Type Length Colour Width (mm) Packing Packing / Box
(mm) (pcs) (pcs)
500100 Cable ties 100 White 2.5 100 10/800
500152 Cable ties 150 White 2.5 100 10/500
500162 Cable ties 160 White 2.5 100 10/500
500202 Cable ties 200 White 2.5 100 10/400
500253 Cable ties 250 White 3.5 100 10/250
500283 Cable ties 280 White 3.5 100 10/200
500303 Cable ties 300 White 3.5 100 10/200
500304 Cable ties 300 White 4.8 100 10/120
500373 Cable ties 370 White 3.5 100 10/120
500384 Cable ties 380 White 4.8 100 10/100
500454 Cable ties 450 White 4.8 100 10/70
500507 Cable ties 500 White 7.9 100 5/40
CABLE TIES - BLACK

Catalogue number Type Length Colour Width Packing Packing / Box
(mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs)
500151 Cable ties 150 Black 2.5 100 10/500
500161 Cable ties 160 Black 2.5 100 10/500
500251 Cable ties 250 Black 3.5 100 10/250
500281 Cable ties 280 Black 3.5 100 10/200
500301 Cable ties 300 Black 3.5 100 10/200
500501 Cable ties 500 Black 7.9 100 40
CABLE HOLDER WITH TIE

Catalogue Type Colour Dissensions (mm) Packing
number a b c d (pcs)
500444 Cable holder with tie Black 27 14 140 0,5 20
WALL PLUG WITH CABLE TIE

Catalogue Type Colour Bore Tie Length Packing
number diameter (mm) (mm) (pcs)
500427 Wall plug with cable tie Black 6 95 50
500425 Wall plug with cable tie Black 8 95 50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

WIRE GRIP BAND FOR FLAT CABLE
Catalogue Type Colour Bore diame- Width of the Packing
number ter (mm) head (pcs)
500432 Wire grip band for flat cable 1 White 6-7 18 50
Wire grip band 1 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x1.0; 2x1.5mm²
Wire grip band 2 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x2.5; 3x1.0
Wire grip band 3 is Suitable for flat cables with section- 2x4; 2x6; 3x1.5; 3x2.5mm²
WIRE GRIP BAND FOR ROUND CABLE

Catalogue Type Colour Bore Width of Packing
number diameter the head (pcs)
(mm)
500438 Wire grip band for round cable 4 White 6-7 6 50
Wire grip band 4 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x1.0; 2x1.5; 3x1.0;
3x2.5mm²; RG6
Wire grip band 5 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x0.5; 2x0.75; UTP;
FTP
Wire grip band 6 is Suitable for round cables with section- 2x2.5; 3x1.5; 4x1
Wire grip band 7 is Suitable for round cables with section- 3x6; 4x4; 5x2.5
Wire grip band 8 is Suitable for round cables with diameter D20mm
CABLE FIXING CLIPS

Support insulators are used in control and TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
distribution cabinets mounting when bars
isolation is required.
• Insulating voltage: 5000 V
Provides reliable insulation of live parts.
• Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C
Catalogue number Type Diameter Packing (pcs) Packing/ Box

(mm) (pcs)
500004 CHR-4 4 100 500
500005 CHR-5 5 100 500
500006 CHR-6 6 100 300
500007 CHR-7 7 100 300
500008 CHR-8 8 100 250
500009 CHR-9 9 100 200
500010 CHR-10 10 100 200
500012 CHR-12 12 100 100
500014 CHR-14 14 100 50
500016 CHR-16 16 100 50
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FISCHER FIS AB 300 T

MF500489
• Model: FIS AB 300 T
• Processing time: approx. 5 min at 20 °C
TOOLS | FIXINGS
• Curing time: approx. 60 min at 20 ° C

APPLICATIONS
• High-performance hybrid mortar for high squeezed out can be reused by changing the
loads in almost all building materials. static mixer.
• Fixing pressure-free fastening enables small • When fixing in solid building materials, the
edge and axis distances drill hole must be cleaned thoroughly.
• Injection cartridges can be processed without • The use of a hollow drill makes conventional
special extrusion devices incl. 2 static mixers. drilling cleaning unnecessary.
• Injection cartridges that are not fully
FISCHER INJECTION ANCHOR SLEEVE PLASTIC

BUILDING MATERIALS
• Vertically perforated brick • Slabs made of hollow brick and other perfo-
• Hollow blocks made from lightweight con- rated brick
crete • Solid pumice and other solid building mate-
• Hollow blocks made from concrete rials
• Perforated sand-lime brick • ETA-approval
• Solid brick
• Hollow pumice slabs
Catalogue Model Drill hole Min. drill Effect. anchorage Fill quantity Packing/
number diameter hole depth depth hef (mm) per sleeve Box (pcs)
d0 (mm) h1 (mm) (scale unit)
MF500490 FIS H 12X50 K 12 60 50 5 50
MF500491 FIS H 12X85 K 12 95 85 10 50
MF500492 FIS H 16X130 K 16 140 110 15 20
MF500493 FIS H 20X85 K 20 95 85 15 20
Applications: Anchorings in perforated brick masonry with injection mortars.
FISCHER INTUMESCENT ACOUSTIC MASTIC FIAM 310 ML

MF500494
FISCHER FiAM is a one part water based acrylic emulsion that can provide up to 5 hours fire
resistance when used in construction joints and services in both vertical and horizontal applica-
tions. When exposed to fire, it reacts to form a highly insulative char that slows down heat transfer,
and provides a barrier to fire seal. Formulated to be halogen and solvent free the FiAM exhibits
excellent slump characteristics and has been designed to maintain the sound reduction index of a
structure.
TOP FEATURES APPLICATIONS BUILDING MATERIALS
• Up to 5 hours fire resistance • Metallic pipes: 6” (159 mm) • Flexible wall constructions
• Movement capability ± 25 % • Cable trays: 18” x 2” (450 x • Rigid floor and wall construc-
• Halogen and solvent free 50 mm) tions
• Low VOC • Cable bunches: 3” (80 mm) • Masonry
• Water based • Linear joints: flexible and • Concrete
rigid construction elements • Timber
• Joints between FCPS coated • Steel
panel system • FCPS System
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
FISCHER INTUMESCENT GRAPHITE MASTIC FIGM 310 ML

MF500495
FISCHER Intumescent Graphite Mastic FiGM is a one part water based flexible acrylic emulsion
containing a high pressure intumescent graphite which is used to seal service penetrations in
both vertical and horizontal applications. Tested to both BS 476 & BS EN1366-3 /4 the FISCHER
TOOLS | FIXINGS
FiGM is also ETA approved and CE Marked for a wide range of applications such as, non metallic
pipes, metallic and insulated pipes, MLC pipes, cables and cable bunches and can also used in
combination with the fischer FCPS Coated Panel System.
APPLICATIONS TOP FEATURES BUILDING MATERIALS
• Metallic pipes: 6” (159 mm) • Low VOC • Concrete
• Non-metallic pipes: 5” (125 mm) • Halogen and solvent free • Masonry
• Cable bunches: 1” (21 mm) • Excellent slump character- • Steel
• Insulated service: 6“ (159 mm) istics • Timber
• Construction joints: 1“ (25 mm) • Excellent acoustic properties
• Mixed services
PENOSIL GENERAL SILICONE, GOLD SERIES

M033128
• Type: General silicone, 310ml
• Colour: Transparent
APPLICATIONS TOP FEATURES
• Indoor and outdoor applications. • Good adhesive properties.
• Sanitary applications. • Excellent processing and smoothing proper-
• Installation and sealing of windows and doors. ties.
• Sealing of ventilation systems. • Suitable for slightly alkaline, acidic and metal
• Not suitable for aquariums. surfaces.
• Does not cause colour changes on marble or
other natural stone surfaces.
• Does not cause corrosion on metal.
• After curing very good temperature resistance
(between -60 °C and +200 °C).
• Does not lose volume during the curing
process.
• Permanent elasticity.
• Mould, UV, moisture and weather resistant
• Cartridge: 310ml
PENOSIL UNIVERSAL SILICONE, STANDARD SERIES

M033129 M033130
• Type: Universal • Type: Universal
silicone, 280ml silicone, 280ml
• Colour: Transparent • Colour: White

• Insulation and sealing of connections in • Insulates and seals.
indoor and outdoor works. • Non-sagging, does not spread in the joint.
• General construction and repair works. • Excellent processing and smoothing proper-
• Moist and dry rooms. ties.
• All finishing, insulation, glassing works. • Touch-dries quickly.
• Insulation of window and door frames and • Adheres well to wood, glass, ceramic tiles,
light box displays. many plastics, and most paints.
• Elastic.
• UV and weather proof.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PENOSIL SANITARY SILICONE, STANDARD SERIES

M033131 M033132
• Type: Sanitary silicone, 280ml • Type: Sanitary silicone, 280ml
• Colour: Transparent • Colour: White
TOOLS | FIXINGS

• Insulation and sealing of connections during • Excellent processing and smoothing proper-
indoor works. ties.
• Insulation and sealing of washbasin, bath, • Contains fungicides.
shower, swimming pool connections. • Mould, UV, moisture and weather resistant.
• Insulation of water supply, drainage and PVC- • Touch-dries quickly.
pipes. • Non-sagging, does not spread in the joint.
• Glazing works. • Adheres well to glass, glazed surfaces, ceramic
tiles, many plastics, metals, and most paints.
• Elastic.
• Long storage time.
PENOSIL BITUM SEALANT, PREMIUM SERIES

M033133
• Type: Bitum sealant, 310ml
• Colour: Black
• Insulation of roof and chimney joints. • Touch-dries quickly.
• Insulation of joints between bituminous • Immediately rain and ice resistant.
plates or rolls. • Suitable on bituminous materials, alkali and
• Repairing small leakages and open cracks on metals.
flat roofs. • Usable on damp surfaces.
• Patching up joint leakages between metal • Melting temperature over 100 °C.
sheets • Will not become brittle in cold.
• Can also be used in vertical joints.
• Dissolved acid, alkali, emission and weather
resistant.
• High tensile strength
PENOSIL ACRYLIC SEALANT, STANDARD SERIES

M033134
• Type: Acrylic sealant, 280ml
• Colour: White
• Filling of wall cracks and joints. • Comfortable use.
• Filling the joints between window frames and • Low odour level.
walls. • Forms a plastic connection.
• Filling of joints between plasterboards and • Non-sagging, does not spread in the joint.
filling of screw holes. • Paintable.
• Correction of surface defects before painting. • Good adherence on most building materials.
• Moisture resistant 5 hours after application.
• High UV-level.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PENOSIL FOAM, STANDARD SERIES

M033135 M033136 M033137
• Type: Foam, 750ml • Type: Foam, 300ml • Type: Gun foam, 750ml
TOOLS | FIXINGS
• Filling of holes and gaps, insulation of joints • Good filling properties.
• Installation and insulation of construction • Good foam for interior and exterior works
structures under normal conditions.
• Insulation and fixation of pipes • Good adherence on various building
• Thermo and sound insulation materials.
• Usable with the delivered straw applicator.
• Easy to use.
• The new and narrower straw ensures better
foam structure and higher output.
• The new trigger is suitable for temporary
air-tight sealing of the straw during work
pauses.
PENOSIL FOAM CLEANER, PREMIUM SERIES

M033138
• Type: Foam cleaner, 500ml
TOP FEATURES APPLICATIONS

• Efficiently cleans uncured construction foam • Cleaning of foam gun after use both inside
from foam gun, clothes, adjacent surfaces. and outside.
• Suitable for immediate cleaning of a foam • Cleaning of clothes and tools from uncured
gun from inside after use. construction foam.
• Cleaning of window frames, window sills,
doors, jambs, etc. From uncured construction
foam during work.
PENOSIL FOAM GUN 306

M033139
• Type: Foam gun 306 economical
APPLICATIONS
• The budget version of the gun known brand
PENOSIL for use with professional foam.
ELMARK
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
AND GENERATORS
• Solar panels
• Mounting structures elements & Sets
• Solar batteries and accessories
• Solar inverters
• Solar power system sets
• Charging stations
• Generators
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
USE OF
SOLAR ENERGY
Choice with perspective
The sun is the largest renewable energy resource that has the potential to nourish life on earth and
provide clean and sustainable energy. The fact is that more energy from the sun reaches our planet in
an hour than is used by the entire population of the world in a year. This energy is the most reliable and
alternative source of exhaustible land resources, with the difference that it is completely free.
The constant improvement of technology and the reduction in the prices of products using solar
energy worldwide make the idea of self-producing energy and its use for home more and more
attractive and, in recent years, more profitable. The reasons for a person to think and take such a step
are becoming more numerous and convincing.
Add value to your home

Building a solar energy system will inevitably add value to your home. In case one day you
decide to sell, this would be a solid argument for any buyer to choose your property over one
without a solar system.
Select language
373 on page 470:
BG BA CR DE EL HU IT RO Sl SK SR
REDUCE DRASTICALLY YOUR
ELECTRICITY BILLS
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Whether you own a small home or a business, the electricity
bill is a significant monthly expense. The use of sunlight to
produce energy can partially reduce this cost or even turn
it off completely. Considering the long life of modern solar
equipment, which is an average of 25 years, the prospect of
building a solar system to power our milliseconds has taken
us into account in the electricity bills and in its long-term
purity. Given volatile and constantly rising electricity prices,
this gives you the certainty and predictability of spending for
years to come.
USE 100% CLEAN ENERGY

Solar energy is a 100% clean and renewable energy source. It reduces the need for and dependence on
exhaustible sources such as oil, natural gas and solid fuels for the production of electricity. The use of
fossil fuels emits harmful emissions that affect air, water and soil quality and are responsible for global
warming. On the other hand, the sun is an unlimited source of energy, the use of which in no way affects
the environment. Residential solar energy systems represent an investment in the future of the planet,
preserving non-renewable energy sources and protecting the environment.
Select language
on page 470: 374
TYPES OF SOLAR SYSTEMS
WHICH SYSTEM MEETS MY
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
NEEDS
Solar systems can be divided into three main groups:
AUTONOMOUS GRID CONNECTED SOLAR HYBRID SOLAR SYSTEM

PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM SYSTEM for places with and without
power supply with the possibility
(OFF-GRID) (ON-GRID)
of storing electricity
for locations without a built-in for locations with a built-in power
supply
power supply
AUTONOMOUS SOLAR SYSTEM

(OFF-GRID) from 300 to 10 000W
These systems are an ideal solution for independent power supply with power from 300W to 10kW
for places where it is inaccessible or unreliable. They can be used to power various consumers in
the home, cottage, camper or caravan, without the need for an existing electrical grid.
Select language
375 on page 470:
Typically, these systems are made up of four main elements::
» Solar panels
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

» Deep discharge battery
» Inverter
» Mounting structure
The principle of operation of the autonomous solar system is as follows: During daylight hours, solar
panels produce electricity stored in the battery(s) connected to the system. In order for this energy to be
used in bits, the inverter converts the constant voltage from the battery into variable before submitting
it to consumers. This results in a completely self-contained appliance power system without the need for
power grid.
There are some differences between the autonomous solar systems offered by ELMARK. For example,
sets up to 2kW are extremely mobile and convenient to transport and connect even for people without
technical knowledge. The inverter and battery are built into the unit housing, and separately only the
solar panel we offer in a convenient transport bag. The appliance can be charged in 3 different ways:
from the electricity grid, from the lighter of the car and from the solar energy, making it a multifunctional
energy station.
All capacities above 2000W are available as sets of inverter, the required number of solar panels
and battery. In these systems, the solar panels are stationary, using mounting elements.
Select language
on page 470: 376
GRID-TIED SOLAR SYSTEM
(ON-GRID) from 3600 to 110 000W
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
This is the most common type of solar power generation system offered by ELMARK with capacity from
3.6 to 110kW.
For the operation of the system it is necessary to have a power supply on site.
Typically, these systems are made up of three main elements:

» Solar panels
» ON-GRID inverter
The principle of the work of the network photovoltaic system is as follows: When grid voltage is available,
during daylight hours, the solar panels produce electricity that is converted by the grid inverter and fed
into the grid. This system does not use a battery to store the electricity produced.
These systems are preferred for the construction of solar plants for the purpose of selling electricity
or building a network system to directly power consumers during the day, in places where there
is electricity and the main consumption is daily. Their principle of operation makes them extremely
suitable for partial reduction or complete disconnection of power substations. Given the size of the
solar system built and the total electricity consumption during daylight hours, the following two
scenarios are possible:
Select language
377 on page 470:
1 The system to produce less energy than used
When a photovoltaic system is installed with a certain capacity and
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

consumption exceeding the capacity of the system, the difference
is taken from the grid. This leads to a reduction in the monthly bill,
depending on the difference between energy produced and consumed.
For example, if we have a photovoltaic system built with a power of 5 kW
and an average consumption of 8 kW, then the bill will be reduced by about
50%. And so: the consumption of 8 kW is distributed from around 5 kW of
instantaneous production from the grid system and 3 kW from the power
grid.
2 The system to produce more energy than consumed
In a photovoltaic system with a certain power and average consumption

lower than the produced one. In this case, if the consumer has a power
purchase agreement with the local electricity distribution company,
they can feed the energy back into the grid at a set tariff. If there is
no contract in place, the excess energy remains unused and must be
prevented from being fed back into the grid because it will be billed
as used. This is achieved through a Smart Meter offered by ELMARK,
connected upstream of the meter installed by the distribution company.
The conclusion of a contract with the local electricity distribution

company to buy excess electricity produced during the day is key to
systems built in private homes, where family members are absent
during daylight hours and the consumption of electricity during the day
is significantly lower than the one produced. The energy produced and
sold compensates financially for consumption in the dark part of the day,
when energy is used entirely from the transmission network. In addition
to home, signing a contract for the purchase of energy is also important
for business, which will inevitably improve monthly electricity bills.
Select language
on page 470: 378
HYBRID SOLAR SYSTEM
from 3500W to 100000W
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
This is a combined variant of the first two systems, gaining increasing popularity and harnessing
the energy produced in the most rational way offered by ELMARK with capacity from 3.6 to
10kW.
Typically, these systems are made up of four main elements::
» Solar panels
» Hybrid inverter
» Deep discharge battery
The principle of operation of the system is determined entirely by the inverter, which can work in one
of your chosen three modes:
As an autonomous solar inverter

This automatically converts the system into an autonomous system. Depending on
the inverter used, the energy produced can be stored in a rechargeable battery or
used directly to power various consumers. The priority in this mode is the energy
produced by the solar panels. The inverters are provided with an input and a power
supply from the power transmission network and in the event of a deficiency of
power from the photovoltaic panels and the battery, take the necessary amount of
electricity from the grid
As a grid connected solar inverter

They pass the electricity produced directly to consumers and do not use a battery.
They only work when electricity grid voltage is available.
Select language
379 on page 470:
Combined mode
They use the energy produced by the solar panels, the battery and the electricity
grid. Here, the priority remains to use the energy produced by the modules, then
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

by the accumulators and only then by the grid in case of the insufficiency of the
first two.
This is themostrational option for using the energy produced, because first
the consumers are energized, if there is an excess of energy the batteries are
energized and once they are charged, the excess can be returned for sale to the
energy company
WHAT IS THE NORMAL

SERVICE LIFE
The life and normal operation of modern solar panels has been proven to be
between 25-30 years. So you can be sure that they will continue to produce
energy for a period of several decades. The decline in their production in 20
years will be less 20%, given that the decrease in the productivity of one panel
up to 30 years in one year does not exceed 1%.
operational
100%
97% DECLINE IN PRODUCTION
90%
81.4%
80%
12 years 0%
warranty YEARS 1 5 10 15 20 25
The other main component in the system is the inverter, which converts the
constant current voltage into variable voltage. The SOLIS inverters offered
by ELMARK are proven on the market for their reliability and we offer them
with a warranty of 5 years with the possibility of its extension up to 12 years.
This ensures the certainty and reliability of the initial investment made in the
up to 5 years return on long term. Given that the system is paid for a period of about 5 years from
investment its installation, for the remaining period the saved resource is at times more
than the possible costs that would arise.
Select language
on page 470: 380
HOW LONG IT
PAYS OFF
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
This is perhaps the most important issue that excites every single person. Naturally, this cannot be
determined precisely, given factors such as - system power, consumption of different appliances, will
unused energy be sold, the price of kW/h offered by each electricity distribution company, future
changes in their prices, etc. As you can see, there are many factors, but the undeniable fact is that
the construction of a photovoltaic system largely gives you greater certainty and predictability of
electricity bills.
FOR RESIDENTIAL SUBSCRIBERS

Assuming that the system we want to build will be grid connected (ON-GRID), it will have a power
of 5kW.We do not want to sell the surplus energy. We estimate that the consumption/production of
energy in the daylight is about 4,25kW, the average duration of solar heating from 5h to the average
daily annual base, the price for kW/h of 0,25 BGN and the investment of about 11,500.00 BGN, including
solar system, assembly structure, additional costs for electrical materials installation - the payout period
will be about 6 years.
SAVED AMOUNT FOR YEAR (Y)

SAVED AMOUNT PER DAY (S) Y = S x 365
S=аxPxT S = 4,78 BGN

Р = 4,25 kW of power produced and consumed,
including 15 % losses on the system at an average Y = 4,78 х 365 = 1744,70 BGN
annual basis (amount saved per year)
T = 4,5 h duration of sunshine
PAYOUT PERIOD (Q)

S = 0,25 х 4,25 х 4,5 = 4,78 BGN Q=I/Y
that is, the daily amount saved S
I = 11 500 BGN investment
will amount to BGN 4.78
Y = 1744,70 BGN amount saved per year
Q = 11500 / 1744,70 = 5,96 years

system will be paid for about
72 months (5 years and 11 months)
Select language
381 on page 470:
ELMARK offers the preparation of an individual project, including all the necessary elements for the construction
of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website www.elmarkholding.eu , you can fill in a form for
preparing an individual project by filling in and sending the parameters specified therein. We will prepare you a
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

project and an offer. Each project provides a detailed financial analysis of the cash flow for a period of 21 years,
showing in detail the period of payment of the system, according to specified individual parameters. The project
shown below tracks the financial flow of a 5kW single-phase solar system.
PROJECT OF A 5KW SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM

» Climatic data - Dobrich, BGR
» Solar system power - 5.33 kWp
» Total area of the solar array - 25 m2
» Number of photovoltaic modules - 13
» Photovoltaic module power - 410W
» Number of inverters - 1
Cash flow
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Investments -10 400,00 BGN -8 858,03 BGN -7 203,72 BGN -5 499,10 BGN -3 742,62 BGN
Tariff 1 541,97 BGN 1 654,31 BGN 1 704,63 BGN 1 756,47 BGN 1850,30 BGN
Annual cash flow -8 858,03 BGN 1 654,31 BGN 1 704,63 BGN 1 756,47 BGN 1850,30 BGN
Accumulated cash
flow (cash balance) -8 858,03 BGN -7 203,72 BGN -5 499,10 BGN -3 742,62 BGN -1851.67 BGN
Cash flow
Investments -1851.67 BGN 13,28 BGN 1934,95 BGN 3915,08 BGN 5955,43 BGN
Tariff 1 864,95 BGN 1 921,67 BGN 1 980,12 BGN 2 040,35 BGN 2 102,41 BGN
Annual cash flow 1 864,95 BGN 1 921,67 BGN 1 980,12 BGN 2 040,35 BGN 2 102,41 BGN
Accumulated cash
flow (cash balance) 13,28 BGN 1934,95 BGN 3915,08 BGN 5955,43 BGN 8057,83 BGN
Cash flow
Investments 8057,83 BGN 10224,19 BGN 12456.44 BGN 14756,58 BGN 17126,68 BGN
Accumulated cash
flow (cash balance) 10224,19 BGN 12456.44 BGN 14756,58 BGN 17126,68 BGN 19568,88 BGN
382
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL (BUSINESS) SUBSCRIBERS

Assuming that the system we want to build will be grid connected (ON-GRID), it will have a power of
15kW and we do not want to sell the excess energy. We estimate that energy consumption/production in
daylight is about 10kW, with an average duration of sunshine of 5h on average per day per year, a kW/h
price of 0.42BGN and an investment of about BGN 25,000, including solar system, installation structure,
additional costs for electrical materials and installation - the payout period will be about 3.3 years.
SAVED AMOUNT FOR YEAR (Y)

SAVED AMOUNT PER DAY (S) Y = S x 365
S=аxPxT
S = 21,00 BGN
а = 0,42 BGN purchase price of electricity per
kW/h, including transmission of electricity Y = 21,00 х 365 = 7665,00 BGN
Р = 10 kW power consumption (amount saved per year)
T = 5 h duration of sunshine
PAYOUT PERIOD (Q)

S = 0,42 х 10 х 5 = 21,00 BGN Q=I/Y
that is, the daily amount saved S
will amount to BGN 21,00 I = 25 000 BGN investment
Y = 7665,00 BGN amount saved per year

.
Q = 25 000 / 7 665 = 3,3 years

System will be paid for about
39 months (3 years and 3 months).
Select language
383 on page 470:
ELMARK offers the preparation of an individual project, including all the necessary elements for the construction
of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website www.elmarkholding.eu, you can fill in a form for
preparing an individual project by filling in and sending the parameters specified therein. We will prepare you a
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

project and an offer. Each project provides a detailed financial analysis of the cash flow for a period of 21 years,
showing in detail the period of payment of the system, according to specified individual parameters. The project
shown below tracks the financial flow of a 30kW three-phase solar system.
PROJECT OF A 30KW THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM

» Climatic data - Dobrich, BGR
» Solar system power - 30.75 kWp
» Total area of the solar array - 144.2 m2
» Number of photovoltaic modules - 75
» Photovoltaic module power - 410W
» Number of inverters - 1
Cash flow
Investments -55 385,00 BGN -40 925,33 BGN -25 403,32 BGN -9 409,20 BGN 7 071,40 BGN
Annual cash flow -40 925,33 BGN 15 522,01 BGN 15 994,12 BGN 16 480,60 BGN 16 981,87 BGN
Accumulated cash
-40 925,33 BGN -25 403,32 BGN -9 409,20 BGN 7 071,40 BGN 24 053,27 BGN
flow (cash balance)
Cash flow
Investments 24 053,27 BGN 41 551,66 BGN 59 582,28 BGN 78 161,33 BGN 97 305,47 BGN
Accumulated cash
41 551,66 BGN 59 582,28 BGN 78 161,33 BGN 97 305,47 BGN 117 031,89 BGN
flow (cash balance)
Cash flow
Investments 117 031,89 BGN 137 358,32 BGN 158 302,99 BGN 179 884,72 BGN 202 122,87 BGN
Accumulated cash
137 358,32 BGN 158 302,99 BGN 179 884,72 BGN 202 122,87 BGN 225 037,42 BGN
flow (cash balance)
384
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
PREPARATION OF DESIGN AND

INSTALLATION OF SOLAR SYSTEM
Regardless of the power, function and application of each photovoltaic system, its proper design
plays a key role in its production efficiency and underpins good investment.
The need to design a project and choose the right partner for this is perhaps the most important
and difficult time for anyone involved in such an endeavor. For this reason, we have taken steps
and can provide full assistance in the construction of your solar installation. You can rely on
ELMARK for:
Advice
Whether you have a hesitation about what
type of solar system to choose, any power, you
can rely on professional advice from us. After
specifying the type and with what indicative
power you want to build your photovoltaic
system, we can cook a project.
Select language
385 on page 470:
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
Request for project preparation Making an offer
A request for the draft could be submitted After final specification of the initial project,
via a special form on the company‘s official we will prepare a personalized offer including
www.elmarkholding.eu. Each customer will receive everything you need for the construction of
an example project, including all the necessary the solar system.
elements to build the solar system, without having
to contact an employee of the company.
Transport to the installation site Mounting

After confirmation of the offer, we undertake Complete system construction and putting into
to deliver the materials ordered by you to the operation.
place of installation of the system.
Warranty and post-warranty

service
Full support including servicing and periodic
maintenance of the system.
Select language
on page 470: 386
DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN
ELEMENTS
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES (PANELS)

465W AND 560W
The photovoltaic modules offered by ELMARK are

monocrystalline, with each cell made of a single silicon
crystal. This technology is superior to polycrystalline panel
technology made up of multiple formed silicon crystals.
monocrystalline
The main advantages of monocrystalline technology are
better efficiency and appearance. The easiest
visual way to determine which of the two types a solar panel
is the hue of the solar cells. In single crystals the hue is black
and in polycrystals it is bluish.
polycrystalline
In addition to the type of silicon cells, whether the solar panel is double ( HALF CUT CELL) or
single affects the efficiency. The panels offered by ELMARK are double (HALF CUT CELL)
panels, which outperform traditional single panels in partial shading in a specific area of the
panel. Productivity is reduced only in the shaded part. The other half continues to produce
power at its full capacity, as an independent. n traditional panels, when even a small portion
of its entire area is shaded, the performance of the entire panel is reduced.
Select language
387 on page 470:
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
standard cell half-cut cell
Another significant reason for the higher productivity of the double photovoltaic module
compared to the single one is the smaller size of the cells, at the expense of their quantity. The smaller
size reduces the current values, resulting in a reduction of the „hot spot“ effect leading to overheating.
The lower temperature reduces the risk of mechanical stress and micro cracks on the panel, and the
higher cell numbers leads to higher performance.
The surface layer of the 465W and 560W solar panels offered by us are coated with only cleaning
glass, which significantly reduces the amount of dust on the panel surface, leading to a reduction in
their performance. Photovoltaic modules have excellent efficiency in low sunlight - early morning or
in cloudy weather and withstand wind loads of 2400Pa and snow loads of 5400Pa.
The solar panels offered by ELMARK are highly efficient, reaching a value of 21,66%, in contrast to
the widespread standard solar panels on the market, which barely exceed an efficiency of 20%.
Select language
on page 470: 388
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | SOLAR PANELS
SOLAR PANEL 465W
98SOL465M
TECHNICAL DATA
• Peak power (Pmax): 465W
12 FULL
WARRANTY
YEARS
• Maximum supply voltage (Vmp): 42,09V

• Maximum power current (Imp): 11,05A
• Open circuit voltage (Voc): 49,9V
25 WARRANTY
PERFORMANCE
YEARS
• Short-circuit current (Isc): 11,82A

• Module effectiveness(%): 21.39
• Maximum system voltage (V): 1500 VDC
30 PANEL
LIFETIME
YEARS
• Rated operating temperature of the module: 45±2°C

• Cell type: Mono-crystalline 21.39%
• Distribution box on the panel: IP68 EFFICACY
• Connector: Compatible with MC4
• Frame material: anodised aluminum alloy type
• Number of cells: 144 cells (6x12+6x12)
• Maximum load: 5400 Pascal
• Dimensions HxWxD: 2094x1038x35mm
• Weight (kg): 25
TEMPERATURE CHARACTERISTICS
• Nominal Module Operating Temperature (NMOT): 45°C±2°C
• Temp. Voc coefficient (TK Voc): -0,32% /°C
• Temp. Isc coefficient (TK Isc): 0,05% /°С
• Temp. Coefficient of Pmax (TK Pmax): -0,39% /°C
D • Ambient temperature: -40°C+85°C
Note: the specifications are obtained under the standard test condi-
tions (STCs): 1000 W / m² solar radiation, 1,5 air mass and 25 ° C cell
temperature.
BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES SET 15° BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES SET 15° FOR TIN ROOF
FOR FLAT ROOF OR GROUND FROM 3.6 TO 30KW FROM 3.6 TO 30KW WITH 465W SOLAR PANELS AND
WITH 465W SOLAR PANELS, SET ROOF SLOPE UP TO 15 DEGREES, SET
Solar system Catalogue number Solar system Catalogue number

(kW) with panel 465W (kW) with panel 465W
3.6 42346536B/EW 3.6 42346536DR/EW
5 4234655B/EW 5 4234655DR/EW
6 4234656B/EW 6 4234656DR/EW
8 4234658B/EW 8 4234658DR/EW
10 42346510B/EW 10 42346510DR/EW
15 42346515B/EW 15 42346515DR/EW
20 42346520B/EW 20 42346520DR/EW
30 42346530B/EW 30 42346530DR/EW
389 Select language

on page 470: BG BA CR DE EL HU IT RO Sl SK SR
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOLAR PANEL 510W
98SOL510M
TECHNICAL DATA
12 FULL
WARRANTY
YEARS
• Open circuit voltage (Voc): 45,70V
25 WARRANTY
PERFORMANCE
YEARS
30 PANEL
LIFETIME
YEARS
• Cell type: Monocrystalline 21.48%
• Frame material: Аodised aluminum alloy type
• Number of cells: 132 cells (11x6x2)
• Weight (kg): 26
D • Temp. Coefficient of Pmax (TK Pmax): -0,36% /°C
• Ambient temperature: -40°C+85°C
tions (STCs): 1000 W / m² solar radiation, 1,5 air mass and 25 °C cell
temperature.
CHARACTERISTICS AT DIFFERENT IRRADIATIONS CHARACTERISTICS AT DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES
Select language 390

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR PANEL 560W
98SOL560M
TECHNICAL DATA
12 FULL
WARRANTY
YEARS

• Open circuit voltage (Voc): 50.60V
25 WARRANTY
PERFORMANCE
YEARS

30 PANEL
LIFETIME
YEARS

• Cell type: Mono-crystalline 21.66%
• Number of cells: 144 cells (6x12+6x12)
• Weight (kg): 29
D • Temp. Coefficient of Pmax (TK Pmax): -0,39% /°C
• Ambient temperature: -40°C+85°C
tions (STCs): 1000 W / m² solar radiation, 1,5 air mass and 25 ° C cell
temperature.
BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES SET 15° BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES SET 15° FOR TIN ROOF
FOR FLAT ROOF OR GROUND FROM 3.6 TO 30KW FROM 3.6 TO 30KW WITH 560W SOLAR PANELS AND
WITH 560W SOLAR PANELS, SET ROOF SLOPE UP TO 15°, SET
Solar system Catalogue number Solar system Catalogue number

(kW) with panel 560W (kW) with panel 560W
3.6 42356036B/EW 3.6 42356036DR/EW
5 4235605B/EW 5 4235605DR/EW
6 4235606B/EW 6 4235606DR/EW
8 4235608B/EW 8 4235608DR/EW
10 42356010B/EW 10 42356010DR/EW
15 42356015B/EW 15 42356015DR/EW
20 42356020B/EW 20 42356020DR/EW
30 42356030B/EW 30 42356030DR/EW
391 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | MOUNTING STRUCTURES

MOUNTING STRUCTURES
An important point in the construction of a photovoltaic system is the way of installation of
the solar panels. Usually it is carried out on the roof of the building, but it is also possible to be
executed on the ground.
We offer ready-made solutions for flat and pitched roofs made of tiles, sheet iron, sandwich
panels, bitumen and concrete.
For each of the options we offer ready-made sets, with the elements necessary for the installation
of the amount of solar panels in the set of each system. They are all offered separately in the
case of an individual approach or up to the construction of an existing assembly structure.
Mounting structures for Mounting structures for

pitched tiled roof pitched bituminous roof
Mounting structure for pitched Triangular ballast mounting

sheet iron roof structures for flat roof or ground
Select language 392

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER MOUNTING RAIL

APPLICATION TECHNICAL DATA
Attached to the roof or the location designated Length: 2400 mm
for the installation of the PV modules, the role Material: Aluminum 6005-T5
of the rails is to hold the rows of solar panels by Universal element suitable for any type of roof or
means of brackets. The way of fixing the rails to for a ground mounting structure.
the roof is determined depending on its type-
tile, bitumen, sheet metal (tin), concrete, etc.
423199
CONNECTOR FOR RAIL

Provides a reliable connection when con- Length: 140 mm
necting two rails. The connection is carried Material: Aluminum 6005-T5
out in the middle of bolts, two rails need one Universal element suitable for any type of roof or
connector. for a ground mounting structure.
423201
MID CLAMP FOR FRAMED PANEL

They serve to connect two panels mounted For solar panels of a height: 30mm and 35mm
side by side. The clamp is placed between them Suitable for frame panels
and by using a screw tightens the frames of the Material: Aluminum 6005-T5
PV modules to the mounting rail. It takes two Universal element suitable for any type of roof or
clamps to connect two panels. for a ground mounting structure.
423202
CLAMP FOR FRAMED PANEL

They are used to connect the photovoltaic For solar panels of a height: 30mm and 35mm
module to the mounting rail at the beginning Suitable for frame panels
and end of the solar line. One end of the clamp Material: Aluminum 6005-T5
is placed in the rail and the other end on the Universal element suitable for any type of roof or
panel frame and, by means of a bolt, the two for a ground mounting structure.
elements are fastened to each other. Two
clamps for framed panel are required for the
30mm
installation of one panel.
423203
35mm
423203-2
393 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

TIN ROOF HOOK TYPES 1, 2, 13, 14
They are used to attach the mounting rail to a Material: Stainless Steel
tiled roof. Using screws, one end of the hook The elements are only suitable for the construction
is fastened to the wooden structure located un- of solar structures on tile roofs.
der the tile itself, and in the hole of the upper
part with bolts is fastened the solar power
mounting rail. Considering the individual
features in the construction of each wooden
structure and the orientation of the solar line,
we offer 4 types of hooks, depending on the
specific needs during installation.
HOOK TYPE 1 HOOK TYPE 2
423204 423205
423206 423207
Select language 394

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TIN ROOF HOOK TYPES 2 AND 3

sheet metal roof. Using screws, one end of the
hook is fastened on the roof rib and the mount- The elements are only suitable for the construc-
ing rail of the solar panel is fastened in the tion of solar structures on sheet metal roofs.
hole at the top with bolts. We offer two types
of hooks depending on the orientation of the
solar line, in relation to the ribbing on the roof.
423217 423218
L-FEET FOR TIN ROOF WITH FASTENERS

sheet metal roof. Using screws, the single end The element is only suitable for the construction
of the hook is fastened on the roof and the of solar structures on sheet metal roofs.
solar power mounting rail is fastened in the
hole of the upper part with bolts.
423216
L-FEET WITH FASTENERS

It is used to attach the mounting rail to a Material: Stainless Steel
bituminous roof. It is recommended that the in- The element is only suitable for the construction
stallation of the hook is carried out in a set with of solar structures on a bituminous roof.
a steel flashing plate to prevent water penetra-
tion. Attach the hook to the roof by screwing it
through the hole of the flashing plate.
423214
395 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FLASHING PLATE 280X280
It is used to attach the mounting rail to a Material: Stainless Steel
bituminous roof. It is recommended that the in- The element is only suitable for the construction of
stallation of the hook is carried out in a set with solar structures on a bituminous roof.
a steel flashing plate to prevent water penetra-
tion. Attach the hook to the roof by screwing it
through the hole of the flashing plate.
423215
15° TRIANGULAR MOUNT

They are used to provide the necessary inclina- Material: Aluminum 6005-T5
tion of the solar panels when mounting them
on a flat roof or to adjust the angle of inclined Catalogue Dimensions
roofs. They are mounted on the rails supporting number (mm)
the solar panels by a steel hook. They are usual- 423223 1300х1400
ly installed on concrete foundations and can be
423223-2 1600х1700
further reinforced with ballast weights.
30° TRIANGULAR MOUNT

They are used to provide the necessary Dimensions:1300х1400mm/ 1600х1700mm
inclination of the solar panels when mounting Material: Aluminum 6005-T5
them on a flat roof or to adjust the angle of
inclined roofs. They are mounted on the rails Catalogue Dimensions
supporting the solar panels by means of a steel number (mm)
hook. They are usually installed on concrete 423227 1300х1400
foundations and can be reinforced additionally
423227-2 1600х1700
with ballast weights.
Select language 396

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
L-CONNECTOR FOR RAIL

The element is suitable for the construction of Material: Stainless Steel
solar structures on straight and pitched roofs or
for solar structures built on land.
423224
ANGLE PLATE
They serve to further strengthen the triangular Material: Stainless Steel
mounts with each other by placing concrete The element is only suitable for the construction
blocks (ballasts) between two hooks. of solar structures on a flat roof or ground.
423225
397 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

GROUNDING OF THE MOUNTING STRUCTURE
The grounding of the solar mounting structure is just as important and necessary as the grounding
in your home. Grounded panels and mounting rails should provide the easiest path for lightning to
reach the ground when needed, as well as to discharge naturally occurring static electricity. This is
achieved by building a system of elements: Grounding clip, earth lug, conductor, earthing rail and
pole and other accessories, depending on the individual approach for installation or features of the
roof.
GROUNDING CLIP
It makes contact between the solar panels and Material: Stainless Steel
the mounting rails. It is usually fixed between
the PV modules and the rail by means of the Universal element suitable for any type of roof or
mid clamp for framed panels. The bolt of for a ground mounting structure.
the mid clamp passes through the hole of
the grounding clip and during tightening it
performs the role of an earthing wire, thus
preventing possible damage to the solar panels
during a storm.
423208
EARTH LUG
A basic element making a connection from Material: Aluminum
the solar array to the ground, by means of a
conductor. It is mounted at one end of the rail Universal element suitable for any type of roof or
for mounting solar panels, thus protecting the for a ground mounting structure.
entire row. A grounding conductor of
aluminum or other material is connected to
it to lead lightning or static electricity to the
earthing rail.
423209
Select language 398

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CABLE CLIPS (CLAMPS) TYPE 1, 2, 8 AND 9

They are important in the installation and Material: Stainless Steel
maintenance of the wiring system. They are
an integral part of its „management“ by being Universal elements suitable for any type of roof or
used to group cables into bundles, determine for a ground mounting structure.
the direction and place of their fixing, so that
the system built can look not only visually well,
but also reliably protected.
Our cable clips for solar systems are designed
for different number and cross-section of wires
with up to 90 degree deviation.
CABLE CLIP TYPE 1 - 2x4/6mm²
423210
CABLE CLIP TYPE 2 - 4x90°4/6mm²/ 3x90°10mm²
423211
CABLE CLIP TYPE 8 -2x90°4/6mm²
423212
CABLE CLIP TYPE 9 - 2x90°4/6mm²
423213
399 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED TILE ROOF, SETS
In the following lines you will find the configuration of different sets of mounting structures for
different types of roof structures with capacities from 3.6 to 30kW. The sets are equipped with all the
basic elements, with quantities sufficient for the complete construction of the photovoltaic arrays
of each system.
The quantities of elements are intended for construction of systems with solar panels with
catalogue number:
• 98SOL465M, with a power of 465W and dimensions 2094x1038x35mm;
• 98SOL560M, with power 560W and dimensions 2279x1134x35mm.
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED TILE ROOF FROM 3.6 TO

30KW FOR PANELS 465W
Description of the items Catalogue at at at at at at at at
included in the set number 3.6 kW 5 kW 6 kW 8 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW
Rail - 2400mm 423199 8 11 13 18 22 33 44 66
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 8 14 12 18 24 36
Mid clamp for framed panel 423202 12 16 20 28 32 48 64 96
30-50mm
End clamp for framed panel 423203-2 8 12 12 16 24 36 48 72
35mm
Tile roof hook 423204 16 22 26 36 44 66 88 132
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 20 28 32 48 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 12 16 24 36 48 72
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED TILE ROOF FROM 3.6 TO

30KW FOR PANELS 560W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 7 9 11 15 18 27 36 54
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 6 12 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
Tile roof hook 423204 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48
CATALOGUE NUMBERS OF THE SETS

Solar system Catalogue number Catalogue number
(kW) for panel 465W for panel 560W
3.6 42346536P/TR 42356036P/TR
5 4234655P/TR 4235605P/TR
6 4234656P/TR 4235606P/TR
8 4234658P/TR 4235608P/TR
10 42346510P/TR 42356010P/TR
15 42346515P/TR 42356015P/TR
20 42346520P/TR 42356020P/TR
30 42346530P/TR 42356030P/TR
Select language 400

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED SHEET METAL ROOF, SETS
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED SHEET METAL ROOF FROM

3.6 TO 30KW FOR PANELS 465W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 8 11 13 18 22 33 44 66
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 8 14 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
L-feet with fasteners for 423216 16 22 26 36 44 66 88 132
sheet metal roof
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 20 28 32 48 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 12 16 24 36 48 72
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED SHEET METAL ROOF FROM

3.6 TO 30KW FOR PANELS 560W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 7 9 11 15 18 27 36 54
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 6 12 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
L-feet with fasteners for 423216 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
sheet metal roof
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48

3.6 42346536P/DR 42356036P/DR
5 4234655P/DR 4235605P/DR
6 4234656P/DR 4235606P/DR
8 4234658P/DR 4235608P/DR
10 42346510P/DR 42356010P/DR
15 42346515P/DR 42356015P/DR
20 42346520P/DR 42356020P/DR
30 42346530P/DR 42356030P/DR
401 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED BITUMINOUS ROOF, SETS
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED BITUMINOUS ROOF FROM 3.6

TO 30KW FOR PANELS 465W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 8 11 13 18 22 33 44 66
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 8 14 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
Bituminous roofing hook 423214 16 22 26 36 44 66 88 132
Flashing plate 280x280 423215 16 22 26 36 44 66 88 132
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 20 28 32 48 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 12 16 24 36 48 72
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR PITCHED BITUMINOUS ROOF FROM 3.6

TO 30KW FOR PANELS 560W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 7 9 11 15 18 27 36 54
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 6 12 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
Bituminous roofing hook 423214 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Flashing plate 280x280 423215 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48

3.6 42346536P/SR 42356036P/SR
5 4234655P/SR 4235605P/SR
6 4234656P/SR 4235606P/SR
8 4234658P/SR 4235608P/SR
10 42346510P/SR 42356010P/SR
15 42346515P/SR 42356015P/SR
20 42346520P/SR 42356020P/SR
30 42346530P/SR 42356030P/SR
Select language 402

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF OR GROUND, SETS
30° TRIANGULAR MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF OR

GROUND FROM 3.6 TO 30KW FOR PANELS 465W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 8 11 13 18 22 33 44 66
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 8 14 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
30° Triangular mount 423227 8 11 13 18 23 31 46 69
L-Connector 423224 16 22 26 36 46 62 92 138
Anchor M517215 16 22 26 36 46 62 92 138
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 20 28 32 48 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 12 16 24 36 48 72
30° TRIANGULAR MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF OR

GROUND FROM 3.6 TO 30KW FOR PANELS 560W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 7 9 11 15 18 27 36 54
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 6 12 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
L-Connector 423224 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Anchor M517215 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48

3.6 42346536F/TR 42356036F/TR
5 4234655F/TR 4235605F/TR
6 4234656F/TR 4235606F/TR
8 4234658F/TR 4235608F/TR
10 42346510F/TR 42356010F/TR
15 42346515F/TR 42356015F/TR
20 42346520F/TR 42356020F/TR
30 42346530F/TR 42356030F/TR
403 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF OR GROUND, SETS
30° TRIANGULAR BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF

OR GROUND FROM 3.6 TO 30KW FOR PANELS 465W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 8 11 13 18 22 33 44 66
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 8 14 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
L-Connector 423224 16 22 26 36 46 62 92 138
Angle Plate 423225 12 16 20 28 34 50 68 102
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 20 28 32 48 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 12 16 24 36 48 72
30° TRIANGULAR BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF

OR GROUND FROM 3.6 TO 30KW FOR PANELS 560W
Rail - 2400mm 423199 7 9 11 15 18 27 36 54
Connector - 140mm 423201 4 6 6 12 12 18 24 36
30-50mm
35mm
L-Connector 423224 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Angle Plate 423225 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48

3.6 42346536F/BTR 42356036F/BTR
5 4234655F/BTR 4235605F/BTR
6 4234656F/BTR 4235606F/BTR
8 4234658F/BTR 4235608F/BTR
10 42346510F/BTR 42356010F/BTR
15 42346515F/BTR 42356015F/BTR
20 42346520F/BTR 42356020F/BTR
30 42346530F/BTR 42356030F/BTR
Select language 404

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
15° MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF AND GROUND WITH EAST-WEST AND SUD
ORIENTATION, SET
This mounting structures are recommended for installation on a flat roof or ground with an east/
west/sud solar plant orientation or on roofs with a slope of up to 15 degrees regardless of
orientation. On a flat roof or ground, the system can only be fixed with ballasts, and if the roof is
sloping, the mounting elements must be fixed to the roof with suitable fasteners.
The system allows the panels to be installed only horizontal -landscape.
*NOTE: The suggested quantities of the items included in the set are indicative and are intended to give
you an approximate quantitative value and what items are included in the set.
An accurate calculation can be made after evaluating a individual solar panels project.
The ballasts aren’t included.
15° MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF AND GROUND FROM 3.6KW
TO 30KW WITH 465W PANELS EAST-WEST AND SUD ORIENTATION, SET
Description of the items Catalogue
at at at at at at at at
Solar panels 465W 98SOL465M 8 11 13 18 22 33 44 65
Rail - 2400mm 423199 16 22 26 36 44 66 88 130
Connector - 140mm 423201 12 16 20 26 32 50 66 98
High bracket 15° 423231 18 25 29 40 55 80 110 165
Low bracket 15° 423232 18 25 29 40 55 80 110 165
30-50mm
East-west mounting type- tin rooftop End clamp for framed panel 423203-2 8 12 16 20 24 28 48 72
35mm
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 28 26 32 52 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 16 20 24 28 48 72
15° MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR FLAT ROOF AND GROUND FROM 3.6 TO
30KW WITH 560W PANELS EAST-WEST AND SUD ORIENTATION, SET
Rail - 2400mm 423199 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Connector - 140mm 423201 10 14 16 22 26 40 54 80
High bracket 15° 423231 16 20 22 33 40 60 80 120
Low bracket 15° 423232 16 20 22 33 40 60 80 120
30-50mm
Southern mounting type End clamp for framed panel 423203-2 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48
35mm
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48
BALLAST MOUNTING STRUCTURES SET 15° FOR FLAT ROOF OR GROUND FROM 3.6
TO 30KWWITH 465W AND 560W SOLAR PANELS AND EAST / WEST SUD ORIENTATION
3.6 42346536B/EW 42356036B/EW
5 4234655B/EW 4235605B/EW
6 4234656B/EW 4235606B/EW
8 4234658B/EW 4235608B/EW
10 42346510B/EW 42356010B/EW
15 42346515B/EW 42356015B/EW
20 42346520B/EW 42356020B/EW
30 42346530B/EW 42356030B/EW
405 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

15° MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR TIN ROOF WITH EAST-WEST AND SUD ORIENTATION
AND ROOF SLOPE UP TO 15°, SET
This mounting structures are recommended for installation on a tin roof with an east/west/sud
solar plant orientation and slope of up to 15°.
The system allows the panels to be installed only horizontal -landscape.
*NOTE: The suggested quantities of the items included in the set are indicative and are intended to give
you an approximate quantitative value and what items are included in the set. An accurate calculation
can be made after evaluating a individual solar panels project.
15° MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR TIN ROOF FROM 3.6 TO 30KW WITH 465W PANELS
EAST-WEST AND SUD ORIENTATION AND ROOF SLOPE UP TO 15°, SET
Rail - 2400mm 423199 16 22 26 36 44 66 88 130
Connector - 140mm 423201 12 16 20 26 32 50 66 98
High bracket 15° 423231 18 25 29 40 55 80 110 165
Low bracket 15° 423232 18 25 29 40 55 80 110 165
Tin roof bracket 423233 36 50 58 80 110 154 220 230
Southern mounting type tin rooftop Mid clamp for framed panel 423202 12 16 28 26 32 52 64 96
30-50mm
35mm
Grounding clip 423208 12 16 28 26 32 52 64 96
Earth lug 423209 8 12 16 20 24 28 48 72
15° MOUNTING STRUCTURES FOR TIN ROOF FROM 3.6 TO 30KW WITH 560W PANELS
EAST-WEST AND SUD ORIENTATION AND ROOF SLOPE UP TO 15°, SET
Rail - 2400mm 423199 14 18 22 30 36 54 72 108
Connector - 140mm 423201 10 14 16 22 26 40 54 80
High bracket 15° 423231 16 20 22 33 40 60 80 120
Low bracket 15° 423232 16 20 22 33 40 60 80 120
Tin roof bracket 423233 32 40 44 66 80 120 160 240
East west mounting type 30-50mm
35mm
Grounding clip 423208 10 14 16 24 28 42 56 84
Earth lug 423209 8 8 12 12 16 24 32 48
MOUNTING STRUCTURES SET 15° FOR TIN ROOF FROM 3.6 TO 30KW WITH 465W AND
560W SOLAR PANELS AND EAST/WEST/SUD ORIENTATION AND ROOF SLOPE UP TO 15°
3.6 42346536DR/EW 42356036DR/EW
5 4234655DR/EW 4235605DR/EW
6 4234656DR/EW 4235606DR/EW
8 4234658DR/EW 4235608DR/EW
10 42346510DR/EW 42356010DR/EW
15 42346515DR/EW 42356015DR/EW
20 42346520DR/EW 42356020DR/EW
30 42346530DR/EW 42356030DR/EW
Select language 406

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GARAGE MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR SOLAR PANELS, SET
GARAGE MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR SOLAR PANELS, SET

The garage structure is suitable for installation of solar panels with power up to 8kW (15 pcs.
ELMARK panels with power 510W). The size of the structure is suitable for parking two cars, with
a high of 2.5 m at its lowest point. The length of the structure is 6m and the width is 5.2m. It is a
suitable option for home construction or for combining multiple cells, when creating larger parking
lots or systems with higher capacities.
This system is also extremely suitable for combining with a 7kW single-phase charging station
for electric vehicles. For the construction of a three-phase charging station with a power of 22kW,
ELMARK recommends the use of 4 mounting structures and a 30kW solar system.
Catalogue number:
423278/CP
407 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | BATTERIES

BATTERIES FOR SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS
UHOME LFP BATTERY (LIFEPO4), 2400 W

ADVANTAGES
This type of battery offers many advantages, such as longer life, no maintenance, outstanding
safety and improved discharge and charge efficiency compared to lead-acid batteries. They are
suitable for high power storage, for frequent loads and for installation in places where space is
limited (battery size is 442x500x133mm). The manufacturer of the Uhome LFP battery guarantees
more than 6000 cycles of deep discharge at 95% of the battery capacity. This is achieved through
an integrated BMS control system that monitors voltage, current, temperature and cell status,
Catalogue number: balancing charging and discharging to increase cell life. The ability to connect up to 8 batteries
in parallel increases the capacity of the system by increasing the time of use or to power more
98BAT2400LFP powerful consumers.
FEATURES
• Environmentally friendly product, non-toxic and non-polluting environment
• The material used to make the product is made of LiFePO4 for safe use and numerous life cycles
• The Battery Management System (BMS) has a protective safety against overcharge, peak current,
low voltage, short circuit and high temperature.
• The system can automatically control overcharge processes and balance current and voltage
levels at the level at the unit level module in a group of several connected batteries.
• It has its own cooling system at low noise levels.
• Low self-discharge rates. The battery can last up to 6 months without charging.
• It does not remember situations where a shallow charge or discharge is required
• The operating temperature range is from -10° to 55°C (When charging 0~50°C; When discharging
-10~55°C)
• Compact and modern design, that fits into any room.
• Compatible with a wide range of hybrid inverters available on the market.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 48-56V DC
• Rated capacity: 2400Wh (2.4kW) 10 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Usable capacity: 2200Wh (2.2kW) + 10 standard
10 extended
• Rated charging/dilution capacity:1500Wh (1.5kW)
• Charging voltage: 57.6V
• Communication inputs: RS485, CAN
• Configuration: up to 8 batteries in series or parallel
• Patients with related adverse
• IP code: IP20
• Cooling: Naturally
• Operating temperature: When charging: from 0 to 50 °C, On discharge: from -10 up to 55°C
• Weight: 27.5Kg
• Installation: on a wall/ on land
• Protection: software and hardware
MONITORING
The battery has a built-in Wi-Fi module providing access to information by computer or mobile
phone, via the Uhome app.
Scan the code to download the Google Play or App Store »
Select language 408

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | BATTERIES
UHOME LFP BATTERY (LIFEPO4), 4800 W

ADVANTAGES
This type of battery offers many advantages, such as longer life, no maintenance, outstanding
safety and improved discharge and charge efficiency compared to lead-acid batteries. They are
suitable for high power storage, for frequent loads and for installation in places where space is
limited (battery size is 442x500x133mm). The manufacturer of the Uhome LFP battery guarantees
more than 6000 cycles of deep discharge at 95% of the battery capacity. This is achieved through
an integrated BMS control system that monitors voltage, current, temperature and cell status,
balancing charging and discharging to increase cell life. The ability to connect up to 8 batteries
in parallel increases the capacity of the system by increasing the time of use or to power more
Catalogue number: powerful consumers.
98BAT5000LFP FEATURES
• Environmentally friendly product, non-toxic and non-polluting environment
• The material used to make the product is made of LiFePO4 for safe use and numerous life cycles
• The Battery Management System (BMS) has a protective safety against overcharge, peak current,
low voltage, short circuit and high temperature.
• The system can automatically control vercharge processes and balance current and voltage
levels at the level at the unit level module in a group of several connected batteries.
• It has its own cooling system at low noise levels.
• Low self-discharge rates. The battery can last up to 6 months without charging.
• It does not remember situations where a shallow charge or discharge is required
• The operating temperature range is from -10° to 55°C (When charging 0~50°C; When discharging
-10~55°C)
• Compact and modern design, that fits into any room.
• Compatible with a wide range of hybrid inverters available on the market.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 48-56V DC
• Rated capacity: 5100Wh (5.1kW)
• Usable capacity: 4800Wh (4.8kW)
• Rated charging/dilution capacity: 3000Wh (3.0kW)
• Charging voltage: 57.6V
• Communication inputs: RS485, CAN
10 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Configuration: up to 8 batteries installed in series or parallel
• IP code: IP20
+ 10 standard
10 extended
• Cooling: Naturally
• Operating temperature: When charging: from 0 to 50 °C, On discharge: from -10 up to 55°C
• Weight: 45Kg
• Installation: on a wall/ on land
• Protection: software and hardware
MONITORING
The battery has a built-in Wi-Fi module providing access to information by computer or mobile
phone, via the Uhome app.
Scan the code to download the Google Play or App Store »
409 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | ACCESSORIES

ACCESSORIES FOR BATTERIES
UHOME ENERGY PORT

The energy port is a device that allows the connection and management of more than 8 batteries
in parallel or in series. It’s suitable with UHOME batteries with capacity of 2400 and 4800W.
ADVANTAGES
• CAN Communication Cable Connection mode (suit for 2-8 batteries piles)
• Suitable for residential and little commercial system.
Catalogue number: • Plug-in and ready, no need any other accessories.
98BAT/EP TECHNICAL DATA

• Power supply: 220-240V
• Live span: over 15 years
• Communication interface: CAN/RS 482/232/Internet
• IP code: IP20
• Working temperature: from -20 till + 60°C
• Size (LxWxH): 300x442x89mm
• Weight: 3kg
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
Select language 410

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR BATTERY MOUNTS UHOME LPF 2400 AND LPF 5000

WALL MOUNTING
By spacers mounted at the four ends of the
battery (Fig. 1)
This method of installation is recommended for
up to 4 batteries. One set is suitable for installa-
tion of 2 batteries.
For installation of more than 4 batteries in a
series it is recommended to use a board.
Catalogue number:
98BAT2400BRW
Fig. 1
GROUND MOUNTING
By spacers mounted at the four ends of the
battery (Fig.2)
This method of installation is recommended for
up to 4 batteries. One set is suitable for installa-
tion of 1 batterie.
For installation of more than 4 batteries in a
series it is recommended to use a board.
Catalogue number:
98BAT2400BRG
Fig. 2
METAL STORAGE CABINET FOR SOLAR BATTERIES UHOME LPF 2400

AND LPF 5000
Using a metal cabinet to store the batteries of an already built hybrid or off-grid solar system is the
most reliable and recommended option for this. The cabinet is suitable for the installation of up to
4 batteries with a capacity of 2400 and 4800Wh, while protecting at the same time the batteries
and adds compactness and completeness to the system. The ability to lock the limits the compro-
mise ofequipment in places with random access to people, eliminating the possibility of accidents.
Ventilation holes are provided on the housing and the door is made of mesh steel for proper
cooling of the batteries, in rooms with temperatures from 0-50°C. In rooms with high tempera-
tures, it is recommended to install an additional fan, and in winter or in rooms with temperatures
below -10°С a heater to ensure optimum temperature. In the free installation method, without
using a storage cabinet, optimum temperature levels are much more difficult to maintain and cost
considerably more than the investment in it. Ensuring the optimum working temperature of the
batteries, in turn, increases their lifetime and their mode of operation.
ADVANTAGES TECHNICAL DATA

• Provides mechanical protection of batteries • Material: cold-rolled SPCC steel
Catalogue number: • Locking the dashboard in order to prevent • Wall thickness: 2 mm
accidental access or incidents. • Weight: 40kg
98BAT15U • Easier to ensure optimal microclimate of the • Dimensions (LxWxH): 600x600x769mm
battery storage area. • Capacity: 4 batteries Uhome-LPF 2400/5000
• System compactness and completeness
411 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

CABLES FOR SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
SOLAR CABLES H1Z2Z2-K

APPLICATION
They are specifically designed for the construction of photovoltaic systems. H1Z2Z2-K solar cables
have good wear resistance, extreme flexibility, UV protection and do not support combustion.
They are also halogen-free, water and oil resistant. Cable weight: 4 mm2- 57kg; 6 mm2- 77kg
TECHNICAL DATA
• Reaction to fire: Dca S1a, d2, a1
• Cable cross-section: 4 mm2; 6 mm2
• Rated voltage (Uo/U): АС 1,0/1,0 kV; DC 1,5/1,5
• Conductor material: Tinned copper Class 5
• Number of conductors X diameter (N°x mm): 4 mm2 - 50x0,30; 6 m2 - 75x0,30
• Insulation and sheath material: Halogen-free compound
• Insulation thickness: 0,70 mm
• Insulation diameter: 4 mm2- 3,90 mm; 6mm2- 4,50mm
• Outer cable diameter: 4 mm2- 5,50 mm; 6 mm2- 6,05 mm
• Cable colour: black; red
• Maximum conductor resistance at 20°C: 4 mm2- 5,09 ohm/km; 6 mm2- 3,39 ohm/km
• Maximum insulation resistance at 20°C: 4 mm2- 580 MΩ.km; 6 mm2- 500 MΩ.km
• Minimum bending radius during laying: 5xØ of cable
• Flame spread test on single cable: EN 60332-1-2
• Operating temperature: -40+90°C
• Maximum short-circuit temperature: 250°C/5sec. (max.)
• Cable weight: 4 mm2- 57kg; 6 mm2- 77kg

M411079/BL 4 Black 5,6 58 100
M411079/R
M411080/BL
4
6
Red
Black
5,6
6,2
58
78
100
100
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
M411080/R 6 Red 6,2 78 100
We have included black and red solar cable H1Z2Z2-K with a cross section of 4mm2 to all our solar
kits. You can see the quantities in the table below:
Catalogue
3.6 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 20 kW 30 kW
number
M411079/BL x50m x50m x50m x75m x100m x100m
M411079/R x50m x50m x50m x75m x100m x100m
Select language 412

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | CABLES & ACCESSORIES
MALE/FEMALE CABLE CONNECTORS IP67, COMPATIBLE WITH MC4 STANDARD

They are an important and indispensable ele- • Rated voltage: 1000V
ment of any modern solar installation, serving • Rated current: 30A
for easier and faster wiring of the solar array. • Test voltage: 6KV(50Hz)
They are available in both male and female • IP code: IP67
versions, and are compatible with the well-es- • Conductive parts material: Silver plated
tablished MS4 connection standard. copper
• Operating temperature: form -40 up +125°C
EC Declaration of conformity • Suitable for solar cables with cross sections:
2.5 mm2; 4 mm2 and 6mm2
• Suitable for cable glands: 3-6 mm
SINGLE CONNECTOR TYPE IP67, SET
Catalogue Type Range of cable Conductor cross Packing

number glands (mm) section (mm²) (pcs)
411078/MF Single male/female couplers, SET 3-6 4/6 1/5
DOUBLE CONNECTOR TYPE 2 MALE/1 IP67

number glands(mm) section (mm²) (pcs)
411080/M 2 male/ 1 female coupler 3-6 4/6 1/5
DOUBLE CONNECTOR TYPE 2 FEMALE/1 IP67

number glands(mm) section (mm²) (pcs)
411080/F 2 male/ 1 female coupler 3-6 4/6 1/5
FOUR-POLE DC SWITCH 1200V, IP66

APPLICATION
The DC switch is mounted between the solar panels and the inverter and is intended to isolate the
PV array during installation or subsequent maintenance.
TECHNICAL DATA FEATURES
DC insulation voltage: 1200V Vertical and horizontal installation
Rated current: 32A UV resistance
Poles: 4P Flame retardant material
Mechanical life: 10 000 cycles Ventilation valve
Operating temperature: -25 to +70°C Lockable at off position
IP code: IP66
Handle colour: Black
Catalogue number:
98SOL4P/DC
413 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | OFF-GRID

OFF-GRID SOLAR INVERTERS WITH CAPACITIES FROM 3.5 TO 10KW
ELMARK‘s off-grid power inverters are hybrid and have capacities ranging from 3.5W to 10kW.
They have an operating mode that completely eliminates the need for existing electrical grid
SINGLE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER GROWATT

3.5KW- SPF 3500 ES
It is a multi-purpose OFF-GRID solar inverter with an integrated charge controller and UPS function
module, making it an ideal power generation solution for locations where there is no established
power grid or as backup power. This inverter can operate with or without batteries. It requires solar
panels, a generator or mains power to operate.
The inverter comes with a Wi-Fi plug-and-play remote monitoring device that plugs into a dedicated
input. It can monitor the status of the PV system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from
anywhere in the world with the Growatt ShinePhone app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS
in 12 different languages.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
Select language 414

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | OFF-GRID
A system built with a GROWATT single-phase solar inverter can be upgraded to 21kW. This is
achieved by connecting up to 6 devices in parallel to each other. Up to 6 devices can support 1
phase or be connected to build a three phase system.
Catalogue number:
423042
• Ability to operate up to 6 inverters in parallel • Number of poles: 1/N/PE
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
and increase system power up to 21kW
• Integrated MPPT controller
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge
• Rated power: 3500W
• Maximum power of solar panels: 4500W
• MPPT operating voltage range: from 120 to
+ 5 standard
0 extended
and discharge rates 430VDC
• Operation with or without battery • Maximum open circuit voltage of solar array:
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring 450VDC
• Battery charge and discharge time schedul- • Number of independent outputs
ing (MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 1/1
• Option to select voltages: • Battery voltage: 48VDC
• 170-280VAC for PCs • Battery Type: Lithium/Lead Acid
• 90-280VAC for home application • Charging current: 60А
• Efficiency: 93 %
• Waveform: Pure sine wave (sinusoid)
• Display: LCD
• IP20
SPF 3500 ES • Altitude: up to 2000m
• Relative humidity: from 5 to 95%
• Operating temperature: from 0 to 55°С
• Ambient temperature: from -15 to 60°С
• Weight: 11.5kg
• Dimensions (WxHxD): 330x485x135mm
415 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | INVERTERS

SINGLE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER SOLIS 5KW-
SOLIS-RHI-5K-48ES
It is an OFF-GRID solar inverter with an integrated charge controller, making it an ideal power gen-
eration solution for locations where there is no electrical grid or as a backup power supply.
It requires solar panels, a battery or an electrical grid to operate. The inverter comes with the
additional option of purchasing a Wi-Fi plug-and-play device with catalog No 423050 for remote
monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on it. It can monitor the status of the photovolta-
ic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from anywhere in the world with the
SolisCloud app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS in 10 different languages. The inverter
does not offer the possibility to connect multiple devices in parallel.
ELMARK offers the possibility of extending the warranty period of all inverters after purchasing
the „Extended Warranty“ package within 30 days after the purchase of the solar inverter.
Catalogue number:
423041
• Integrated MPPT controller • Number of poles: 1/N/PE
• Intelligent Energy Management System (EMS) • Rated power: 5000W
function, • Maximum power of solar panels: 8000W 12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• improving the reliability of battery • MPPT operating voltage range: from 90 to + 5 standard
7 extended
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge 520VDC
and discharge rates • Maximum input voltage: 600VDC
• Short circuit protection • Number of independent outputs
• DC reverse voltage protection (MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 2/2
• Overvoltage protection • Battery voltage: 42-58VDC
• Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing • Battery Type: Lithium/Lead Acid
the risk of fire • Charging current: 100А
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring • EU performance: >96,8%
• Multiple operating modes to optimize system • Display: LCD
benefits • IP65
SOLIS-RHI-5K-48ES • Weight: 18.3kg
Select language 416

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER SOLIS

6KW AND 10KW- RHI-3P6K-HVES-5G UND RHI-3P10K-HVES-5G
These are OFF-GRID solar inverters with integrated charge controllers, making them an ideal
power generation solution for locations where there is no power grid or as backup power supply.
They require solar panels, a battery or an electrical grid to operate.
The inverters come with the additional option of purchasing a Wi-Fi plug-and-play device with
catalog No 423050 for remote monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on them.
It can monitor the status of the photovoltaic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time
and from anywhere in the world with the SolisCloud app.
The app is compatible with Android and iOS in 10 different languages. To download the app, scan
the code from page 416.
The inverter does not offer the possibility to connect multiple devices in parallel.
ELMARK offers the possibility of extending the warranty period of all inverters after purchasing the
„Extended Warranty“ package within 30 days after the purchase of the solar inverter.

• Maximum efficiency 98.4% • Number of poles: 3/N/PE
• Three operating modes (self-consuming, • Rated power: 6000W /10 000W
while • Maximum power of solar panels:
• using and off-grid back-up 9600W/16 000W
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge • MPPT operating voltage range: from 200 to
and discharge rates 850VDC
• Integrated MPPT controller • Maximum input voltage: 1000VDC
• Intelligent Energy Management System • Number of independent outputs (
(EMS) function, improving the reliability of the MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 2/2; 2/4
battery • Battery voltage: 160-600VDC
• Short circuit protection • Battery type: Li-ion
• DC reverse voltage protection • Charging current: 25А
• Overvoltage protection • EU performance: >97,7%
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY • Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing
the risk of fire
• Display: LCD
+ 5 standard • IP code: IP65
7 extended • Protection stopping the voltage supply • Altitude: up to 4000m
when the mains power fails. This prevents the • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
accidental voltage drop from the system to the • Humidity range: from 0 to 100%
mains during operation and in combination • Weight: 25.1kg
mode • Dimensions (WxHxD): 535x455x185mm
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring
Catalogue Type Number of poles Rated power Maximum power of

number (W) solar panels (W)
423044 RHI-3P6K-HVES-5G 3/N/PE 6000 9600
423045 RHI-3P10K-HVES-5G 3/N/PE 10000 16000
417 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

THREE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER GROWATT
10KW- SPH 10000TL3 BH-UP
It is a multi-purpose OFF-GRID solar inverter with an integrated charge controller, smart phase-
level power control and UPS function module, making it an ideal power generation solution for
locations where there is no established power grid or as backup power.
It can monitor the status of the PV system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from
anywhere in the world with the Growatt ShinePhone app. The app is compatible with Android and
iOS in 12 different languages.
Catalogue number:
423046
• Can work with smart energy meters SEM-E 50 • Number of poles: 3P+N+PE
and 100kW to increase system power
• 100% three-phase imbalance output
• Smart phase-level power export limitation
• Rated power: 10000W
• Maximum power of solar panels: 15000W
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
• Wide battery voltage 100-550V 600VDC
• UPS function, 10ms transition • Maximum open circuit voltage of solar array:
• Scalable system configuration 600VDC
• VPP interface ready • Number of independent outputs (MPP Track-
• 1.5 DC/AC Ratio ers)/Strings on each output: 2/1
• DC reverse polarity protection • Battery voltage: 100-550VDC
• AC/DC surge protection type II • Battery Type: Lithium/Lead Acid
• Battery reverse protection • Charging current: 25А
• AC short-circuit protection • Efficiency: 98.2 %
• Ground fault monitoring • Display: LCD
• Grid monitoring • IP code: IP65
• Anti-islanding protection • Altitude: up to 3000m
• Residual-current monitoring unit • Relative humidity: from 0 to 100%
• Insulation resistance monitoring • Operating temperature: from 0 to 55°С
• Weight: 30kg
Select language 418

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SINGLE-PHASE ENERGY STORAGE INVERTER SOLIS

3KW- RAI-3K-48ES-5G
The AC-Coupled inverter is used for upgrade the existing on-grid single pole Solis power genera-
tion system to a hybrid system which can work with batteries to optimize self-consumption. The
energy storage inverter is a good choice for ON-GRID and OFF-GRID integrated storage solutions.
catalog No 423050 for remote monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on them.
It can monitor the status of the photovoltaic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time
and from anywhere in the world with the SolisCloud app. The app is compatible with Android and
iOS in 10 different languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416.
Catalogue number:
423040
• Compatible with any ON-GRID SOLIS SYSTEM • Number of poles: 1/N/PE
• Compatible with both li-ion battery and • Rated power: 3000W
lead-acid battery • Maximum input voltage: 1000VDC
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge • Battery voltage: 40-60VDC
and discharge rates • Battery type: Li-ion/lead acid
• OFF-GRID, back-up function • Charging current: 60А
• Minimum/maximum voltage protection of • Maximum charging efficiency: >94,0%
the battery • Maximum discharge efficiency: >94,5%
• Battery protection at wrong poles connection • Display: LCD
• Thermal protection • IP65
• Intelligent Energy Management System (EMS) • Altitude: up to 2000m
function, improving the reliability of battery • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring • Weight: 15kg
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY • Dimensions (WxHxD): 403x525x170mm
+ 5 standard
7 extended
RAI-3K-48ES-5G
419 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

GRID CONNECTED (ON-GRID) SOLAR INVERTERS WITH POWERS FROM 3.6 TO 110KW
These are the most common type of inverters, also known as strings, ON-GRIDs or grid connected.
Their work requires power from the power grid. These inverters cannot operate with a battery
serving as energy storage or as a UPS.
SINGLE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTERS SOLIS

3.6KW, 5KW AND 8KW
Standard grid inverters are the most commonly used type of inverters for trading electricity or pro-
ducing electricity for own use. Because they them selves cannot work with batteries, this means that
they can only be used during the bright part of the day. That is, the electricity produced from the
solar panels is consumed instantly or returned to the electricity grid for sale.
The inverters come with the additional option of purchasing a Wi-Fi plug-and-play device with cat-
alog No 423050 for remote monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on them. It can mon-
itor the status of the photovoltaic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from
anywhere in the world with the SolisCloud app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS in 10
different languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416
ELMARK offers the possibility of extending the warranty period of all inverters after purchasing the „Ex-
tended Warranty“ package within 30 days after the purchase of the solar inverter.
ADVANTAGES TECHNICAL DATA 3.6KW/ 5KW/ 8KW

• Integrated algorithm for Maximum Power • Number of poles: 1/N/PE
Point Tracking (MPPT) • Rated power: 3.6KW/ 5KW/ 8KW
• Integrated EPM (Export Power Manager) • Maximum power of solar panels:
function 5400W / 7500W / 12000W
• Short circuit protection • MPPT operating voltage range: 80-500VDC/
• DC reverse voltage protection 90-520VDC / 80-500VDC/ 90-520VDC
• Over voltage protection • Maximum input voltage: 600VDC
• Thermal protection
• Network monitoring
• Number of independent outputs
(MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 1/2;
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
• Protection stopping the voltage supply in 2/2; 3/2 7 extended
case of failure of power supply from the mains. • EU performance: >96,8%/ 97,1%/ 97,3%
This prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage • Display: LCD
from the system to the network during opera- • IP code: IP66
tion and while in combined mode • Altitude: up to 4000m
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
SOLIS-S6-GR1P3.6-M • Weight: 7.7kg/ 12kg/ 13.3kg
SOLIS-S6-GR1P5K • Dimension (WxHxD): 310x373x160mm/
SOLIS-1P8K-5G 310x543x160mm/ 310x543x160mm
Catalogue Type Number of Rated Maximum power of Dimensions WxHxD

number poles power solar panels (W) (mm)
(W)
423001 SOLIS-S6-GR1P3.6-M 1/N/PE 3600 5400 310x373x160
423002 SOLIS-S6-GR1P5K 1/N/PE 5000 7500 310x543x160
423003 SOLIS-1P8K-5G 1/N/PE 8000 12000 310x543x160
Select language 420

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREE-PHASE (ON-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER SOLIS

6KW, 10KW, 15KW AND 20KW
Standard grid inverters are the most commonly used type of inverters for trading electricity or
producing electricity for own use. As they cannot run on batteries alone, this means they can only
be used during daylight hours. That is, the electricity produced from the solar panels is consumed
instantly or returned to the electricity grid for sale.
catalog No 423050 for remote monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on them. It can
monitor the status of the photovoltaic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and
from anywhere in the world with the SolisCloud app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS
in 10 different languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416
ADVANTAGES TECHNICAL DATA 6KW/ 10KW/ 15KW/ 20KW

Point Tracking (MPPT) • Rated power: 6000W / 10 000W / 15 000W /
• Integrated EPM (Export Power Manager) 20 000W
function • Maximum power of solar panels:
• Short circuit protection 9000W / 15 000W/22 500W/ 30 000W
• DC reverse voltage protection • MPPT operating voltage range: 160-1000VDC
• Overvoltage protection • Maximum input voltage: 1100VDC
• Thermal protection • Number of independent outputs (MPP Track-
• Network monitoring ers)/Strings on each output:2/2; 2/2; 2/4; 2/4
• Protection stopping the voltage supply in • EU performance: >98,3%/ 97,9%/ 98%/ 98,1%
case of failure of power supply from the mains. • Display: LCD
This prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage • IP code: IP66
from the system to the network during opera- • Altitude: up to 4000m
tion and while in combined mode • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring • Relative humidity: from 0 to 100%
• Weight: 17.8 kg/ 17.8kg/ 18.8kg/ 20kg
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY SOLIS-S5-GR3P6K • Dimensions (WxHxD): 310x563x219mm
+ 5 standard SOLIS- S5-GR3P10K
7 extended Catalogue Type Number of Rated Maximum power of Dimensions WxHxD
SOLIS- S5-GR3P15K number poles power solar panels (W) (mm)
SOLIS- 3P20K-4G (W)
423019 SOLIS-S5-GR3P6K 3/N/PE 6000 9000 310x563x219
423020 SOLIS- S5-GR3P15K 3/N/PE 10000 15000 310x563x219
423021 SOLIS- S5-GR3P10K 3/N/PE 15000 22500 310x563x219
423022 SOLIS- 3P20K-4G 3/N/PE 20000 30000 310x563x219
421 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

THREE-PHASE (ON-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER 30KW- SOLIS -S5-GC30K
in 10 different languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416.
Catalogue number:
423023
Point Tracking (MPPT) • Rated power: 30000W
• Integrated EPM (Export Power Manager) • Maximum power of solar panels: 45000W
function • MPPT operating voltage range: 200-1000VDC
• Integrated working Volt-watt mode of • Maximum input voltage: 1100VDC
operation • Number of independent outputs (MPP Track-
• Leakage current suppression technology ers)/Strings on each output: 3/6
• Anti-resonance, supporting more than 6MW • EU performance: >98,1%
in parallel in a single transformer • Display: LCD
• Short circuit protection • IP code: IP66
• DC reverse voltage protection • Altitude: up to 4000m
• Surge protection - cathodic arrester type II • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
• Thermal protection • Relative humidity: from 0 to 100%
• Scanning I/V Curves • Weight: 37kg
SOLIS-S5-GC30K • Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing • Dimensions (WxHxD): 647х629х252mm
the risk of fire
• Network monitoring 12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Protection stopping the voltage supply in + 5 standard
7 extended
case of failure of power supply from the mains.
This prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage
from the system to the network during opera-
tion and while in combined mode
Select language 422

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

40KW, 50KW AND 60KW
The inverter comes with the additional option of purchasing a Wi-Fi plug-and-play device with
catalog No 423050 for remote monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on it. It can
in 10 different languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416
ELMARK offers the possibility of extending the warranty period of all inverters after
purchasing the „Extended Warranty“ package within 30 days after the purchase of the solar inverter.
ADVANTAGES TECHNICAL DATA 40KW/ 50KW/ 60KW

Point Tracking (MPPT) • Rated power: 40 000W / 50 000W / 60 000W
• Integrated EPM (Export Power Manager) • MPPT operating voltage range: 200-1000VDC/
function 180-1000VDC/ 180-1000VDC
• SVG Function • Maximum input voltage: 1100VDC
• Maintains work with aluminum wires to • Number of independent outputs (MPP Track-
reduce costs for the system ers)/Strings on each output: 4/8; 5/10; 6/12
• Short circuit protection • EU performance: >98,3%
• DC reverse voltage protection • Display: LCD
• Surge protection - cathodic arrester type II • IP66
• Thermal protection • Altitude: up to 4000m
• Scanning I/V Curves • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
• Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing • Relative humidity: from 0 to 100%
the risk of fire • Weight: 37kg/ 54.5kg/ 54.5kg
• Network monitoring • Dimensions (WxHxD): 647х629х252mm/
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Protection stopping the voltage supply in
691x578x338mm/ 691x578x338
+ 5 standard
7 extended This prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage
from the system to the network during opera-
tion and while in combined mode
Catalogue Type Number of Rated MPPT operating Dimensions WxHxD

number poles power voltage range (mm)
(W) (VDC)
423024 Solis-S5-GC40K 3/N/PE 40000 200-1000 647х629х252mm
SOLIS-S5-GC40K

(W) (VDC)
423025 Solis-S5-GC50K 3/N/PE 50000 180-1000 691x578x338
423026 Solis-S5-GC60K 3/N/PE 60000 180-1000 691x578x338
SOLIS-S5-GC50K
SOLIS-S5-GC60K * Products are delivered on request, after coordination of a project and preparation of an individual
offer.
423 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

80KW, 100KW AND 110KW
in 10 different languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416.
ADVANTAGES TECHNICAL DATA 80KW, 100KW AND 110KW
Point Tracking (MPPT) • Rated power: 80 000W / 100 000W / 110 000W
• Integrated EPM (Export Power Manager) • MPPT operating voltage range: 180-1000VDC
function • Maximum input voltage: 1100VDC
• SVG Function • Number of independent outputs (MPP Track-
• Supports working with aluminum wires to ers)/Strings on each output: 9/18; 10/20; 10/20
reduce system costs • EU performance: >98,3%
• Short circuit protection • Display: LCD
• DC reverse voltage protection • IP66
• Surge protection - cathodic arrester type II • Altitude: up to 4000m
• Thermal protection • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
• Scanning I/V Curves • Relative humidity: from 0 to 100%
• Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing • Weight: 82kg/ 91kg/ 91kg
the risk of fire • Dimensions (WxHxD):1050x567x315mm/
• Network monitoring 1065x567x345mm/ 1065x567x345 mm
This prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage
from the system to the network during 12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
operation and while in combined mode + 5 standard
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring 7 extended

(W) (VDC)
423027 Solis-80K-5G 3/N/PE 80000 180-1000 1050x567x315
423028 Solis-100K-5G 3/N/PE 100000 180-1000 1065x567x345
423029 Solis-110K-5G 3/N/PE 110000 180-1000 1065x567x345
SOLIS-80K-5G
SOLIS-100K-5G
SOLIS-110K-5G
Select language 424

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
HYBRID SOLAR INVERTERS WITH CAPACITIES FROM 3.5 TO 10KW
ELMARK‘s hybrid inverter options range from 3.5W to 10kW. They have a mode of operation that
completely excludes the need for existing power supply from the grid, as well as in combined
mode connected to the grid and to a battery.
SINGLE-PHASE HYBRID SOLAR INVERTER GROWATT

3.5KW- SPF 3500 ES
It is a multi-purpose OFF-GRID solar inverter with an integrated charge controller and UPS function
module, making it an ideal power generation solution for locations where there is no established
power grid or as backup power supply. This inverter can operate with or without batteries. It
requires solar panels, a generator or mains power to operate. Combined version of OFF-GRID and
ON-GRID inverter, which is gaining more and more popularity and which utilizes the produced
energy in the most rational way. The inverter comes with a Wi-Fi plug-and-play remote monitoring
device that plugs into a dedicated input. It can monitor the status of the photovoltaic system from
a mobile phone or computer at any time and from anywhere in the world with the Growatt Shine-
Phone app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS in 12 different languages.
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
425 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

A system built with a GROWATT single-phase solar inverter can be upgraded to 21kW. This is
achieved by connecting up to 6 devices in parallel to each other. Up to 6 devices can support 1
phase or be connected to build a three phase system.
Catalogue number:
423042
ADVANTAGES TECHNICAL DATA:
• Ability to operate up to 6 inverters in parallel • Number of poles: 1/N/PE
and increase system power up to 21kW • Rated power: 3500W
• Integrated MPPT controller • Maximum power of solar panels: 4500W
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge
and discharge rates
• Operation with or without battery
430VDC
• Maximum open circuit voltage of solar array:
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring 450VDC
• Battery charge and discharge time • Number of independent outputs
scheduling (MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 1/1
• Option to select voltages: • Battery voltage: 48VDC
¾ 70-280VAC for PCs • Battery type: Lithium/Lead Acid
¾ 90-280VAC for home application • Charging current: 60А
• Efficiency: 93%
• Waveform: Pure sine wave (sinusoid)
• Display: LCD
SPF 3500 ES • IP20
• Operating temperature: from 0 to 55°С
• Weight: 11.5kg
Select language 426

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SINGLE-PHASE HYBRID SOLAR INVERTER SOLIS

5KW- SOLIS-RHI-5K-48ES
It is an OFF-GRID solar inverter with an integrated charge controller, making it an ideal power
generation solution for locations where there is no electrical grid or as a backup power supply.
It requires solar panels, a battery or an electrical grid to operate. The inverter comes with the
monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on it. It can monitor the status of the
photovoltaic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from anywhere in the
world with the SolisCloud app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS in 10 different
languages. To download the app, scan the code from page 416. The inverter does not offer the
possibility to connect multiple devices in parallel.
Catalogue number:
423041
• Integrated MPPT controller • Number of poles: 1/N/PE
• Intelligent Energy Management System • Rated power: 5000W
(EMS) function, improving the reliability of the • Maximum power of solar panels: 8000W
battery • MPPT operating voltage range: from 90 to
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge 520VDC
and discharge rates • Maximum input voltage: 600VDC
• Short circuit protection • Number of independent outputs
• DC reverse voltage protection (MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 2/2
• Surge protection • Battery voltage: 42-58VDC
• Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing • Battery type: Lithium/Lead Acid
the risk of fire • Charging current: 100А
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring • EU performance: >96,8%
• Multiple operating modes to optimize system • Display: LCD
benefits • IP65
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY SOLIS-RHI-5K-48ES • Altitude: up to 2000m
+ 5 standard • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
7 extended
• Weight: 18.3kg
427 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

THREE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER GROWATT
10KW- SPH 10000TL3 BH-UP
It is a multi-purpose OFF-GRID solar inverter with an integrated charge controller, smart phase-
level power control and UPS function module, making it an ideal power generation solution for
locations where there is no established power grid or as backup power.
It can monitor the status of the PV system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from
anywhere in the world with the Growatt ShinePhone app. The app is compatible with Android and
iOS in 12 different languages.
Catalogue number:
423046
• Can work with smart energy meters SEM-E 50 • Number of poles: 3P+N+PE
and 100kW to increase system power • Rated power: 10000W
• 100% three-phase imbalance output • Maximum power of solar panels: 15000W
• Smart phase-level power export limitation • MPPT operating voltage range: from 120 to
• Wide battery voltage 100-550V 600VDC 12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• UPS function, 10ms transition • Maximum open circuit voltage of solar array: + 5 standard
7 extended
• Scalable system configuration 600VDC
• VPP interface ready • Number of independent outputs (MPP Track-
• 1.5 DC/AC Ratio ers)/Strings on each output: 2/1
• DC reverse polarity protection • Battery voltage: 100-550VDC
• AC/DC surge protection type II • Battery Type: Lithium/Lead Acid
• Battery reverse protection • Charging current: 25А
• AC short-circuit protection • Efficiency: 98.2 %
• Ground fault monitoring • Display: LCD
• Grid monitoring • IP code: IP65
• Anti-islanding protection • Altitude: up to 3000m
• Residual-current monitoring unit • Relative humidity: from 0 to 100%
• Insulation resistance monitoring • Operating temperature: from 0 to 55°С
• Weight: 30kg
Select language 428

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREE-PHASE (OFF-GRID) SOLAR INVERTER SOLIS

6KW AND 10KW- RHI-3P6K-HVES-5G AND RHI-3P10K-HVES-5G
These are OFF-GRID solar inverters with integrated charge controllers, making them an ideal
power generation solution for locations where there is no power grid or as backup power supply.
They require solar panels, a battery or an electrical grid to operate. The inverters come with the
monitoring, which connects to a dedicated input on them. It can monitor the status of the pho-
tovoltaic system from a mobile phone or computer at any time and from anywhere in the world
with the SolisCloud app. The app is compatible with Android and iOS in 10 different languages.
To download the app, scan the code from page 416. The inverter does not offer the possibility to
connect multiple devices in parallel.

• Maximum efficiency 98.4% • Number of poles: 3/N/PE
• Three modes of operation (on own consump- • Rated power: 6000W /10 000W
tion, during use and off-grid back-up • Maximum power of solar panels: 9600W/16
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge 000W
and discharge rates • MPPT operating voltage range: from 200 to
• Integrated MPPT controller 850VDC
• Intelligent Energy Management System • Maximum input voltage: 1000VDC
(EMS) function, improving the reliability of the • Number of independent outputs
battery (MPP Trackers)/Strings on each output: 2/2; 2/4
• Short circuit protection • Battery voltage: 160-600VDC
• DC reverse voltage protection • Battery type: Li-ion
• Surge protection • Charging current: 25А
• Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing • EU performance: >97,7%
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• the risk of fire
• Display: LCD
• IP65
+ 5 standard
7 extended case of failure of power supply from the mains. • Altitude: up to 4000m
RHI-3P6K-HVES-5G This prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage • Ambient temperature: from -25 to 60°С
RHI-3P10K-HVES-5G from the system to the network during opera- • Humidity range: from 0 to 100%
tion and while in combined mode • Weight: 25.1kg
• Remote Wi-Fi monitoring • Dimensions (WxHxD): 535x455x185mm
Catalogue Type Number of Rated Maximum power of Dimensions WxHxD

number poles power solar panels (mm)
(W)
423044 RHI-3P6K-HVES-5G 3/N/PE 60000 9600 535x455x185
423045 RHI-3P10K-HVES-5G 3/N/PE 100000 16 000 535x455x185
429 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ACCESSORIES FOR SOLAR INVERTERS
SOLIS EXPORT MANAGER EPM1-5G

The Solis export power manager is the ideal solution for smart energy management for both
residential and commercial systems. The unit allows you to adjust export values to satisfy local net-
work regulatory requirements. Energy management with the Solis export power manager allows
for higher self-consumption and efficient use of the locally generated PV power. Solis Export Power
Manager EPM1-5G can control up to 10 inverters connected to it.
Catalogue number:
423053
EPM1-5G • Simultaneous control and monitoring of 10 • Supported devices: all Solis-branded inverters
inverter • Rated voltage: 230 V, 1/N/PE
• Supports “Δ“ and “Y” grid systems and • Input voltage range: L to N: 100~ 300 V (L-N)
single-phase grids to reduce system changes • Input frequency range: 45~65 Hz
• Realizing reactive compensation of the • Communication with the inverter:
system Modbus 485
• The control accuracy is up to 3%, which • Monitoring: Wi-Fi stick
improves the system’s spontaneous use rate • Maximum communication distance:
• Supports simultaneous access to Solis up 1000 m
inverters with different capacities • Maximum number of managing inverters: 10
• Display: LCD
• IP code: IP65
• Relative humidity: 5- 95%
• Ambient temperature: from -25 up 60°С
• Weight: 2.1kg
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
SOLIS EXPORT MANAGER EPM3-5G + 5 standard
0 extended
Thanks to Solis Export Power Manager EPM3-5G, you can adjust the export values of energy pro-
duced. This is an ideal solution for intelligent management of the energy produced for own needs
and to meet the regulatory requirements of the local energy distribution company.
Solis Export Power Manager EPM3-5G can control up to 10 inverters connected to it.
Catalogue number:
423051
• Simultaneous control and monitoring of 10 • Supported devices: all Solis-branded inverters
EPM3-5G inverter • Rated voltage: 400 V, 3/N/PE or 3/PE
• Supports “Δ“ and “Y” networks, as well as • Input voltage range: L to N: 100~277 V; L to L:
single-phase 176~480 V
• Compensates for harmful harmonics and • Communication with the inverter: Modbus
provides a power factor within normal limits RS485 with two-pin RS485 cable
• High steering accuracy with deviation up 3% • Monitoring: Wi-Fi stick
• Supports simultaneous access to Solis • Maximum length of the connecting cable: up
inverters with different capacities 1000 m
• Maximum number of managing inverters: 10
• Display: LCD
• IP code: IP65
• Weight: 2.1kg
Select language 430

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | ACCESORIES
SOLIS EXPORT MANAGER EPM3-5G-PLUS

Thanks to Solis Export Power Manager EPM3-5G-PLUS, you can adjust the export values of energy
produced. This is an ideal solution for intelligent management of the energy produced for own
needs and for meeting the regulatory requirements of the local energy distribution company.
Solis Export Power Manager EPM3-5G-PLUS can control up to 80 inverters connected to it.
Catalogue number:
423052
• Simultaneous control and monitoring of 10 • Supported devices: all Solis-branded inverters
inverter • Rated voltage: 400 V, 3/N/PE
• Supports “Δ“ and “Y” networks, as well as • Input voltage range: L to N: 100~263 V
single-phase • Communication with the inverter: Modbus
• Compensates for harmful harmonics and RS485 dual pin cable RS485 or RJ45
provides a power factor within normal limits • Monitoring: built-in Wi-Fi box (DLB-W)
• High steering accuracy with deviation up 3% • Maximum length of the connecting cable: up
5 • Supports simultaneous access to Solis 1000 m

YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY inverters with different capacities • Maximum number of managing inverters: 80
with power up 2MW
+ 5 standard
0 extended • Display: LCD
• IP code: IP65
• Weight: 5.4kg
WI-FI DEVICE FOR CONTROL AND ANALYSIS

The Solis monitoring system is focused on remote service and maintenance of the built system.
This is achieved thanks to a Wi-Fi plug-and-play device that can be placed on any SOLIS-branded
inverter. The monitoring possibility provides users with accurate and comprehensive data analysis,
as well as timely notification of damage.
Catalogue number:
423050
• Easy installation - plug-and-play • Supported devices: all Solis-branded inverters
• Real-time damage alarm • Operating voltage: 5 VDC (+/-5%)
• Status indication • Indicator light: LED x 3
• Reset debugging button • Power Consumption 5W
• Configuration method: APP/WEB
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Data storage: 4МВ
• IP code: IP65
+ 3 standard
0 extended
• Weight: 80g
431 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SMART METERS
The so-called „Smart Meter“ is an important element in the construction of a photovoltaic system,
especially in cases where we do not have a contract for the sale of produced energy to the local
energy distribution company. When daytime production exceeds consumption, excess energy is
returned to the grid and charged as consumed. To avoid this, a Smart Meter must be added to the
system. Its function is to continuously (24/7) monitor the consumption at the customer premises
and feed this information to the inverter. By receiving the information from the meter, the inverter
knows at all times whether the produced energy is more than consumption. When the production
values exceed the consumed power, the inverter instantly reduces its production so that it is equal
to or less than the on-site consumption, thus avoiding energy being fed back into the grid.
SINGLE-PHASE SMART METER DDSD1352

A three-phase DDSD1352 electricity meter can be used in all types of control systems, including
SCADA. It is distinguished by high accuracy, small dimensions, and easy installation. It is used
for measuring and managing multiple electrical parameters, providing data for the previous 12
months, on the condition of harmonics, realizes remote switching and control with switching of
input and relay output with the possibility of alarm notification.
Catalogue number:
423060
• Measurement of a wide range of parameters • Input voltage: 220V AC
• Easy parameter adjustment using 3 buttons • Rated current: 10А
• Multi-tariff - four tariffs • Maximum current: 60А
• 4 time zones, 2 time interval channels with 14 • Accuracy class: 1
intervals per day • Measuring range: 000000.00~99999999kWh
• Voltage drop or over voltage warning • Measurement parameters: voltage, current,
active, reactive and power factor, power factor,
frequency
• Constant: 1600imp/kWh
• Protocol: MODBUS-RTU
• Communication: Infrared
• Display: 8 Bit LCD
• Dimensions (LxHxW): 36х88х70mm 3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
THREE-PHASE SMART METER DDSD1352

A three-phase DTSD1352 electricity meter can be used in all types of control systems, includ-
ing SCADA. Designed for power supply systems, industrial mining enterprises and utilities. It is
distinguished by high accuracy, small dimensions and easy installation. It is used for measuring
and managing multiple electrical parameters, providing data for the previous 48 months, on the
condition of harmonics, including the 31st harmonic, realizes remote switching and control with
switching of input and relay output with the possibility of alarm notification.
Catalogue number:
423061
• Measurement of a wide range of parameters • Voltage: 3×100V, 3×380V, 3×57.7/100V,
• Easy parameter adjustment using 4 buttons 3×220/380V
• Multi-tariff - four tariffs • Resistance: >2MΩ
• 4 time zones, 2 time interval channels with 14 • Rated current: 3×1(6)A
intervals per day • Maximum current: 3×10(80)A
• Voltage drop or over voltage warning • Deviation: ±0.2%
• Accuracy class: active energy 1;
reactive energy 2
• Measuring range: 000000.00~99999999kWh
• Measurement parameters: voltage, current,
active, reactive and apparent power factor,
power factor, frequency
• Constant: 6400imp/kWh
• Communication interface: RS485, Infrared
• Display: 8 Bit LCD
• Dimensions (LxHxW): 126.5х88.2х69.5mm
Select language 432

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | OFF-GRID SETS
OFF-GRID SOLAR SYSTEM SETS
ELMARK offers various ready-made variants and solutions of complete non-grid solar systems with
capacities from 300W to 10kW.
OFF-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 300W, SET

The 300W power kit on offer is extremely compact and easy to carry. The quality of the electricity
it produces is stable and comparable to that from the grid. Its compact dimensions and mobility
make it extremely suitable for powering small consumers off the grid. The battery is built into the
body of the inverter and the solar panel is placed in a convenient carrying bag. In addition to sun-
light, the inverter‘s lithium-ion battery can be charged from the mains (220V) or from a car battery
(12V). The inverter has many different types and voltages of output ports, making it a versatile
device suitable for powering appliances with different purposes.
Catalogue number:
98SOL501
ADVANTAGES OF THE SYSTEM TECHNICAL DATA
• Three ways to charge the battery - from the • Rated power АС: 300W
mains, battery, solar power • Peak power AC: 600W
• It can be used as a backup power supply in • Output Voltage: 220V/50HZ; AC110V/60HZ;
case of failure of 12V
• the main power supply for stand-by lighting • Waveform: Pure sine wave (sinusoid)
or other important low-power consumers. • Battery: Li-ion 14.8V 33.5Ah
• High quality, rechargeable lithium-ion bat- • Battery capacity: 495Wh
tery with cover capacity 495Wh • Charge current characteristics: 18- 30V 3.5A
• The inverter has 2 universal outlets 100-240V (MAX)
AC (300W), compatible with all known world • Solar panel current characteristics: 18V/ 100W
standard plugs • Charging time required: 6-8h
• USB ports for smartphones, iPad, MP3, cam- • USB outputs: USB 2.05V 2A/USB QC 3.0/
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
era, hobby (helicopters, drones, etc.)
• Lighter for car
• Ports for simultaneous battery charging and
Type-C
• Outputs 12V DC: 2x10A
• Outputs 220V DC: 2
+ 3 standard
0 extended
discharging • Operating temperature: from -10 to 60°С
• 12V petrol car start function • Dimensions LxWxH: 205x105x170mm
• Overload protection and warning, short • Net weight of the inverter: 3.6kg
circuit,overheating, over voltage, overheating,
over voltage
THE SOLAR SET INCLUDES
• Inverter (charging station) with built-in
lithium-ion battery and power of 300W
• Solar panel 18V 100W
433 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

OFF-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 1000W, SET
The available 1000W kit is extremely compact and easy to carry. The quality of the electricity it
produces is stable and comparable to that of mains electricity. Its compact size and mobility make
it extremely suitable for powering small off-grid consumers. The battery is built into the inverter
housing and the solar panel is placed in a convenient carrying bag. In addition to sunlight, the in-
verter‘s lithium-ion battery can be charged from the mains (220V) or from a car battery (12V). The
inverter has many different types and voltages of output ports, making it a versatile device suitable
for powering appliances with different purposes.
Catalogue number:
98SOL1001
case of failure of the main power supply for 12V
stand-by lighting or other important low-pow- • Waveform: Pure sine wave (sinusoid)
er consumers. • Battery: Li-ion 25.2V 41.6Ah
• High quality, rechargeable lithium-ion battery • Battery capacity: 1048Wh
with cover capacity 1048Wh • Current charge characteristics: 29.4- 40V 15A
• The inverter has 2 universal outlets 100-240V (MAX)
AC (1000W), compatible with all known world • Solar panel current charge characteristics:
standard plugs 36V/ 100W
• USB ports for smartphones, iPad, MP3, cam- • Charging time required: 6-8h
era, hobby (helicopters,drones, etc.) • USB outputs: USB 2.05V 2A/USB QC 3.0/
• Lighter for car Type-C
• Ports for simultaneous battery charging and • Outputs 12V DC: 2x10A
discharging • Outputs 220V DC: 2
• 12V petrol car start function • Operating temperature: from -10 to 60°С
• Overload protection and warning, short • Dimensions LxWxH: 360x215x300mm
circuit, overheating, over voltage • Net weight of the inverter: 10.5kg
• Inverter (charging station) with built-in
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
Select language 434

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
OFF-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 2000W,SET

The available 2000W kit is extremely compact and easy to carry. The quality of the electricity it pro-
duces is stable and comparable to that of mains electricity. Its compact size and mobility makes it
extremely suitable for powering small off-grid consumers. The battery and inverter are housed in
a wheeled case with a handle, and the solar panel is in a convenient carry bag. In addition to sun-
light, the inverter‘s lithium-ion battery can be charged from the mains (220V) or from a car battery
(12V). The inverter has many different types and voltages of output ports, making it a versatile
device suitable for powering appliances with different purposes.
Catalogue number:
98SOL2001
case of failure of 12V
• the main power supply for stand-by lighting • Waveform: Pure sine wave (sinusoid)
or other important low-power consumers. • Battery: Li-ion 25.2V 80Ah
• High quality, rechargeable lithium-ion battery • Battery capacity: 2016Wh
with cover capacity • Current charge characteristics: 29.4- 40V 15A
• 2016Wh (MAX)
• The inverter has 2 universal outlets 100-240V • Solar panel current charge characteristics:
AC (2000W), compatible with all known world 36V/ 200W
standard plugs • Charging time required: 10-12h
• USB port • USB outputs: USB 2.05V 2A/USB QC 3.0/
• Lighter for car Type-C
• Ports for simultaneous battery charging and • Outputs 12V DC: 1
discharging • Outputs 220V DC: 2
• 12V petrol car start function • Operating temperature: from -10 to 60°С
• Overload protection and warning, short • Dimensions LxWxH: 516x435x229mm
circuit,overheating, over voltage • Net weight of the inverter: 18kg
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY • Inverter (charging station) with built-in
+ 3 standard
0 extended
435 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

OFF-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 3500W,SET
The proposed kit is suitable for the construction of a stationary off-grid (OFF-GRID) solar system
in places where there is no power grid or as a hybrid to provide backup power in case of power
failure.
ELMARK offers the preparation of an individual project, including all the necessary elements for the
construction of a solar system, completely free of charge.
On our website www.elmarkholding.eu , you can fill in a form for preparing an individual project by
filling in and sending the parameters specified therein. We will prepare you a project and an offer.
ADVANTAGES OF THE SYSTEM

• Ability to operate up to 6 inverters in parallel and increase system power up to 21kW
• Ability to upgrade backup power capacity with adding additional batteries
• Inverter mit integrated MPPT controller
• Built-in controller monitoring battery charge and discharge rates
• Ability to operate the system with or without a battery
• Remote Wi-Fi system monitoring
• High quality monocrystalline half cut cells solar panels with high efficiency up to 21.5%
• Low performance drop of the system and long service life of the solar panels, up to 30 years
SOLAR SET WITH PANEL 465W

98SOL465M Catalogue number:
98SOL560M 98SOL3500HM/2
Description of the items Catalogue Quantity
included in the set number
Growatt hybrid inverter with a power of 3500W 423042 1 pc.
Solar panel 465W 98SOL465M 9 pc.
LiFePO4 baterry with capacity 2400Wh 98BAT2400LFP 1 pc.
Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50 m
Solar cable - black, Ø 4mm² M411079/BL 50 m
4P 32A DC switch 98SOL4P/DC 1 pc. 12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
7 extended
423042

Catalogue number:
98BAT2400LFP 98SOL3500HM/3
Growatt hybrid inverter with a power of 3500W 423042 1 pc.
LiFePO4 baterry with capacity 2400Wh 98BAT2400LFP 1 pc.
98SOL4P/DC 4P 32A DC switch 98SOL4P/DC 1 pc.
M411079/BL
M411079/R
Select language 436

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
OFF-GRID/HYBRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF

5000W - SET
failure.
construction of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website
www.elmarkholding.eu, you can fill in a form for the preparation of an individual project by filling in
and sending the parameters specified in it. We will prepare you a project and an offer.
• Inverter with built-in МРРТ controller
• Intelligent Energy Management System (EMS) function, improving the reliability of battery
• Short circuit protection
• DC reverse voltage protection
• Surge protection
• Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing the risk of fire
98SOL465M • Remote Wi-Fi monitoring
98SOL560M • Multiple operating modes to optimize system benefits

Catalogue number:
98SOL5000HM/2
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY included in the set number
+ 5 standard Hybrid inverter Solis with power of 5000W 423041 1 pc.
7 extended
Solar panel 465W 98SOL465M 11 pcs.
423041
LiFePO4 battery with capacity 2400Wh 98BAT2400LFP 1 pc.
4P 32A DC switch 98SOL4P/DC 2 pcs.
98BAT2400LFP

Catalogue number:
98SOL5000HM/3
98SOL4P/DC Hybrid inverter Solis with power of 5000W 423041 1 pc.
Solar panel 560W 98SOL560M 9 pcs.
4P 32A DC switch 98SOL4P/DC 2 pcs.
M411079/BL
M411079/R
437 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

OFF-GRID/HYBRID THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF
6000W - SET
failure.
construction of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website
www.elmarkholding.eu, you can fill in a form for the preparation of an individual project by filling in
and sending the parameters specified in it. We will prepare you a project and an offer.
• Maximum efficiency 98.4%
98SOL465M • Integrated AFCI arc flash protection reducing the risk of fire
• Multiple operating modes to optimize

Catalogue number:
98SOL6003HM/2
Description of the items
included in the set
Catalogue
number
Quantity
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Hybrid inverter Solis with power of от 6000W 423044 1 pc. + 5 standard

7 extended
423044 Solar panel 465W 98SOL465M 13 pc.

4P 32A DC switch 98SOL4P/DC 2 pc.
98BAT2400LFP

Catalogue number:
98SOL6003HM/3
98SOL4P/DC Hybrid inverter Solis with power of от 6000W 423044 1 pc.
M411079/BL
M411079/R
Select language 438

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
OFF-GRID/HYBRID THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF

10000W SET
failure.
construction of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website www.elmarkholding.eu, you
can fill in a form for the preparation of an individual project by filling in and sending the parameters
specified in it. We will prepare you a project and an offer.

• Maximum efficiency 98.4% of the inverter
• Intelligent EMS function, increasing battery life
98SOL560M • Multiple operating modes to optimize system benefits

Catalogue number:
98SOL10003HM/2
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Description of the items
included in the set
Catalogue
number
Quantity
+ 5 standard
7 extended Hybrid inverter Solis with power of 10 000W 423045 1 pc.
423045 LiFePO4 battery with capacity 2400Wh 98BAT2400LFP 1 pc.
98BAT2400LFP

Catalogue number:
98SOL10003HM/3
Hybrid inverter Solis with power of 10 000W 423045 1 pc.
98SOL4P/DC
M411079/BL
M411079/R
439 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

OFF-GRID/HYBRID THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER FROM
10KW TO 100KW, SET
The proposed kit is suitable for the construction of a stationary off-grid (OFF-GRID) solar system in
places where there is no power grid or as a hybrid to provide backup power in case of power fail-
ure. Steps with 10 kW are realized with additional inverters with power of 10kW and smart energy
manager. We have energy managers witch can work with 5 and with 10 inverters
*As an example - 10kW system no need energy manager. 100kW system has 10 inverters with
a power of 10kW, controlled by 1 smart energy manager. For a detailed list of the components
included in each system, please refer to the item card of each catalog number in the E-business
platform or in the ELMARK store.
SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 20000W

Catalogue number:
98SOL20003HM/4
98SOL465M
98SOL560M Description of the items Catalogue Quantity
Growatt Hybrid inverter with power of 10 000W 423046 2 pc.
Energy smart manager 423054 1 pc.
Solar cable - black, Ø 4mm² M411079/BL 100m
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
423046 + 5 standard
7 extended
Catalogue number:
98SOL20003HM/5
Hybrid inverter Growat with power of 10 000W 423046 2 pc.
Energy smart manager 423054 1 pc.
423054 Solar panel 560W 98SOL560M 36 pc.
4P 32A DC switc 98SOL4P/DC 4 pc.
M411079/BL
98SOL4P/DC M411079/R
SOLAR SYSTEM FROM 10 TO 100KW- CATALOGUE NUMBERS
10kW 20kW 30kW 40kW 50kW

System with 465W solar panels 98SOL10003HM/4 98SOL20003HM/4 98SOL30003HM/4 98SOL40003HM/4 98SOL50003HM/4
60kW 70kW 80kW 90kW 100kW

Select language 440

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
POWER STORAGE INVERTER 3000W WITH BATTERY - SET

The inverter is used to upgrade the existing SOLIS single-phase grid (ON-GRID) power generation
system to a battery-capable hybrid system to optimize self-consumption. The energy storage
inverter is a good choice for already built ON-GRID systems, providing backup power when the
main is dropped.
can fill out a form for the preparation of an individual project by filling in and submitting the parameters
specified therein. We will prepare you a project and an offer.
• Ability to upgrade the capacity of the backup power supply with the addition of additional
batteries
• Compatible with any ON-GRID SOLIS SYSTEM
• Compatible with both li-ion battery and lead-acid battery
• OFF-GRID, back-up function
423040 • Inverter mit integrated MPPT controller
• Intelligent EMS function, increasing battery life
• Minimum/maximum voltage protection of the battery
• Battery protection at wrong poles connection
98BAT2400LFP Catalogue number:

98SOL3000EM
THE SET INCLUDES:

12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Solis energy storage inverter with a power of 3000W 423040 1 pc.
+ 5 standard
7 extended
441 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | ON-GRID SETS

ON-GRID SOLAR SYSTEM SETS
ELMARK offers various ready-made options and solutions for off-grid solar systems with capacities
from 3.6W to 110kW.
ON-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 3600W, SET
These systems are preferred for the construction of solar power plants for the purpose of selling
electricity or the construction of a grid system for the direct supply of consumers during the day in
places where there is an established power grid. Their operating principle makes them extremely
suitable for the partial reduction or complete exclusion of electricity bills.
• Inverter with accurate MRT algorithm
• Intelligent EMS function
98SOL465M • Network monitoring
98SOL560M • Protection stopping the voltage supply in case of failure of power supply from the mains. This
prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage from the system to the network during operation and
while in combined mode
Catalogue number:
98SOL3600M/2
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
7 extended
ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 3600W 423001 1 pc.
423001 Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50 m
98SOL4P/DC SOLAR SET WITH PANEL 560W

Catalogue number:
98SOL3600M/3
M411079/BL Solar panel 560W 98SOL560M 7 pc.
M411079/R Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50 m
Select language 442

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ON-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 5000W SET


• Protection stopping the voltage supply in case of failure of power supply from the mains. This
98SOL465M SOLAR SET WITH PANEL 465W

98SOL5000M/TB2
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Solar panel 465W 98SOL465M 11 pc.
+ 5 standard
7 extended Solar cable - red M411079/R 50 м
Solar cable - black M411079/BL 50 м
423002

Catalogue number:
98SOL5000M/TB3
98SOL4P/DC included in the set number
Solar cable - red M411079/R 50 м
Solar cable - black M411079/BL 50 м
M411079/BL
M411079/R
443 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ON-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 8000W - SET

98SOL465M
98SOL8000M/2
Hybrid inverter Solis with power of 8000W 423003 1 pc.
Solar panel 465W
Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm²
98SOL465M
M411079/R
18 pc.
50 m
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
7 extended
423003

Catalogue number:
98SOL8000M/3
Hybrid inverter Solis with power of 8000W 423003 1 pc.
M411079/BL
M411079/R
Select language 444

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ON-GRID THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 6000W, SET


while in combined mode.
98SOL465M
98SOL6000M/2
ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 10 000W 423019 1 pc.
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Solar panel 465W 98SOL465M 13 pc.
+ 5 standard
7 extended Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50m
423019

Catalogue number:
98SOL6000M/3
ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 10 000W 423019 1 pc
Solar panel 560W 98SOL560M 11pc.
Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50m
M411079/BL
M411079/R
445 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE


98SOL465M
98SOL10000M/2
Solar panel 465W
98SOL465M
M411079/R
22 pc.
50 м
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
7 extended
Solar cable - black, Ø 4mm² M411079/BL 50 м
423020

Catalogue number:
98SOL10000M/3
Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50 м
Solar cable - black, Ø 4mm² M411079/BL 50 м
M411079/BL
M411079/R
Select language 446

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

construction of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website www.elmarkholding.eu , you
can fill in a form for preparing an individual project by filling in and sending the parameters specified
therein. We will prepare you a project and an offer.
• Overvoltage protection

98SOL560M 98SOL15000M/2
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Solar cable - red M411079/R 75 m
+ 5 standard
7 extended
Solar cable - black M411079/BL 75 m
423021

Catalogue number:
98SOL15000M/3
98SOL4P/DC
Solar cable - red M411079/R 75 m
M411079/BL
M411079/R
447 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

construction of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website www.elmarkholding.eu , you

98SOL560M
98SOL20000M/2
Solar panel 465W
98SOL465M
M411079/R
44 pc.
100 m
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
7 extended
423021

Catalogue number:
98SOL20000M/3
98SOL4P/DC ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 20 000W 423022 1 pc.
M411079/BL
M411079/R
Select language 448

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ON-GRID THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 30 000W,SET

ELMARK offers the preparation of an individual project, including all the necessary
elements for the construction of a solar system, completely free of charge. On our website
www.elmarkholding.eu , you can fill in a form for preparing an individual project by filling in and
sending the parameters specified therein. We will prepare you a project and an offer.
• ADVANTAGES OF THE SYSTEM
• Integrated working Volt-watt mode of operation
• Leakage current suppression technology
• Anti-resonance, supporting more than 6MW in parallel in a single transformer
• Over voltage protection
• Scanning I/V Curves
98SOL465M prevents the occasional pop-up of voltage from the system to the network during operation and
98SOL560M while in combined mode

Catalogue number:
98SOL30000M/2
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
7 extended included in the set number
423023

98SOL4P/DC Catalogue number:
98SOL30000M/3
M411079/BL Solar cable - red M411079/R 100 m
M411079/R Solar cable - black M411079/BL 100 m
449 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ON-GRID THREE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 40KW -110KW
ELMARK offers options for drafting solar systems with capacities from 40 to 110 kW after coordi-
nation and drafting of a project and a quote on an individual request. The powers of solar systems
that we can offer in this range are the following:
• 40 000W • 60 000W • 100 000W

• 50 000W • 80 000W • 110 000W
ON-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 5000W, SET
WITH GARAGE CONSTRUCTION
98SOL465M • Suitable for the construction of charging stations for electric vehicles
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• Network monitoring + 5 standard

7 extended
• Protection stopping the voltage supply when the mains power fails. This prevents accidental
cross voltage from the system to the grid during operation and in combined mode
Catalogue number:
98SOL5000M/2CP
423002 Description of the items Catalogue Quantity
Garage construction 423278/CP 1 pc.
M411079/BL
98SOL4P/DC M411079/R
423278/CP
Select language 450

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ON-GRID SINGLE-PHASE SOLAR SYSTEM WITH POWER OF 8000W -

SET WITH GARAGE CONSTRUCTION
places where there is an established power grid.

• Suitable for the construction of charging stations for electric vehicles

Catalogue number:
98SOL465M
98SOL510M 98SOL8000M/2CP
12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 8000W
Solar panel 465W
423003
98SOL465M
1 pc.
18 pc.
+ 5 standard
7 extended Solar cable - red M411079/R 50 m
423003

Catalogue number:
98SOL8000M/CP
M411079/BL included in the set number
98SOL4P/DC M411079/R ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 8000W 423003 1 pc.
423278/CP
451 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

WITH GARAGE CONSTRUCTION

Catalogue number:
98SOL465M 98SOL6000M/2CP
98SOL510M
Solar panel 465W 98SOL465M 13 pc. 12 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Solar cable - red, Ø 4mm² M411079/R 50 m + 5 standard
7 extended
423019

Catalogue number:
98SOL6000M/CP
M411079/BL ON-GRID inverter Solis with power 6000W 423019 1 pc.
98SOL4P/DC M411079/R Solar panel 510W 98SOL510M 12 pc.
423278/CP
Select language 452

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
KM1-63DC 6KA/10KA DC MCB
EKM1-63DC
ini Circuit Breaker6KA/10KA DC MCB
SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | EL. DEVICES
Mini Circuit Breaker Standard_ IEC60947-2

MCB Characteristics
MCB Characteristics
ELECTRICAL DEVICES FOR PV SYSTEMS
Time limit for
Expected
Time limit for result
not tripping
Expected
result
not tripping
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV
b 1.30ln
Documents corresponding to Tripping
MINIATURE t＜1h CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV the rated working voltage of DC circuit breakers
the product: c 8ln Cold state a
speciallyTripping
used in photovoltaic can be as high as DC 1000V. The special arc extinguishing and
c 8ln Cold state a Tripping limiting system can quickly disconnect the fault current of the DC power distribution
current
Standard IEC60947-2
d 12ln Cold state a system. The photovoltaic module, an important component in solar power system, can avoid
Tripping
Note: The terminology “Cold state” means damage that thefrom high DC
test is performed
at reverse current and AC feedback current caused by the inverter failure,
the base calibration temperature with
the base calibration temperature with no
no load priortest.
load prior to the
to the test.
FUNCTIONS
• Disconnection the fault current of the DC power distribution system trough are extinguishing
and current limiting system.
• Protection from high DC reverse current and AC feedback current caused by the inverter failure,
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram Circuit Diagram • Responsible protection of high cost components in PV system.
• Covers all common PV system voltages and currents.
1 3 1 3 5 7
1 3 1 3 5 7 TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 2P(500V); 4P(1000V)
2 4 • Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A
2 4 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8
• Rated impulse withstands voltage (1.5/50) Uimp: 4000V
• Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min: 2kV
1P 2P 4P
1P
2P 4P • Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000
Overall and Installation Dimension(mm) • Contact position indicator: Yes
• IP code: IP>20
• Cable
35.5
45
81
• Pin-type busbar
7 YEARS TOTAL • U-type busbar
35.5
45
81
WARRANTY
• Terminal size top/bottom for cable: 25mm2
+ 7 standard 18 18 50
0 extended 36
54
66
78
• Terminal size top/bottom for busbar: 25mm2
72
18 18 50
36 66
EKM1-63DC 6KA/10KA DC MCB

54
72
78
MOUNTING 02
• Vertical
02
• DIN-rail
Mini Circuit Breaker Standard_
• For mounting in housing or industrial IEC60947-2
environment without serious current interference
• Ambient temperature: -5° C to + 65°C±2° C
• Daily temperature average: ≤35° C
MCB Characteristics
Characteristics Curves
Time limit for

Expected
result
not tripping
the base calibration temperature with no load prior to the test.
Circuit Diagram
1 3 1 3 5 7
453 Select language

2onpage 470: BG4 BA CR DE EL HU IT RO Sl SK SR
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

41264 C62DC PV/6А 2 6 6 4.0 90
41265 C62DC PV/10А 2 10 6 4.0 90
41266 C62DC PV/13А 2 13 6 4.0 90
41267 C62DC PV/16А 2 16 6 4.0 90
41268 C62DC PV/20А 2 20 6 6.0 90
41269 C62DC PV/25А 2 25 6 6.0 90
41270 C62DC PV/32А 2 32 6 10.0 90
41271 C62DC PV/40А 2 40 6 10.0 90
41272 C62DC PV/50А 2 50 6 16.0 90
41273 C62DC PV/63А 2 63 6 25.0 90

41564 C64DC PV/6А 4 6 6 4.0 45
41565 C64DC PV/10А 4 10 6 4.0 45
41566 C64DC PV/13А 4 13 6 4.0 45
41567
41568
C64DC PV/16А
C64DC PV/20А
4
4
16
20
6
6
4.0
6.0
45
45
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
41569 C64DC PV/25А 4 25 6 6.0 45
41570 C64DC PV/32А 4 32 6 10.0 45
41571 C64DC PV/40А 4 40 6 10.0 45
41572 C64DC PV/50А 4 50 6 16.0 45
41573 C64DC PV/63А 4 63 6 25.0 45
Select language 454

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
EKL6-100B 10KA B Type RCCB

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE (RCD)- JEL7B
Residual Current Circuit Breaker Standard_ IEC61
Documents corresponding DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM IEC62
to the product: JEL7B Type B RCD has compact structure, good reliability, and high safety. They ensure higher
protection levels with maximum operational continuity under all working conditions. Type B RCDs
Tripping are sensitive to
Lagging Angle AC and steady DC leakage I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A
IEC61008-1
IEC62423 AC, pulsating currents. This type may be required for
Current use in photovoltaic 0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
EKL6-100B 10KA B Type
can resultRCCB
(PV) solar energy installations because the PV panels produce a DC output
Range
and some types 90°
of fault in the leakage 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
of DC currents to earth. Type B RCDs can0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
ensure
maximum safety in135° many applications, such as EV0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
Charging Station, Crane and Elevator, variable
Residual
speedCurrent
drives,Circuit
medical Breaker
equipment, PV and Wind power plants, etc. Standard_ IEC61008-1
IEC62423
TECHNICAL DATA
Alternative Current Sensitive Pulsating direct current sensitive Surge current proof
Tripping Lagging Angle
• Mode: Electromagnetic I△n＞0.01A I△n≤0.01A
• Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1min:
B class
Current
• Type: 0°
B for AC/DC current 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
2.5kV 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n
RangeTripping
• Rated is ensured
operating for
90° sinusoidal
voltage AC 50/60 Hz
Ue 2P: 240V 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
• Electrical life: 2 000 cycles 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n
residual
• Rated currentsvoltage
operating pulsed
135° DCUeresidual
4P: 415V 50/60 Hz 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n
• Mechanical life: 4 000 cycles0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n
currents, alternating
• Insulation voltage Ui:residual
500V • IP code: IP>20
sinusoidal
• Circuit currents
breaker ratedupcurrent:
to 1000Hz,
accordingThey
to thereact• to AC and pulsating DC type: RCCB’s surge capacity.
Alternative Current Sensitive Pulsating direct current sensitive
Terminal connection Surge current proof
pulsating direct residual currents and fault current¾which
table Cablereach 0 or almost Not tripping at standardized 8/
for smooth
B class
• Residual directresponsiveness:
current residual currents, 30mA 0 within one¾time period of the surge-current waves acc.to VDE
Pin-type busbar
whether
• Break timeapplied
Tripping suddenly
is ensured
under IΔn:for or
sinusoidal
≤0.1s AC mains frequency. Part 2 with surge current value
increasing slowly.
¾ U-type busbar
residual
• Circuit breaker currents pulsed
tripping DC residual
curve: C tocable:
250A. 35mm2
currents, alternating residual • Terminal size top/bottom for
sinusoidal currents up to 1000Hz,
• Breaking capacity: 10 000A They react to AC and pulsating DC
• Terminal size RCCB’s surge capacity.
top/bottom for busbar: 35mm2
• Short pulsating direct residual
circuit protection currents
device and fuse:
(SCPD) fault current which reach 0 or torque:
• Tightening almost 2.5Nm
Not tripping at standardized 8/20 υs
10 000Afor smooth direct residual currents, 0 within one time period oftemperature:
• Ambient the surge-current waves acc.to VDE 0432
-10°C + 65°C
• Ratedwhether
impulse applied suddenly or
withstand
increasing slowly.
mains frequency.
voltage(1.5/50) • Installation altitude: Part 2 with surge current values of up
up to 2000m
to 250A.
Uimp: 4000V
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram Type B (2P) Type B (4P)
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard Type B (2P) Type B (4P)
0 extended
Circuit diagram

35.5
45
83
35.5
45
35.583
35.5
21.3
21.3
54 72 73.1
54 72 73.1
Overall and installation dimensions (mm)
02
455 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

Catalogue number Type Number Breaking Rated Packing/
(kA) (A)
30
40845B JEL7B 1P+N 10 16 1/90
40846B JEL7B 1P+N 10 25 1/90
40847B JEL7B 1P+N 10 32 1/90
40848B JEL7B 1P+N 10 40 1/90
40849B JEL7B 1P+N 10 63 1/90
40850B JEL7B 1P+N 10 80 1/90
40851B JEL7B 1P+N 10 100 1/90

(kA) (A)
30
40852B JEL7B 3P+N 10 16 1/45
40853B JEL7B 3P+N 10 25 1/45
40854B JEL7B 3P+N 10 32 1/45
40855B JEL7B 3P+N 10 40 1/45
40856B JEL7B 3P+N 10 63 1/45
40857B JEL7B 3P+N 10 80 1/45 7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
40858B JEL7B 3P+N 10 100 1/45 + 7 standard
0 extended
Select language 456

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
Standard_ IEC/EN61643-31
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES T2 DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV)

SYSTEMS
- - - -
EKU5T240PV2M600S
Documents corresponding Type 2 PV SPD is a DC surge protector specially designed for photovoltaic power supply systems.
to the product: Max continuous operating voltage reach DC1500V. These units must be installed in parallel on the
IEC/EN61643-31 DC networks to be protected and provide common and different modes protection. Its installed
location is recommended at both ends of the DC power supply line (solar panel side and inverter/
converter side), especiallyWithRemoteSignaling
if the line routing is external and long. Type 2 SPDs protect against indi-
Uc:600:DC600V,1000:DC1000V,1500:DC1500V
rect lightning strikes, which are characterized by 8/20 µs waveforms. An 8/20 µs waveform means
that the strike has an 8 µsNo.ofModule:2:2Module,3:3Module
rise time and a duration to one-half peak of 20 µs.
SolarPVSystem
TECHNICAL DATA I.max:40kA
ClassificationT2
• SPD classification according to IEC/EN61643- ¾ 2P 1000V: ≤4kV
SPDserieNo.5
¾ 3P 1500V: ≤5.2kV
31: T2 CompanyCode
• Max. continuous operating a.c.voltage Ucpv: • Operating temperature range (Tu): -40º~80º
¾ 2P: 600 and 1000V • Operating State/Fault Indication: Green/Red
¾ 3P: 1500V • Cross-section area (Min.): 4 mm2
• Nominal discharge current (8/20μs) In: 20kA • Cross-section area (Max.):Standard_
35 mm2IEC/EN61643-31
• Maximum discharge current (8/20μs) Imax: • Enclosure material: Thermal Plastic UL94-V0
SPDTypeReferenceList
40kA • Ingress Protection: IP20
• Voltage protection level DC+/DV-to PE:
¾ 2P 600V: ≤2.6kV Max.ContinuousOperatingDCVoltage
No.ofPoles
600VDC 1000VDC 1500VDC
2Module EKU5-T2-40PV-2M600 EKU5-T2-40PV-2M1000 -
3Module
number poles - EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1000 EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1500
(pcs)
Type I.max 40KA PV Solar DC SPD
WithRemoteSignaling
64209 2P 20 40 600 1/64
2Module EKU5-T2-40PV-2M600S EKU5-T2-40PV-2M1000S -
3Module
64210 2P - 20 EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1000S
40 1000 EKU5-T2-40PV-3M1500S
1/64
EKU5-T2-40PV
64309 3P EKU5-T2-40PV
20 40 EKU5-T2-40PV
1500 EKU5-T2-40PV
1/32
2P(600VDC) 2P(1000VDC) 3P(1000VDC) 3P(1500VDC)
TechnicalData
SPDclassificationaccordingtoIEC/EN61643-31 T2 T2 T2
Basiccircuitdiagram
Max.continuousoperatinga.c.voltage Ucpv 600VDC 1000VDC 1500VDC
7 Norminaldischargecurrent(8/20μs) In 20kA 20kA 20kA

YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Maximumdischargecurrent(8/20µs) Imax 40kA 40kA 40kA
DC+ DC- DC+ DC-
2Mods ≤2.6kV ≤4.0kV -
+ 7 Up
standard
VoltageprotectionlevelDC+/DV-toPE
0 extended 3Mods - ≤4.0kV ≤5.2kV
Responsetime tA ≤25ns ≤25ns ≤25ns
Operatingtemperaturerange Tu -40℃~80℃
OperatingState/FaultIndication Green/Red
Cross-sectionarea(Min.) 4mm
2
Type I.max 40KA PV Solar DC SPD Cross-sectionarea(Max.) 35mm

2
Formountingon 35mmDinrail
Enclosurematerial ThermalPlasticUL94-V0
DegreeofProtection IP20
No.ofMoudles 2P(2Mods),3P(3Mods)

2P 3P
OverallandInstallationDimension(mm) Circuit diagram
09
68mm
Overall and installation dimensions
10
457 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES T1+T2 DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV)
SYSTEMS
Documents corresponding T1+T2 three-module photovoltaic surge protective device (SPD) (with three -step DC switching
to the product: device) features visual indication and optional remote contact signaling (floating changeover
IEC/EN61643-31 contact) for use in PV systems.
TECHNICAL DATA
• SPD classification according to IEC/EN61643-31: T1+T2
• Max. continuous operating a.c.voltage Ucpv: 1000 and 1500 VDC
• Impulse Discharge Current Iimp (10/350 μs): 6.25kA
• Total Discharge Current Itotal (10/350 μs): 12.5kA
• Nominal discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA
• Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20µs): 40kA
• Voltage protection level DC+/DV-to PE: ≤5.2kV
• Response time: ≤25ns
• Operating temperature range (Tu): -40º~80º
• Operating State/Fault Indication: Green/Red
• Cross-section area (Min.): 4 mm2
• Cross-section area (Max.): 35 mm2
• Enclosure material: Thermal Plastic UL94-V0
• Ingress Protection: IP20
Circuit diagram
number poles (pcs)
64310 3P 20 40 1000 1/32
64311 3P 20 40 1500 1/32
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 7 standard
0 extended
Connection diagram Overall and installation dimensions
Select language 458

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
PHOTOVOLTAIC FUSE HOLDERS 1500V DC, 15PV14L SERIES

Photovoltaic fuse holders provide protection against short-circuits and overloads. They work with
fuse till 50A and rated voltage 1500V DC.
FUNCTIONS AND ADVANTAGES:
• Protection against short-circuits and overloads.
• Easy installation and fuse removal with no additional tools required.
• Tin-plated bimetallic copper fuse clips deliver superior fatigue resistance compared to traditional
spring brass.
• High temperature performance thanks to venting grooves and cooling chambers that improve
heat dissipation also for multiple configurations.
• Finger safety feature which ensures personnel protection during maintenance (no possibility of
getting in touch with live parts during fuse replacement).
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated Voltage: 1500V DC
• Size of Fuse Link: suitable for fuse with sizes 10x85 and 14x85mm
• Class of Operation: gPV
• Mechanical Life: 500 times
• Tightening Torque: 2.5Nm
• Cable section of terminal: 10mm²
Catalogue Type Number of Rated current Base dimensions (mm) Packing /Box
number poles (А) W H D (pcs)
15PV14L PV DC 1P 50 22.4 134 92 1/120
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
459 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

FUSE LINKS 1500V DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC FUSE HOLDERS 15PV14L
SERIES
A fuse is a replaceable circuit protection device that provides protection to both the equipment
and the equipment operator in the event of a circuit overload. It is commonly connected with a
circuit in series, and when fault current increases to a certain value, the fuse blows out to cut off
the circuit so as to fulfill an aim of protecting other equipment in the circuit. The fuse is the most
commonly used component in an over current protection circuit. The traditional fuse mainly con-
sists of two parts of a tube body, of which both ends have metal connecting terminals, and metal
melts in the tube body.
Solar fuses vary in a number of different ways including fuse speed, voltage and amperage rating,
braking capacity and their physical size and shape.
FUNCTIONS
• Protect solar power equipment against over current.
• Protect against reverse current and short circuits.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 1500V DC
• Rated current: 6-50A
• Class of operation: gPV
• Breaking capacity: 20kA
• Sizes: 10x85mm and 14x85mm
Catalogue Voltage (V) Rated current (А) Size of the fuse Packing/ Box (pcs)
number (mm)
15PV06A 1500V DC 6 10x85 1000
15PV10A 1500V DC 10 10x85 1000
15PV12A 1500V DC 12 10x85 1000
15PV16A 1500V DC 16 10x85 1000
15PV20A 1500V DC 20 10x85 1000
15PV25A 1500V DC 25 10x85 1000
15PV32A 1500V DC 32 10x85 1000
15PV40A
15PV45A
1500V DC
1500V DC
40
45
14x85
14x85
400
400
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
2 extended
15PV50A 1500V DC 50 14x85 400
Select language 460

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
1000V DC HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, DC1

SERIES
StandardI EC 60947-1 capacity up to 20kA, which can ensure reliable short-circuit protection of the system. The MCCBs
IEC 60947-2 available in 2P, with nominal voltage of 1000VDC.
GB/T 14048.2
FUNCTIONS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Pole number: 2P
• IP code: IP>20
MOUNTING
+ + • Joining with bolts
Dimensions (mm)
L
Type L W H
7 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ +
DC1-320 180 76 126
+ 7 standard
0 extended
W H Catalogue Type Rated current Number of Operating/Max. Packing/ box
number ln (A) poles breaking capacity (pcs)
(kA) lcs/Icu 1000V
44000DC DC1-320 50A 2P 20/20 1
44001DC DC1-320 63A 2P 20/20 1
44002DC DC1-320 80A 2P 20/20 1
44003DC DC1-320 100A 2P 20/20 1
44004DC DC1-320 125A 2P 20/20 1
44005DC DC1-320 160A 2P 20/20 1
44006DC DC1-320 200A 2P 20/20 1
44007DC DC1-320 250A 2P 20/20 1
44008DC DC1-320 300A 2P 20/20 1
461 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

1500V DC HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, DC1
SERIES
capacity up to 20kA, which can ensure reliable short-circuit protection of the system. The MCCBs
Standard IEC 60947-1
available in 2P & 3P, with nominal voltage of 1500VDC.
IEC 60947-2
GB/T 14048.2 FUNCTIONS
TECHNICAL DATA
• Pole number: 2P
• IP code: IP>20
MOUNTING
+ + • Joining with bolts.
• Mounting position: vertical.
Dimensions (mm)
L
7
Type L W H
YEARS TOTAL
DC1-320-3P 180 107 126 WARRANTY
+ + DC1-400-2P 250 124 165 + 7 standard
0 extended
W H DC1-630-2P 250 124 165
DC1-800-2P 250 124 165
Catalogue Type Rated current Number of poles Operating/Max. Packing/ box

number ln (A) breaking capacity (pcs)
(kA) lcs/Icu 1000V
44012DC DC1-320 50A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44013DC DC1-320 63A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44014DC DC1-320 80A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44015DC DC1-320 100A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44016DC DC1-320 125A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44017DC DC1-320 160A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44018DC DC1-320 200A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44019DC DC1-320 250A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1
44009DC DC1-400 400A 2P (2P housing) 20/20 1
44010DC DC1-630 630A 2P (2P housing) 20/20 1
44011DC DC1-800 800A 2P (2P housing) 20/20 1
Select language 462

POWER SYSTEMS | VEHICLE CHARGERS
CHARGING STATIONS FOR

ELECTRIC AND PLUG-IN CARS
Advantages
of charging stations
Let‘s first look at what is the advantage of an electric car charger over a standard charge from a single-
phase (two-pin) socket at home to answer the question, do I need a special charging station at home?
One of the answers to this question lies in the SPEED of charging

the electric car battery from zero to full charge and whether it is
acceptable to you. The charging speed depends on the capacity
of the battery and the power it consumes per hour.
The standard Schuko socket allows charging the battery with a
maximum current of 16A, which is equivalent to approximately
3680W. The charging cables in turn deliberately reduce the
magnitude of the current from 16 to 12A, in order to protect
the installation from overloading. So the power drawn from
the battery per hour drops to 2760W. For a mass battery of
about 40kWh, the time required to fully charge it under these
conditions would be about 15 hours.
463 Select language

REDUCES CHARGING TIME BY

UP TO 3 TIMES
ELMARK‘s 7kW single-phase charger will speed up the
charging process between 2 and 3 times. Thus, the same
battery with a capacity of 40kWh will be charged for about 6
hours, enough time to fully charge at night rate and the car
to be charged 100% for the next day.
40kWh 7kW 6 hours

2018 Nissan LEAF home charging charging
station time
SECURITY -
ANOTHER REASON TO CHOOSE
THE HOME CHARGING STATION
Standard household outlets are not designed
to withstand continuous loads with maximum
power for 10-15 hours. These loads, combined
with the long duration, can cause the installation
to heat up, increasing the risk of damage and fire.
The purpose-built charging point,
including the charging station and its
accompanying installation, ensure that they are
safe from any electrical hazards.
ENSURE YOUR COMFORT

Another advantage that ensures the use of a home charger station is convenience. The commitment to
looking for a convenient place near home for charging the car battery and the loss of time during its charging
period is dropped.
Select language 464

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELMARK PORTABLE ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGERS

ELMARK provides single-phase AC portable EV chargers with rated power of 3.7kW and 7.3kW
AC with has multiple safety protection mechanisms such as over current, over voltage and over
temperature protection to ensure safe use.
Portable EV chargers are light in weight and stable in performance, resistant to falling and pres-
sure. The waterproof performance is up to IP65, and it can work normally when immersed in water
for a short time
It is usually carried with the car to facilitate the owner to charge in any charging condition.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Rated voltage: 207-253V AC
• Poles: 1P+N+ PE
• Rated current: adjustable
• Charging cable length: 4m
• IP code: IP65
• Connector material: Flame retardant, RoHS, wear resistance, rolling pressure resistance, high and
low temperature resistance, stamping resistance, high oil resistance, ultraviolet rays resistance.
• Protections: Over temperature, over/under voltage protection, over current protection, residual
current protection(AC30mA,DC6mA)
• Terminals: silver plated
• Gun head material: ABS, safe and durable, not easy to ignite
• Display: LCD
• Charger size (LxWxH): 180x82x50mm
• Working temperature: from -25 to +50°C
• Working humidity: 3-95%
• Working altitude: <2000m
Catalogue Number of Rated power Output current Cable length Packing/ Box
number poles (kW) (A) (m)
98EVP37 1P+N+ PE 3.7 6-16 adjustable 4 1
98EVP73 1P+N+ PE 7.3 6-32 adjustable 4 1
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
465 Select language

GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELMARK RFID ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING WALL BOXES
RFID EV Charging wall box, it is easy to install, stable in performance, and has a complete protec-
tion mechanism. The LCD display can show the detailed charging status. To operate RIFD function,
it has a card writer and management program. The charger can be used with a stand.
This device is a charger that, for reasons of convenience and safety, must meet a number of tech-
nical requirements, while at the same time being designed to supply our vehicle in the comfort of
our homes. This is the ideal solution for supplying electricity to the battery, as it allows us to make
the most of idle hours, such as at night, to charge our vehicles.
ADVANTAGES
• Applicable with 99% of electric vehicles
• Two installation modes: on the wall or on a stand
• Easy charging activation via magnetic card
• Precise monitoring of PWM signal variations
• Oxygen-free pure copper cables, flame retardant and high temperature resistance
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS:
• RFID Function: The charging station can be configured with contactless IC card swiping function,
and charging can only be carried out through authorized IC card. If the IC card is lost, the internal
dip switch can be used to set the IC card losing module. There are 2 IC cards which are authorized
• DLB Function: This function is the automatic distribution of charging current, through an
external current transformer. During the charging process, the charging station will monitor the
online charging current in real time and make corresponding adjustments. When it is detected
that the current of the main circuit is greater than the set current, the charging station will reduce
the charging current until the charging is stopped. When it is detected that the current of the
main circuit is less than the set current, the charging station will continue to increase the charging
current until 32A or 63A. In this state, the maximum charging current of the charging station is 32A
and 63A. While the charging current is uncertain, the current setting switch of the charging station
becomes the transformation ratio setting switch of the current transformer. The transformation
ratio of the external current transformer is set by software or factory setting. The factory default
current transformer transformation ratio is 100A/5A.
• RCMU function: When the charging station is working , if there is a DC leakage current signal,
the RCMU will immediately output a fault signal and cut off the output power within 300ms,
ensuring the safety and reliability of personal and property. If the fault is eliminated, the charging
station will automatically restart charging according to the program within 3S. Before charging,
the RCMU module of the device will automatically carry out the accuracy and detection of the DC 3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
leakage current to ensure the safe and reliable operation of the device. + 3 standard
0 extended
• CT access function: The charging station can provide an analog input function, the input analog
is AC0-5A, which is used to display the current working current. When the detected working cur-
rent is greater than the set current value, the charging station will reduce the charging current to
the set current value. Thereby ensuring the safe and reliable operation of the charging station.
• LCD display function
TECHNICAL DATA
• Charger output: socket type 2 • Terminals: silver plated
• Rated voltage: 207-253V AC; 360-440V AC • Gun head material: ABS, safe and durable, not
• Poles: 1P+N+ PE; 3P+N+ PE easy to ignite
• Rated current: adjustable • RFID module for IC card with 2 cards
• IP code: IP54 • DLB: CT 100/5A
• Connector material: Flame retardant, RoHS, • Lock: Electro-magnetic lock DC 12V 4 wire
wear resistance, rolling pressure resistance, type
high and low temperature resistance, stamping • Communication mode: OCPP1.6 Wi-Fi, 4G
resistance, high oil resistance, ultraviolet rays • Display: LCD
resistance. • Mounting: wall or post
• Protections: Over temperature, over/under • Charger size (LxWxH): 245x123x357mm
voltage protection, over current protection, • Working temperature: from -25 to +50°C
residual current protection(AC30mA,DC6mA), • Working humidity: 3-95%
surge protection • Working altitude: <2000m
Catalogue number Rated Number of poles Rated power Packing/ Box

voltage (V) (kW)
98EV73 207-253 1P+N+ PE 7.3 1
98EV11 360-440 3P+N+ PE 11 1
98EV22 360-440 3P+N+ PE 22 1
Select language 466

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
EV CHARGING CABLES
EV charging cable is the carrier connecting electric vehicle and charging pile. And its basic func-
tion is to transmit electric energy.
EV Charging cables are generally used in charging stations, parking lots, hotels, communities,
garages, and other areas.
At present, the safety of electric vehicles has become the focus of the industry.
During electric vehicles’ charging and discharging process, it is important to pay attention to safe-
ty issues because of the long usage time, high current intensity, and high frequency of cables.
Based on ensuring good insulation performance, electric vehicle charging cable shall have high
heat resistance and aging resistance.
At the same time, it shall have good low smoke and flame-retardant characteristics during com-
bustion to minimize loss and injury.
Type 2 AC charging cables double-plug version (Type 2 to Type 2 or Female to Male Extension
Cable), which is used for the connection from the charging station end to the electric vehicle end.
Product meets the IEC 62196-2 charging connector standards. They are mainly two current options
of 16A and 32A, which are divided into single-phase and three-phase version and defaults to a 5m
black straight cable.
TECHNICAL DATA
• Type: female to male type 2 charging cable
• Case material: thermoplastic, flame retardant grade UL94 V-0
• Pin: copper alloy, silver + thermoplastic on the top
• Insulation resistance: >500MΩ(DC500V)
• Conductive terminal temperature rise: ≤50K
• Withstand voltage: 2500V/min
• Contact resistance: ≤0.3Ω
• Mechanical life: no-load plug in/ pull out >50000 times
• Coupled insertion force: 45N~80N
• Withstanding impact: Tolerable to 2-ton car rolling or 1m height drop without damage.
Catalogue Operating Rated Suitable for Cable type Cable Packing/

number voltage current charging station length Box
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
(V)
98EVP32/1P 207-253
(A)
32
with power (kW)
7.3 3x6+2x0.5mm2
(m)
5 1
+ 3 standard
0 extended 98EVP16/3P 360-440 16 11 5x2.5mm+2x0.5mm2 5 1
98EVP32/3P 360-440 32 22 5x6mm+2x0.5mm2 5 1
EV CHARGING PILLAR
In cases where the charging station cannot be installed on a wall and the parking space is remote
from the building, it is recommended to install the charging station on a pillar to which the
charging cable is freely accessible.
Catalogue number:
98EVPOLE
467 Select language

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | WARRANTY
EXTENDED WARRANTY TERMS FOR SOLAR INVERTERS -
UP TO 12 YEARS
• The extended warranty terms are valid only for Solis brand inverters.
• The standard product warranty on Solis brand inverters is 5 years.
• The extended warranty for inverters is issued for 5 to 12 years, against additional payment.
• Warranty extension can only be made on the official ELMARK website at www.elmarkholding.eu
after the purchase of the „Extended Warranty Package“ within 30 days from the date of purchase
of the inverter.
• The extension of the warranty of a purchased inverter can be made at any time, provided that the
condition“Package-extended warranty“ has been purchased within 30 days after the purchase of
the solar inverter.
• Extension of the warranty will be refused in case you wish to pay an additional „Package-Extended
warranty“ after the thirtieth day of purchase of the inverter.
• Subject to the above terms, ELMARK shall issue a certificate certifying the extension of the
warranty period.
• When purchasing a solar system kit with an included inverter and purchasing the „Additional
Warranty Package“, the warranty extension applies to all items included in the set.
WARRANTY TERMS
The terms apply to all products in the „Solar systems“ section and are valid within the officially
announced warranty periods:
• Upon sale, ELMARK guarantees that the products are free from defects and function under normal
use and service. The announced warranty period of each product starts from the date of sale.
• The warranty is only valid for products purchased directly from ELMARK after a purchase document
has been provided. For products purchased from our partners, all documents certifying the
movement of the product from ELMARK to the end customer shall be provided.
• ELMARK‘s sole obligation in relation to the warranty periods announced shall be to enclose in
replacement or repair of any product found to be defective after a claim by ELMARK within the
warranty period specified for the product concerned.
• The warranty does not cover labor and transportation costs to the location where the product
subject to the claim was installed.
• The warranty does not apply in the event that a product is installed in non-compliance with the
installation instructions, except if the installation is performed by ELMARK.
• The warranty does not apply in the event that auxiliary or essential elements not purchased or
recommended by ELMARK are used in the mounting of the system.
• The warranty does not apply in the event of damage caused by misuse, improper operation or
unauthorized modification.
• The warranty does not apply in the event of damage occurring during transport by an external
carrier.
• The warranty does not apply in case of damage or defects resulting from natural disasters caused
by lightning, flood, fire, damage caused by pests and acts by third parties or events.
ELMARK recommends taking out solar array (system) insurance

against natural disasters and damage.
Select language 468

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS | WARRANTY
• The warranty does not apply in the event of damage or defects resulting from hurricane-force
winds and snowfall in excess of the values stated in the mounting structures section.
• The warranty does not apply in case of installation by unqualified persons or by qualified
technicians in case of non-compliance with the installation instructions.
• The warranty does not apply in the event of attempted repair or correction by an unqualified
technician.
• The warranty does not apply in case of relocation of elements of the system by a non-qualified
technical person, compared to the initial installation.
• The warranty does not apply in case of modification of the system, in relation to the initial and
final construction, in case of damage or deletion of serial numbers of the solar inverters.
• The warranty does not apply when using batteries that are not certified, not specified and
recommended by Solis, when building off-grid and hybrid energy storage systems.
FILING A CLAIM
• A warranty claim will be honored subject to all terms described in the warranty terms and
conditions section.
• Claims can be made from the official ELMARK website at www.elmarkholding.eu
• The additional costs for travel, labor, delivery, etc., will be charged additionally upon
removal of the claim if it is found that the products are free from defect or the warranty
conditions are not met.
• A claim for compensation cannot be made for any loss of profit (including energy not
fed into the grid or energy not used for own consumption, etc.). In any event, the maximum
compensation for the customer‘s losses, regardless of fault, may not exceed the amount paid
by the customer to purchase the equipment.
469 Select language

CATALOGUE “SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS”
Select language and scan the code.
BG BA CR
DE EL HU
IT RO SI
SK SR
Select language 470

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
POWER SYSTEMS | GENERATORS
ELECTRICAL GASOLINE GENERATORS
ELECTRICAL GASOLINE GENERATORS EL-GF SERIES

Generators are machines that provide electricity when power from the local grid is unavailable.
Electrical generators are used as a primary power source in areas where a local electrical grid is
unavailable or difficult to access such as mining and farming operations or even new develop-
ments and construction and to supply backup power to facilities, businesses, or homes during
power outages. Electrical generators don’t create electricity. They convert mechanical energy into
electrical power. Capturing the power of motion and turning it into electrical energy by forcing
electrons from the external source through an electrical circuit. A generator is an electrical motor
working in reverse. Once an electrical current has been established, it is directed through copper
wires to power machines, devices, or electrical systems.
FEATURES
• Automatic voltage regulator (AVR): An automatic voltage regulator (AVR) is a electronic device
for automatically maintaining generator output terminal voltage at a set value under varying load
and operating temperature. It controls output by sensing the voltage Vout at a power-generating
coil and comparing it to a stable reference. The error signal is then used to adjust an average value
of the field current.
• Switch for electric start: no included by EL-3GF-6.
• Two power supply voltage: 220 and 380V AC ( all models without EL-3GF-6).
• Four stroke engine: more fuel efficient as compared to 2-stroke generators. They consume the
fuel on every 4th cycle. Moreover 4 stroke engine is and more durability A 2-stroke engine works
more as compared to a 4 stroke engine for a specific time. It is evident from the fact that a 2-stroke
engine produces more heat and more exhaust in one hour as compared to a 4-stroke engine.
• Less sound: A 4-stroke engine produces less sound and makes less pollution. It is safe for the
environment. This is due to the fact that you do not have to add oil in the gas and hence no oil is
burned during the combustion process.
• No Extra Oil in Fuel: There is no need to add extra oil along with the fuel in the fuel tank. Sepa-
rate engine oil is used which needs to be replaced after every 500 hours of activity.
• Compact design.
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
• User-friendly in operations.
+ 3 standard
0 extended
Catalogue Model Rated Max. Fuel tank Fuel Running
number power (kW) power (kW) capacity (L) comsumption time
(g/(kW·h)) (h)
45GF36 EL-2.8GF-6 2.8 3 15 ≤530 10
45GF524 EL-5GF-2-4 5 5.5 25 ≤480 9.5
45GF724 EL-7GF-2-4 7 7.5 25 ≤515 5.8
ELMARK
471 BUSINESS APP or
Download from www.elmarkholdimg.eu or for mobile from
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
POWER SYSTEMS | GENERATORS

ELECTRICAL DIESEL GENERATORS
ELECTRICAL DIESEL GENERATORS EL-DF SERIES

A diesel generator is machinery that converts the chemical energy in diesel to electrical energy
and is used to power electrical equipment. They can be used to supply a range of applications
such as homes, schools, factories, hospitals and other.
Diesel generators are available with and without canopy. Canopies are made of galvanized 3 mm
metal sheets. The painting is done by nano technology electronic powder coating technique.
Galvanized metal sheets are durable against rust. On the doors of canopies are used stainless steel
hinges and locks. In canopies, high levels of sound muting type of silence are located in an
isolated area to insulate heat which included exhaust pipes and exhaust itself.

WITH CANOPY
Catalogue Model Power Power Output Length Width Height
number stand by prime voltage (mm) (mm) (mm)
(kVA/kW) (kVA/kW) (V)
45DG15/12C EL-DF15C 12/10 11/9 400/230 1350 850 1080
45DG25/20C EL-DF25C 25/20 23/18 400/230 2000 950 1450
45DG55/44C EL-DF55C 55/44 50/40 400/230 2400 1000 1800
45DG75/60C EL-DF75C 75/60 68/55 400/230 2400 1000 1800
45DG94/75C EL-DF94C 94/75 85/68 400/230 2700 1100 1800
45DG110/88C EL-DF110C 110/88 100/80 400/230 3100 1100 1880
45DG150/120C EL-DF150C 150/120 136/109 400/230 3100 1100 1880
45DG175/140C EL-DF175C 175/140 159/127 400/230 3100 1100 1880
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended

WITHOUT CANOPY
Catalogue Model Power Power Output Length Width Height
number stand by prime voltage (mm) (mm) (mm)
(kVA/kW) (kVA/kW) (V)
45DG15/12 EL-DF15 12/10 11/9 400/230 1350 850 1050
45DG25/20 EL-DF25 25/20 23/18 400/230 1650 950 1400
45DG55/44 EL-DF55 55/44 50/40 400/230 2000 1000 1700
45DG75/60 EL-DF75 75/60 68/55 400/230 2000 1000 1800
45DG94/75 EL-DF94 94/75 85/68 400/230 2150 1100 1800
45DG110/88 EL-DF110 110/88 100/80 400/230 2500 1100 1780
45DG150/120 EL-DF150 150/120 136/109 400/230 2500 1100 1780
45DG175/140 EL-DF175 175/140 159/127 400/230 2500 1100 1780
ELMARK
VENTILATION
• Domestic fans
• Industrial fans
• Ventilation systems and accessories
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
VENTILATION | DOMESTIC FANS
ELMARK AF SERIES EASY MOUNTING
Axial fans, for exhaust ventilation MOTOR:

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • Equipped with thermal cut out protection
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Low power consumption
OPTIONS: • High materials quality and high efficiency
• V-Valve: Back flow preventing. Fan is equipped with a valve • Ambient temperature max 130°C
• VT- Timer + Valve: Adjustable operating time from 3 to 15 • IP-X4
minutes. • Insulation class B
Fan is equipped with a valve.
DESIGN:
• VH- Higro-Timer + Valve: Humidistat detects humidity
• Easy mounting system
starting from 40% to 90%, includes adjustable
• Very slim front panel
• Timer from 3 minutes to 15 minutes. Fan is equipped with a
valve. • Plastic housing and impeller
• Compatible with 100 and 120 mm PVC or flexible air ducts • Modern design and aesthetic look
500120 AXIAL FAN WITH VALVE Ø100

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:100mm
• Dimensions: ØA:98/B:140/C:98/
D:10mm
• Voltage:220-240V
• Power:15W
140 mm
• Revolutions per minute: 2500

• Maximum air capacity: 98 m3/h
• Sound pressure level: 41 db(A)
• Body color: White
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
AF-V100
140 mm
+ 3 standard
0 extended
500122 AXIAL FAN WITH VALVE & TIMER Ø100

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:100mm
• Dimensions: ØA:98/B:140/C:98/D:10mm
• Power:15W
140 mm

140 mm
AF-V100
500124 AXIAL FAN WITH VALVE & HYGRO-TIMER Ø100

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:100mm
• Power:15W
140 mm

140 mm
AF-V100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELMARK AF SERIES EASY MOUNTING

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:120mm
• Power: 20W
170 mm

170 mm
AF-V120
500123 AXIAL FAN WITH VALVE & TIMER Ø120

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:120mm
• Power: 20W
170 mm

AF-V120
170 mm 3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
500125 AXIAL FAN WITH VALVE & HYGRO-TIMER Ø120

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:120mm
• Power: 20W
170 mm

170 mm
AF-V120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELMARK ALS SILENT SERIES
Axial fans, for exhaust ventilation DESIGN:

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • Easy mounting system
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Very slim front panel
OPTIONS: • Plastic housing and impeller
• V-Valve: Back flow preventing. Fan is equipped with a valve • Modern design and aesthetic look
• Compatible with 100 and 120 mm PVC or flexible air ducts
MOTOR:
• Equipped with thermal cut out protection
• Low power consumption
• High materials quality and high efficiency
• IP-X4
• Insulation class B

TECHNICAL DATA
500140
• Diameter: 100mm
• Power:15W
140 mm

• Body color: Silver | White
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
ALS-V100
140 mm
+ 3 standard
0 extended

TECHNICAL DATA
500142
• Diameter: 120mm
• Power: 20W
170 mm

• Body color: Silver | White
170 mm
ALS-V120
ALS-V100 ALS-V120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELMARK AS SERIES

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • Very slim front panel
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Plastic housing and impeller
OPTIONS: • Modern design and aesthetic look
• V-Valve: Back flow preventing. Fan is equipped with a valve
• Compatible with 100 mm PVC or flexible air ducts
MOTOR:
• IP-X4

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 100mm
• Power:15W
140 mm

140 mm 3 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
AS-V100 + 3 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELMARK AN SERIES

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • Short back tube
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces • Plastic housing and impeller
OPTIONS: • Modern design and aesthetic look
• Back flow preventing- fan is equipped with a valve
MOTOR:
• IP-X4

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 100mm
• Voltage: 220-240V
• Power: 15W
153 mm

3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
AN-V100
153 mm
+ 3 standard
0 extended

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:100mm
• Power: 20W
180 mm

180 mm
AN-V120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELMARK AC SERIES

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • Plastic housing and impeller
Kitchens, Showers, Bathrooms, Utility spaces, Supply • Modern design and aesthetic look
ventilation
OPTIONS: • Designed for ventilation where you want to stop spreading
humidity and unpleasant smells.
• Possibility to mounting in the ventilation systems
MOTOR:
• Do not use in rooms where the temperature is above 40°C
• IP-X4
500117 AXIAL IN-LINE FAN Ø100

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:100mm
• Dimensions: ØA:60/B:97/C:92mm
• Power: 15W
97 mm

AC-V100
97 mm 3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
500118 AXIAL IN-LINE FAN Ø120

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter:120mm
• Dimensions: ØA:118/B:170/C:100/
D:13mm
• Power: 20W
118 mm

118 mm
AC-V120
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
RETRO DESK FAN
AREAS OF APPLICATION: TOP FEATURES:

Domestic - ideal for any rooms or office • 2 speed settings- gives gentle and quiet air flow
OPTIONS: • Aluminum blades for optimizing airflow volume
• Back flow preventing- fan is equipped with a valve
500147 RETRO DESK FAN

TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 28W
• Body color: Silver
330 mm
290 mm
RDF2
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
VENTILATION | INDUSTRIAL FANS

ELMARK PAS SERIES
Industrial fans, for exhaust ventilation MOUNTING:

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • On a window
• On a wall
For a continuous or periodical ventilation of medium large
• On a roof
agricultural, industrial buildings, park lots, warehouses and
• On suspending ceiling
other places where it is needed great volumes of air to be
• Inside walls
moved as well as other non-explosive gases, not containing
glue substances.
500126 INDUSTRIAL FAN PAS-200

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 200mm
• Dimensions: ØA:220/B:257/C:3/D:70/
E:53mm
• Power: 36W
257 mm

• Body color: Black
257 mm
PAS-200

TECHNICAL DATA
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
0 extended
• Diameter: 250mm
E:60mm
• Power: 60W
313 mm

313 mm
PAS-250

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 300mm
E:80mm
• Power: 110W
350 mm

350 mm
PAS-300
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ELMARK IAS SERIES
Industrial fans, for exhaust ventilation. MOUNTING:

AREAS OF APPLICATION: • On a wall
For a continuous or periodical ventilation of medium large
agricultural, industrial buildings, park lots, warehouses and
other places where it is needed great volumes of air to be
moved as well as other non-explosive gases, not containing
glue substances.
500129 INDUSTRIAL FAN IAS-200

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 200mm
E:53mm
• Power: 36W
264 mm

264 mm
IAS-200
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
TECHNICAL DATA
+ 3 standard
0 extended • Diameter: 250mm
E:60mm
• Power: 60W
314 mm

314 mm
IAS-250

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 300mm
E:80mm
• Power: 110W
364 mm

364 mm
IAS-300
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ELMARK TAS SERIES
Industrial fans, for exhaust ventilation.

MOUNTING:
• On walls
• On ceilings
• On suspending ceilings
• Possibility to mounting in the ventilation systems
Can be combined with aluminum exhaust grills - see on page 492
500132 INDUSTRIAL FAN TAS-200

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 200mm
• Power: 36W
264 mm

• Body color: Grey
264 mm
TAS-200

TECHNICAL DATA 3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 3 standard
• Diameter: 250mm 0 extended
• Power: 60W
313 mm

270 mm
TAS-250

TECHNICAL DATA
• Diameter: 300mm
• Power: 110W
350 mm

320 mm
TAS-300
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
500144 ULTRA-QUIET 3 IN 1 INDUSTRIAL FAN

AREAS OF APPLICATION:
Residential, commercial, or industrial - ideal for gyms, workshop, offices,
restaurant, warehouses and etc.
TOP FEATURES:
• Low noise
• 3 speed settings
• 90° oscillating for great air flow
• Aluminum blades for optimizing airflow volume
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 65W
UQIF3 • Maximum air capacity: 2800 m3/h
500145 HIGH POWER INDUSTRIAL WALL FAN

Residential, commercial, or industrial - ideal for gyms, workshop, offices,
restaurant, warehouses and etc.
TOP FEATURES:
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 180W
3 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
HPIWF3
+ 3 standard
0 extended
500146 HIGH POWER INDUSTRIAL STANDING FAN

Residential, commercial, or industrial- ideal for gyms, workshop , offic-
es,restaurant, warehouses and etc.
TOP FEATURES:
TECHNICAL DATA
• Power: 180W
HPISF3 • Body color: Black
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
VENTILATION SYSTEMS ACCESSORIES
VENTILATION | ACCESSORIES
AIR CONDUIT ALUMINUM
• Type: Air conduit for ventilation and air-condition systems.
• Material: Aluminum 99.5%
Catalogue Diameter Full length Thickness Packing/Box

number (mm) (m) (mm) (pcs)
500201 100 1.5 0.1 66
500203 120 1.5 0.1 45
500101 100 3 0.1 42
500103 120 3 0.1 30
AIR CONDUIT TEXOFLEX

• Type: Air conduit for aspiration and ventilation systems.
• Material: multilayer aluminum, laminated with polyester and forced with
reinforcement additionally. Light and flexible, easy to use. Toxic gases are
not being insulated in case of a fire.
• Certified in B1 category - fireproof material.
Catalogue Diameter Full length Thickness Packing/Box

number (mm) (m) (mm) (pcs)
500204 100 1.5 0.1 12
500205 120 1.5 0.1 12
500104 100 3 0.1 12
500105 120 3 0.1 12
AIR CONDUIT PLASTIC - ROUND

• Type: Round air conduit
• Connection diameter: 100 mm
• Length: 1m
Catalogue number:
M522023
AIR CONDUIT PLASTIC - RECTANGULAR

• Type: Rectangular air conduit
• Width: 110 mm
• Height: 55 mm
• Length: 1m
Catalogue number:
M522039
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
M522032 FLAT DUCT BRACKET

Type: Flat duct bracket

Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
M522029 FLAT DUCT CONNECTOR

Type: Flat duct connector
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
M522030 FLAT DUCT CONNECTOR WITH DAMPER

Type: Flat duct connector with damper
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
M522033 PVC WALL CONNECTOR

Type: PVC wall connector
For duct wit section: 110x55 mm
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
M522015 HORIZONTAL 90° BEND FOR FLAT DUCT

Type: Horizontal 90° bend for flat duct
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
M522016 VERTICAL 90° BEND FOR FLAT DUCT
Type: Vertical 90° bend for flat duct
Material: Plastic
240 mm
90 mm
M522020 T-JOINT FOR FLAT DUCTS

Type: T-joint for flat ducts
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
M522017 T-JOINT FOR FLAT & ROUND DUCTS

Type: T-joint for flat & round ducts
Connection diameter: 100 mm
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
M522019 END GRILLE FOR FLAT DUCTS

Type: End grille for flat ducts
Material: Plastic
60 mm
110 mm
M522018 90° CONNECTING BEND FOR FLAT & ROUND DUCTS

Type: 90° connecting bend for flat & round ducts
Material: Plastic
55 mm
110 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
M522014 ROUND TO FLAT CONNECTOR

Type: Round to flat connector

Material: Plastic
240 mm
90 mm
M522115 CONNECTOR WITH BACK DRAFT DAMPER AND WALL

PLATE FOR ROUND DUCTS
Type: Connector with back draft damper and wall plate for round ducts
Width: 62 mm
Material: Plastic
134 mm
150 mm
M522013 90° CONNECTING BEND FOR ROUND DUCTS

Type: 90° connecting bend for round ducts
Material: Plastic
M522012 T-JOINT FOR ROUND DUCTS

Type: T-joint for round ducts
Material: Plastic
M522010 CONNECTOR WITH BACK DRAFT DAMPER FOR

ROUND DUCTS
Type: Connector with back draft damper for round ducts
Material: Plastic
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
500109 UNIVERSAL REDUCT PVC FOR Ø100-Ø150
Type: Universal reduct PVC for Ø100-Ø150
Material: Plastic
500108 FRONT MASK WITH SHUTTER ADJUSTABLE

Type: Front mask with shutter adjustable
Diameter: 100/120 mm
Material: Plastic
500111 VENTILATION GRILL Ø100

Type: Ventilation grill
For fan with diameter: 100 mm
Material: PVC
500112 VENTILATION GRILL Ø125

Type: Ventilation grill
Material: PVC
500106 RING Ø100

Type: Ring
Material: Plastic
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
500107 RING Ø120

Type: Ring
Material: Plastic
500113 VENTILATION ANEMOSTAT Ø100

Type: Ventilation anemostat
Material: PVC
500114 VENTILATION ANEMOSTAT Ø125

Type: Ventilation anemostat
Material: PVC
M522034 FAN GRILL WITH BACK DRAFT DAMPER

Type: Fan grill with back draft damper
Material: ABS
154 mm
154 mm
M522078 FAN GRILL WITH BACK DRAFT DAMPER

Type: Fan grill with back draft damper
Material: ABS
186 mm
186 mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
AIR CONDUIT METAL CLAMPS
Catalogue Type Connection
number diameter (mm)
M522036 Air conduit metal clamps 90-110
M522089 Air conduit metal clamps 110-130
METAL FAN GRILL
Catalogue Type Connection Width Material

number diameter (mm) (mm)
M522049T Metal fan grill 125 125 Metal
M522050T Metal fan grill 150 150 Metal
M522139 Metal fan grill 200 200 Metal
EXHAUST GRILL
Catalogue Type Colour Dimensions
number (mm)
500136 Aluminum exhaust grill Grey 200x200
REVISION OPENING PVC

Catalogue Material Length Height
number (mm) (mm)
M522001T Plastic 150 150
M522002T Plastic 150 200
M522003T Plastic 200 200
M522004T Plastic 200 250
M522005T Plastic 200 300
M522006T Plastic 200 400
M522007T Plastic 250 300
M522008T Plastic 300 300
M522009T Plastic 300 400
ELMARK
SWITCHES &
SOCKETS
CITY SERIES
CITY SERIES
White/White Anthracite/White Champagne metallic/ Yellow/White

White
Red/White Green/White Blue/White Orange/White
Orange metallic/White Bordo metallic/ Grey/White

White
Champagne metallic White/ Anthracite/

Champagne metallic Champagne metallic
Yellow/ Red/ Green/ Blue/

Champagne metallic Champagne metallic Champagne metallic Champagne metallic
Orange/ Orange metallic/ Bordo metallic/ Grey/

Champagne metallic Champagne metallic Champagne metallic Champagne metallic
Anthracite White/Anthracite Champagne metallic/ Blue/Anthracite
Anthracite
Red/ Green/ Yellow/ Orange/

Anthracite Anthracite Anthracite Anthracite
Orange metallic/ Bordo metallic/ Grey/

Anthracite Anthracite Anthracite
2 gangs Champagne metallic/White 3 gangs Red/White
4 gangs Anthracite/White
5 gangs Grey/White
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | CITY
SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

Catalogue Type Rated current Packing/
number (A) Box (pcs)
190011 1 button 1 way switch 10 10/100
190031 1 button cross switch 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 190791 1 button double pole switch 20 10/100
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES WITH LIGHT

190011L 1 button 1 way switch with light 10 10/100
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES

190041 2 buttons 1 way switch 10 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

THREE BUTTONS SWITCHES
DOORBELL SWITCH
Catalogue Type Packing/
number Box (pcs)
190181 Doorbell switch 10/100
DOORBELL SWITCH WITH NAME CARD

190171 Doorbell switch with light name card 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)
190183 Type: Push light button 10/100
KEY CARD POWER SWITCH

190043 Key card power switch 10 10/60
**Not compatible with another decorative frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
CURTAIN CONTROL & INTERLOCK SHUTTER SWITCH

190045 1-2 mode curtain control switch 10 10/60
190066 Interlock shutter switch 10 10/100
DIMMER SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
190191 Dimmer switch LED 3-300W 10/60
190193 Dimmer switch 0-10V 10/60
MOTION SENSOR
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
190771 Motion sensor 200W 10 10/60
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | WHITE
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

Catalogue Type Rated Packing/
number current (A) Box (pcs)
190211S German screw type socket 16 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET IP44

190211D German screw type socket IP44 16 10/100
FRENCH TYPE SOCKET

190211F French screw type socket 16 10/100
Screw type sockets
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH USB PORTS

190062 German screw type socket with 2 USB ports 16 10/100
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET - DOUBLE

190371S German screw type socket (double) 16 10/100
AUDIO & NETWORKING SOCKETS

190721 Audio socket- double 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

190751 USB socket - double 2A 2 10/100

number Box (pcs)
190747 HDMI socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
190281 Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E 10/100
190034 Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)
190711 Computer socket RJ45 - double 10/100
TELEPHONE & TV SOCKETS

number Box (pcs)
190261 Phone socket RJ11 10/100

number Box (pcs)
190731 Phone socket RJ11 + Computer socket RJ45 10/100
Catalogue Type Packing/ 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
number Box (pcs) + 5 standard
0 extended
190251 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
190033 TV+FM+SAT socket 10/100
ACCESSORIES
number Box (pcs)
190060 1 Gang cable outlet without cable terminal 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)
190741 One gang blank plate 10/100

number Box (pcs)
190091 One gang surface mounting box 126

number Box (pcs)
190092 Two gangs surface mounting box 66
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Catalogue Type Packing/
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
190090 Silicone cover IP44 100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | ANTHRACITE
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

193791 1 button double pole switch 20 10/100 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended


ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
THREE BUTTONS SWITCH

DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)

5
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)

*Not compatible with another decorative frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DIMMER SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
193193 Dimmer switch 0-10V 10/60
MOTION SENSOR
193771 Motion sensor 200W 10 10/60 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | ANTHRACITE
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
FRENCH TYPE SOCKET

Screw type sockets
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

193062 German screw type socket with 2xUSB ports 16 10/100

193371S German screw type socket (double) 16 10/100

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

193751 USB socket - double 2A 2 10/100

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY Catalogue Type Packing/
+ 5 standard
0 extended number Box (pcs)
193251 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
193033 TV+FM+SAT socket 10/100
ACCESSORIES
number Box (pcs)
193060 1 Gang cable outlet without cable terminal 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)
193741 One gang blank plate 10/100

number Box (pcs)
193091 One gang surface mounting box 126

number Box (pcs)
193092 Two gangs surface mounting box 66
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY 190722 1 button 1 way switch 20 10/100
+ 5 standard
0 extended
190069 1 button double pole switch 20 10/100


ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)

5
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DIMMER SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
190194 Dimmer switch 0-10V
MOTION SENSOR
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
190782 Motion sensor 200W 10 10/60
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
FRENCH TYPE SOCKET

Screw type sockets
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET - DOUBLE

190372S German screw type socket - double 16 10/100


190752 USB socket - double 2 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
190252 TV socket 10/100
Catalogue Type Packing/ 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
number Box (pcs) + 5 standard
0 extended
190034F TV+FM+SAT socket 10/100
ACCESSORIES
number Box (pcs)
190172 1 gang blank plate 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
COLORED PANELS
WHITE PANELS
Catalogue Type Size: HxL Packing/
190441 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
190551 Two gangs panel 85x155 1/100
190661 Three gangs panel 85x225 1/150
190361 Four gangs panel 85x298 1/100
190601 Five gangs panel 85x367 1/100
One gang panel Two gangs panel Four gangs panel
Three gangs panel Five gangs panel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ANTHRACITE PANELS
190440 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
CHAMPAGNE METALLIC PANELS

190442 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ORANGE PANELS
190443 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
YELLOW PANELS
190444 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

GREEN PANELS
190445 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
RED PANELS
190446 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
BLUE PANELS
190447 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
GREY PANELS
190450 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

ORANGE METALLIC PANELS
190448 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
BORDO METALLIC PANELS

190449 One gang panel 85x85 1/200
ELMARK
SWITCHES &
SOCKETS
LECCE SERIES
White/White Black/White
Silver grey/White Green/White Golden/White
Graphite mat/White Graphite/White Blue/White
Champagne/White Onix/White Cherry-tree/White
White/Black Black/Black
Silver grey/Black Green/Black Golden/Black
Graphite mat/Black Graphite/Black Blue/Black
Champagne/Black Onix/Black Cherry-tree/Black

LECCE SERIES
1 gang Black/White
2 gangs Green/White 2 gangs Blue/White
6 gangs White/White
3 gangs Onix/White 6 gangs Black/White
3x2 gangs Champagne/White

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MODULE SWITCHES | WHITE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | LECCE

ONE BUTTON SWITCHES
Catalogue Type Size Rated current Packing/
26001 1 button 1 way switch 1 mod 16 10/100
26004 1 button cross switch 1 mod 10 10/100
26027 Push light button 1 mod 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

26026 1 button 2 pole switch 1 mod 16 10/100

26002 1 button 1 way switch with light 1 mod 16 10/100
CURTAIN CONTROL SWITCH

26006 Curtain switch 1 mod 6 10/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DOORBELL SWITCHES

26005 Door bell switch 1 mod 10 10/100
Catalogue Type Size Packing/

number Box (pcs)
26015 Door bell 2mod 10/100
DIMMER SWITCHES
number Box (pcs)
26055 Dimmer 250W 1 mod 10/60
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
26053 LED dimmer 200VA 3 mod 10/60
BOILER SWITCHES
26024 Boiler switch with neon 3 mod 45A 10/60
* Not included decorative triple
panel.
KEY POWER SWITCH

26025 Key power switch 3 mod 30 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MODULE SOCKETS | WHITE

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET
Catalogue Type Size Rated Packing/
26008 German type socket 2 mod 16 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
ITALIAN TYPE SOCKET + 5 standard
0 extended

26020 Italian type socket 2 mod 16 10/100

26007 Italian standard multi socket 1 mod 16 10/100
UNIVERSAL TYPE SOCKET

26009 Universal socket 2 mod 13 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
DOUBLE PIN SOCKET


26007SA Double pin socket 1 mod 16 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26021 Audio socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26016 Sound dimmer 2 mod 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
26014 2 port USB socket 1 mod 10/100
90-240V / Output: 5V 2A

number Box (pcs)
26022 HDMI socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26013 Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E 1 mod 10/100
26013C Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 1 mod
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)
26012 Phone socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26010 TV socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26011 Satellite socket 1 mod 10/100
ACCESSORIES
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue Type Size Packing/ + 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
26017 Blank cover 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26023 Button without functional part 3 mod 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MODULE SWITCHES | ANTHRACITE

ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

27004 1 button cross switch 1 mod 10 10/100
27027 Push light button 1 mod 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

27026 1 button 2 pole switch 1 mod 16 10/100

27002 1 button 1 way switch with light 1 mod 16 10/100

27006 Curtain switch 1 mod 6 10/60
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DOORBELL SWITCHES
27005 Door bell switch 1 mod 10 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27015 Door bell 2mod 10/100
DIMMER SWITCHES
number Box (pcs)
27055 Dimmer 250W 1 mod 10/60

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
27053 LED dimmer 200VA 1 mod 10/60
BOILER SWITCHES
27024 Boiler switch with neon 3 mod 45A 10/60
* Not included decorative triple
panel.
KEY POWER SWITCH

27025 Key power switch 3 mod 30 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
MODULE SOCKETS | ANTHRACITE

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

27008 German type socket 2 mod 16 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ITALIAN TYPE SOCKET
27020 Italian type socket 2 mod 16 10/100

27007 Italian standard multi socket 1 mod 16 10/100
UNIVERSAL TYPE SOCKET

27009 Universal socket 2 mod 13 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DOUBLE PIN SOCKET
27007SA Double pin socket 1 mod 16 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27021 Audio socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27016 Sound dimmer 2 mod 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
27014 2 port USB socket 1 mod 10/100
90-240V / Output: 5V 2A

number Box (pcs)
27022 HDMI socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27013 Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E 1 mod 10/100
27013C Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 1 mod
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE


number Box (pcs)
27012 Phone socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27010 TV socket 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27011 Satellite socket 1 mod 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
ACCESSORIES
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
27017 Blank cover 1 mod 10/100

number Box (pcs)
27023 Button without functional part 3 mod 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

INSTALLATION FRAMES & CONSOLES
INSTALLATION FRAMES
Catalogue Type Size Mounting Packing/
number Box (pcs)
26019 Mounting frame 1 mod/ 3 mod Recessed 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26018 Mounting frame 2 mod Recessed 10/100

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
26056 Mounting frame 2x3 mod Recessed 10/100

number Box (pcs)
2604 Mounting frame with cover IP65 4 mod Surface 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)
2603 Mounting box with cover IP65 3 mod Surface 10/100
CONSOLE BOXES FOR PLASTERBOARD

number Box (pcs)
24205 Console for plasterboard Triple Recessed 10/100

number Box (pcs)
24206 Console for plasterboard Quadruple Recessed 10/100

number Box (pcs)
26636 Console for plasterboard Sixfold Recessed 10/100
CONSOLE FOR BRICK AND CONCRETE

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COLORED PANELS
WHITE PANELS
26100 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26200 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26300 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26400 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
266001 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
26600 3x2 gangs panel 122x122
1 gang panel 2 gangs panel 3 gang panel
4 gangs panel 6 gangs panel
3x2 gangs panel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ANTHRACITE PANELS

26111 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26211 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26311 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26411 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26611 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
BLUE PANELS
26101 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26201 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26301 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26401 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26601 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GOLDEN PANELS

26103 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26203 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26303 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26403 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26603 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
SILVER GREY PANELS

26102 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26202 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26302 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26402 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
266021 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
3x2 gangs panel 4 gangs panel 6 gangs panel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GRAPHITE MAT PANELS


26104 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26204 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26304 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26404 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26604 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
GRAPHITE PANELS
26105 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26205 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26305 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26405 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
266051 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GREEN PANELS

26107 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26207 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26307 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26407 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26607 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
CHAMPAGNE PANELS
26106 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26206 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26306 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26406 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
266061 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ONIX PANELS

26108 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26208 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26308 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26408 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26608 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100
CHERRY-TREE PANELS
26109 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200
26209 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100
26309 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150
26409 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100
26609 6 gangs panel 122x122
ELMARK
SWITCHES &
SOCKETS
LONDON SERIES
LONDON SERIES
1 small button switch 2 small buttons switch 3 small buttons switch 4 small buttons switch
white white white white
4 small buttons switch white 6 small buttons switch white
1 big button switch 2 big buttons switch 3 big buttons switch

white white white
4 big buttons switch white 6 big buttons switch white
1 small button switch 1 small button switch

with socket white with socket and neon
white
2 small button switch with 2 small button switch with

2 sockets white 2 sockets and neon white
1 small button switch 2 small buttons switch 3 small buttons switch
stainless steel stainless steel stainless steel
4 small buttons switch stainless steel 6 small buttons switch stainless steel
1 big button switch 2 big buttons switch 3 big buttons switch

stainless steel stainless steel stainless steel
4 big buttons switch stainless steel 6 big buttons switch stainless steel
1 small button switch 1 small button switch

with socket with socket and neon
stainless steel stainless steel
2 small button switch with 2 small button switch with

2 sockets stainless steel 2 sockets and neon stainless steel
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | LONDON
SMALL BUTTON SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

Catalogue Type Rated current Material
number (AX)
190801 1 button 1 way switch 10 Plastic PC
190822 1 button cross switch 10 Plastic PC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (AX)
190826 1 button double pole switch + neon 20 Plastic PC

number (AX)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number (AX)

number (AX)
190803 2 buttons 1 way switch 10 Plastic PC
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES WITH LIGHT

number (AX)
190827 2 buttons double pole switch + neon 20 Plastic PC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (AX)
FOUR BUTTONS SWITCHES

number (AX)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number (AX)
SIX BUTTONS SWITCHES

number (AX)
DOORBELL SWITCH
number (AX)
190824 Door bell switch 10 Plastic PC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BIG BUTTON SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

number (AX)
ONE BUTTON SWITCH WITH LIGHT 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number (AX)
TWO BUTTONS SWITCH

number (AX)

number (AX)
190823 Curtain control switch 10 Plastic PC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number (AX)

number (AX)

number (AX)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
DOOR BELL SWITCH

number (AX)
190825 Door bell switch 10 Plastic PC
LIGHT DIMMER
number (VA)
190859 Light dimmer 500 Plastic PC
FAN SPEED DIMMER

number (VA)
190860 Fan speed dimer 250 Plastic PC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | WHITE
ONE GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET

number (AX)
190831 1 gang single pole switched British standard 13 Plastic PC
socket
190832 1 gang double pole switched British standard 10 Plastic PC
socket
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ONE GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET + NEON
number (AX)
socket + neon
socket + neon
ONE GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET + NEON

+ USB PORT
number (AX)
socket with neon + USB port 1.2A
socket + neon + USB port 1.2A
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
TWO GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKETS

number (AX)
socket
socket
TWO GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKETS+ NEON

number (AX)
socket + neon
socket + neon
NETWORKING SOCKETS
Catalogue Type Material
number
190842 1 gang USB socket Plastic PC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number
190841 1 gang HDMI socket Plastic PC

number
190851 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Plastic PC
190855 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 Plastic PC

number
190853 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket with indicator Plastic PC
190857 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 with indicator Plastic PC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number
190852 2 gang RJ45 LAN socket Plastic PC
190856 2 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 Plastic PC

number
190854 2 gang RJ45 LAN socket with indicator Plastic PC
190858 2 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 with indicator Plastic PC

number
190847 1 gang RJ11 socket Plastic PC
Catalogue
number
Type Material
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
190849 1 gang RJ11 socket with indicator Plastic PC 0 extended

number
190848 2 gang RJ11 socket Plastic PC

number
190850 2 gang RJ11 socket with indicator Plastic PC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number
190843 1 gang TV socket Plastic PC

number
190844 2 gang TV socket Plastic PC

number
190845 1 gang TV satellite socket (45 degree) Plastic PC

number
190846 2 gang TV satellite socket (45 degree) Plastic PC
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ACCESSORIES
number
190861 1 gang blank plate Plastic PC
190862 2 gangs blank plate Plastic PC
Dimensions of console box for Switches and sockets LONDON series:

86mm
60.3mm 120.6mm
86mm
86mm 147mm
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SMALL BUTTON SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | CHROME
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

number (AX)
190901 1 button 1 way switch 10 Stainless steel
190922 1 button cross switch 10 Stainless steel
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number (AX)
190926 1 button double pole switch + neon 20 Stainless steel

number (AX)

number (AX)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number (AX)
190903 2 buttons 1 way switch 10 Stainless steel
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES WITH LIGHT

number (AX)
190927 2 buttons double pole switch + neon 20 Stainless steel

number (AX)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended FOUR BUTTONS SWITCHES
number (AX)

number (AX)
DOORBELL SWITCH
number (AX)
190924 Door bell switch 10 Stainless steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BIG BUTTON SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | CHROME
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

number (AX)
TWO BUTTONS SWITCH 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number (AX)

number (AX)
190923 Curtain control switch 10 Stainless steel

number (AX)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number (AX)

number (AX)
DOOR BELL SWITCH

number (AX)
190925 Door bell switch 10 Stainless steel
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
LIGHT DIMMER
number (VA)
190959 Light dimmer 500 Stainless steel
FAN SPEED DIMMER

number (VA)
190960 Fan speed dimer 250 Stainless steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | CHROME
ONE GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET

number (AX)
190931 1 gang single pole switched British standard 13 Stainless steel
socket
ONE GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET + NEON 5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue Type Rated current Material + 5 standard

0 extended
number (AX)
socket + neon
TWO GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKETS

number (AX)
socket
TWO GANG SWITCH WITH BRITISH STANDARD SOCKETS+ NEON

number (AX)
socket + neon
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
NETWORKING SOCKETS
number
190951 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Stainless steel
190955 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 Stainless steel

number
190953 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket with indicator Stainless steel
190957 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 with indicator Stainless steel

number
190952 2 gang RJ45 LAN socket Stainless steel
190956 2gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 Stainless steel
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number
190954 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket with indicator Stainless steel
190958 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Cat.6 with indicator Stainless steel

number
190947 1 gang RJ11 socket Stainless steel

number
190949 1 gang RJ11 socket with indicator Stainless steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number
190948 2 gang RJ11 socket Stainless steel

number
190950 2 gang RJ11 socket with indicator Stainless steel

number
190943 1 gang TV socket Stainless steel
5
number
YEARS TOTAL
190944 2 gang TV socket Stainless steel WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

number
190945 1 gang TV satellite socket (45 degree) Stainless steel

number
190946 2 gang TV satellite socket (45 degree) Stainless steel
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
ACCESSORIES
number
190961 1 gang blank plate Stainless steel
190962 2 gangs blank plate Stainless steel
Dimensions of console box for Switches and sockets LONDON series:
86mm
60.3mm 120.6mm
86mm
86mm 147mm
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
SWITCHES &
SOCKETS
RHYME SERIES
RHYME SERIES
White metallic Champagne metallic Grey metallic
Graphite metallic Coffee metallic
2 gangs/ White metallic 3 gangs/ Champagne metallic
5 gangs/ Grey metallic
4 gangs/ Coffee metallic
6 gangs/ Graphite metallic

GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | RHYME

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE METALLIC
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES + 5 standard

0 extended


DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

11181B Doorbell switch with light name card 10 10/100
PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)
11181C Type: Push light button 10/100

11171A Curtain control switch 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY DIMMER SWITCH
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
11191 Dimmer switch 10/100
SENSOR SWITCH
11411 Sensor switch 10 10/60

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | WHITE METALLIC
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

11211 German screw type socket 16 10/100
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
11211C German screw type socket with cover 16 10/100
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET DOUBLE

11371 German screw type socket - double 16 10/100
NETWORKING SOCKETS
number Box (pcs)
112816E Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
11741 Phone socket RJ11 - double 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue
number
Type Packing/
Box (pcs)
+ 5 standard
0 extended 11731 Phone socket RJ11 + Computer socket RJ45 10/100

number Box (pcs)
11251 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
11681 TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket 10/100
*Not compatible with another decorative
frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES 0 extended


DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)

5 YEARS TOTAL
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
SENSOR SWITCH

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET


WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

NETWORKING SOCKETS
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
Catalogue
number
Type Packing/
Box (pcs)
+ 5 standard
0 extended 11732 Phone socket RJ11 + Computer socket RJ45 10/100

number Box (pcs)
11252 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | GREY METALLIC
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard


DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)

5 YEARS TOTAL
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
SENSOR SWITCH

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | GREY METALLIC
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET


WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

NETWORKING SOCKETS
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended Catalogue Type Packing/
number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
11254 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | GRAPHITE METALLIC
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard


DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)

5 YEARS TOTAL
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
SENSOR SWITCH

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | GRAPHITE METALLIC
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET


WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended

NETWORKING SOCKETS
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended Catalogue Type Packing/
number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
11255 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | COFFEE METALLIC
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard


DOORBELL SWITCH
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

PUSH LIGHT BUTTON

number Box (pcs)

5 YEARS TOTAL
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)
SENSOR SWITCH

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | COFFEE METALLIC
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET


WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
11216C German screw type socket IP44 16 10/100

NETWORKING SOCKETS
number Box (pcs)
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
number Box (pcs)

number Box (pcs)
11256 TV socket 10/100

number Box (pcs)
frame.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COLORED PANELS
WHITE METALLIC PANELS

11601 Five gangs panel 85x298
11621 Six gangs panel 85x367
Two gangs panel Three gangs panel Five gangs panel
Four gangs panel Six gangs panel
CHAMPAGNE METALLIC PANELS

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
GREY METALLIC
GRAPHITE METALLIC
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

COFFEE METALLIC
ACCESSORIES
Catalogue Type Colour

number
192215 Outlet safety cap White
192214 Outlet safety cap Brown
Catalogue Type Colour

number
192121/WH Wall protector White
192121/TR Wall protector Transparent
ELMARK
SWITCHES &
SOCKETS
ANTIQUE SERIES
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | ANTIQUE

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WHITE
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
TWO BUTTON SWITCHES

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

190202 German type socket - double 16 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | ANTIQUE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | BLACK
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES

5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
TWO BUTTON SWITCHES

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET

190203 German type socket - double 16 10/100
ELMARK
WATERPROOF
SWITCHES AND
SOCKETS
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WATERPROOF
WATERPROOF SWITCHES IP44/ IP65
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES, IP44

Catalogue Type Colour Rated current Packing/
191011 1 button 1 way switch, IP44 White 10 10/100
191021 1 button 2 way switch, IP44 White 10 10/100
191031 1 gang intermediate switch, iP44 White 10 10/100
ONE BUTTON SWITCHES, IP65

191111 1 button 1 way switch, IP65 Grey 10 10/100
191181 1 gang push button switch, IP65 Grey 10 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES, IP44
+ 5 standard
0 extended
191041 2 buttons 1 way switch, IP44 White 10 10/100
TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES, IP65

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

WATERPROOF SOCKETS IP44/ IP65
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER, IP44

191012 German type socket, IP44 White 16 10/100

191112 German type socket, IP65 Grey 16 10/100
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER - DOUBLE, IP44 5 YEARS TOTAL

WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
191071 German type socket - double, IP44 White 16 10/100
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER - DOUBLE, IP65

191171 German type socket - double, IP65 Grey 16 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
WATERPROOF SWITCHES ANTIQUE SERIES IP44


5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER - DOUBLE, IP44

190214 German type socket - double, IP44 White 16 10/100
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

WATERPROOF SOCKETS ANTIQUE SERIES IP44
ONE BUTTON SWITCH WITH GERMAN TYPE SOCKET, IP44

190216 1 button 1 way switch with White 16 10/100
German type socket, IP44
190218 1 button 2 way switch with White 16 10/100
TWO BUTTONS SWITCH WITH GERMAN TYPE SOCKET, IP44

190217 2 buttons 1 way switch with White 16 10/100
5 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 5 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WATER HEATER SWITCHES
WATER HEATER SWITCHES AND MOUNTING CONSOLE BOXES
BOILER SWITCH FOR FLUSH MOUNTING

Catalogue Type Voltage Rated Colour Size LxHxW Packing/
number (V AC) current (A) (mm) Box (pcs)
M030137 Boiler switch for flush 220 25 White 100x100x50 1
mounting
BOILER SWITCH FOR SURFACE MOUNTING

Catalogue Type Voltage Rated Colour Size LxHxW Packing/
number (V AC) current (A) (mm) Box (pcs)
M030164 Boiler switch for 220 25 White 100x100x50 1
surface mounting
BOILER SWITCH WITH NEON

Catalogue Type Voltage Rated Colour Size Packing/
2 YEARS TOTAL
number (V AC) current (A) Box (pcs)
WARRANTY 26024 Boiler switch with neon 220 45 White 3 mod 1/60
+ 2 standard
0 extended
* Not included decorative
triple panel.
CONSOLE FOR PLASTERBOARD

number Box (pcs)
24205 Console for plasterboard - recessed mounting 3 mod 1/300
CONSOLE FOR BRICK AND CONCRETE

ELMARK
DOORBELLS
• Wireless doorbells
• Doorbells with sensor
• Bell transformers
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SMART HOME | DOORBELLS
WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT
Catalogue QTY Transmiter/ Voltage Sound level Volume Music Distance Packing/
number Reciever (V) db(A) levels (m) Box
(pcs)
Low/
36
5020 One/One 220 65-85 Middle/ 80 1/60
melodies
High
Transmitter battery: 12V A23

The item is without a coded frequency! Within a montage at a distance less than
80 meters and of two or more analogue doorbells, their work can be influenced by
or disturbances to happen.
Catalogue QTY Transmitter/ Voltage Sound level Volume Music Distance Packing/
number Receiver (V) db(A) levels (m) Box
(pcs)
Low/
36
5016 One/One 220 65-85 Middle/ 80 1/60
melodies
High

2
YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
(pcs)
Low/
36
5019 One/One 220 65-85 Middle/ 80 1/60
melodies
High

(pcs)
Low/
36
5015 One/ Two 220 65-85 Middle/ 80 1/60
melodies
High

ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

(pcs)
Low/
36
5018 One/ Two 220 65-85 Middle/ 80 1/60
melodies
High

Catalogue QTY Transmitter Receiver Sound Volume Music Dis- Packing/

number Transmitter/ Voltage Voltage level levels tance Box
Receiver (V) (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)
5023/1 One/One 12V 23A DC 3x1.5V 70-85 Low/ 36 80 1/60
Battery AAA Battery Middle/ melodies
High
5024 One/One 12V 23A 220V AC 70-85 Low/ 36 80 1/60
Battery Middle/ melodies
High
The item is without a coded frequency! Within a montage at a distance less than 80
meters and of two or more analogue doorbells, their work can be influenced by or
disturbances to happen.
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
Catalogue QTY Transmitter Receiver Sound Volume Music Dis- Packing/

number Transmitter/ Voltage Voltage level levels tance Box
Receiver (V) (V) db(A) (m) (pcs)
5023/2 One/Two 12V 23A DC 3x1.5V 70-85 Low/ 36 80 1/60
Battery AAA Battery Middle/ melodies
High
The item is without a coded frequency! Within a montage at a distance less than 80
meters and of two or more analogue doorbells, their work can be influenced by or
disturbances to happen.
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
SELF-POWERED DIGITAL WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT
Catalogue QTY Transmitter Receiver Sound Volume Music Distance Packing/

number Transmitter/ Voltage Voltage level levels (m) Box
Receiver (V) (V) db(A) (pcs)
5027WH One/Two Self- 220V AC 70-85 Low/ 4 chord/ 100-120 1/60
powered Middle/ 36
High melodies

5027BL One/Two Self- 220V AC 70-85 Low/ 4 chord/ 100-120 1/60
powered Middle/ 36
High melodies
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

DIGITAL WIRELESS DOORBELLS WITH LED FLASH LIGHT

5025WH One/One 12V 23A DC 2x1.5V AA 70-85 Low/ 32 120 1/60
Battery Battery Middle/ melodies
High

5025BL One/One 12V 23A DC 2x1.5V AA 70-85 Low/ 32 120 1/60
Battery Battery Middle/ melodies
High
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended

5026 One/One 12V 23A 220V AC 70-85 Low/ 36 100 1/60
Battery Middle/ melodies
High
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE
INFRARED INDUCTION DOORBELLS
An electric appliance with inserted motion sensor. It is used for advisement for guests,visitors or
customers. When there is a motion ,it starts / there is a sound which advises that there is a visitor/
customer/ in the premises. Working area - up to 7 meters
Catalogue Description Voltage Sound level Detection Sensor detection Music Packing/
number (V) db(A) angle distance (m) Box (pcs)
5021 Doorbell 4.5V DC 85 100° up to 7 36 1/60
with sensor melodies
A complex product that combines two appliances. It is used for advisor for guests,visitors or
customers. The sensor is installed to the place that you would like to know there is a motion/
visitor,this usually is the shop entrance,offices,warehouses and etc. The bell can be installed at a
distance up to 130 m from the sensor which we will receive the signal for motion /visitor.
Working frequency: 315MHz/433.92 MHz
Catalogue Description Voltage Sound level Detection Sensor detection Music Packing/
number (V) db(A) angle distance (m) Box (pcs)
5022 Doorbell & 4,5V DC 85 100° up to 7 36 1/60
sensor melodies
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
ELMARK
GO TO THE
1st PAGE

BELL / BELL TRANSFORMER
Mounting: on DIN-rail
Catalogue Type In (V) Un (V) Consumption Sound level Packing/Box

number (VA) db(A) (pcs)
5012 Bell 230 8-12 3.6 70 1/12/240
5220 Bell 230 230 5 70 1/12/240
Mounting: on DIN-rail
Catalogue Type In (V) Un (V) Consumption Packing/Box

number (VA) (pcs)
5001 Bell transformer 230 8/12/24 8 1/80
2 YEARS TOTAL
WARRANTY
+ 2 standard
0 extended
ELMARK

Catalog Electric - Elmark - 2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Electric - Elmark - 2023

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Electric - Elmark - 2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Brand of Electricity

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) & Accessories | page 12

High power devices | page 28

Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) | page 41

Residual current devices (RCD) | page 54

Surge protection devices | page 64

SPD AC | page 66 Combined SPD AC - DC | SPD for PV

Low voltage contactors | page 64

Thermal protection devices | Starters | page 83

Frequency inverters | Soft starters | Compensating devices | page 95

Timers and relays | Digital counters | page 101

Transformers | Industrial relays | page 123

Measurement devices | Limit switches | Sensors | page 134

Rotary switches | Buttons & Indicators | Warning lights | page 156

Industrial plugs & sockets | Industrial boards | page 173

Distribution boards | page 186

Cable installation systems & Cable trunking | page 215

Cable support systems | page 234

Lighting protection | page 248

Distribution boxes | page 254

Cable terminals & Cable consumables | page 259

Explosion proof installation systems | page 275

Cable reels | Multiplugs | Accessories | page 283

Cables & Conductors | page 295

Electrical and cordless tools | page 309

Digital tools| page 315

Mechanical tools | page 319

Accessories and protection equipment | page 335

Work and hobby lights | Fixings and fasteners page 345

SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS

Solar Panels and Mounting structures elements | page 372

Mounting structure sets | page 400

Battaries and accessories for solar power systems | page 408

Off-grid inverters up 3.5kW to 10kW and sets | page 415

SET SET SET SET

On-grid up 3.6kW to 110kW invertes and sets | page 420

SET SET SET SET

Hybrid inverters up 3.5kW to 10kW and sets | page 426

SET SET SET SET

Domestic fans | page 475

Industrial fans | Ventilation systems and accessories | page 482

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

CITY Series | LECCE Series | page 497

LONDON Series | RHYME Series | page 547

ANTIQUE Series | Waterproof Series | page 590

Wireless doorbells and doorbells with sensor | page 599

• Miniature circuit breakers & • Frequency inverters

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C40N

AUTOMATION | MINI CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C40N

41675C C42N / 32A 2 32 4.5 6.0 6/120 + 7 standard

41677C C42N / 50A 2 50 4.5 10.0 6/120

3P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C40N

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C60N

MOUNTING Dimensions (mm)

AUTOMATION | MINI CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60N

3P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60N

4P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60N